You are on page 1of 0

Eternity

System Manual
Eternity
Integrated Enterprise Voice Switch
with Universal Connectivity
System Manual
Documentation Disclaimer
Matrix Telecom reserves the right to make changes in the design or components of the product as engineering
and manufacturing may warrant. Specifications are subject to change without notice.
This is a general documentation for all models of the product. The product may not support all the features and
facilities described in the documentation.
Information in this documentation may change from time to time. Matrix Telecom reserves the right to revise
information in this publication for any reason without prior notice. Matrix Telecom makes no warranties with
respect to this documentation and disclaims any implied warranties. While every precaution has been taken in
the preparation of this system manual, Matrix Telecom assumes no responsibility for errors or omissions. Neither
is any liability assumed for damages resulting from the use of the information contained herein.
Neither Matrix Telecom nor its affiliates shall be liable to the purchaser of this product or third parties for
damages, losses, costs or expenses incurred by the purchaser or third parties as a result of: accident, misuse or
abuse of this product or unauthorized modifications, repairs or alterations to this product or failure to strictly
comply with Matrix Telecom's operating and maintenance instructions.
Copyright
All rights reserved. No part of this system manual may be copied or reproduced in any form or by any means
without the prior written consent of Matrix Telecom.
Version 8
Release date: March 10, 2009
Contents
Documentation Disclaimer .................................................................................................................................. 4
Section 1: Introduction.......................................................................................................................................... 9
Welcome........................................................................................................................................................... 11
Warranty Statement .......................................................................................................................................... 14
Packing List....................................................................................................................................................... 15
Introducing the Eternity ME............................................................................................................................... 16
Introducing the Eternity GE............................................................................................................................... 52
Section 2: Features and Facilities ...................................................................................................................... 71
Abbreviated Dialing........................................................................................................................................... 73
Access Codes................................................................................................................................................... 77
Account Codes.................................................................................................................................................. 94
Alarms............................................................................................................................................................... 96
Alternate Number Dialing................................................................................................................................ 105
Answer Signaling on SLT................................................................................................................................ 108
Answer Supervision on TWT .......................................................................................................................... 109
Auto Answer.................................................................................................................................................... 111
Auto Call Back (ACB)...................................................................................................................................... 112
Auto Redial ..................................................................................................................................................... 113
Automated Control Applications...................................................................................................................... 115
Automatic Number Translation ....................................................................................................................... 118
Background Music (BGM)............................................................................................................................... 120
Backup-SMDR................................................................................................................................................ 122
Backup-System Configuration ........................................................................................................................ 127
Backup-System Software................................................................................................................................ 131
Barge-In .......................................................................................................................................................... 135
Behind the PBX Applications .......................................................................................................................... 136
Call Back on Mobile Port................................................................................................................................. 138
Call Budget ..................................................................................................................................................... 140
Call Chaining................................................................................................................................................... 142
Call Cost Calculation (CCC) ........................................................................................................................... 143
Call Cost Display............................................................................................................................................. 165
Call Disconnection Tone Detection................................................................................................................. 166
Call Duration Control (CDC) ........................................................................................................................... 169
Call Duration Display ...................................................................................................................................... 173
Call Forward.................................................................................................................................................... 174
Call Forward-Remote...................................................................................................................................... 178
Call Park ......................................................................................................................................................... 179
Call Pick Up .................................................................................................................................................... 181
Call Progress Tones ....................................................................................................................................... 183
Call Splitting.................................................................................................................................................... 190
Call Taping...................................................................................................................................................... 191
Call Transfer ................................................................................................................................................... 192
Calling Line Identification and Presentation (CLIP) ........................................................................................ 195
Calling Line Identity Restriction (CLIR) ........................................................................................................... 196
Cancel All Station Features ............................................................................................................................ 198
Central Ringer................................................................................................................................................. 199
Class of Service (COS)................................................................................................................................... 200
CLI Based Routing.......................................................................................................................................... 205
Clock Synchronization .................................................................................................................................... 207
Closed User Group (CUG).............................................................................................................................. 208
Closed User Group-With Exchange ID........................................................................................................... 212
Communication Ports...................................................................................................................................... 215
Conference Dial-In.......................................................................................................................................... 219
Conference-3 Party......................................................................................................................................... 221
Conference-Multi Party ................................................................................................................................... 224
Conflict Dialing................................................................................................................................................ 230
Continued Dialing............................................................................................................................................ 231
Conversation Recording.................................................................................................................................. 232
Customer Emergency Services Identification Dialing ..................................................................................... 233
Customer Name.............................................................................................................................................. 234
Daylight Saving Time (DST)............................................................................................................................ 235
DDI Routing Table........................................................................................................................................... 238
Debug for the VoIP Ethernet Port ................................................................................................................... 240
Default Settings............................................................................................................................................... 242
Department Call .............................................................................................................................................. 246
Dialed Number Directory................................................................................................................................. 249
Digital Input Port (DIP) .................................................................................................................................... 250
Digital Key Phone-Operation........................................................................................................................... 252
Digital Key Phone-Soft Keys Programming .................................................................................................... 264
Digital Output Port (DOP)................................................................................................................................ 278
Direct Dialing-In (DDI) ..................................................................................................................................... 280
Direct Inward Dialing (DID) ............................................................................................................................. 282
Direct Inward System Access (DISA).............................................................................................................. 286
Direct Station Selection Console..................................................................................................................... 293
Directory Dialing by Name .............................................................................................................................. 298
Disconnect Information on TWT...................................................................................................................... 299
Disconnect Signaling on SLT.......................................................................................................................... 301
Distinctive Rings.............................................................................................................................................. 302
Do Not Disturb (DND) ..................................................................................................................................... 304
DS1 Trunks ..................................................................................................................................................... 307
Dynamic Lock.................................................................................................................................................. 341
E&M Connectivity............................................................................................................................................ 343
E&M Feature Template................................................................................................................................... 346
E&M Features ................................................................................................................................................. 348
E1 Maintenance .............................................................................................................................................. 354
Emergency Detection and Reporting .............................................................................................................. 358
Emergency Dialing.......................................................................................................................................... 359
External List .................................................................................................................................................... 362
External Music................................................................................................................................................. 365
File Transfer Protocol (FTP)............................................................................................................................ 366
Flash Timer ..................................................................................................................................................... 367
Flashing on Trunks.......................................................................................................................................... 368
Flexible Numbers ............................................................................................................................................ 369
Floor Service................................................................................................................................................... 371
Follow Me........................................................................................................................................................ 373
Forced Answer ................................................................................................................................................ 374
Forced Call Disconnection .............................................................................................................................. 375
GPAX Application............................................................................................................................................ 376
GPAX Billing.................................................................................................................................................... 379
GPAX Flexible Numbers ................................................................................................................................. 380
Help Desk........................................................................................................................................................ 381
Hold................................................................................................................................................................. 382
Hot Desking..................................................................................................................................................... 383
Hotline............................................................................................................................................................. 384
IC Reference Table......................................................................................................................................... 386
Incoming Call Management ............................................................................................................................ 388
Internal Call Restriction................................................................................................................................... 390
International Mobile Equipment Identity (IMEI) ............................................................................................... 392
Interrupt Request (IR) ..................................................................................................................................... 393
ISDN-An Introduction ...................................................................................................................................... 394
ISDN-BRI ........................................................................................................................................................ 398
ISDN-PRI ........................................................................................................................................................ 410
Jeeves............................................................................................................................................................. 413
Key Board Macro ............................................................................................................................................ 422
Last Caller Recall ............................................................................................................................................ 424
Last Number Redial ........................................................................................................................................ 425
Least Cost Routing-An Introduction................................................................................................................ 426
Least Cost Routing-Carrier Pre-Selection....................................................................................................... 428
Least Cost Routing-Destination and Time Based........................................................................................... 429
Least Cost Routing-Number Based ................................................................................................................ 432
Least Cost Routing-SP to SP.......................................................................................................................... 434
Least Cost Routing-Time Based..................................................................................................................... 436
Live Call Screening......................................................................................................................................... 438
Live Call Supervision ...................................................................................................................................... 439
MAC Address Cloning..................................................................................................................................... 440
Magneto Trunk Port ........................................................................................................................................ 442
Master Time Zone........................................................................................................................................... 445
Meet Me Paging.............................................................................................................................................. 446
Message Wait ................................................................................................................................................. 447
Missed Calls.................................................................................................................................................... 450
Mobile Port...................................................................................................................................................... 451
Multi-Stage Dialing.......................................................................................................................................... 456
Music on Hold (MOH) ..................................................................................................................................... 459
Mute................................................................................................................................................................ 461
Name Programming........................................................................................................................................ 462
Network Selection for Mobile Port................................................................................................................... 466
OFF-Hook Alert............................................................................................................................................... 469
OG Reference Table....................................................................................................................................... 470
OG Trunk Bundle............................................................................................................................................ 472
OG Trunk Bundle Group................................................................................................................................. 474
Operator.......................................................................................................................................................... 479
Paging............................................................................................................................................................. 481
Peer-to-Peer Calling ....................................................................................................................................... 484
PLCC-An Introduction..................................................................................................................................... 489
Printer Port...................................................................................................................................................... 496
Priority............................................................................................................................................................. 497
Privacy ............................................................................................................................................................ 500
Programming the System ............................................................................................................................... 503
Programming Using a Computer .................................................................................................................... 506
QSIG............................................................................................................................................................... 508
Quick Dial........................................................................................................................................................ 516
Raid................................................................................................................................................................. 517
Region Code................................................................................................................................................... 518
Real Time Clock (RTC)................................................................................................................................... 520
Reminder ........................................................................................................................................................ 521
Remote Programming..................................................................................................................................... 530
Room Monitor ................................................................................................................................................. 532
Routing Group................................................................................................................................................. 533
RTC Synchronization...................................................................................................................................... 537
Security Dialing and Reporting ....................................................................................................................... 538
Selective Port Access ..................................................................................................................................... 543
Self Ring Test ................................................................................................................................................. 544
SIM PIN........................................................................................................................................................... 545
SIP Trunk Parameters .................................................................................................................................... 546
SIP Trunk Status............................................................................................................................................. 554
SLT Hardware Template................................................................................................................................. 555
Static Routing Table........................................................................................................................................ 558
Software Port and Hardware ID...................................................................................................................... 561
Station Advanced Feature Template .............................................................................................................. 565
Station Basic Feature Template...................................................................................................................... 569
Station Group.................................................................................................................................................. 572
Station Message Detail Recording.................................................................................................................. 574
Station Message Detail Recording-Online...................................................................................................... 575
Station Message Detail Recording-Posting .................................................................................................... 586
Station Message Detail Recording-Report...................................................................................................... 615
Station Message Detail Recording-Storage.................................................................................................... 625
System Activity Log......................................................................................................................................... 629
System Activity Log Display ............................................................................................................................ 633
System Administrator (SA) Mode.................................................................................................................... 634
System Debug................................................................................................................................................. 635
System Engineer (SE) Mode........................................................................................................................... 637
System Fault Log ............................................................................................................................................ 638
System Fault Log Display ............................................................................................................................... 641
System Parameters......................................................................................................................................... 642
System Security .............................................................................................................................................. 648
T1 Maintenance .............................................................................................................................................. 650
T1 RBS Parameters........................................................................................................................................ 656
Telnet .............................................................................................................................................................. 664
Time Tables .................................................................................................................................................... 668
Time Zone Display .......................................................................................................................................... 674
Toll Control ...................................................................................................................................................... 675
Trunk Access Group (TAG)............................................................................................................................. 677
Trunk Auto Answer.......................................................................................................................................... 678
Trunk Feature Template.................................................................................................................................. 680
Trunk Landing Group (TLG)............................................................................................................................ 684
Trunk Reservation........................................................................................................................................... 686
TWT Hardware Template................................................................................................................................ 687
User Absent/Present ....................................................................................................................................... 698
User Password................................................................................................................................................ 699
Video Call ........................................................................................................................................................ 700
Virtual Station.................................................................................................................................................. 701
VLAN Tagging................................................................................................................................................. 702
Voice Help....................................................................................................................................................... 704
Voice Mail Integration...................................................................................................................................... 705
Voice Message Applications ........................................................................................................................... 708
VoIP Calling .................................................................................................................................................... 714
VoIP Ethernet Port Parameters....................................................................................................................... 715
VoIP Ethernet Port Status............................................................................................................................... 724
Walk-In Class of Service................................................................................................................................. 725
Section 3: Appendices....................................................................................................................................... 727
Appendix A: Technical Specification............................................................................................................... 729
Appendix B: Troubleshooting.......................................................................................................................... 735
Appendix C: Features at a Glance.................................................................................................................. 737
Appendix D: System Commands .................................................................................................................... 742
Appendix E: Regulatory Information ............................................................................................................... 766
Appendix F: Open Source Licensing Terms and Conditions .......................................................................... 777
Appendix G: Acronyms ................................................................................................................................... 784
Index............................................................................................................................................................... 787
Section 1: Introduction
Matrix
Eternity V8 System Manual 11
Welcome
Welcome to the world of Telecom Solutions. Thank You for choosing 'Eternity'.
This product is designed to give you the highest performance, combined with real ease of use. We hope you will make
optimum use of this intelligent, intuitive, feature-packed 'Integrated Enterprise Voice Switch with Universal Connectivity'
System. This product supports calling by using Analog Trunks, BRI, DS1 (both E1 and T1), E&M, GSM/CDMA and SIP
(VoIP calls). It supports standards for calling in India as well as other countries as specified. Please read this document
carefully before installing your Eternity.
About this System Manual
Eternity System Manual contains detailed information and instructions for installing, configuring and using Eternity. This
System Manual also contains information on protecting and maintaining the system and steps to be followed to default
the system in case you are unable to configure it properly. We have made the best efforts to let you know your Eternity so
that you can efficiently communicate with your business contacts.
Intended Audience
This System Manual is aimed at:
Network and System Engineer: A person who will install, configure and maintain Eternity. It is assumed that he has
some experience in installing and programming the Routers, Gateways and PBX System.
User: A person who is using the extension of Eternity or extension connected to the PBX interfaced with Eternity.
User includes the receptionist, residential users, personnel of small and medium businesses, large enterprises and
other commercial/public organizations/institutions.
It is assumed that the Users have some previous experience in operating analog Phone System and operating Computer
system. Users are not expected to configure the system or program its features. However, it is anticipated that some of
them may have to or want to configure the system and program its features. Therefore, this document provides
instructions on installation and configuration in as lucid manner as possible.
Organization of this Document
This System Manual contains following sections:
Introduction: Gives an overview of this document, its purpose, intended audience, organization of this document, terms
and conventions used to present information and instructions. It also provides information for Warranty statement, items
supplied with the product and how to protect the system.
The chapter 'Introducing the Eternity ME' and 'Introducing the Eternity GE' of this section provides information for
connecting interfaces and steps for basic configuration.
Also refer other documents 'Eternity-Quick Start' for configuring basic parameters with the information for Web
configuration (Jeeves) and 'Eternity-User Card' for configuring main features using access codes.
Features and Facilities: Gives detailed information for various features offered by your Eternity. It provides information
for using this Enterprise PBX features for routing of calls to desired port.
It also contains steps to reinstate the default settings for the system which is useful if you need to set back factory set
values for the parameters while configuring Eternity.
Appendices: Contains information such as acronyms, system commands, regulatory information etc.
How to Read this System Manual
This System Manual is prepared in such a way that you will find all the information quickly and easily.
Using table of contents and the index: The table of contents given at the beginning of this System Manual shows all
the sections. Refer section Section 2: Features and Facilities to get the information of all the features and topics covered
in separate chapters. Page numbers are given opposite to every topic which helps you to refer that particular topic easily.
Also the chapter 'Index' at the back of this System Manual contains a keyword reference with page number for the
chapter in which it is referred. This will help you to find the particular information easily.
What's this?: Each chapter contains a paragraph for 'What's this' which gives brief description of the feature.
How it works?: Each chapter contains a paragraph for 'How it works?' which gives the detailed working of the feature.
For some features this topic is put as topic 'How to use?'.
Matrix
12 Eternity V8 System Manual
Important Point: This topic is given in most of the chapters to provide a hint to configure that feature or to provide
additional information for the feature. It indicates something that requires your special attention.
Relevant Topics: It is given at the end of each chapter as chapter name related to the chapter you are referring, with
page numbers. You will be able to navigate easily through the System Manual with the help of this topic.
Conventions used in this System Manual
The following titles have been used for notices to draw your attention to important things:
Alert or Note: This is given to inform behavior of the product during specific condition and some precaution to be taken
while using that feature.
Terminology used in this System Manual
In this manual, words 'Eternity' and 'System' are used interchangeably. If not mentioned, features are applicable for both
Eternity ME and Eternity GE models.
Some of the terms used in this System Manual are defined below:
Network and System Engineer (SE): A person who will install and configure Eternity. To configure the system, SE
will be required to enter SE Programming Mode. It is assumed that he has some experience in installing and
programming the PBX System.
System Administrator (SA): A person who will configure the system as per user's requirement and maintain Eternity.
To configure the system, SA will be required to enter SA Programming Mode. For example, receptionist or an
operator is system administrators. They can operate only specific features e.g. display call duration, display software
version-revision.
Caller/Calling party: A person who makes calls.
Callee/Called party: A person to whom call is made by Caller.
Other points regarding the system manual:
Either GSM module or CDMA module is installed in Mobile port as required. Thus the word Mobile port may be
referred as GSM Port or CDMA port.
This System Manual mainly includes features for Enterprise Applications of PBX. Please refer separate Manual for
Hotel/Motel Applications of Eternity or contact Matrix Support Group.
However, this manual includes basic information about VMS application and Voice Module integration, refer separate
Manual for VMS Card for detailed information or contact Matrix Support Group.
For users who refer the system manual for first time, it is recommended to refer some of the topics in following
sequence and then refer other topics as per your requirement:
Section 1
Section 2
Default Settings
Region Code
Real Time Clock (RTC)
SLT Programming (Programming of the Software Port, Hardware Slot, Flexible Numbers, Station Basic and
Advanced Feature Template, SLT Hardware Template, etc.)
DKP Programming (Programming of the Software Port, Hardware Slot, Flexible Numbers, Station Basic and
Advanced Feature Template, etc.)
TRK Programming (Programming of the Software Port, Hardware Slot, Hardware Port, Trunk Basic and Advanced
Feature Template, TRK Hardware Template, etc.)
Station Message Detail Recording
Voice Message Applications
Call Cost Calculation (CCC)
Call Budget
Department Call
Paging
Music on Hold (MOH)
Distinctive Rings
Call Forward
Matrix
Eternity V8 System Manual 13
Digital Output Port (DOP)
Emergency Dialing
E&M Programming (Programming of the Software Port, Hardware Slot, Hardware Port, Name Trunk Basic and
Advanced Feature Template, E&M Feature Template, Station Basic and Advanced Feature Template, etc.)
DSS Programming (DKP Software Port, DSS Number, Hardware Slot, Hardware Port, etc.)
BRI Programming (Programming of the Software Port, Hardware Slot, Hardware Port, Name, Trunk Basic and
Advanced Feature Template, etc.)
Using this System Manual, you will be able to install, operate and make optimum use of Eternity.
In case you face any technical difficulties, you are advised to contact our dealers for help. All Matrix dealers are properly
trained and ready to give you support whenever needed. In addition to this, technical consultation is also available from
Matrix engineers every business day. For technical consultation from our engineers, you are requested to dial our
support numbers given in this manual.
Matrix
14 Eternity V8 System Manual
Warranty Statement
Matrix Telecom Pvt. Ltd. (Matrix) warrants to its consumer purchaser any of its products to be free of defects in material,
workmanship and performance for a period of 15 months from date of manufacturing or 12 months from the date of
installation which ever is earlier.
During this warranty period, Matrix will at its option, repair or replace the product at no additional charge if the product is
found to have manufacturing defect. Any replacement product or part/s may be furnished on an exchange basis, which
shall be new or like-new, provided that it has functionality at least equal to that of the product, being replaced. All
replacement parts and products will be the property of Matrix. Parts repaired or replaced will be under warranty
throughout the remainder of the original warranty period only.
This limited warranty does not apply to:
1. Products that have been subjected to abuse, accident, natural disaster, misuse, modification, tampering, faulty
installation, lack of reasonable care, repair or service in any way that is not contemplated in the documentation for the
product or if the model or serial number has been altered, tampered with, defaced or removed.
2. Products which have been damaged by lightning storms, water or power surges or which have been neglected,
altered, used for a purpose other than the one for which they were manufactured, repaired by customer or any party
without Matrixs written authorization or used in any manner inconsistent with Matrixs instructions.
3. Products received improperly packed or physically damaged.
4. Products damaged due to operation of product outside the products specifications or use without designated
protections.
Warranty valid only if:
Primary protection on all the ports provided.
Mains supply is within limit and protected.
Environment conditions are maintained as per the product specifications.
Warranty Card:
When the product is installed, please return the warranty card with:
Date, signature and stamp of the customer
Date, signature and stamp of the channel partner
Matrix assumes that the customer agrees with the warranty terms even when the warranty card is not signed and
returned as suggested.
The Purchaser shall have to bear shipping charges for sending product to Matrix for testing/rectification. The product
shall be shipped to the Purchaser at no-charge if the material is found to be under warranty. The Purchaser shall have to
either insure the product or assume liability for loss or damage during transit.
Matrix reserves the right to waive off or make any changes in its warranty policy without giving any notice.
If Matrix is unable to repair or replace, as applicable, a defective product which is covered by Matrix warranty, Matrix
shall, within a reasonable time after being notified of the defect, refund the purchase price of the product provided the
consumer/purchaser returns the product to Matrix.
In no event will Matrix be liable for any damages including lost profits, lost business, lost savings, downtime or delay,
labor, repair or material cost, injury to person, property or other incidental or consequential damages arising out of use of
or inability to use such product, even if Matrix has been advised of the possibility of such damages or losses or for any
claim by any other party.
Except for the obligations specifically set forth in this Warranty Policy Statement, in no event shall Matrix be liable for any
direct, indirect, special, incidental or consequential damages whether based on contract or any other legal theory and
where advised of the possibility of such damages.
Neither Matrix nor any of its distributors, dealers or sub-dealers makes any other warranty of any kind, whether
expressed or implied, with respect to Matrix products. Matrix and its distributors, dealers or sub-dealers specifically
disclaim the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose.
This warranty is not transferable and applies only to the original consumer purchaser of the Product. Warranty shall be
void if the warranty card is not completed and registered with Matrix within 30 days of installation.
All legal course of action subjected to Vadodara (Gujarat, India) Jurisdiction only.
Matrix
Eternity V8 System Manual 15
Packing List
The Ideal sales package for Eternity ME is as mentioned below:
The Ideal sales package for Eternity GE is as mentioned below:
Please make sure that these components are present.
In case of short supply or damage detection, contact the source from where you have purchased the system.
=X=X=
Eternity ME-10S/16S
Sr. Accessories Qty.
01 Eternity ME Platform (10S/16S) 1
02 User Card 4
03 Quick Start 1
04 3 Pin Power Cord, MC-4 Black 1
05 MDF Cable for Eternity ME Card Switch 1
06 Wall Mounting Nails 4
07 Telephone Message Pad 1
08 Warranty Card Set 1
09 Support Card 1
10 Telephone Personality Guide 1
11 Matrix Logo Small 10
12 Mounting Template 1
13 CD (System Manual, User Card, Quick Start and Voice Messages) 1
Eternity GE 3S/6S/12S
Sr. Accessories Qty.
01 Eternity GE Platform (6S/12S) 1
02 User Card 4
03 Quick Start 1
03 3 Pin Power Cord, MC-4 Black 1
04 Wall Mounting Nails 2
05 Telephone Message Pad 1
06 Warranty Card Set 1
07 Support Card 1
08 Telephone Personality Guide 1
09 Matrix Logo Small 10
10 Mounting Template 1
11 CD (System Manual, User Card, Quick Start and Voice Messages) 1
Matrix
16 Eternity V8 System Manual
Introducing the Eternity ME
Referring Commands: For information about the 4-digit command used in the system, refer first the Command List
given in the Appendix section and then get the details in the corresponding chapter.
The Eternity ME is a versatile and flexible digital switch (PBX). A variety of external equipment can be interfaced with
system. This chapter consists of following sections:
Section 1: Overview of Eternity ME
Section 2: Configuring the Eternity ME
Section 3: Protection and Safety
Section 4: Installing the Eternity ME
Section 5: Getting Started Eternity ME
Before programming any feature/parameters refer chapter Class of Service (COS) and allow it, if required.
The system is built around a 256x256 or a 512x512 or a 1024x1024 digital CMOS switch. The system is a digital PBX
with capacity up to 468 user ports. The system uses a digital switch and has a dedicated DTMF circuit for each port. This
makes system a 100% non-blocking switch both speech wise and dial wise i.e. all the ports can talk at the same time as
well as dial at the same time. The figure shows the different interfaces and the ports to which these interfaces can be
connected.
ALERT!
At every power up of the system or re-registration of the GSM/CDMA modules with the GSM/CDMA network, the
GSM/CDMA modules take approx. 3 minutes to get registered with the network.
Hence, during this period it is possible that the Outgoing calls made from the system may get routed through other
ports of the system (for e.g. FXO, BRI, PRI, etc.) if available in the system.
However, once the GSM/CDMA modules (ports) get registered with the Network, the calls are routed through Mobile
ports as configured by the Administrator.
Eternity
ME/GE
Power
Supply
E
&
M

C
a
r
d
D
S
1 C
A
R
D
VMS Card
B
R
I

C
a
r
d
GSM
Card
DLC +
SLT
Card
TWT
+ SLT
Card
VoIP Card
SLT Card
Switch
Card
Master
Card
Internet
PLCC Terminal
Router, Leased
Circuit, Vsat
Equipment, etc.
ISDN PRI/T1/E1
Digital Trunk Line
SLT
SLT
SLT
Computer
Printer
Analog Trunk Line
FAX
FAX
PAS External Music
Telephone
Telephone
FCBC
AC Mains
Battery 48V
48V P.S.
Card
AC Mains
230V P.S.
Card
Ethernet
D
L
C

C
a
r
d
EON45
EON42
DSS72
DSS64
SIM Card
Antenna
PBX PBX
E&M1
E&Mn
E&M1
E&Mn
Tie Lines
S1
S2
Sn
S1
S2
Sn
Reset
Switch
Ethernet
Contactor
M
a
g
n
e
to
C
a
rd
Magneto
Phone
EON42
EON45
EON42
EON45
Voice Mail
EON48
EON48
EON48
Matrix
Eternity V8 System Manual 17
The Eternity ME is available in following models:
Eternity ME 10SAC (with AC power supply)
Eternity ME 10SDC (with DC power supply)
Eternity ME 16SAC (with AC power supply)
Eternity ME 16SDC (with DC power supply)
The Eternity ME 10S has ten universal slots whereas the Eternity ME 16S has sixteen universal slots. Eternity ME
supports advanced state of art technology by supporting, Eternity ME Card GSM and Eternity ME Card VoIP. Other cards
for interfacing ISDN and PSTN Network are also supported. The diagram shown below is the architecture of Eternity ME.
Section 1: Overview of Eternity ME
In Eternity ME16S model, the extreme left slot is reserved for the Eternity ME Card 10SAC/16SAC, the extreme right slot
is reserved for the Eternity ME Card Master whereas the second last slot from the right is reserved for the Eternity ME
Card Switch. In Eternity ME 10S model, the extreme left side six slots are reserved: two slots for Eternity ME Card
10SAC/16SAC, two slots for Eternity ME Card Master and two slots are for Eternity ME Card Switch. Hence, in all model
these slots are called the fixed slots. Remaining slots are flexible and hence are called Universal slots.
The Eternity ME 16S
The Eternity ME 16S has following characteristics:
1. Total Ports = 516
2. User Ports = 516
3. Special Slots = 3 (Eternity ME Card Power Supply, Eternity ME Card Master and Eternity ME Card Switch)
4. Universal Slots = 16
5. Maximum SLT = 512
6. Maximum DKP = 128
7. Maximum Analog Trunks = 128
8. Maximum E&M = 128
9. Maximum DSS64/72 per DKP Console = 2
10.Maximum BRI trunks = 32
11.Maximum DS1 Trunks = 8
Matrix
18 Eternity V8 System Manual
12.Maximum Mobile trunks = 32
13.Maximum SIP Trunks = 32
14.Maximum Magneto Trunk = 128
Eternity ME 10S/10SR
The Eternity ME 10S has following characteristics:
1. Total Ports = 324
2. User Ports = 324
3. Special Slots = 6 (2 Master, 2 Switch and 2 Power Supply)
4. Universal Slots = 10
5. Maximum SLT = 320
6. Maximum DKP = 128
7. Maximum Analog Trunks = 128
8. Maximum E&M Trunks = 80
9. Maximum DSS64/DSS72 per DKP Console = 2
10. Maximum BRI Trunks = 32
11. Maximum DS1 Trunks = 8
12. Maximum Mobile Trunks = 32
13. Maximum SIP Trunk = 32
14. Maximum Magneto Trunk = 128
For more information on the interfaces and the ports to which these interfaces can be connected please refer Eternity ME
16S.
Matrix
Eternity V8 System Manual 19
Mechanical Dimensions of the Eternity ME 16S
LEFT SIDE VIEW
397 mm (15.63 Inch)
2
8
0
.
8

m
m

(
1
1
.
0
6

I
n
c
h
)
3
1
3

m
m

(
1
2
.
3
2

I
n
c
h
)
FRONT VIEW
524.2 mm (20.64 Inch)
TOP VIEW
BACK VIEW
1
8
6

m
m

(
7
.
3
2

I
n
c
h
)
524.2 mm (20.64 Inch)
492.2 mm (19.38 Inch)
3
1
3

m
m

(
1
2
.
3
2

I
n
c
h
)
Matrix
20 Eternity V8 System Manual
Mechanical Dimensions of the Eternity ME 10S.
Section 2: Configuring the Eternity ME
All the models have similar hardware and software architecture with only difference in number of universal slots and
hence the total number of user ports available. Please note that Eternity ME 10S/16S includes cabinet with Mother
Board, Eternity ME Card Master and the Eternity ME Card Switch. Other cards can be used as per the requirement.
TOP VIEW
LEFT SIDE VIEW
397 mm (15.63 Inch)
2
8
0
.
8

m
m

(
1
1
.
0
6

I
n
c
h
)
3
1
3

m
m

(
1
2
.
3
2

I
n
c
h
)
BACK VIEW
1
8
6

m
m

(
7
.
3
2

I
n
c
h
)
3
1
3

m
m

(
1
2
.
3
2

I
n
c
h
)
438 mm (17.24 Inch)
406 mm (15.98 Inch)
483 mm (19.01 Inch)
438 mm (17.24 Inch)
FRONT VIEW
1
9
0

m
m

(
7
.
4
8

I
n
c
h
)
462 mm (18.29 Inch)
Matrix
Eternity V8 System Manual 21
Note:
Refer command '2187' in chapter System Parameters to restart the card, installed in the Universal Slot of the
Eternity ME.
The Eternity ME supports following types of cards (with Hot swap feature as optional):
1. Eternity ME Card Master
For software version of Eternity ME Card Master refer note given in topic 'Eternity ME Card Switch'.
The Eternity ME Card Master occupies a fixed slot in the Eternity ME. This slot has unique arrangement of connectors
and hence other universal cards cannot be inserted in the system.
The Eternity ME Card Master manages the complete system. It performs all higher-level functions. It controls all the slave
cards like Eternity ME Card Switch, Eternity ME Card SLT, Eternity ME Card TWT+ SLT, Eternity ME Card E&M, Eternity
ME Card BRI, Eternity ME Card VMS, Eternity ME Card T1E1PRI, etc. All the configuration and programming
information is stored on this card. For this purpose, it uses two controllers viz. main controller and a secondary controller
(called Communication Manager). The Eternity ME Card Master has three LEDs, two Communication Ports, a Digital
Input Port, a Digital Output Port, Ethernet Port, USB Port, Reset Switch and a Printer Port on the front panel.
The Ethernet port and the USB port are supported in the PCB version V3R0 onwards. The three LEDs on the Eternity ME
Card Master are used to indicate:
The health of this card (during reset cycle).
The health of the system during normal working of the system.
These three LEDs are of dual colour Green and Red. After power ON, when the system becomes stable Green LED
glows for 1 second ON and OFF.
Following are the jumper position and their function for Eternity ME Card Master:
Communication Ports
The Eternity ME supports two asynchronous, serial, full duplex RS232C communication ports. These ports are known as
COM1 and COM2. These communication ports are used while using following features.
Programming using computer
PMS Interface
SMDR-Posting
Downloading SMDR Reports
Downloading System Activity, System Fault Log, etc.
The communication ports are made available on the front panel of the Eternity ME Card Master through two identical DB-
9 connectors. Please note that the Eternity ME assumes role of a Data Terminal Equipment (DTE), hence a crossed
cable is required to connect a computer with the Eternity ME.
Ethernet Port
The Ethernet Port is used to connect Eternity to the Ethernet port of the Computer using RJ45 cable provided with the
system.
SE can get Backup-System Configuration, Backup-SMDR and Backup-System Software using Jeeves.
All the important parameters can be configured using web pages of the Jeeves. Refer chapter Jeeves.
Jumper Number Position Function
J8
AB (default)
BC
External Boot.
Internal Boot.
J9
AB
BC (default)
Reset SE Password.
Dont reset SE Password.
J10
AB (default)
BC
Embedded ICE.
JTAG Mode.
J12
AB (default)
BC
Enable: Tx debug from COM Port 2 (debug/1st boot).
Disable: Tx debug.
J13
AB (default)
BC
Enable: Rx debug from COM Port 2 (debug/1st boot).
Disable: Rx debug.
Matrix
22 Eternity V8 System Manual
Printer Port
The Eternity ME Card Master supports industry standard Centronics parallel port. This port is useful for printing various
reports. This port is made available on the front panel of the Eternity ME Card Master by a DB-25 female connector.
Please refer Section 2: Features and Facilities of the manual for more details on how to program the printer port for
printing various reports.
Digital Input Port
The Eternity ME supports a Digital Input Port on the Eternity ME Card Master to which a panic switch or a sensor can be
connected. The device connected to this port should comply to its technical specifications.
Digital Output Port
The Eternity ME supports a Digital Output Port on the Eternity ME Card Master to which a hooter, buzzer, etc. can be
connected. The device connected to this port should comply to its technical specifications.
Default Password Loading
The Eternity ME stores all the programming on the Eternity ME Card Master. This includes the SE password. One cannot
enter the SE Mode without the SE password. In case the SE password is forgotten, no further programming is possible.
Refer chapter System Security, to default the password by hardware.
USB Port
The USB port is provided for future use.
Reset Switch
The reset switch is used to reset the system.
2. Eternity ME Card Switch
The Eternity ME Card Switch occupies a fixed slot in the system. It is the second card from right hand side after the
Eternity ME Card Master. This slot has special connectors and hence other universal cards cannot be inserted in the
system. This card supports an external music port, a PAS port and four DKP ports.
The Eternity ME Card Switch performs following functions:
Speech and Data connections
Conferencing
Call Progress Tone Generation like Dial Tone, Ring Back Tone, Busy Tone, etc.
Music Generation
The two LEDs on the Eternity ME Card Switch are used to indicate:
The health of this card (during reset cycle).
Status of the DKP ports (during normal working of the system).
Notes for selecting Eternity ME Card Master and Eternity ME Card Switch type:
If you are using new Eternity ME Card Switch (1000 ports) of firmware version V5Rx, use Eternity ME Card Master
with software version less than or equal to 'V6R10' only.
If you are using old Eternity ME Card Switch (512 ports) of firmware V4Rx, you can use Eternity ME Card Master with
any software version. (However, in 7th slot, use the cards with configuration of less than 16 ports)
If you are using DSP based Eternity ME Card Switch it is preferable to use the firmware version of 'V5R1' to avoid
compatibility issue with software version of Eternity ME Card Master used. (If you are using firmware version of
Eternity ME Card Switch less than 'V4Rx', the cards in the 7th and 8th slot will not work. However, in 7th slot, you can
use the cards with configuration, less than 16 ports). For example, if you are using Eternity ME Card Switch with
software version 'V4R2', change it to 'V5R1'.
Analog Input Port (AIP)
The Eternity ME Card Switch supports one external music port (AIP). This port can be used to connect an external music
source. Please refer the MDF cable pin details for making connections. The music from an external music source can be
used as a Music-on-Hold. The system can be programmed to give this external music as hold on music to internal users,
external callers or both. Please refer Music on Hold (MOH) for more details.
Matrix
Eternity V8 System Manual 23
Analog Output Port (AOP)
The Eternity ME Card Switch also supports a PAS port (AOP). This port provides un-amplified, isolated, analog speech
signal, which can be amplified by an external amplifier. The output is used for Public Address System (PAS) and Paging.
Refer chapter Paging for more details.
The Eternity ME Card Switch has one MDF connector to which an External Music Port, PAS port and 4 DKP ports are
connected. The Eternity ME Card Switch comes with a 3-meters long MDF cable (24 Way-10 Pair). The connection
details for each of this card is shown in the figure.
3. Eternity ME Card Power Supply
The Eternity ME Card Power Supply is located in a fixed slot of the Eternity ME. This slot has special connectors and
hence other universal cards cannot be inserted in the system.
The Eternity ME offers two types of Eternity ME Card Power Supply viz.
Eternity ME Card 10SAC/16SAC: 90-265VAC, 47-63Hz Mains as Input AC Voltage Power Supply.
Eternity ME Card PS48VDC 10S: 48VDC as Input DC Power Supply voltage with External Float Cum Boost Charger
used in 10 Slot Eternity ME.
Eternity ME Card 10SAC/16SAC:
This card is designed on the SMPS scheme. Since this card does not have provision for battery backup, it is
recommended to connect UPS to provide battery backup during power failure.
This card has four LEDs and a Mains Switch/Socket assembly to which the mains cord is connected.
Eternity ME Card PS48VDC:
This card has a main ON/OFF Switch by which the power fed to the card can be turned ON or OFF. The power cord is
connected to this switch assembly. If this card is used then 48VDC should be fed externally to the card. Generally FCBC
(Float Cum Boost Charger) is used to feed 48VDC to this card. Since batteries can be connected to FCBC, battery
DKP01 (Pin 01-13, Blue-White)
DKP02 (Pin 02-14, Orange White)
DKP03 (Pin 03-15, Green-White)
DKP04 (04-16, Brown-White)
External Music (Pin 05-17, Grey-White)
PAS (Pin 06-18, Blue-Red)
(Pin 10-22, Grey-Red)
(Pin 09-21, Brown-Red)
(Pin 08-20, Green-Red)
(Pin 07-19, Orange-Red)
Switch
Card
H/w Support V2R2 and Onwards
Eternity ME
Card 10SAC/16SAC
90-265VAC
@47-63Hz
-85VDC (LED L1)
+5VDC (LED L2)
+3.5VDC (LED L3
-27VDC (LED L4)
Matrix
24 Eternity V8 System Manual
backup is required for Eternity ME Card PS48VDC. If 48V/26Ah batteries are used then backup time of approx. 2 hours is
ensured, provided the batteries are fully charged.
This Card has four LEDs, a Mains Switch and a 3-way termination block.
The power cord from the FCBC output is terminated on the 3-way termination block. Polarity is very important. Hence,
please be sure to connect the wires with correct polarity.
The FCBC manufacturers maintain the color codes given above but it is recommended to measure the voltage before
connecting the power cable to the power supply card. Also, please be sure to connect earth.
Matrix supports Hot Swap and Redundancy features, as described below:
Hot Swap:
Hot Swap type of card can be removed and inserted without switching OFF the system.
Thus, a faulty card can be replaced with a working card without affecting the complete system.
Matrix supports Hot Swap cards on both models. All the cards of the Eternity ME can be supplied with hot swap
option, except Eternity ME Card Power Supply.
Redundancy:
What's this?
In order to reduce down time and to provide smooth and uninterrupted communication, Matrix supports redundant
card for few important cards of the PBX.
It is not supported in the Eternity ME 16S models. It is also not supported for the cards in the universal slots (Slave
Cards).
Eternity ME 10S supports Eternity ME Card PS48VDC redundancy with two identical cards.
Eternity ME 10S supports Eternity ME Card Master redundancy with two identical cards.
Eternity ME 10S supports Eternity ME Card Switch redundancy with two identical cards.
It is possible to configure redundancy cards as per requirements. Thus, we can configure redundancy only for Eternity
ME Card Power Supply and not for Eternity ME Card Master and Eternity ME Card Switch.
How it works?
Eternity ME Card PS48VDC Redundancy:
Eternity ME 10S supports up to two cards operating on 48VDC supply rail.
Redundancy is not supported for Eternity ME Card 10SAC/16SAC (90-265V AC Mains Card).
When the active card fails, the standby card takes over. During the take over, the system does not restart and the
existing calls do not get disconnected. The standby card becomes active card and the system continues normal
operation without any disruption.
Because of this, communication is continued without any gap.
Eternity ME Card Master Redundancy:
Eternity ME 10S supports up to two cards simultaneously.
When the active card fails, the standby card takes over. During the take over, the system restarts and hence the
existing calls get disconnected. The standby card becomes active card and the system re-boots automatically
without any manual intervention.
Because of this, communication is continued with a gap of only few minutes (2 to 3).
The configuration needs to be updated on both the Eternity ME Card Master by the System Engineer, which can
be done with the web-based configuration management tool called Web Jeeves. Refer chapter Jeeves.
Colour Signal
Red +48VDC
Black GND
Green Earth
230VAC +/-
10%@50Hz
FCBC
10A
41 to 56V
Eternity ME
Card PS48VDC
-85VDC (LED L1)
-27VDC (LED L2)
+5VDC (LED L3)
+3.5VDC (LED L4)
48V Battery
Matrix
Eternity V8 System Manual 25
Eternity ME Card Switch Redundancy:
Eternity ME 10S supports up to two cards simultaneously.
When the active card fails, the standby card takes over automatically. During the take over, the system restarts
and hence the existing calls get disconnected. The standby card becomes active and the system re-boots
automatically without any manual intervention.
Because of this communication is continued with a gap of only few minutes (2 to 3).
Note:
If the Eternity ME 10S is used and it is installed with the standby card to support redundancy. Otherwise the Eternity
ME's functioning will get affected. In other models, if any of the special cards is removed by hot swapping, the Eternity
ME will be down.
4. Eternity ME Card TWT
The Eternity ME supports following configurations with Eternity ME Card TWT viz.
Eternity ME Card TWT8
Eternity ME Card TWT16
Eternity ME Card TWT32
The Eternity ME Card TWT8 is the eight-port, two wire trunk card, Eternity ME Card TWT16 is the sixteen-port, two
wire trunk card and Eternity ME Card TWT32 is the thirty two-port, two wire trunk card.
The Eternity ME Card TWT8 has two MDF connectors to which 8 ports are connected. First 4 ports are located on the
lower MDF connector whereas the other four are located on the upper MDF connector. This card is accompanied with
two MDF cables each 3 meters long. Please contact your dealer for support of Eternity ME Card TWT16.
The Eternity ME Card TWT32 card has RJ45 ports.
5. Eternity ME Card SLT
An Eternity ME Card SLT is an intelligent card with its own micro-controller, memories and other circuitry. It uses the SLIC
technology with 35VDC battery fed for excellent loop resistance and speech performance. The Eternity ME Card SLT8 is
an eight-port, 2-wire analog station (SLT) card; the Eternity ME Card SLT16 is a sixteen port, 2-wire analog station (SLT)
card whereas the Eternity ME Card SLT32 is a thirty-two port, 2-wire analog station (SLT) card.
Matrix
26 Eternity V8 System Manual
The Eternity ME supports three configurations with Eternity ME Card SLT viz.
Eternity ME Card SLT8
Eternity ME Card SLT16
Eternity ME Card SLT32
Matrix
Eternity V8 System Manual 27
The Eternity ME Card SLT performs various functions like Subscriber's status monitoring, Ring Generation, Speech
Interface, etc.
The Eternity ME Card SLT has one tri-color LED on the front panel. This LED is used to indicate:
The health of this card (during reset cycle).
Status of one of the station ports (during normal working) During normal working of the system, the port to be
monitored is assigned a LED, using a command from SE mode. (5323-Slot-Port).
The Eternity ME Card SLT8 has one MDF connector to which 8 ports are connected. The Eternity ME Card SLT16 also
has one MDF connector to which 16 SLT ports can be connected whereas the Eternity ME Card SLT32 has two MDF
connectors. First 16 ports are located on the lower MDF connector whereas remaining 16 ports are connected to the
upper MDF connector. The connection details for each of these cards are shown in figure.
The Eternity ME Card SLT8 and Eternity ME Card SLT16 come with a 3-meters long MDF cable (36 Way-20 Pair)
whereas the Eternity ME Card SLT32 comes with two MDF cables (36 Way-20 Pair). The MDF cable used in the upper
connector has SLT ports starting from SLT17 to SLT32. The MDF cable is same for all the configurations.
6. Eternity ME Card TWT+SLT
The Eternity ME supports three configurations with Eternity ME Card TWT+SLT viz.
Eternity ME Card TWT4+SLT12
ternity ME Card TWT8+SLT24
These Eternity ME Card TWT+SLT can be used with any of the Eternity ME models. The jumper setting is not required
for configuration. The Eternity ME Card TWT+SLT is an intelligent card with its own micro-controller, memories and other
circuitry.
Upper MDF Connector Lower MDF Connector
SLT01 (Pin 01-19, Blue-White)
SLT02 (Pin 02-20, Orange-White)
SLT03 (Pin 03-21, Green-White)
SLT04 (Pin 04-22, Brown-White)
SLT05 (Pin 05-23, Grey-White)
SLT06 (Pin 06-24, Blue-Red)
SLT07 (Pin 07-25, Orange-Red)
SLT08 (Pin 08-26, Green-Red)
SLT09 (Pin 09-27, Brown-Red)
NC (Pin 18-36, Green-Yellow)
NC (Pin 17-35, Orange-Yellow)
SLT16 (Pin 16-34, Blue-Yellow)
SLT15 (Pin 15-33, Grey-Black)
SLT14 (Pin 14-32, Brown-Black)
SLT13 (Pin 13-31, Green-Black)
SLT12 (Pin 12-30, Orange-Black)
SLT11 (Pin 11-29, Blue-Black)
SLT10 (Pin 10-28, Grey-Red)
SLT17 (Pin 01-19, Blue-White)
SLT18 (Pin 02-20, Orange-White)
SLT19 (Pin 03-21, Green-White)
SLT20 (Pin 04-22, Brown-White)
SLT21 (Pin 05-23, Grey-White)
SLT22 (Pin 06-24, Blue-Red)
SLT23 (Pin 07-25, Orange-Red)
SLT24 (Pin 08-26, Green-Red)
SLT25 (Pin 09-27, Brown-Red)
NC (Pin 18-36, Green-Yellow)
NC (Pin 17-35, Orange-Yellow)
SLT32 (Pin 16-34, Blue-Yellow)
SLT31 (Pin 15-33, Grey-Black)
SLT30 (Pin 14-32, Brown-Black)
SLT29 (Pin 13-31, Green-Black)
SLT28 (Pin 12-30, Orange-Black)
SLT27 (Pin 11-29, Blue-Black)
SLT26 (Pin 10-28, Grey-Red)
SLT32
Matrix
28 Eternity V8 System Manual
The Eternity ME Card TWT4+SLT12 is a four trunk port and 12 SLT port card whereas the Eternity ME Card
TWT8+SLT24 is an eight trunk port and 24 SLT port card. The analog trunk lines can be connected to the trunk ports
whereas conventional telephone instruments can be connected to the SLT ports.
The SLT port performs various functions like Subscriber's status monitoring, Ring Generation, Speech Interface, etc.
Whereas the TWT port performs various functions like hook operation, ring sense, polarity reversal sense, isolation, etc.
The Eternity ME Card TWT+SLT has one tricolor LED on the front panel. This LED is used to indicate:
The health of this card (during reset cycle)
Status of one of the station ports (during normal working) during normal working of the system: The port to be
monitored is assigned a LED, using a command from SE mode. (5323-Slot-Port).
The Eternity ME Card TWT4+SLT12 has one connector to which four trunk ports and 12 SLT ports are connected. This
card is accompanied with one MDF cable, 3 meters long.
The Eternity ME Card TWT8+SLT24 has two MDF (36 way 20 pair) connectors. First 4 trunk ports and first 12 SLT ports
are located on the lower MDF connector whereas the remaining trunk ports and SLT ports are connected on the second
Matrix
Eternity V8 System Manual 29
MDF connector. This card is accompanied with two MDF cables, each 3 meters long. The connection details of this cards
is as shown below:
7. Eternity ME Card DKP
The Eternity ME supports two configurations with Eternity ME Card DKP viz.
Eternity ME Card DKP8
Eternity ME Card DKP16
Eternity ME Card DKP32
The Eternity ME Card DKP8 is an eight port, 2 wire digital station card; the Eternity ME Card DKP16 is sixteen port card
and the Eternity ME Card DKP32 is thirty two port card The proprietary digital interface viz. Eon45, Eon42, Eon48,
EonSoft, DSS64, DSS72, can be connected to the DKP ports. The DKP port performs various functions like sending
commands to and receiving commands from Eon.
The LED is used to indicate:
The health of this card (during reset cycle)
Status of one of the station ports (during normal working) during normal working of the system, the port to be
monitored is assigned a LED, using a command from SE Mode (5323-Slot-Port).
The Eternity ME Card DKP8 has two MDF connectors to which 8 ports are connected. First 4 ports are located on the
lower MDF connector whereas the other four are located on the upper MDF connector. This card is accompanied with
two MDF cables each 3 meters long.
The Eternity ME Card DKP16 has one MDF connector (36way-20 pair MDF cable) to which 16 ports are connected. All
16 ports are located in lower MDF connector. This card is accompanied with one MDF cable of 3 meters long.
Upper MDF Connector Lower MDF Connector
SLT01 (Pin 01-19, Blue-White)
SLT02 (Pin 02-20, Orange-White)
SLT03 (Pin 03-21, Green-White)
SLT04 (Pin 04-22, Brown-White)
SLT05 (Pin 05-23, Grey-White)
SLT06 (Pin 06-24, Blue-Red)
SLT07 (Pin 07-25, Orange-Red)
SLT08 (Pin 08-26, Green-Red)
SLT09 (Pin 09-27, Brown-Red)
NC (Pin 18-36, Green-Yellow)
NC (Pin 17-35, Orange-Yellow)
TWT04 (Pin 16-34, Blue-Yellow)
TWT03 (Pin 15-33, Grey-Black)
TWT02 (Pin 14-32, Brown-Black)
TWT01 (Pin 13-31, Green-Black)
SLT12 (Pin 12-30, Orange-Black)
SLT11 (Pin 11-29, Blue-Black)
SLT10 (Pin 10-28, Grey-Red)
SLT13 (Pin 01-19, Blue-White)
SLT14 (Pin 02-20, Orange-White)
SLT15 (Pin 03-21, Green-White)
SLT16 (Pin 04-22, Brown-White)
SLT17 (Pin 05-23, Grey-White)
SLT18 (Pin 06-24, Blue-Red)
SLT19 (Pin 07-25, Orange-Red)
SLT20 (Pin 08-26, Green-Red)
SLT21 (Pin 09-27, Brown-Red)
NC (Pin 18-36, Green-Yellow)
NC (Pin 17-35, Orange-Yellow)
TWT08 (Pin 16-34, Blue-Yellow)
TWT07 (Pin 15-33, Grey-Black)
TWT06 (Pin 14-32, Brown-Black)
TWT05 (Pin 13-31, Green-Black)
SLT24 (Pin 12-30, Orange-Black)
SLT23 (Pin 11-29, Blue-Black)
SLT22 (Pin 10-28, Grey-Red)
TWT8 + SLT24
H/w support V2R1 and onwards
Matrix
30 Eternity V8 System Manual
The Eternity ME Card DKP32 has RJ45 ports.
8. Eternity ME Card E&M
The Eternity ME supports two configurations with Eternity ME Card E&M viz.
Eternity ME Card E&M4
Eternity ME Card E&M8
Refer chapter E&M Connectivity for more details of application.
The Eternity ME Card E&M4 has one MDF connector to which 4 ports are connected. All 4 ports are located in lower
MDF connector. This card is accompanied with one MDF cable of 3 meters long.
The Eternity ME Card E&M8 has eight tri-colour LEDs on the front panel. The Eternity ME Card E&M8 has two MDF (36
Way-20 Pair) connectors, 4 E&M ports (E&M1 to E&M4) are located on the lower MDF connector whereas remaining four
E&M ports (E&M5 to E&M8) are located on the upper MDF connector. The MDF cables are 3 meters long.
L
1
D
K
P
1
6
H/w support V1R0 and onwards Lower MDF Connector
DKP01 (Pin 01-19, Blue-White)
DKP02 (Pin 02-20, Orange-White)
DKP03 (Pin 03-21, Green-White)
DKP04 (Pin 04-22, Brown-White)
DKP05 (Pin 05-23, Grey-White)
DKP06 (Pin 06-24, Blue-Red)
DKP07 (Pin 07-25, Orange-Red)
DKP08 (Pin 08-26, Green-Red)
DKP09 (Pin 09-27, Brown-Red)
(Pin 18-36, Green-Yellow)
(Pin 17-35, Orange-Yellow)
DKP16 (Pin 16-34, Blue-Yellow)
DKP15 (Pin 15-33, Grey-Black)
DKP14 (Pin 14-32, Brown-Black)
DKP13 (Pin 13-31, Green-Black)
DKP12 (Pin 12-30, Orange-Black)
DKP11 (Pin 11-29, Blue-Black)
DKP10 (Pin 10-28, Grey-Red)
DKP8/DKP16
L
1
L
2
L
3
L
4
Upper MDF Connector Lower MDF Connector
E&M01 M, SB (Pin 01-19, Blue-White)
E&M01 E, SG (Pin 02-20, Orange-White)
E&M01 SP(RxA), SP(RxB) (Pin 03-21, Green-White)
E&M01 SP(A), SP(B) (Pin 04-22, Brown-White)
E&M01-02 CCS (Pin 05-23, Grey-White)
E&M02 M, SB (Pin 06-24, Blue-Red)
E&M02 E, SG (Pin 07-25, Orange-Red)
E&M02 SP(RxA), SP(RxB) (Pin 08-26, Green-Red)
E&M02 SP(A), SP(B) (Pin 09-27, Brown-Red)
E&M04 SP(A), SP(B) (Pin 18-36, Green-Yellow)
E&M04 SP(RxA), SP(RxB) (Pin 17-35, Orange-Yellow)
E&M04 E, SG (Pin 16-34, Blue-Yellow)
E&M04 M, SB (Pin 15-33, Grey-Black)
E&M03-04 CCS (Pin 14-32, Brown-Black)
E&M03 SP(A), SP(B) (Pin 13-31, Green-Black)
E&M03 SP(RxA), SP(RxB) (Pin 12-30, Orange-Black)
E&M03 E, SG (Pin 11-29, Blue-Black)
E&M03 M, SB (Pin 10-28, Grey-Red)
E&M4
H/w support V1R1 and onwards
Matrix
Eternity V8 System Manual 31

The connection details of for 2wire/4wire, Type4/Type5 cards are given below:
L
1
L
2
L
3
L
4
Upper MDF Connector Lower MDF Connector
E&M01 M, SB (Pin 01-19, Blue-White)
E&M01 E, SG (Pin 02-20, Orange-White)
E&M01 SP(RxA), SP(RxB) (Pin 03-21, Green-White)
E&M01 SP(A), SP(B) (Pin 04-22, Brown-White)
E&M01-02 CCS (Pin 05-23, Grey-White)
E&M02 M, SB (Pin 06-24, Blue-Red)
E&M02 E, SG (Pin 07-25, Orange-Red)
E&M02 SP(RxA), SP(RxB) (Pin 08-26, Green-Red)
E&M02 SP(A), SP(B) (Pin 09-27, Brown-Red)
E&M04 SP(A), SP(B) (Pin 18-36, Green-Yellow)
E&M04 SP(RxA), SP(RxB) (Pin 17-35, Orange-Yellow)
E&M04 E, SG (Pin 16-34, Blue-Yellow)
E&M04 M, SB (Pin 15-33, Grey-Black)
E&M03-04 CCS (Pin 14-32, Brown-Black)
E&M03 SP(A), SP(B) (Pin 13-31, Green-Black)
E&M03 SP(RxA), SP(RxB) (Pin 12-30, Orange-Black)
E&M03 E, SG (Pin 11-29, Blue-Black)
E&M03 M, SB (Pin 10-28, Grey-Red)
L
5
L
6
L
7
L
8
E&M05 M, SB (Pin 01-19, Blue-White)
E&M05 E, SG (Pin 02-20, Orange-White)
E&M05 SP(RxA), SP(RxB) (Pin 03-21, Green-White)
E&M05 SP(A), SP(B) (Pin 04-22, Brown-White)
E&M05-06 CCS (Pin 05-23, Grey-White)
E&M06 M, SB (Pin 06-24, Blue-Red)
E&M06 E, SG (Pin 07-25, Orange-Red)
E&M06 SP(RxA), SP(RxB) (Pin 08-26, Green-Red)
E&M06 SP(A), SP(B) (Pin 09-27, Brown-Red)
E&M08 SP(A), SP(B) (Pin 18-36, Green-Yellow)
E&M08 SP(RxA), SP(RxB) (Pin 17-35, Orange-Yellow)
E&M08 E, SG (Pin 16-34, Blue-Yellow)
E&M08 M, SB (Pin 15-33, Grey-Black)
E&M07-08 CCS (Pin 14-32, Brown-Black)
E&M07 SP(A), SP(B) (Pin 13-31, Green-Black)
E&M07 SP(RxA), SP(RxB) (Pin 12-30, Orange-Black)
E&M07 E, SG (Pin 11-29, Blue-Black)
E&M07 M, SB (Pin 10-28, Grey-Red)
E&M8
H/w support V1R1 and onwards
M
SB
E
SG
SP(RxA)
SP(RxB)
SP(A)
SP(B)
CCS
One E&M Port of PBX-A One E&M Port of PBX-B
M
SB
E
SG
SP(RxA)
SP(RxB)
SP(A)
SP(B)
CCS NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
2 Wire / Type 4 E&M Connection
M
SB
E
SG
SP(RxA)
SP(RxB)
SP(A)
SP(B)
CCS
One E&M Port of PBX-A One E&M Port of PBX-B
M
SB
E
SG
SP(RxA)
SP(RxB)
SP(A)
SP(B)
CCS
CCS Connection should be made as shown belowfor any of the above four combination
PLCC
Panel
PLCC
Panel
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
M
SB
E
SG
SP(RxA)
SP(RxB)
SP(A)
SP(B)
CCS
One E&M Port of PBX-A One E&M Port of PBX-B
M
SB
E
SG
SP(RxA)
SP(RxB)
SP(A)
SP(B)
CCS
4 Wire / Type 5 E&M Connection
NC
NC
NC
NC
M
SB
E
SG
SP(RxA)
SP(RxB)
SP(A)
SP(B)
CCS
One E&M Port of PBX-A One E&M Port of PBX-B
M
SB
E
SG
SP(RxA)
SP(RxB)
SP(A)
SP(B)
CCS
4 Wire / Type 4 E&M Connection
NC NC
M
SB
E
SG
SP(RxA)
SP(RxB)
SP(A)
SP(B)
CCS
One E&M Port of PBX-A One E&M Port of PBX-B
M
SB
E
SG
SP(RxA)
SP(RxB)
SP(A)
SP(B)
CCS
2 Wire / Type 5 E&MConnection
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
Matrix
32 Eternity V8 System Manual
Hardware details for E&M Configuration Type
9. Eternity ME Card VMS
The Eternity ME supports configuration with Eternity ME Card VMS (Voice Mail Service) with 8 ports and 16 ports.
These Eternity ME Card VMS can be used with any of the Eternity models. Both the cards contain same software; the
configurations are decided by the jumper settings. The card supports 'Ethernet Port' and 2 COM ports. The USB Port is
inside the card.
The Eternity ME Card VMS is an intelligent card with its own micro-controller, memories and other circuitry. Eternity ME
Card VMS8 has 8 VMS ports whereas Eternity ME Card VMS16 has 16 VMS ports to which trunk lines can be made to
land. (This is done with the help of programming) With Eternity ME Card VMS8, eight calls can be attended
simultaneously whereas with Eternity ME Card VMS16, sixteen calls can be attended simultaneously. We can store voice
messages upto 4.5 hours to 18 hours depending on the flash drive used.
The card type can be configured using Jumper J6:
Eternity ME Card VMS8 when J6 is in AB position.
Eternity ME Card VMS16 when J6 is in BC position.
The Eternity ME Card VMS has four tri-colour LEDs on the front panel. These LEDs are used to indicate, the health of
this card (during reset cycle).
Note for SE/Installing person:
It is recommended to SE that while installing the Eternity, refer chapter Voice Message Applications to include the
phrase "Please press 0 to acknowledge the Alarm and Reminder" as voice prompt. This is used to acknowledge the
Alarm/Reminder call, placed on the station as a Snooze Call.
10. Eternity ME Card BRI
The Eternity ME supports following configuration of Eternity ME Card BRI:
Eternity ME Card BRI4
Eternity ME Card BRI8
Eternity ME Card BRI is an intelligent card with its own micro-controller, memories and other circuitry. Eternity ME Card
BRI4 has four BRI ports and Eternity ME Card BRI8 for eight BRI ports.
For Eternity ME Card BRI4 configuration J5 in AB position and J6 in BC position.
For Eternity ME Card BRI8 configuration J5 in BC position and J6 in BC position.
The BRI port can be configured as BRI (TE) or BRI (NT) port, using web-page. The BRI line from Service Provider is
connected to BRI (TE) port. The ISDN Phone or BRI (TE) port of another ISDN PBX can be connected to BRI (NT) port of
Eternity ME Card BRI.
Jumper Position Configuration Type
J1 and J2 AB Type 4
BC Type 5
J3 and J4 AB 4-Wire
BC 2-Wire
Matrix
Eternity V8 System Manual 33
The Eternity ME Card BRI has one LED on the front panel to indicate health of this card (during reset cycle). The MDF
cables are 3 meters long. The connection details for the MDF cable for Eternity ME Card BRI8 are shown in figure.
V- and V+ are used when a TE is connected to BRI port.
How to connect a BRI line to the Eternity ME Card BRI?
Most of the service providers provide the NT1 along with the BRI line.
At the customer's premises, the BRI line is terminated on the NT1. The S/T interface of the NT1 is connected to the BRI
port of the Eternity.
Above block diagram shows a BRI line connected to Eternity ME Card BRI in TE mode.
Hardware Configuration of BRI port
Depending on the requirement, each BRI Port can be configured in TE/NT Mode through the Web Jeeves without
changing any Jumper position. Also proper termination on the connection, made between the Eternity and the ISDN
terminals can be set using Jumpers. Following section gives information about the same.
L
1
B
R
I8
Upper MDF Connector Lower MDF Connector
BRI01 TxA, TxB (Pin 01-19, Blue-White)
BRI01 RxA, RxB (Pin 02-20, Orange-White)
BRI01 V-, V+ (Pin 03-21, Green-White)
BRI02 TxA, TxB (Pin 04-22, Brown-White)
BRI02 RxA, RxB (Pin 05-23, Grey-White)
BRI02 V-, V+ (Pin 06-24, Blue-Red)
BRI03 TxA, TxB (Pin 07-25, Orange-Red)
BRI03 RxA, RxB (Pin 08-26, Green-Red)
BRI03 V-, V+ (Pin 09-27, Brown-Red)
(Pin 18-36, Green-Yellow)
(Pin 17-35, Orange-Yellow)
(Pin 16-34, Blue-Yellow)
(Pin 15-33, Grey-Black)
(Pin 14-32, Brown-Black)
(Pin 13-31, Green-Black)
BRI04 V-, V+ (Pin 12-30, Orange-Black)
BRI04 RxA, RxB (Pin 11-29, Blue-Black)
BRI04 TxA, TxB (Pin 10-28, Grey-Red)
BRI05 TxA, TxB (Pin 01-19, Blue-White)
BRI05 RxA, RxB (Pin 02-20, Orange-White)
BRI05 V-, V+ (Pin 03-21, Green-White)
BRI06 TxA, TxB (Pin 04-22, Brown-White)
BRI06 RxA, RxB (Pin 05-23, Grey-White)
BRI06 V-, V+ (Pin 06-24, Blue-Red)
BRI07 TxA, TxB (Pin 07-25, Orange-Red)
BRI07 RxA, RxB (Pin 08-26, Green-Red)
BRI07 V-, V+ (Pin 09-27, Brown-Red)
(Pin 18-36, Green-Yellow)
(Pin 17-35, Orange-Yellow)
(Pin 16-34, Blue-Yellow)
(Pin 15-33, Grey-Black)
(Pin 14-32, Brown-Black)
(Pin 13-31, Green-Black)
BRI08 V-, V+ (Pin 12-30, Orange-Black)
BRI08 RxA, RxB (Pin 11-29, Blue-Black)
BRI08 TxA, TxB (Pin 10-28, Grey-Red)
BRI4/BRI8
H/w support V1R0 and onwards
ISDN
Network
Power
4
5
3
4
5
6
NT-1
U-Interface
(2-wire)
S/T Interface
(4-wire)
Tx
Rx
Rx1
Tx1
Tx2
Rx2
TxA
RxA
RxB
TxB
V-
V+
NC
NC
Eternity
A BRI port of
Eternity
Matrix
34 Eternity V8 System Manual
Power to the Terminal:
The BRI Port (when configured in NT mode) can be configured to feed power to the terminal equipment connected to it
using the jumpers mentioned in the table given below. Power can be fed on Tx and Rx wires as well as on separate pair
of wires (Refer Note-B).
Jumpers J1 and J2 are on BRI Module of each port. By default Jumper J1 and J2 are in A-B position.
Termination on the Port:
The termination of 100 Ohms can be provided on the BRI Port using following table (Refer Note-A):
Jumpers J3 and J4 are on BRI Module of each port. By default Jumper J3 and J4 are in A-B position.
Notes:
Note-A
Termination of 100 Ohms should be inserted in following cases:
When the BRI port is configured in NT mode.
When the BRI port is configured in TE mode and connected in Point-to-point configuration as shown in figure.
When the BRI port is configured in TE mode and connected as last terminal on the 'S0' bus (Multi-point configuration)
as shown in figure.
Termination need not be inserted in case 2 and 3 above, if the 'S0' bus itself supports Terminating resistors.
Termination need not be inserted if BRI port of Eternity (configured in TE mode) is connected as any 'Terminal' other
than the last 'Terminal' on the 'S0' bus (Multi-point configuration).
Note-B
Number of ISDN terminals that can be connected on the BRI port configured in NT mode depends on the power
consumed by the ISDN terminals. Maximum power that can be provided on one BRI port is 50mA. However, from
signaling point of view maximum 8 terminals can be connected on the BRI port configured in NT mode. Hence, if the
terminal equipment do not consume power from the BRI port (configured in NT mode) of the Eternity, maximum 8
terminals can be connected to it.
11. Eternity ME Card T1E1PRI
The Eternity ME supports following configuration of Eternity ME Card T1E1PRI:
Eternity ME Card T1E1PRI Single
Eternity ME Card T1E1PRI Dual
Description J1 J2
To feed power on Tx and Rx wires (Phantom power) A-B A-B
To feed power on separate pair of wires B-C B-C
No power to be feed to the terminal equipment Open Open
Description J3 J4
To insert 100 Ohms Termination A-B A-B
To remove 100 Ohms Termination B-C B-C
Etenity ME
NT
BRI
Line ISDN
Network
TE
NT
BRI
Line ISDN
Network
Other
ISDN
Equipment
Other
ISDN
Equipment
TE TE TE
Matrix
Eternity V8 System Manual 35
For Eternity ME Card T1E1PRI Single configuration J5 in BC position. For Eternity ME Card T1E1PRI Dual configuration
J5 in AB position.
The Eternity supports Eternity ME Card T1E1PRI Dual to which a PRI line can be connected.
The Eternity ME Card T1E1PRI is an intelligent card with its own micro-controller, memories and other circuitry.
The Eternity ME Card T1E1PRI has four tri color LED on the front panel. This LED is used to indicate:
The health of this card (during reset cycle).
Status of one of the station ports (during normal working). During normal working of the system, the port to be
monitored is assigned a LED, using a command from SE mode. (5323-Slot-Port)
How to configure Eternity ME Card T1E1PRI Dual for connecting a PRI line to it?
A PRI line can be terminated on the Eternity ME Card T1E1PRI Dual on a RJ-45 connector (Open links L1 and L2).
DIP Switch SW1 on the Eternity ME Card T1E1PRI is used to set the Line Impedance. Following table gives possible
combinations of the DIP-switch for setting line impedance
DIP Switches SW2 and SW4 on the Eternity ME Card T1E1PRI are used to set the termination resistance.
Possible combination of the DIP switch for setting termination resistance is as given below:
The default position of SW3 is PIN 1, PIN 2, PIN 3 and PIN 4 are OFF. This switch is used for general purpose I/O.
Following sketch shows the connections of a PRI line to the Eternity ME Card T1E1PRI Dual.
Most of the service providers insist to connect an ISDN modem at both the ends of the PRI line i.e. one at the Local
Exchange and other at the Customer's Premises.
At the Customer's Premises, the PRI line is terminated on the HDSL interface of the modem. The DTE interface of the
modem should be connected to the T1E1PRI port (RJ-45 connector provided on the front side of the Eternity ME
Card T1E1PRI).
Pin Meaning
Only Pin1 ON 75 Ohms
Only Pin2 ON 100 Ohms
Only Pin3 ON
120 Ohms
(Default)
DIP Switch SW1 and SW4
Termination Resistance (Ohms)
Pin1 Pin2 Pin3 Pin4
OFF ON OFF ON 0 (Default)
OFF OFF ON OFF 5.1
OFF OFF ON ON 0
OFF ON OFF OFF 6.04
OFF ON OFF ON 0
OFF ON ON OFF 0.3616
OFF ON ON ON 0
ON OFF OFF OFF 6.8
ON OFF OFF ON 0
ON OFF ON OFF 0.3431
ON OFF ON ON 0
ON ON OFF OFF 0.31
ON ON OFF ON 0
ON ON ON OFF 0.5087
ON ON ON ON 0
Matrix
36 Eternity V8 System Manual
This is shown in the figure given below:
Pin details of HDSL Interface of the G.703 Modem. (HDSL Network Termination Unit)
Pin details of DTE Interface of G.703 Modem. (HDSL Network Interface Unit)
The pin details of HDSL interface and DTE interface are of a stand-alone HDSL Network Termination Unit, Model HTU-E
from RAD data communication. Most of the HDSL NTU manufacturers use these connectors. However, it is advisable to
read through the instrument guide of the HDSL NTU used by you. LEDs indications for various Fault conditions:
12. Eternity ME Card GSM
The Eternity ME Card GSM is an intelligent card with its own micro-controller, memories and other circuitry.
The Eternity ME Card GSM can be used with any of the Eternity ME.
The Eternity ME Card GSM has either GSM Module or CDMA Module installed in the Mobile port as per requirement
of the user. Thus the mobile port can be interfaced with CDMA (Code Division Multiple Access) network for the ports
where CDMA module is installed. By default the GSM module is installed for all the Mobile ports.
Pin Number Pin Details
1 Line A
2 Line A
3 Not Used
4 Line B
5 Line B
6 Not Used
7 Not Used
8 Not Used
Pin Number Pin Details
1 TX1 (Tip)
2 TX2 (Ring)
3 Not Used
4 RX1 (Ring)
5 RX2 (Tip)
6 Not Used
7 Not Used
8 Not Used
LED Indication Meaning
1 LED blinks Green, 1 sec. ON, 1sec. OFF Eternity ME Card T1E1PRI is working OK
LED continuously ON/OFF Eternity ME Card T1E1PRI faulty
2 LED glows Red Basic Alarm. Alignment is not acquired
LED blinks Red, 1 sec. ON, 1sec. OFF Red Alarm. Basic frame alignment is lost for at least 100ms.
3 LED glows Red Multi Frame Alignment is lost
LED blinks Red, 1 sec. ON, 1sec. OFF Either E1/E2 bit is list. (CRC-4 received by the remote end is
lost/corrupted)
4 LED glows Red CRC-4 Synchronization is lost
LED blinks Red, 1 sec. ON, 1sec. OFF CRC-4 Reframe is forced
ISDN
Network
HDSL (RJ-45
Connector)
G.703
Modem
G.703
Modem
DTE (RJ-45
Connector)
Power
Customer Premises
4-wire 4-wire
Eternity
Matrix
Eternity V8 System Manual 37
The card uses 4 or 8 GSM engines, as per card type.
SIM cards of different Service Providers can be mounted on the SIM holder provided on the card.
The Eternity ME Card GSM performs functions like speech processing. The Eternity ME Card GSM also allows
multiple simultaneous calls (Incoming and Outgoing).
The Eternity ME Card GSM has 4 tri-colour LEDs.
They indicate:
The health of the card
Status of one of the station ports during normal working of the system
The card supports two configurations:
For Eternity ME Card GSM4 configuration J1 in AB position.
For Eternity ME Card GSM8 configuration J1 in BC position.
There are 1 or 2 RT antenna connector on the front fascia. The card comes with 1 or 2 antenna cable.
13. Eternity ME Card VoIP
The Eternity ME can be configured with one type of Eternity ME Card VoIP:
Eternity ME Card VoIP8
Eternity ME Card VoIP8 is used, '8' simultaneous calls are possible. The Eternity ME Card VoIP is based on session
Initiated Protocol (SIP) which is internationally recognized standard for implementing VoIP. The card supports 'VoIP
Ethernet Port' for connecting IP from SP. This card is maximum of 32 SIP Accounts are supported.
14. Eternity ME Card Magneto
Eternity ME supports maximum of 128 Magneto trunk ports.
No battery voltage is provided on the Tip-Ring pair of the Magneto Trunk. It supports the interface of Magneto phone
only.
Two configurations of Eternity ME Card Magneto are supported. The jumper setting in the card is not required, for
configuration.
Eternity ME Card Magneto4
Eternity ME Card Magneto8
Port type for the Magneto Trunk is '29' for selecting the port using selective port access command.
The MDF connector wiring detail for Eternity ME Card Magneto is as shown below:
Note:
The configuration of the cards mentioned above may change from time-to-time. In case of discrepancy, please
contact your dealer for details.
15. Cards with RJ45 Interface Port:
Eternity ME supports following cards with RJ45 interface:
M
A
G
8
Lower MDF Connector
Magneto 1 (Pin 01-19, Blue-White)
Magneto 2 (Pin 02-20, Orange-White)
Magneto 3 (Pin 03-21, Green-White)
Magneto 4 (Pin 04-22, Brown-White)
Magneto 5 (Pin 05-23, Grey-White)
Magneto 6 (Pin 06-24, Blue-Red)
Magneto 7 (Pin 07-25, Orange-Red)
Magneto 8 (Pin 08-26, Green-Red)
H/w support V1R1 and onwards
Magneto4/Magneto8
Matrix
38 Eternity V8 System Manual
Eternity ME card SLT32: It supports 32 ports for connecting analog phones.
Eternity ME card TWT32: It supports 32 ports for connecting analog Two Wire Trunks.
Eternity ME card DKP32: It supports 32 ports for connecting digital phones, DKP.
Eternity ME card TWT8-SLT24: It supports 8 ports for connecting analog Two Wire Trunks and 24 ports for connecting
analog phones.
Please refer following table for connecting cables to the RJ45 connector:
Interfacing Modules:
Following modules or operator console can be interfaced with Eternity ME:
Eon45/Eon42/Eon48 and EonSoft
DSS64/DSS72
PFT8
MDF
FCBC
Battery Backup
PPM4
Eon45:
These are Digital Key Phone (DKP) used as phone for DKP port. The Eon45 offers following features:
A 2-line x 16 character adjustable LCD.
Twenty-six programmable keys for direct station selection/trunk access/features.
Tri-color LEDs to show status of ports.
Hot Keypad.
Speaker Phone.
Headset Connectivity.
Connector SLT32 Card TRK32 Card DKP32 Card TRK8, SLT24 Colour
Card

RJ45-1 SLT 01 TRK 01 DKP 01 SLT 01 Blue - (Blue & White)
(Blue) SLT 02 TRK 02 DKP 02 SLT 02 Orange - (Orange & White)
SLT 03 TRK 03 DKP 03 SLT 03 Green - (Green & White)
SLT 04 TRK 04 DKP 04 SLT 04 Brown - (Brown & White)
RJ45-2 SLT 05 TRK 05 DKP 05 SLT 05
(Orange) SLT 06 TRK 06 DKP 06 SLT 06
SLT 07 TRK 07 DKP 07 SLT 07
SLT 08 TRK 08 DKP 08 SLT 08
RJ45-3 SLT 09 TRK 09 DKP 09 SLT 09
(Green) SLT 10 TRK 10 DKP 10 SLT 10
SLT 11 TRK 11 DKP 11 SLT 11
SLT 12 TRK 12 DKP 12 SLT 12
RJ45-4 SLT 13 TRK 13 DKP 13 SLT 13
(Brown) SLT 14 TRK 14 DKP 14 SLT 14
SLT 15 TRK 15 DKP 15 SLT 15
SLT 16 TRK 16 DKP 16 SLT 16
Blue - (Blue & White)
Orange - (Orange & White)
Green - (Green & White)
Brown - (Brown & White)
Blue - (Blue & White)
Orange - (Orange & White)
Green - (Green & White)
Brown - (Brown & White)
Blue - (Blue & White)
Orange - (Orange & White)
Green - (Green & White)
Brown - (Brown & White)
RJ45-5 SLT 17 TRK 17 DKP 17 SLT 17 Blue - (Blue & White)
(Blue) SLT 18 TRK 18 DKP 18 SLT 18 Orange - (Orange & White)
SLT 19 TRK 19 DKP 19 SLT 19 Green - (Green & White)
SLT 20 TRK 20 DKP 20 SLT 20 Brown - (Brown & White)
RJ45-6 SLT 21 TRK 21 DKP 21 SLT 21 Blue - (Blue & White)
(Orange) SLT 22 TRK 22 DKP 22 SLT 22 Orange - (Orange & White)
SLT 23 TRK 23 DKP 23 SLT 23 Green - (Green & White)
SLT 24 TRK 24 DKP 24 SLT 24 Brown - (Brown & White)
RJ45-7 SLT 25 TRK 25 DKP 25 TRK 01 Blue - (Blue & White)
(Green) SLT 26 TRK 26 DKP 26 TRK 02 Orange - (Orange & White)
SLT 27 TRK 27 DKP 27 TRK 03 Green - (Green & White)
SLT 28 TRK 28 DKP 28 TRK 04 Brown - (Brown & White)
RJ45-8 SLT 29 TRK 29 DKP 29 TRK 05 Blue - (Blue & White)
(Brown) SLT 30 TRK 30 DKP 30 TRK 06 Orange - (Orange & White)
SLT 31 TRK 31 DKP 31 TRK 07 Green - (Green & White)
SLT 32 TRK 32 DKP 32 TRK 08 Brown - (Brown & White)
L1 L2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Matrix
Eternity V8 System Manual 39
Adjustable ringer tune and ringer volume.
Adjustable speech levels; transmit and receive levels.
Menu driven functions.
Keypad security.
Eon42/Eon48:
The Eon42/Eon48 offers following features:
Eon42 comes with models: Eon42S, Eon42P and Eon42SR.
Eon42S is standard DKP with 2 line 24 characters LCD display.
Eon42P is standard DKP with 6 line 24 characters LCD display.
It is completely replaceable with Eon45.
Twenty-Five programmable keys for direct station selection/trunk access/features (for Eon42).
Twenty-Nine programmable keys (for Eon48).
Important Points:
The Eternity ME supports maximum distance of 3 kms between the system and the Eon45/Eon42/Eon48.
Use good quality wire. (CAT5 or equivalent). Avoid joints.
Maximum 128 DKP can be connected to the Eternity ME.
EonSoft
EonSoft is a PC operated soft phone with special DKP software supplied by matrix.
DSS64/DSS72
The DSS64/DSS72 is a Direct Station Selection (DSS) attachment (Console) for the DKP. Operators prefer to use
consoles for efficient handling of the calls. It offers following features:
It is a 2-wire Digital Terminal.
An attachment for the DKP.
DSS64 supports 64 DSS keys with Dual Color LEDs.
DSS72 supports 72 DSS keys with Dual Color LEDs.
Once DSS64/DSS72 is connected to the Eternity ME, it should be programmed as an attachment (console) for any one
of the DKPs connected to the system.
Power Fail Transfer Module (PFT8)
For obvious reasons, it is desirable to have trunk lines available directly on few SLTs during power failures and
system breakdowns. This is known as Power Fail Transfer or PFT in short.
The Eternity ME offers a PFT device capable of diverting eight trunks to eight different SLT ports. More number of
PFT8 can be connected in case more number of trunks needs to be taken care during power failures.
Following figure shows the block diagram of power fail transfer.
Telephone
in the field
Power Fail Condition
NO
NO
NC
NC
C
C
Station
Trunk
Line
Matrix
40 Eternity V8 System Manual
PFT8 operates on 230VAC or on 48VDC.
230VAC can be fed to the PFT8 by the way of 3-core power cable. Please take care that the Eternity ME and the
PFT8 are fed mains voltage from the same power point.
48VDC can be fed to the PFT8 using 2-core battery cable supplied with the PFT8. One end of this cable is connected
to a Casio jack, which should be plugged into the DC socket meant for it on the PFT8. The other end is left open
which should be connected to the 48V source.
A toggle switch is also provided. This switch helps the system engineer while doing maintenance work. The system
engineer should put this switch in 'PFT' mode before starting the maintenance work. Doing so:
Power-down SLT stations get trunk dial tone.
All incoming calls land on the power-down SLT stations.
However all the busy trunks are not transferred immediately to avoid disconnection of active calls. This way all the
trunks will be freed after some time and the system engineer will be able to switch OFF the system.
Once the maintenance work is over, the system engineer should put the switch to 'Normal' mode. Doing so:
The trunks are connected back to the system.
Power down stations not currently in use get the system dial tone and now can make outgoing calls as per the
programming.
However the stations already in speech with trunk will not be disconnected. These stations return to the normal mode
when they go ON-Hook on completion of their talk.
PFT8 comes with two 36-way connectors on both the side.
How to connect PFT8?
With PFT8 connected to the Eternity ME:
Power fail transfer happens immediately as soon as the power failure is detected.
Ongoing calls will get disconnected.
Switch-over back from power-fail to normal condition happens when the power returns.
This switch-over for a trunk is immediate if the trunk is free at that time.
In case a trunk is being used at the time of power return, the switch over will happen only after the present ongoing
call is finished.
This avoids unwanted disconnection of ongoing calls at the time of power return.
Please take care not to connect the Eon45 as a power down station.
ET2-PFT8
M
D
F
230V Power
Supply
36-way/20 pair
Cable
36-way/20 pair
Cable
Trunk (05-08)
+ SLT (13-24)
Trunk (01-04)
+ SLT (01-12)
LED
LED ON - Normal Mode
LED Flashing - Maintenance Mode
Toggle Switch for Mode Selection
Trunk (05-08)
/ SLT (13-24)
Trunk (01-04)
/ SLT (01-12)
48V DC Supply
Telecom Earth
ETH
From PBX
From PBX
Eternity
Matrix
Eternity V8 System Manual 41
Main Distribution Frame (MDF)
It is strongly suggested that the MDF be divided in two parts as shown in figure.
Important Points:
System MDF and field MDF must be separate.
Primary Protection Modules (PPM) with GDT and fuses are must on all the trunk, SLT, DKP and E&M ports.
Float Cum Boost Charger (FCBC)
If Eternity ME Card PS48VDC is used then FCBC should be connected to feed 48V externally to the card.
Batteries can be connected to FCBC so that battery backup can be ensured. If 48V/26Ah batteries are used then back up
time of approx. 2.5 to 3 hours can be ensured, provided the batteries are fully charged and the system traffic is normal.
Figure shows how to connect a FCBC to the Eternity:
How FCBC works?
When the batteries are completely drained, FCBC goes to charge mode and charges the batteries at higher current.
When the batteries reach a preset voltage level (typically set to 56.0 volts), the FCBC goes to float mode. In float mode
the FCBC keeps charging the battery but at lower current. FCBC monitors the voltage level of the batteries. As soon as
the battery voltage goes below preset voltage (typically set to 50.4 volts), FCBC goes from float mode to charge mode.
Change over from mains to battery and vice-versa is automatic.
The advantage of using FCBC is that since the batteries are charged with higher current initially, they get charged
sooner.
Battery Backup
Battery Backup is used when power is fed through FCBC. Battery backup depends upon the total load. The total load is
a sum of system's load and load of active stations.
Power Consumption of Eternity
Eternity Model Power Consumption (Typical)
Eternity-10S 70 Watts
Eternity-16S 100 Watts
Eternity
System
MDF
Field MDF
with
Primary
Protection
MDF
Cable
Jumper
Wire
Field
Wiring
System Engineer Zone Wireman/Electrician Zone
ETH ETH
FCBC
Battery Load
48VDC
Battery
Eternity PS48V Card
48VDC
Matrix
42 Eternity V8 System Manual
Battery backup time with Eternity ME Card 10SAC/16SAC:
Since it is not possible to provide battery backup with this card, it is recommended to use UPS.
Battery backup time with Eternity ME Card PS48VDC (with FCBC):
It depends on the 'Ah' rating of the battery connected to the FCBC. If 48V/26Ah batteries are connected to the FCBC
for the Eternity ME 10S system then backup time of 2.5 to 3 hrs can be ensured. FCBC uses constant voltage
charging method. Hence the batteries get charged faster if less power is consumed by the system when in mains
mode.
PPM4:
It is a primary Protection Module supplied by Matrix. Refer section for 'Protection and Safety' for more details.
Section 3: Protection and Safety
The Eternity ME does not work in isolation with the environment.
Power is fed to the system for functioning of the system.
Being a PBX system, trunk lines and stations are also connected to the system.
System also has other interfaces like external music, PAS, Printer interface, Computer interface. Hence there are
chances that heavy voltages can enter the system through these interfaces.
If the system is protected from these interfaces, 100% satisfactory and trouble free performance of the system is
guaranteed. Also the system should be protected from static charges that could find their way through the system
components.
Protecting the Eternity ME from heavy voltages from the mains:
The Eternity ME is designed to work with input voltages ranging between 90-265VAC. The Eternity ME Card 10SAC/
16SAC/PS48VDC is designed on switch mode design and hence such a wider range of operating voltage is supported.
However to protect the system from abrupt changes in the input voltage, use of CVT is recommended.
Protecting the system from heavy voltages on the trunk lines and the overhead stations:
The Eternity ME can get damaged if heavy voltages enter the system from trunk lines or from overhead stations.
These heavy voltages could be due to:
Heavy voltage line falling on the CO line or on the overhead stations cable.
Thunderbolts.
Short-circuit of trunk lines or overhead station cables with electric cables.
It is necessary to protect the Eternity ME from these voltages. The protection can be in the form of some protection
devices like GDTs, MOVs, Fuses, etc. Since the MDF cables are terminated on the system MDF, it is recommended that
PPM (Primary Protection Module) be installed on the system MDF.
Eternity ME supports PPM module, PPM4 consisting of four PPMs.
PPMs generally contain GDTs and fuses. GDT is an over voltage protection device. It has three terminals. It is connected
in parallel to the CO line or the overhead station cable. The third terminal is connected to a telecom earth. Whenever the
voltage between any of the two terminals, exceeds the specified voltage (generally 150V), the gas in the device starts
Warning!
This equipment supports Eternity ME Card GSM also. Hence, the Antenna used for this equipment must be installed
to provide separation distance of at least 20cm from all persons and must not be co-located with any Antenna.
Eternity ME Model CVT Ratings
Eternity-10S 500VA
Eternity-16S 1KVA
Matrix
Eternity V8 System Manual 43
conducting. This shorts either terminal with the earth terminal. Heavy voltage passes to the earth instead of entering the
system thereby protecting the system.
PPMs also have fuses. Fuse is an over current protection device. Whenever the current builds up beyond a specified
limit, (generally 100mA), the fuse opens thereby protecting the circuit ahead. PPMs work satisfactorily only if they are
properly earthed. It is recommended that PPMs should be connected to a separate telecom earth. Telecom earth is a
dedicated earth only for the PBX. The advantage of having a dedicated earth is that there is no risk of back voltage. In
heavy industries there are chances that the earth is not perfect and instead of providing protection to the system, it
damages the system.
How to connect PPM?
Protecting the system from static charges:
While installing the system or servicing the system, SE should take care to provide a path to the static charges. The
engineer, installing the system should wear an antistatic belt, which is properly earthed.
Every person carries a static charge on his body depending upon his body composition and the environment around him.
Most of the times this charge finds its way to the earth when the person touches any object, which is grounded or if he is
bare footed. Generally, during installation or troubleshooting, the person takes extra care and wears footwear to get
protection from the electric shock. Doing so, the static charge on the body does not find its way to the ground. This keeps
on accumulating the charge on his body. Now when the person touches any of the electronic cards, the static charge
finds its way through the electronic components thereby damaging the cards. Care should be taken to avoid this.
Protecting the system from heavy voltage on the communication cable:
The Eternity ME provides two communication ports to which a computer can be connected. It is recommended to run the
cable connecting both the devices through the conduit carrying telephone cables or through a separate conduit. By fluke
if an electrical wire carrying heavy voltage shorts with this cable, heavy voltages can damage the communication port.
Protecting the system from heavy voltage on the external music port:
The external music port of the Eternity ME should be protected from:
Heavy voltages on the cable connecting the system and the external music source due to shorting with any electrical
wire.
An audio signal, which is not as per the specifications, is fed to this port. Please refer External Music for
specifications.
Protecting the system from heavy voltage on the PAS port:
The PAS (Public Address System) port of the Eternity ME should be protected from:
Heavy voltages on the cable connecting the system and the amplifier/speaker due to shorting with any electrical wire.
Faulty Amplifier.
Protecting the system from heavy voltage on the printer cable:
The Eternity ME provides a printer port to which a printer can be connected. The printer port should be protected from:
Heavy voltages on the cable connecting the system and the printer due to shorting with any electrical wire. To avoid
this please check the supply to the printer. Please ensure that the printer is properly earthed. Also check the printer
cable for any short or open.
MDF PBX
CO Lines
Extensions
CO Lines
P
P
M
P
P
M
Adjacent
Building
CO
Lines
Main Building
Matrix
44 Eternity V8 System Manual
Protecting the system from Lightning:
Protecting the system from high current surges is achieved by installing primary protection device. A lightning protector is
a primary protection device which is used to prevent a dangerous surge from entering the building and damaging the
system. For equipment installed in a more exposed environment, it is necessary to protect the system with primary
protectors such as PPMs. With the development of electronic equipment, problems due to lightning surges have
increased. A dangerous surge can occur if a telephone line comes in contact with a power line. A lightning protector
should be installed on an outside (CO) line to prevent a dangerous surge from entering the building and damaging the
system. The best place for the insertion of the primary protection is the cable entry point of the building, shelter or
equipment housing.
This is not always possible but every attempt should be made to place the primary protection as close as possible to the
entry point of the cables into the building, shelter or equipment housing. Hence, the system should be installed with
lightning protectors. In addition, grounding (connection to earth ground) is very important to protect the system.
Telecom Earth (Ground)
It is mandatory to provide a separate telecom earth to the system installation. Please refer 'How to make a perfect earth'
for details on providing a perfect earth. Telecom earth is a dedicated earth for the PBX/any other telecom equipment.
Providing a separate earth to the telecom equipment eliminates the possibility of any back-voltage on the earth.
Just as it is important to protect the Eternity, it is also important to protect the personnel while installing the system. A
perfect electrical earth is vital for safety of the personnel and the system. Following explanation shows how a perfect
electrical earth can save a human life.
In the above diagram, Vc = VS *Z2 / Z1 + Z2
Where,
Z1 is the stray impedance between the electrical parts of the Gadget and the Chassis.
Z2 is the stray impedance between the Chassis and the Earth.
If Z2 = 0 then VC = 0
This formula implies that if the impedance between the Chassis and the Earth is reduced to 0 then Voltage on the
Chassis i.e VC would be Zero and hence any person touching the enclosure will not get an electric shock. Hence Z2
should be made Zero. This can be done by providing a perfect earth to the electrical equipment.
System
Protective Earth
Terminal
CO Line
Lightning
Protectors
CO Line
Telecom Earth
Electrical Parts of the Gadget
Enclosure of the Gadget
A.C. Input
P
N
Vs Vc
Z1
Z2
Earth
Matrix
Eternity V8 System Manual 45
How to make a perfect earth?
Dig a pit of area 2 feet x 2 feet x 6 feet (L x B x D).
Get a copper plate of size 1.5 feet x 1.5 feet x 0.25 feet.
Connect a copper strip of size 1-inch wide, 3 mm thick and 6 feet length at the center of the copper plate by welding
or nuts and bolts.
Insert a G.I pipe onto the copper strip till it reaches the copper plate.
Place this set up into the pit and ensures that at least 4 inch of the G.I. pipe is above the ground level.
Fill the pit 1-inch layer of charcoal and salt in 3:1 ratio at the bottom and then with the soil.
Connect a bare 14 SWG copper wire (double) on the top of the copper strip and run it to the exchange room and
connect it on the bus bar.
Bus bar is a copper strip 4-inch long with 6 nos. of screws and nuts mounted on it. It has to be fixed on the wall in the
exchange room.
The earth wire of the PPMs should be connected to this bus bar.
It is recommended to water the earth at regular intervals.
Section 4: Installing the Eternity ME
Safety Installation Instructions:
This section describes following area's for good installation:
Important Safety Instruction
Site Selection
Cabling
Power Supply
Station
Trunk Lines
Installation
Important Safety Instructions:
When using your telephone equipment, basic safety precautions should always be followed to reduce the risk of fire,
electric shock and injury to persons, including the following:
Read and understand all instructions.
Unplug this product from the wall outlet before cleaning. Do not use liquid cleaners or aerosol cleaners. Use a dry
cloth for cleaning.
Do not use this product near water, for example, near a bathtub, wash bowl, kitchen sink or laundry tub, in a wet
basement or near a swimming pool.
Do not install in direct sunlight and excessive cold or humid places.
Do not open the system in power ON condition.
Do not place this product on an unstable cart, stand or table. The product may fall, causing serious damage to the
product.
Exchange Room
BUS BAR
G.1 PIPE
4 Inch
Pit of area 2x2x6
Copper strip 1 wide x
3mm thick x 6mm long
Soil
1 layer of salt and
charcoal 1:3 ratio
Copper plate
1.5 x 1.5 x 1/4 thick
Matrix
46 Eternity V8 System Manual
Don't place this product where shocks or vibration are frequent or strong.
Don't place this product in dusty places or where oil may come in contact with the system.
Don't place this product near High-Frequency generating devices such as Sewing Machine or Electric Welder and
Microwave Oven.
Slots and openings in the cabinet and the back or bottom are provided for ventilation, to protect it from
overheating. These openings must not be blocked or covered. The openings should never be blocked by placing
the product on the bed, sofa, rug, or other similar surface.
This product should be operated with proper supply voltage. If you are not sure about supply voltage, contact
authorized dealer. It is advisable to give proper, stabilized power.
Do not allow anything to rest on the power cord. Do not locate this product where the cord will be misused by
people walking on it.
Do not overload wall outlets and extension cords as this can result in the risk of fire or electric shock.
Never push objects of any kind into this product through cabinet slots as they may touch dangerous voltage points
or short out parts that could result in a risk of fire or electric shock. Never spill liquid of any kind on the product.
To reduce the risk of electric shock, do not disassemble this product, but take it to a qualified serviceman when
some service or repair work is required. Opening or removing covers may expose you to dangerous voltages or
other risks. Incorrect reassembly can cause electric shock when the appliance is subsequently used.
Unplug this product from the wall outlet and refer servicing to qualified service personnel under the following
conditions:
When the power supply cord or plug is damaged or frayed.
If liquid has been spilled into the product.
If the product has been exposed to rain or water.
If the product does not operate normally by following the operating instructions. Adjust only those controls, which
are covered by the operating instructions because improper adjustment of other controls may result in damage
and will often require extensive work by a qualified technician to restore the product to normal operation.
If the product has been dropped or the cabinet has been damaged.
If the product exhibits a distinct change in performance.
Avoid using a telephone (other than a cordless type) during an electrical storm. There may be a risk of electric
shock from lightning.
Do not use the telephone to report a gas leak in the vicinity of the leak.
Make sure that you install primary protection device at entry point for all CO trunks and all overhead stations. If not
installed, heavy voltage on CO trunks/overhead stations can damage the product. Please note that warranty does
not cover such damages.
This product is equipped with a plug having a third (ground) pin, which fits only into a grounding-type outlet. This is
a safety feature. If you are unable to insert the plug into the outlet, ask an electrician to replace the obsolete outlet.
Do not defeat the purpose of the grounding type plug.
Site Selection
The Eternity ME should always be installed at a place equidistant from all the extensions. This reduces the cabling
cost and also makes cabling network less complicated.
It should preferably be installed at 3.5 feet height (approx.) in airy, dust free and moisture free place. An installation at
this height makes preventive or corrective maintenance task easy.
It is advisable that the system should be installed away from any source of electromagnetic noise such as any radio
equipment, heavy transformers, faulty electric chokes of tube-lights, any device having a faulty coil etc. This will
reduce any problem arising due to electromagnetic effect.
Cabling
Select a good quality telephone cable (with 0.5 mm conductor diameter) for internal cabling as well as for over-head
cabling.
Ensure separate cable conduits for both electrical and telephone cables.
Use separate MDF for system wiring and field wiring as shown for topic 'MDF'.
Take care that cables are not left open on the ground where they may get damaged due to entanglement in the foot or
due to pressure from other heavy objects.
Avoid long length cables and at the same time keep number of joints to a minimum i.e. strike a balance between the
two. This will help you to find out a cable fault easily.
Eternity ME Power Supply
The Eternity ME operates either on:
90-265VAC, 47-63Hz supply
48V (Range: 43V-56V) DC supply through Eternity ME Card PS48VDC.
Matrix
Eternity V8 System Manual 47
Power Supply for the system must be separate from other heavy electrical loads like Air-Conditioners, Heaters,
Welding Machines, Electrical Motors, Heavy Transformers, Tube Lights having faulty Chokes, Electric Bell and other
such noise generating equipment.
Please ensure that the system is properly earthed.
Caution!
Always switch OFF Mains switch of the system and remove power cable from mains plug, to avoid risk of electric
shock. All servicing to be undertaken only by qualified service personnel. There are no user serviceable parts
inside the unit.
3.6V Battery:
Eternity ME Card Switch contains 3.6V DC battery marked as "B1" on. Don't try to replace this battery at customer
end.
Always prefer to contact authorized dealer of Matrix.
Fuse Ratings:
Fuse is provided in inlet AC socket provided on Eternity ME Card 10SAC/16SAC. Fuse rating is:
Slow Blow type glass fuse of 6 Amp.
Size: 5 x 20 mm
Always use the IEC approved fuses for better quality, ask authorized Matrix dealer for further help.
Stations
Proprietary Digital Key Phones (DKP) called Eon45/Eon42/Eon48 as well as standard telephones instruments like Rotary
phone, Pulse/tone switchable push-button phone, Feature phone or a Cordless phone can be connected to the Eternity.
Hence, it is not necessary to buy all new phones.
Trunk Lines
Analog trunk lines can be connected to the system. Please connect protection device to these trunk lines. Also be sure to
earth the Protection device.
Installation
Unpack the box. Get satisfied with the contents and the condition of all the parts.
Configure the system as per the required software version of Eternity ME Card Master and Eternity ME Card Switch.
Hang the system at the selected site. Please refer to the Mechanical Dimensions for Eternity Model 10S and 16S
given at Section 1: Overview of Eternity ME. These would help you while making the holes on the wall for hanging the
system.
Check the voltage at the power point from where the supply is to be given to the system. It should be as per the
specifications. Earth the system properly.
Connect only one SLT MDF cable to the system. Connect two conventional telephone instruments to the other end of
the MDF cable directly and two DKP, for initial testing of the system.
If GSM card is used, insert at least one working SIM card.
Connect all the required trunk lines: CO-Line, BRI Line, T1E1PRI Line, and SIP IP Line from the Service Providers.
Section 5: Getting Started Eternity
After strictly following the safety instructions and installing the system as instructed, the system is now ready to be
switched ON. To check the correctness of installation, configuration and connection it is always advisable to execute the
basic features like Making a Call (both internal and external), Receiving a call, etc. before proceeding with the complex
programming as per requirement.
Switching ON the System
Switch 'ON' the system. The system will take about 1-2 minutes to reset. Observe the reset cycle on the front panel of
system.
Matrix
48 Eternity V8 System Manual
Reset Cycle
During the Reset Cycle the ROM and RAM of every card are checked. The faulty condition or failure is indicated by the
LED's.
LED Indication for Mobile Ports (At power ON):
All LED will glow 1 Sec. Red-1 Sec. OFF-1 Sec. Green-1 SEC Off-1 Sec. Orange-1 Sec. OFF till the Eternity gets reset
completely.
During Stand-by state:
All LED will glow 1 Sec. Orange-1 Sec. Green, repeatedly.
During normal functioning:
Cards/Time
Eternity ME
Card Power
Eternity ME
Card Master
Eternity ME
Card Switch
Eternity ME
Card E&M4
Eternity ME
Card T1E1PRI
At Power ON
LEDs L1 glow
orange
At power ON not
response
LED L1 glow
Orange
LED L1 glow
Orange
LED L1 glow
Orange
After 5-6 sec. for
other cards. After
30 sec. only for
VMS.
LED L1 glows
green 500ms, red
500ms and
orange 500ms.
LED L1-L4 blink
green five times
(500ms ON,
500ms OFF)
LED L1 glows
Green 500ms,
Red 500ms and
Orange 500ms.
LED L1 glows
Green 500ms,
Red 500ms and
Orange 500ms.
LED L1 glows
Green 500ms,
Red 500ms and
Orange 500ms.
Normal Condition
LED L1 blinks red
with 1 sec ON, 1
sec OFF.
LED L1 is
programmable. By
default it assign to
the first port.
LED L1 is
programmable. By
default it assign to
the first port.
LED L1 is
programmable. By
default it assign to
the first port.
Stand by Mode
Cards/Time
Eternity ME
Card BRI
Eternity ME
Card VMS
Eternity ME
Card SLT
Eternity ME
Card TRK+SLT
Eternity ME
Card DKP+SLT
At Power ON
LEDs L1-L4 glow
red
After 5-6 sec. L1-
L3 glow Orange
LEDs L1-L2 glow
Orange
LEDs L1-L4 glow
Orange
LEDs L1-L4 glow
Orange
After 5-6 sec. for
other cards. After
30 sec. only for
VMS.
LEDs L1-L4 glow
continuously red
LED L1-L3 glow
Orange
LEDs L1-L2 glow
Green 500ms,
Red 500ms and
Orange 500ms.
LEDs L1-L4 glow
Green 500ms,
Red 500ms and
Orange 500ms.
LEDs L1 glow
Green 500ms,
Red 500ms and
Orange 500ms.
Normal Condition
LEDs L1-L4 glow
continuously red
LED L1 blinks
Green with 1 sec
OFF, 1 sec ON.
Depends upon the
situation
Stand by Mode
LED L1 blinks red
with 1 sec. OFF, 1
sec. ON.
LED L1 blinks red
with 1 sec. OFF, 1
sec. ON.
Master L4 blinks Green 200 ms ON 200ms OFF L4 blinks Red 200ms ON 200ms OFF
Switch L1 blinks Green 200 ms ON 200ms OFF L1 blinks Red 250ms ON 200ms OFF
SLT L1 blinks Green 200 ms ON 200ms OFF L1 blinks Red 200ms ON 200ms OFF
TRK + SLT L1 blinks Green 200 ms ON 200ms OFF L1 blinks Red 200ms ON 200ms OFF
E&M L1 blinks Green 200 ms ON 200ms OFF L1 blinks Red 200ms ON 200ms OFF
VMS L1 blinks Green 200 ms ON 200ms OFF L1 blinks Red 200ms ON 200ms OFF
BRI L1 blinks Green 200 ms ON 200ms OFF L1 blinks Red 200ms ON 200ms OFF
T1E1PRI L1 blinks Green 200 ms ON 200ms OFF L1 blinks Red 200ms ON 200ms OFF
Event Colour Cadence in msec
Port Disable -- LED Off
Port Idle -- LED Off
Port Active (All states other than
Ring and Speech)
Red Continuous ON
Ring Event Green 400ms ON-200ms OFF-400ms ON-2000ms OFF
Matrix
Eternity V8 System Manual 49
LED Indication for Eternity Me Card VoIP:
The card supports 'VoIP Ethernet Port' for connecting IP from Service Provider. Eternity ME Card VoIP supports 2 LEDs:
LED 1 = Indicates the Eternity ME Card VoIP's Status.
LED 2 = Indicate the status of the SIP Trunk to which this LED is assigned.
Eternity Me Card VoIP LED1 Indication:
Eternity ME Card VoIP LED2 Indication:
LED Indication for Eternity ME Card Magneto:
LED Indications in other events:
Port Status Indication for Alarm Conditions (T1E1PRI):
Eternity ME Card T1E1PRI contains 2 physical ports and 4 LED's. For Red, Yellow and Blue alarm conditions, refer
Port1 and Port2 status in chapter E1 Maintenance and T1 Maintenance.
Speech Green Continuous ON
GSM Initialisation Orange
200ms ON-200ms OFF-200ms ON-200ms OFF-200ms ON-200ms
OFF-200ms ON-200ms OFF-200ms ON-1200ms OFF
PUK Required Orange
200ms ON-200ms OFF-200ms ON-200ms OFF-200ms ON-200ms
OFF-200ms ON-1600ms OFF
SIM PIN Faulty Orange
200ms ON-200ms OFF-200ms ON-200ms OFF-200ms ON-2000ms
OFF
SIM Absent Orange 200ms ON-200ms OFF-200ms ON-2400ms OFF
Network Link Down (Absence of
GSM Network)
Orange 200ms ON-2800ms OFF
Card Status LED Cadence
Booting Up Green Continuous
Booting in progress Green 200ms ON-200ms OFF 200ms ON-200ms OFF
Booting Successful Green 1 Sec ON-1 Sec OFF
VoIP program down load fail Red Continuous ON
Booting Failure-PPPoE authentication Fail Red 200ms ON-1 Sec OFF
Booting Failure-IP Address invalid Red 200ms ON-200ms OFF 200ms ON-1 Sec. OFF
SIP Trunk Status LED Cadence
SIP Trunk-Disabled Red Continuous ON
Registration Fail-Authentication Password invalid Red 200ms ON-1 Sec. OFF (Continuous)
Registration Fail-Configuration Parameter invalid Red 200ms ON-200ms OFF 200ms ON-1 Sec. OFF (Continuous)
Registration In Progress Green 200ms ON-1 Sec. OFF (Continuous)
Registration Successful Green Continuous ON
Event Cadence
At Power ON LED L1 to L8 glow 1sec Red-1sec OFF-1sec Green-1sec OFF-1sec Orange-1sec OFF.
On completion of initialization LED L1 to L8 glow Orange for 1sec- Green for 1sec.
RAM Failure LED L1 glow Green for 200 msec ON - 200 msec OFF (Repeatedly)
ROM Failure LED L1 glow Red for 200 msec ON - 200 msec OFF (Repeatedly)
Event Colour Cadence
Port Disable -- LED OFF
Port Idle -- LED OFF
Ring (IC/OG) RED Continuous 'ON' at 'Ring Start' event (modulated with 25Hz) 'OFF' at 'Ring Stop' event
OFF-Hook (Relay ON) GREEN Continuous ON
Event Colour Cadence in msec
Matrix
50 Eternity V8 System Manual
Configuring the Eternity ME Card VoIP
Connect the VoIP Ethernet Port of the card to the LAN Switch/Hub/Router/Broadband modem.
Change IP address of the VoIP port according to the LAN addressing scheme.
If LAN uses static addresses, the SE will take the static address of the VoIP port from the LAN administrator and
program it as the IP address for the VoIP port of system.
If LAN uses DHCP server, then DHCP server is to be enabled for the VoIP port so that the DHCP server in the LAN
will assign an IP address dynamically to VoIP port of the system whenever system is restarted. This address can be
known from the Web page of the VoIP port.
You can reset the card without switching OFF and ON by pressing the 'Reset' (on the card) button for 3 seconds
continuously to restart the Eternity ME Card VoIP. If DHCP server is used in the LAN, the IP address will be re-
assigned to the VoIP port connected to the LAN.
VoIP Call can be initiated after suitable programming of the SIP Trunk number in the Routing Group.
SIM PIN
Before installing the SIM card and switching ON the system, consider following points:
Whenever the SIM PIN request is received from the module, the system will send the SIM PIN stored in the
configuration to the module. Hence it is necessary that the SIM PIN in the SIM card and in the system is same.
If required the parameters, 'SIM PIN' and 'SIM PIN at Power On flag' can be changed in the SIM card by removing the
SIM card from the system, inserting it into the mobile handset and changing it from mobile handset.
User should enable the 'SIM PIN at power ON' parameter in the SIM card. To protect the SIM card that is inserted in
the system from being misused.
Now, if SE tries to change the SIM PIN, on receipt of command for SIM PIN change, the system will first send the
command to the module. If the 'SIM PIN at Power On flag' is enabled in the SIM card, the change would be effective.
If 'SIM PIN at Power On flag' is disabled in the SIM card, the change would not be effective. User can know this
change in the SIM PIN by downloading the SIM PIN page of 'Jeeves'.
Hence, the 'SIM PIN at Power On flag' in the SIM card must be enabled. Otherwise, SIM PIN will not be changed
using the command for 'Changing SIM PIN'.
Important Points:
Ensure that the SIM PIN in the SIM card and in the system is same. By default, SIM PIN for all the ports of the system
is 1234.
To protect the SIM card that is inserted in the system from being misused, the customer is recommended to enable
'SIM PIN at power ON' parameter in the SIM card.
While changing SIM PIN number using the command, ensure that the 'SIM PIN at Power ON' parameter in the SIM
card is enabled. Else, SIM PIN will not be changed.
SIM PIN number does not get change when the user gives command to default the system parameters.
RUIM
SIM is referred as RUIM in CDMA. Before installing the RUIM in CDMA port, ensure that 'PIN protection' is disabled in
RUIM. Else the CDMA module may not get initialized!
Basic Steps for Configuration
Connect all interfaces which are required for optimum application of the CO line, BRI Trunk, T1E1PRI line, IP line,
SIM Cards and Antenna.
PLEASE NOTE!
The default IP Address of VoIP Port is 192.168.001.116.
PLEASE NOTE!
Use LAN IP information from your LAN Administrator or ISP
IP Address
IP Mask (must)
Gateway
DNS IP Address (must)
DNS Domain Name
Matrix
Eternity V8 System Manual 51
Switch ON the 'ON-OFF' switch on Eternity ME Card 10SAC/16SAC and wait for LED; to attain normal state.
You can now call any number from the Analog Trunk, BRI Port, T1E1PRI Port, Mobile or SIP Trunk, using phone at
SLT port.
You can use the system features by programming through Web Jeeves.
Start Internet Explorer (IE6), type in the default IP Address 192.168.001.101 (default IP Address of Eternity ME Card
Master Ethernet Port) in the address field.
Enter the password '1234' to Log In the system. You will get 'Welcome' page with all programmable features on the
left hand side menu list.
For enjoying benefits of many useful features of the system, click on the required feature name.
If any feature, need to be subscribed from the GSM service provider, contact your service provider, before
programming the feature. For example, 'Emergency Number Dialing' is enabled by default, from the service provider.
If you need to reprogram the system you can get back to factory defaults, Click on 'Default Eternity'.
During this default condition, your system is ready to call any number from DKP/SLT.
If you need to reload the program, use the feature 'System Software-Upload/Download', using FTP.
Eternity ME Card T1E1PRI software can be upgraded, through the PC, connecting at COM port of the Eternity ME
Card T1E1PRI.
You can get various reports like System Activity Log, System Fault Log by connecting PC to the COM port of the
Eternity ME Card Master.
Note that default IP Address of Eternity ME Card VoIP is 192.168.001.116 and Default IP Address of Eternity ME
Card VMS is 192.168.001.131.
Refer Safety warning for mounting Antenna in section 'Protection and Safety'.
Testing the installation
In the power ON mode the system is ready for use with predefined default values for variable like extension's flexible
number, timers and other programmable parameters.
Test any one extension for dial tone, ring back tone, speech and ring one by one.
Test functioning of the trunk by dialing outside number from one of the extensions and checking the trunk tones and
speech. Ring on the trunk can be tested by asking your friends to dial your number.
How to make External Call?
From SLT/DKP Handset
Lift the handset.
Dial Trunk Access Code.
Dial the External Telephone Number.
For VoIP call, select the SIP trunk and then dial SIP ID or IP Address.
OG calls can also be made by dialing a number which will be dialed out by the system as per the routing group
assigned to the station.
Important Points:
The stations having access to trunk will only be able to make external calls.
The stations having internal call feature allowed in Class of Service will only be able to make internal calls.
The system accepts the command immediately and works accordingly but it takes approximately 2 minutes to save a
command. Hence it is advisable not to turn OFF the system for 2 to 3 minutes after entering the last command.
=X=X=
ABSOLUTELY NEEDED!
Ensure network availability.
Make sure that your GSM module is registered with GSM network.
Make sure that you have connected a subscribed T1E1PRI line and IP line from
the Service Provider.
Matrix
52 Eternity V8 System Manual
Introducing the Eternity GE
Referring Commands: For information about the 4-digit command used in the system, refer first the command list
given in the Appendix section and then get the details in the corresponding chapter.
The Eternity GE is a versatile and flexible digital switch. A variety of external equipment can be interfaced with
Eternity GE. This chapter consists of following sections:
Section 1: Overview of Eternity GE
Section 2: Configuring the Eternity GE
Section 3: Protection and Safety
Section 4: Installing the Eternity GE
Section 5: Getting Started Eternity GE
Before programming any feature/parameters refer chapter Class of Service (COS) and allow it, if required.
Section 1: Overview of Eternity GE
Matrix Eternity GE supports three basic models:
Eternity GE-3S
Eternity GE-6S
Eternity GE-12S
Matrix Eternity GE supports different variants as mentioned below:
Eternity GE3SAC (with AC power supply)
Eternity GE3SDC (with DC power supply)
Eternity GE6SAC (with AC power supply)
Eternity GE6SDC (with DC power supply)
Eternity GE12SAC(with AC power supply
Eternity GE12SDC (with DC power supply)
Eternity GE 3S, 6S and 12S are available in the following variants based on a specific CPLD firmware installed:
Eternity GE-S
Eternity GE-P
Eternity GE-PLCC
Eternity GE-S
Eternity GE-S variant will support all the features of the Eternity except following:
Auto Attendant
Voice messages will be restricted.
i.e. if Voice message is assigned in the DID, the voice message will not be played and instead the tones will be given
as if there is no VM assigned for the DID feature.
Same is true for all the features using VM.
Conference-Multi Party and Dial-In.
Closed User Group.
Call Costing: Call cost will be stored as 00. I.e. call cost calculation will be restricted.
PMS
DIP
DOP
All features related to the PLCC
CLI Based Routing
ALERT!
At every power up of the system or re-registration of the GSM/CDMA modules with the GSM/CDMA network, the
GSM/CDMA modules take approx. 3 minutes to get registered with the network.
Hence, during this period it is possible that the Outgoing calls made from the system may get routed through other
ports of the system (for e.g. FXO, BRI, PRI, etc.) if available in the system.
However, once the GSM/CDMA modules (ports) get registered with the Network, the calls are routed through GSM/
CDMA ports as configured by the Administrator.
Matrix
Eternity V8 System Manual 53
Eternity GE P
Eternity GE-P variant will support all the features of the Eternity except features related to the PLCC application.
Eternity GE PLCC
Eternity GE-PLCC variant will support all the features of the Eternity ME. The system is built around a digital CMOS
switch. The system is a digital PBX with capacity up to 192 user ports.
The system uses a digital switch and has a dedicated DTMF circuit for each port. This makes system a 100% non-
blocking switch both speech wise and dial wise i.e. all the ports can talk at the same time as well as dial at the same time.
The Eternity GE 12S has twelve universal slots whereas Eternity GE 6S has six universal slots. Eternity GE supports
advanced state of art technology by supporting, Eternity GE Card GSM and Eternity GE Card VoIP. Other cards for
interfacing ISDN and PSTN Network are also supported. Following diagrams shows the architecture of Eternity GE.
In Eternity GE model, the extreme left side two slots are reserved for the Eternity GE Card 3SAC/6SAC/12SAC and
Eternity GE Card Master. Eternity GE supports the Eternity GE Card Magneto for connecting Magneto Phones. Magneto
Phone is widely used in field by military personnel's.
Eternity GE 3S
The Eternity GE has following characteristics:
1. Total Ports = 64
2. User Ports = 60
3. Special Slots = 2
4. Universal Slots = 3
5. Maximum SLT = 60
6. Maximum DKP = 48
7. Maximum Analog Trunks = 48
8. Maximum E&M = 12
9. Maximum DSS64 per DKP Console = 2
10.Maximum BRI trunks = 12
11.Maximum DS1 Trunks = 3
12.Maximum Mobile trunks = 12
13.Maximum SIP Trunks = 32
14.Maximum Magneto Trunks = 12
Power Supply Card
SLOT#06
CPU Card
6

U
n
i
v
e
r
s
a
l

S
l
o
t
s
SLOT#01
CPU Card
SLOT#01
SLOT#12
3

U
n
i
v
e
r
s
a
l

S
l
o
t
s
Power Supply Card
SLOT#03
CPU Card
SLOT#01
SLOT#02
Matrix
54 Eternity V8 System Manual
For more information on the interfaces and the ports to which these interfaces can be connected please refer Figure1 in
topic Introducing the Eternity ME.
Eternity GE 6S
The Eternity GE has following characteristics:
1. Total Ports = 128
2. User Ports = 120
3. Special Slots = 2
4. Universal Slots = 6
5. Maximum SLT = 120
6. Maximum DKP = 96
7. Maximum Analog Trunks = 96
8. Maximum E&M = 24
9. Maximum DSS64 per DKP Console = 2
10.Maximum BRI trunks = 24
11.Maximum DS1 Trunks = 6
12.Maximum Mobile trunks = 24
13.Maximum SIP Trunks = 32
14.Maximum Magneto Trunks = 24
For more information on the interfaces and the ports to which these interfaces can be connected please refer Figure1 in
topic Introducing the Eternity ME.
Eternity GE 12S
The Eternity GE has following characteristics:
1. Total Ports = 256
2. User Ports = 240
3. Special Slots = 2
4. Universal Slots = 12
5. Maximum SLT = 240
6. Maximum DKP = 128
7. Maximum Analog Trunks = 128
8. Maximum E&M = 48
9. Maximum DSS64 per DKP Console = 2
10.Maximum BRI trunks = 32
11.Maximum DS1 Trunks = 2
12.Maximum Mobile trunks = 32
13.Maximum SIP Trunks = 32
14.Maximum Magneto Trunks = 48
Matrix
Eternity V8 System Manual 55
For more information on the interfaces and the ports to which these interfaces can be connected please refer Figure1 in
topic Introducing the Eternity ME.
Mechanical Dimension for Eternity GE 3S:
Matrix
56 Eternity V8 System Manual
Mechanical dimension for Eternity GE 6S:

260mm (10.24)
1
6
3
m
m

(
6
.
4
2

)
1
4
3
m
m

(
5
.
6
3

)
1
4
3
m
m

(
5
.
6
3

)
1
6
3
m
m

(
6
.
4
2

)
260mm (10.24)
20mm (0.79)
260mm (10.24)
2
5
4
m
m

(
1
0
.
0

)
2
4
0
m
m

(
9
.
4
5

)
260mm (10.24)
2
5
4
m
m

(
1
0
.
0

)
2
2
4
m
m

(
8
.
8
2

)
254mm (10.0)
30mm
(1.18)
1
6
3
m
m

(
6
.
4
2

)
1
4
3
m
m

(
5
.
6
3

)
Matrix
Eternity V8 System Manual 57
Mechanical dimension for Eternity GE 12S:
Section 2: Configuring the Eternity GE
All the models have similar hardware and software architecture with only difference in number of universal slots and
hence the total number of user ports available. Please note that Eternity GE 6S/12S includes cabinet with Mother Board
and Eternity GE Card Master. Other cards can be used as per the requirement. Eternity GE doesn't support 'Hot Swap'
and Redundancy features. It has power fail transfer feature in built to all the Eternity GE Card TWT+SLT.
Note:
Refer command '2187' in chapter System Parameters to restart the card, installed in the Universal Slot of the Eternity
ME.
The Eternity GE supports following types of cards:
1. Eternity GE Card Power Supply
The Eternity GE offers two types of Eternity GE Card Power Supply viz.
Eternity GE Card 3SAC/6SAC/12SAC: 90-265V, 47-63Hz Mains as Input AC voltage Power Supply.
Eternity GE Card 3SDC/6SDC/12SDC: PS48VDC as Input DC voltage power supply fed from external source.
The card is located in the left most slot of the Eternity GE. This slot has special connectors and hence other universal
cards cannot be inserted in the system.
The Eternity GE Card 3SAC/6SAC/12SAC are designed on the SMPS scheme. Since this card does not have
provision for battery backup, it is recommended to connect UPS to provide battery backup during power failure.
This card has mains ON/OFF Switch by which the power fed to the card can be turned ON or OFF.
412 mm (16.22)
1
6
3

m
m

(
6
.
4
2

)
1
4
3

m
m

(
5
.
6
3

)
412 mm (16.22)
2
4
0

m
m

(
9
.
4
5

)
2
5
4

m
m

(
1
0
.
0
0

)
1
6
3

m
m

(
6
.
4
2

)
30 mm
(1.18)
1
4
3

m
m

(
5
.
6
3

)
254 mm (10.00)
2
5
4

m
m

(
1
0
.
0
0

)
412 mm (16.22)
2
2
4

m
m

(
8
.
8
2

)
412 mm (16.22)
1
6
3

m
m

(
6
.
4
2

)
1
4
3

m
m

(
5
.
6
3

)
20 mm (0.79)
Matrix
58 Eternity V8 System Manual
For Eternity GE Card PS48VDC is used, 48VDC is fed from external source or FCBC (Float Cum Boost Charger).
FCBC works on input AC voltage of 230VAC 10% @ 50Hz.
Both cards provide DC output voltages as: +3.5V, +5.0V, -27V and -85V.
2. Eternity GE Card CPU
The Eternity GE Card CPU occupies a fixed slot in the Eternity GE system. It is not used in normal Matrix Eternity ME
system. It is the second card from left hand side. This slot has unique arrangement of connectors and hence other
universal cards cannot be inserted in the system. This card is designed to take care of all functions of the Eternity ME
Card Master and Eternity ME Card Switch of the normal Eternity ME.
The Eternity GE Card CPU manages the complete system. It performs all higher level functions. It controls all the
slave cards like Eternity GE Card SLT, Eternity GE Card DKP, Eternity GE Card TWT+SLT, Eternity GE Card
DKP+SLT, Eternity GE Card E&M, Eternity GE Card BRI, Eternity GE Card VMS, Eternity GE Card T1E1PRI, Eternity
GE Card GSM, Eternity GE Card VoIP, etc. All the configuration and programming information is stored on this card.
The Eternity GE Card CPU has two dual colour LEDs, a Communication Port, a Digital Input Port (DIP), a Digital
Output Port (DOP), an Analog Input Port (AIP), An Analog Output Port (AOP), Ethernet Port and USB Port on the
front panel.
The two dual colour LEDs on the Eternity GE Card CPU are used to indicate:
The health of this card (during reset cycle), (L2).
The health of the system (during normal working of the system), (L1).
These two LEDs are of dual colour Green and Red. After power ON, when the system becomes stable LED glows
Green for 1 second ON and OFF.
Following are the Jumper position and their function for Eternity GE Card CPU of Eternity GE:
Communication Port:
The Eternity GE Card CPU supports one asynchronous, serial, full duplex RS232C communication port. This port is
known as COM1. This communication port is used while using following features:
Programming using computer
PMS Interface
SMDR-Posting Interface
Downloading SMDR Reports
Downloading System Activity, System Fault Log, etc.
The communication port is on the front panel of the Eternity GE Card CPU DB-9 connector. Please note that the Eternity
GE assumes role of a Data Terminal Equipment (DTE), hence a crossed cable is required to connect a computer with the
Eternity GE.
Ethernet Port
The Ethernet Port is used to connect Eternity to the Ethernet port of the Computer using RJ45 cable provided with the
system.
SE can get Backup-System Configuration, Backup-SMDR and Backup-System Software using Jeeves.
All the important parameters can be configured using web pages of the Jeeves. Refer chapter Jeeves.
Digital Input Port (DIP)
The Eternity GE supports a Digital Input Port on the Eternity GE Card CPU to which a panic switch or a sensor can be
connected.
The device connected to this port should comply with its technical specifications. Refer chapter Digital Input Port (DIP) for
more details.
Jumper Number Position Function
J7
AB (default)
BC
External Boot.
Internal Boot.
J12
AB
BC (default)
Reset SE Password.
Dont reset SE password.
J13
AB (default)
BC
Embedded ICE.
JTAG Mode.
J13
AB (default)
BC
Embedded ICE.
JTAG Mode.
Matrix
Eternity V8 System Manual 59
Digital Output Port (DOP)
The Eternity GE supports a Digital Output Port on the Eternity GE Card CPU to which a hooter, buzzer, etc. can be
connected. The device connected to this port should comply with its technical specifications. Refer chapter Digital Output
Port (DOP) for more details.
Analog Input Port (AIP)
The Eternity GE supports an external music port called Analog Input Port (AIP). This port can be used to connect an
external music source. The music from an external music source can be used as a hold on music. The system can be
programmed to give this external music as hold on music to internal users, external callers or both. For this, J5 jumper
should be in 'AB' position. Refer chapter Music on Hold (MOH) for more details.
Analog Output Port (AOP)
The Eternity GE also supports an Analog Output Port. This port outputs un-amplified, isolated, analog speech signal,
which can be amplified by an external amplifier. Follow following steps to connect paging system to the Eternity GE:
Connect good quality external amplifiers and matching speakers to the external music port. A combination of 10W
amplifier and a 4W speaker can be used. Other combinations can also be used as per the requirement.
Keep the distance between the system and the amplifier at minimum to reduce noise pickup.
Use shielded cable for connecting the system with the amplifier and amplifier with the speaker.
USB Port
The USB port is provided for future use.
3. Eternity GE Card SLT
The Eternity GE supports two configurations with Eternity GE Card SLT viz.
Eternity GE Card SLT8
Eternity GE Card SLT16
The configuration is decided by SMD (Surface Mount Device) mini jumper, which is factory set. The Eternity GE Card
SLT performs various functions like Subscriber's status monitoring, Ring Generation, Speech Interface, etc. The Eternity
GE Card SLT8 is an eight-port, 2-wire analog station (SLT) card and Eternity GE Card SLT16 is a sixteen-port, 2-wire
analog station (SLT) card.
The Eternity GE Card SLT has two dual colour LEDs on the front panel. This LED is used to indicate:
The health of this card (during reset cycle).
Status of one of the station ports (during normal working of the system). During normal working of the system, this
LED is assigned to one of the station ports using a command from SE mode.
The Eternity GE Card SLT8 has a MDF connector to which 8 ports are connected. The Eternity GE Card SLT16 has a
MDF connector to which 16 SLT ports can be connected. The Eternity GE Card SLT8 and Eternity GE Card SLT16 come
with 3-meters long MDF cable (36 Way-20 Pair).
However, the connection details for each of these cards are given below:
SLT01 (Pin 01-19, Blue-White)
SLT02 (Pin 02-20, Orange-White)
SLT03 (Pin 03-21, Green-White)
SLT04 (Pin 04-22, Brown-White)
SLT05 (Pin 05-23, Grey-White)
SLT06 (Pin 06-24, Blue-Red)
SLT07 (Pin 07-25, Orange-Red)
SLT08 (Pin 08-26, Green-Red)
SLT09 (Pin 09-27, Brown-Red)
(Pin 18-36, Green-Yellow)
(Pin 17-35, Orange-Yellow)
SLT16 (Pin 16-34, Blue-Yellow)
SLT15 (Pin 15-33, Grey-Black)
SLT14 (Pin 14-32, Brown-Black)
SLT13 (Pin 13-31, Green-Black)
SLT12 (Pin 12-30, Orange-Black)
SLT11 (Pin 11-29, Blue-Black)
SLT10 (Pin 10-28, Grey-Red)
SLT 8, SLT 16
Card
H/w support V1R4 and onwards
Matrix
60 Eternity V8 System Manual
4. Eternity GE Card TWT
The Eternity GE supports following configurations with Eternity GE Card TWT viz.
Eternity GE Card TWT8
The Eternity GE Card TWT8 card has RJ45 ports.

5. Eternity GE Card TWT+SLT
The Eternity GE supports two configurations with Eternity GE Card TWT+SLT viz.
Eternity GE Card TWT2+SLT14
Eternity GE Card TWT4+SLT4
The configuration is decided by SMD jumper, which is factory set. These TWT and Eternity GE Card TWT+SLT can be
used with any of the Eternity GE models. Power Fail Transfer circuit is used for following purpose:
To get the trunk dial tone on SLT stations directly, during power down of the Eternity.
All incoming calls land on the power down SLT station. But all the busy trunks will not be transferred immediately to
avoid disconnection of active calls. When all the trunks get freed after some time, the system engineer can switch
OFF the system.
The Eternity GE Card TWT2+SLT14 is a two trunk port and 14 SLT port card, whereas the Eternity GE Card TWT4+SLT4
is a four trunk port and 4 SLT port card. The analog trunk lines can be connected to the trunk ports whereas conventional
telephone instruments can be connected to the SLT ports. The connection details for this card are given below:
Matrix
Eternity V8 System Manual 61
The SLT port performs various functions like Subscriber's status monitoring, Ring Generation, Speech Interface, etc.
whereas the TWT port performs various functions like hook operation, ring sense, polarity reversal sense, isolation, etc.
The Eternity GE Card TWT+SLT has two dual colour LEDs on the front panel. This LED is used to indicate:
The health of this card (during reset cycle).
Status of one of the station ports (during normal working). During normal working of the system, this LED is assigned
to one of the station ports using a command from SE mode.
The Eternity GE Card TWT4+SLT4 has one connector to which 4 trunk ports and 4 SLT ports are connected. The Eternity
GE Card TWT2+SLT14 has one MDF connector. 2 trunk ports and 14 SLT ports are located on the MDF connector.
Eternity GE Card TWT4+SLT4 is accompanied with one MDF cable (24 way-10 pair), 3 meters long wheras the Eternity
GE Card TWT12+SLT14 is accompanied with one MDF cable (36 way-20 pair), 3 meters long.
6. Eternity GE Card DKP
The Eternity GE supports two configurations with Eternity GE Card DKP viz.
Eternity GE Card DKP4
Eternity GE Card DKP8
The Eternity GE Card DKP can be used with any of the Eternity GE models. The configurations are decided by SMD
jumper, which is factory set.
The Eternity GE Card DKP4 is a four port, 2 wire digital station card; the Eternity GE Card DKP8 is an eight port card.
The proprietary digital interface viz. Eon45, Eon42, EonSoft, DSS64 can be connected to the trunk ports, whereas
conventional telephone instruments can be connected to the SLT ports. The connection details for each of these cards
are given below:
The Eternity GE Card DKP has two dual colour LEDs on the front panel. This LED is used to indicate:
The health of this card (during reset cycle).
Status of one of the station ports (during normal working). During normal working of the system, this LED should be
assigned to one of the station ports using a command from SE Mode.
The Eternity GE Card DKP4 has a MDF connector to which 4 ports are connected. The Eternity GE Card DKP8 has a
MDF connector to which 8 DKP ports can be connected. The Eternity GE Card DKP4 and Eternity GE Card DKP8 is
supplied with a 3-meters long MDF cable (24 Way-10 Pair).
7. Eternity GE Card DKP+SLT
The Eternity GE supports two configurations with Eternity GE Card DKP+SLT viz.
Eternity GE Card DKP2+SLT6
Eternity GE Card DKP4+SLT12
L
1
L
2
DKP1 (01-13, Blue-White)
DKP2 (02-14, Orange-White)
DKP3 (03-15, Green-White)
DKP4 (04-16, Brown-White)
DKP5 (05-17, Gray-White)
DKP7 (07-19, Orange-Red)
DKP8 (08-20, Green-Red)
NC
NC
NC
NC
DKP6 (06-18, Blue-Red) DKP4, DKP8
Card
H/w support V1R2 and onwards
Matrix
62 Eternity V8 System Manual
These Eternity GE Card DKP+SLT can be used with any of the Eternity GE models. The configurations are decided by
SMD jumper which is factory set. The Eternity GE Card DKP2+SLT6 is a 2 trunk port and 6 SLT port card, whereas
Eternity GE Card DKP4+SLT12 is a four trunk port and 12 SLT port card.
The proprietary digital interface viz. Eon45, Eon42, EonSoft, DSS64 can be connected to the trunk ports whereas
conventional telephone instruments can be connected to the SLT ports.
The SLT port performs various functions like subscriber's Status Monitoring, Ring Generation, Speech Interface, etc.
whereas the DKP port performs various functions like sending commands to the Eon45/Eon42/EonSoft and receiving
commands from Eon45/Eon42/EonSoft.
The Eternity GE Card DKP+SLT has two dual colour LEDs on the front panel. This LED is used to indicate:
The health of this card (during reset cycle).
Status of one of the station ports (during normal working). During normal working of the system, this LED should be
assigned to one of the station ports using a command from SE Mode.
The Eternity GE Card DKP2+SLT6 has one connector. 2 DKP ports and 6 SLT ports are located on the MDF connector.
The Eternity GE Card DKP4+SLT12 has one connector. 4 DKP ports and 12 SLT ports are located on the MDF
connector. Eternity GE Card DKP+SLT is accompanied with a MDF cable (36 way-20 pair) of 3 meters long.
The connection details for each of these cards are given below:
8. Eternity GE Card E&M
The Eternity GE supports following configuration with Eternity GE Card E&M viz.
Eternity GE Card E&M2
Eternity GE Card E&M4
The configuration is decided by SMD jumper, which is factory set. The Eternity GE Card E&M4 has four dual colour LEDs
on the front panel. The Eternity GE Card E&M2 has a MDF connector to which 2 ports are connected. The Eternity GE
Card E&M4 has a MDF connector to which 4 ports are connected. These cards are accompanied with a MDF cable (36
way-20 Pair) of 3 meters long. For 2 wire and 4 wire, Type4 and Type5 connection, refer chapter Introducing the Eternity
ME.
SLT01 (Pin 01-19, Blue-White)
SLT02 (Pin 02-20, Orange-White)
SLT03 (Pin 03-21, Green-White)
SLT04 (Pin 04-22, Brown-White)
SLT05 (Pin 05-23, Grey-White)
SLT06 (Pin 06-24, Blue-Red)
SLT07 (Pin 07-25, Orange-Red)
SLT08 (Pin 08-26, Green-Red)
SLT09 (Pin 09-27, Brown-Red)
(Pin 18-36, Green-Yellow)
(Pin 17-35, Orange-Yellow)
DKP4 (Pin 16-34, Blue-Yellow)
DKP3 (Pin 15-33, Grey-Black)
DKP2 (Pin 14-32, Brown-Black)
DKP1 (Pin 13-31, Green-Black)
SLT12 (Pin 12-30, Orange-Black)
SLT11 (Pin 11-29, Blue-Black)
SLT10 (Pin 10-28, Grey-Red) DKP2+SLT6,
DKP4+SLT12
Card
H/w support V1R3 and onwards
Matrix
Eternity V8 System Manual 63
The connection details of for each of these cards are given below:
9. Eternity GE Card VMS
The Eternity GE supports configuration of Eternity GE Card VMS (Voice Mail Service) with 8 ports and 16 ports. These
Eternity GE Card VMS can be used with any of the Eternity GE models. Both the cards contain same software; the
configurations are decided by the jumper settings. The card supports one 'Ethernet Port', one COM port and one USB
Port.
The Eternity GE Card VMS is an intelligent card with its own micro-controller, memories and other circuitry. Eternity GE
Card VMS8 has 8 VMS ports whereas Eternity GE Card VMS16 has 16 VMS ports to which trunk lines can be made to
land. (This is done with the help of programming) With Eternity GE Card VMS8, eight calls can be attended
simultaneously whereas with Eternity GE Card VMS16, sixteen calls can be attended simultaneously. We can store voice
messages upto 4.5 hours to 18 hours depending on the flash drive used.
The card type can be configured using Jumper J2:
Eternity GE Card VMS8 when J2 is in AB position.
Eternity GE Card VMS16 when J2 is in BC position.
The Eternity GE Card VMS has two LEDs on the front panel. These LEDs are used to indicate, the health of this card
(during reset cycle).
Note for SE/Installing person:
It is recommended to SE that while installing the Eternity, refer chapter Voice Message Applications to include the
phrase "Please press 0 to acknowledge the Alarm and Reminder" as voice prompt. This is used to acknowledge the
Alarm/Reminder call, placed on the station as a Snooze Call.
10. Eternity GE Card BRI
The Eternity GE supports two configurations with Eternity GE Card BRI viz.
Eternity GE Card BRI2
Eternity GE Card BRI4
The Eternity GE Card BRI can be used with any of the Eternity GE models. The configurations are decided by SMD
jumper, which is factory set.
Eternity GE Card BRI is an intelligent card with its own micro-controller, memories and other circuitry. Eternity GE Card
BRI2 supports two BRI2 ports (RJ45) and Eternity GE Card BRI4 supports four ports (RJ45). Refer topic 'Eternity ME
Card BRI' in chapter Introducing the Eternity ME.
Hardware Configuration of BRI port
Depending on the requirement, each BRI Port can be configured in TE/NT mode. It is possible to feed power to the
terminal equipment connected to the BRI port (configured in NT mode) from the Eternity GE. Also proper termination on
the connection, made between the Eternity GE and the ISDN terminals is required. Following section gives information
about the same.
E&M 2, E&M 4
Card
E&M01 M, SB (Pin 01-19, Blue-White)
E&M01 E, SG (Pin 02-20, Orange-White)
E&M01 SP(RxA), SP(RxB) (Pin 03-21, Green-White)
E&M01 SP(A), SP(B) (Pin 04-22, Brown-White)
E&M01-02 CCS (Pin 05-23, Grey-White)
E&M02 M, SB (Pin 06-24, Blue-Red)
E&M02 E, SG (Pin 07-25, Orange-Red)
E&M02 SP(RxA), SP(RxB) (Pin 08-26, Green-Red)
E&M02 SP(A), SP(B) (Pin 09-27, Brown-Red)
E&M04 SP(A), SP(B) (Pin 18-36, Green-Yellow)
E&M04 SP(RxA), SP(RxB) (Pin 17-35, Orange-Yellow)
E&M04 E, SG (Pin 16-34, Blue-Yellow)
E&M04 M, SB (Pin 15-33, Grey-Black)
E&M03-04 CCS (Pin 14-32, Brown-Black)
E&M03 SP(A), SP(B) (Pin 13-31, Green-Black)
E&M03 SP(RxA), SP(RxB) (Pin 12-30, Orange-Black)
E&M03 E, SG (Pin 11-29, Blue-Black)
E&M03 M, SB (Pin 10-28, Grey-Red)
H/w support V1R1 and onwards
Matrix
64 Eternity V8 System Manual
Port Configuration (NT/TE type):
BRI Port can be configured either in TE mode or NT mode as per the table given below (Refer Note-B):
Above Jumpers are on the main board.
Power to the terminal:
The BRI Port (when configured in NT mode) can be configured to feed power to the terminal equipment connected to it
using the jumpers mentioned in the table given below. Power can be fed on Tx and Rx wires as well as on separate pair
of wires (Refer Note-B).
Jumpers J1 and J2 are on BRI Module of each port. By default Jumper J1 and J2 are in A-B position.
Termination on the Port:
The termination of 100 Ohms can be provided on the BRI Port using following table (Refer Note-A):
Jumpers J3 and J4 are on BRI Module of each port. By default Jumper J3 and J4 are in A-B position.
Notes:
Note-A
Termination of 100 Ohms should be inserted in following cases:
When the BRI port is configured in NT mode.
When the BRI port is configured in TE mode and connected in Point-to-point configuration as shown in figure.
When the BRI port is configured in TE mode and connected as last terminal on the 'S0' bus (Multi-point configuration)
as shown in figure.
Termination need not be inserted in case 2 and 3 above, if the 'S0' bus itself supports Terminating resistors.
Termination need not be inserted if BRI port of Eternity (configured in TE mode) is connected as any 'Terminal' other
than the last 'Terminal' on the 'S0' bus (Multi-point configuration).
Note-B
Number of ISDN terminals that can be connected on the BRI port configured in NT mode depends on the power
consumed by the ISDN terminals. Maximum power that can be provided on one BRI port is 50mA. However, from
Mode
Jumper Position for Port1 Jumper Position for Port2 Jumper Position for Port3 Jumper Position for Port4
J1 J2 J3 J4 J6 J7 J8 J9 J10 J16 J17 J18 J14 J15 J19 J20
NT BC BC BC BC BC BC BC BC BC BC BC BC BC BC BC BC
TE AB AB AB AB AB AB AB AB AB AB AB AB AB AB AB AB
Description J1 J2
To feed power on Tx and Rx wires (Phantom power) A-B A-B
To feed power on separate pair of wires B-C B-C
No power to be feed to the terminal equipment Open Open
Description J3 J4
To insert 100 Ohms Termination A-B A-B
To remove 100 Ohms Termination B-C B-C
Etenity GE
NT
BRI
Line ISDN
Network
TE
NT
BRI
Line ISDN
Network
Eternity GE
Other
ISDN
Equipment
Other
ISDN
Equipment
TE TE TE
Matrix
Eternity V8 System Manual 65
signaling point of view maximum 8 terminals can be connected on the BRI port configured in NT mode. Hence, if the
terminal equipment do not consume power from the BRI port (configured in NT mode) of the Eternity, maximum 8
terminals can be connected to it.
11. Eternity GE Card T1E1PRI
Following configuration of Eternity GE Card T1E1PRI is supported:
Eternity GE Card T1E1PRI Single
The Eternity GE supports Eternity GE Card T1E1PRI to which a PRI line can be connected. This Eternity GE Card
T1E1PRI can be used with any of the Eternity GE models.
The Eternity GE Card T1E1PRI is an intelligent card with its own micro-controller, memories and other circuitry. The
Eternity GE Card T1E1PRI has two dual color LEDs on the front panel. This LED is used to indicate:
The health of this card (during reset cycle).
Status of one of the station ports (during normal working of the system). During normal working of the system, this
LED is assigned to one of the station ports using a command from SE mode.
For configuring details of card, refer chapter Introducing the Eternity ME.
12. Eternity GE Card GSM
The Eternity GE supports two configurations with Eternity GE Card GSM viz.
Eternity GE Card GSM2
Eternity GE Card GSM4
The Eternity GE Card GSM can be used with any of the Eternity GE. The jumper setting is not required for configuration.
An Eternity GE Card GSM is an intelligent card with its own micro-controller, memories and other circuitry. The Eternity
GE Card GSM2 uses 2 GSM engines, whereas Eternity GE Card GSM4 uses 4 GSM engines.
The Eternity GE Card GSM can be used with any of the Eternity GE. This card provides 2 or 4 mobile ports. SIM cards of
different Service Providers can be mounted on the SIM holder provided on the card. The Eternity GE Card GSM has
either GSM Module or CDMA Module installed in the Mobile port as per requirement of the user. Thus the mobile port can
be interfaced with CDMA (Code Division Multiple Access) network for the ports where CDMA module is installed. By
default the GSM module is installed for all the Mobile ports.
The Eternity GE Card GSM performs functions like speech processing. The Eternity GE Card GSM also allows multiple
simultaneous calls (Incoming and Outgoing). The Eternity GE Card GSM has two dual colour LEDs. They indicate:
The health of the card.
Status of one of the station ports during normal working of the system.
There is 1 RT antenna connector on the front fascia. The card comes with 1 or 2 antenna cable.
13. Eternity GE Card VoIP
The Eternity GE can be configured with one type of Eternity GE Card VoIP:
Eternity GE Card VoIP8
For VoIP8 configuration J2 in AB position. For VoIP12 configuration J2 in BC position. This card is maximum of 32 SIP
Accounts are supported. If Eternity GE Card VoIP8 is used, '8' simultaneous calls are possible. The Eternity GE Card
VoIP8 is based on Session Initiated Protocol (SIP) which is internationally recognized standard for implementing VoIP.
14. Eternity GE Card Magneto (Check availability with your dealer)
Eternity GE supports maximum of 48 Magneto trunk ports.
No battery voltage is provided on the Tip-Ring pair of the Magneto Trunk. It supports the interface of Magneto phone
only.
Only Eternity GE Card Magneto4 is supported for Eternity GE.
Port type for the Magneto Trunk is '29' for selecting the port using selective port access command.
Matrix
66 Eternity V8 System Manual
The MDF connector wiring detail for Eternity GE Card Magneto is as shown below:
15. Cards with RJ45 Interface Port:
Eternity GE supports following cards with RJ45 interface:
Eternity GE Card SLT16: It supports 16 ports for connecting analog phones.
Eternity GE Card SLT20: It supports 20 ports for connecting analog phones.
Eternity GE Card TWT8: It supports 8 ports for connecting analog Two Wire Trunks.
Eternity GE Card TWT16: It supports 16 ports for connecting analog Two Wire Trunks.
Eternity GE Card DKP16: It supports 16 ports for connecting digital phones, DKP
Eternity GE Card TWT2+DKP2+SLT8: It supports 2 ports for connecting analog Two Wire Trunks, 2 ports for
connecting DKP and 8 ports for connecting analog phones.
Eternity GE Card TWT2+DKP2+SLT16: It supports 2 ports for connecting analog Two Wire Trunks, 2 ports for
connecting DKP and 16 ports for connecting analog phones.
Eternity GE Card TWT4+SLT16: It supports 4 ports for connecting analog Two Wire Trunks and 16 ports for
connecting analog phones.
Eternity GE Card DKP4+SLT16: It supports 4 ports for connecting DKP and 16 ports for connecting analog phones.
Please refer following table for connecting cables to the RJ45 connector:
Connector SLT16 Card TWT8 Card TWT16 Card DKP16 Card Colour

RJ45-1 SLT 01 TWT01 TWT 01 DKP 01 Blue - (Blue & White)
(Blue) SLT 02 TWT02 TWT 02 DKP 02 Orange - (Orange & White)
SLT 03 TWT03 TWT 03 DKP 03 Green - (Green & White)
SLT 04 TWT04 TWT 04 DKP 04 Brown - (Brown & White)
RJ45-2 SLT 05 TWT 05 DKP 05
(Orange) SLT 06 TWT 06 DKP 06
SLT 07 T WT 07 DKP 07
SLT 08 TWT 08 DKP 08
RJ45-3 SLT 09 DKP 09
(Green) SLT 10 DKP 10
SLT 11 DKP 11
SLT 12 TWT 12 DKP 12
RJ45-4 SLT 13 DKP 13
(Brown) SLT 14 DKP 14
SLT 15 DKP 15
SLT 16 DKP 16
TWT05 Blue - (Blue & White)
TWT06 Orange - (Orange & White)
TW 07 T Green - (Green & White)
TWT08 Brown - (Brown & White)
TWT09 Blue - (Blue & White)
TWT10 Orange - (Orange & White)
TWT11 Green - (Green & White)
Brown - (Brown & White)
TWT13 Blue - (Blue & White)
TWT14 Orange - (Orange & White)
TWT15 Green - (Green & White)
TWT16 Brown - (Brown & White)
L1 L2
1
2
3
4
Matrix
Eternity V8 System Manual 67
Interfacing Modules
Following modules or operator console can be interfaced with Eternity GE:
Eon45/Eon42/Eon48 and EonSoft
DSS64/DSS72
MDF
FCBC
Battery Backup
PPM4
For more details on above interfacing modules, refer chapter Introducing the Eternity ME.
Section 3: Protection and Safety
The Eternity GE does not work in isolation with the environment.
Power is fed to the system for functioning of the system.
Being a PBX system, trunk lines and stations are also connected to the system.
System also has other interfaces like external music, PAS, Printer interface, Computer interface. Hence there are
chances that heavy voltages can enter the system through these interfaces.
If the system is protected from these interfaces, 100% satisfactory and trouble free performance of the system is
guaranteed. Also the system should be protected from static charges that could find their way through the system
components.
Protecting the Eternity GE from heavy voltages from the mains:
The Eternity GE is designed to work with input voltages ranging between 90-265VAC. The Eternity GE Card 3SAC/
6SAC/12SAC/PS48VDC is designed on switch mode design and hence such a wider range of operating voltage is
supported. However to protect the system from abrupt changes in the input voltage, use of CVT is recommended.
For more details on earthing and protection refer chapter Introducing the Eternity ME.
Warning notice: (as per SAR requirement)
The Antenna(s) used for this equipment must be installed to provide separation distance more than 20 cm. from all
persons and must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna.
Connector TWT2, DKP2 TWT4, SLT16 SLT16 Card DKP4, SLT16 Colour
SLT16 Card Card Card
RJ45-1 SLT 01 SLT 01 SLT 01
SLT 02 SLT 02 SLT 02
SLT 03 SLT 03 SLT 03
SLT 04 SLT 04 SLT 04
RJ45-2 SLT 05 SLT 05 SLT 05
SLT 06 SLT 06 SLT 06
SLT 07 SLT 07 SLT 07
SLT 08 SLT 08 SLT 08
RJ45-3 SLT 09 SLT 09 SLT 09
SLT 10 SLT 10 SLT 10
SLT 11 SLT 11 SLT 11
SLT 12 SLT 12 SLT 12
RJ45-4 SLT 13 SLT 13 SLT 13
SLT 14 SLT 14 SLT 14
SLT 15 SLT 15 SLT 15
SLT 16 SLT 16 SLT 16
RJ45-5 DKP 01 TWT 01 DKP 01
DKP 02 TWT 02 DKP 02
RJ45-6 TWT 01 TWT 03 DKP 03
TWT 02 TWT 04 DKP 04
SLT01 Blue - (Blue & White)
SLT02 Orange - (Orange & White)
SLT03 Green - (Green & White)
SLT04 Brown - (Brown & White)
SLT05 Blue - (Blue & White)
SLT06 Orange - (Orange & White)
SLT07 Green - (Green & White)
SLT08 Brown - (Brown & White)
SLT09 Blue - (Blue & White)
SLT10 Orange - (Orange & White)
SLT11 Green - (Green & White)
SLT12 Brown - (Brown & White)
SLT13 Blue - (Blue & White)
SLT14 Orange - (Orange & White)
SLT15 Green - (Green & White)
SLT16 Brown - (Brown & White)
SLT17 Blue - (Blue & White)
SLT18 Orange - (Orange & White)
SLT19 Blue - (Blue & White)
SLT20 Orange - (Orange & White)
L1 L2
1
2
3
4
5
6
Matrix
68 Eternity V8 System Manual
Section 4: Installing the Eternity GE
For Safety Installation Instructions and Site Selection, refer chapter Introducing the Eternity ME. For Eternity GE,
selecting of card type for Eternity GE Card CPU is not required, for features of tones and conference.
Section 5: Getting Started Eternity GE
After strictly following the safety instructions and installing the system as instructed, the system is now ready to be
switched ON. To check the correctness of installation, configuration and connection it is always advisable to execute the
basic features like Making a call (both internal and external), Receiving a call, etc. before proceeding with the complex
programming as per requirement.
Switching ON the Eternity GE
Switch ON the system. The system will take about 1-2 minutes to reset. Observe the Reset Cycle on the front panel of
the system as mentioned in following table of events at different times which are indicated by Red, Green (Grn) and
Orange (Orng) color of LED. The various notations and colors for LED's used in the table are described in the notes
below the table.

Reset Cycle
Note1:
L1 Green or Red depends on the state of first port. Used for debugging port. Default is assigned to Port1 of card. For
Eternity GE Card BRI4 and Eternity GE Card GSM4, L3 and L4 LED's indication will be same as L1 and L2.
Important Points:
The Type1 and Type2, refers to LED numbers and placements for different cards as shown below:
For Eternity GE Card VMS, LED Type is Type1 and the LED pattern will be as per Eternity ME Card VMS.
For Eternity GE Card VoIP, LED type is Type1 and the LED pattern will be as per Eternity ME Card VoIP.
LED Indication for Mobile Ports:
Please refer 'Getting Started Eternity ME' topic in Introducing the Eternity ME chapter for more details.
Cards/Time
Eternity GE
Card CPU
(Type1)
Eternity GE
Card TRK,
SLT8/16, DKP4/
8, DKP+SLT
(Type1)
Eternity GE
Card T1E1PRI
(Type 1)
Eternity GE
Card BRI4
(Type2)
Eternity GE
Card E&M4
(Type2)
Eternity GE
Card GSM2/4
(Type2)
At Power
ON
L1 Orng, L2
Orng.
L1 off, L2 off L1 off, L2 off L1 off, L2 off L1 off, L2 off L1 off, L2 off
After 30-60
secs.
L1 off, L2 off L1 off, L2 off L1 off, L2 off L1 off, L2 off L1 off, L2 off L1 off, L2 off
After 60-90
secs. And
after another
5 secs.
L1 Orng,
L2 Orng.
L1 Red, L2 Red
(500ms), L1 off,
L2 off (500ms),
L1 Grn, L2 Grn
(500ms), L1 off,
L2 off.
L1 Red, L2 Red
(500ms), L1 off,
L2 off (500ms),
L1 Grn, L2 Grn
(500ms), L1 off
L2 off
L1 Red, L2 Red
(500ms), L1 off,
L2 off (500ms),
L1 grn, L2 Grn
(500ms), L1 off,
L2 off
L1 Red, L2 Red
(500ms), L1 off,
L2 off (500ms),
L1 Grn, L2 Grn
(500ms), L1 off,
L2 off
L1 Red, L2 Red
(500ms), L1 off,
L2 off (500ms),
L1 Grn, L2 Grn
(500ms), L1 off,
L2 off
After 5 secs.
Normal
L1 Grn, L2 off
(L1 Blinking)
L1 Grn/Red, L2
off Note1
L1 Grn/Red, L2
off Note1
At Power ON At Power ON no response
After 30 seconds for LEDs L1-L2 blink Green five minutes (500ms ON, 500ms OFF)
Normal Condition LED L1 starts blinking Red with 1 sec ON, 1 sec OFF
Stand by Mode --
L1 L2 L1 L3
L2 L4
LED Type1 LED Type2
Matrix
Eternity V8 System Manual 69
LED Indication for Eternity GE Card VoIP and Eternity GE Card GSM:
For Port status indication for alarm condition and configuring Eternity GE Card GSM and
Basic steps for configuration please refer Introducing the Eternity ME chapter for more details.
LED Indication for Eternity GE Card Magneto:
Please refer 'Getting Started Eternity ME' topic in Introducing the Eternity ME chapter for more details.
Testing the Installation:
As per Introducing the Eternity ME chapter.
Installing the SIM Card:
As per Introducing the Eternity ME chapter.
How to make External Call?
As per Introducing the Eternity ME chapter.
Alert
The Eternity GE accepts the command immediately and works accordingly but it takes approximately 2
minutes to save a command. Hence it is advisable not to turn OFF the system for 2 to 3 minutes after
entering the last command.
=X=X=
Matrix
70 Eternity V8 System Manual
Section 2: Features and Facilities
Matrix
Eternity V8 System Manual 73
Abbreviated Dialing
Whats this?
The numbers which are used for frequently calling can be stored in the system memory. These numbers can be
dialed using specific codes. This saves time while dialing such frequently used numbers. It is also known as Memory
Dialing.
An abbreviated number is accessed through its directory index.
The Eternity offers flexibility to call these numbers by dialing their name from the DKP. Please refer Directory Dialing
by Name for more details. It also supports special digits like #* for programming as number. Refer chapter Flash
Timer for this.
The Eternity offers two types of abbreviated dialing:
Personal Abbreviated Dialing
Global Abbreviated Dialing
Personal Abbreviated Dialing
The numbers used for personal abbreviated dialing are stored in a memory area called personal memory.
The personal memory of the system is divided in 50 groups (PM Group) is called personal directory.
Each group can hold 25 numbers. The location codes for personal memory are 001 to 025.
One such group is assigned to a station.
The numbers in the personal directory are programmed by the SE.
The system checks OG Trunk Bundle Group (OGTBG) and Toll Control Level of Allowed List and Denied List before
dialing the personal abbreviated number. Hence for Personal Abbreviated Dialing; OG Trunk Bundle Group, Toll
Control Level of Allowed List, Toll Control Level of Denied List and Class of Service should be programmed properly.
The table will look as shown below:
How to use Personal Memory Group?
How to program Personal Memory Group?
Step 1
Take a piece of paper and a pen and make a list of telephone numbers.
Step 2
Use the following command to program a telephone number in a personal directory:
1902-PM Group-Location Code-Number-#*
Where,
PM Group is from 01 to 50.
Location Code is from 001 to 025.
Number is the telephone number (Maximum 16 digits).
PM Group Location Code OGTBG Number Name
01 001
:
025
1
:
1
Blank
:
Blank
Blank
:
Blank
02 001
:
025
1
:
1
Blank
:
Blank
Blank
:
Blank
: : : : :
50 001
:
025
1
:
1
Blank
:
Blank
Blank
:
Blank
1 Lift the Handset. Dial tone
2 Dial 8-Location Code. Number dialed out.
The commands explained below should be referred as:
To program a single port: XXXX-1
To program a range of ports: XXXX-2
To program all the ports: XXXX-*
Matrix
74 Eternity V8 System Manual
By default, the numbers in personal directory are blank.
Use the following command to clear a telephone number from a location in a PM Group:
1902-PM Group-Location Code-#*
Step 3
Use the following command to program a name in PM Group:
1903-PM Group-Location Code-Name-#*/<press Hold>
Where,
PM Group is from 01 to 50.
Location Code is from 001 to 025.
Name is a string of alphanumeric characters (Max. 12 char.)
By default, no name is programmed in PM Group.
Use the following command to clear a name from a location in a PM Group:
1903-PM Group-Location Code-#*/<Press Hold>
Step 4
Use the following command to assign PM Group to a SLT:
1905-1-SLT-PM Group
1905-2-SLT-SLT-PM Group
1905-*-PM Group
Where,
PM Group is from 01 to 50.
By default, 00 is the PM Group assigned to all SLTs.
Use the following command to clear the PM Group assigned to a SLT:
1905-1-SLT-00
1905-2-SLT-SLT-00
1905-*
Use the following command to assign PM Group to a DKP:
1906-1-DKP-PM Group
1906-2-DKP-DKP-PM Group
1906-*-PM Group
Where,
DKP is from 001 to 128.
PM Group is from 01 to 50.
By default, 00 is the PM Group assigned to all DKPs.
Use the following command to clear the PM Group assigned to a DKP:
1906-1-DKP-00
1906-2-DKP-DKP-00
1906-*
Step 5
Use the following command to program the TAC Index for PM Group:
1904-PM Group-Location Code-TAC Index
Where,
PM Group is from 01 to 50.
Location Code is from 001 to 025.
TAC Index is 1 to 6.
By default, the TAC Index 1 is assigned to PM Group.
Step 6
Use the following command to clear a PM Group:
1901-1-PM Group
1901-2-PM Group-PM Group
1901-*
Where,
PM Group is from 01 to 50.
Matrix
Eternity V8 System Manual 75
How to program number in personal memory?
From SLT:
Location Code is from 001 to 025.
TAC are 0, 5, 61-64 (Selective Trunk Access is not allowed).
Number is the telephone number, which is to be abbreviated.
From DKP:
Please refer Eon User Card for more details.
Note:
The Trunk Access Code (TAC), if programmed is displayed on the DKP and can be changed also.
Global Abbreviated Dialing
The numbers used for global abbreviated dialing are stored in a memory area called global memory (global directory).
The memory space in which the telephone numbers are stored is called global directory.
Global directory can be programmed from the SE mode.
The global directory is common for all the users.
Maximum 900 numbers can be stored in the global directory. Location Codes for global directory are from 100 to 999.
Global directory is divided into three parts i.e. Global Directory Part 1, Global Directory Part 2 and Global Directory
Part 3.
When an user dials a number from global directory part 2 and part 3, the system checks for COS and Call Budget.
A user can dial numbers in global memory part 1 irrespective of his Toll Control and OGTBG. However these numbers
can be dialed only if the user is allowed this feature from Class of Service.
Telephone numbers of fire, police, branch offices or such other places can be stored in this memory so that any user
can access this facility.
The default table will look as shown below:
How to use Global Directory?
How to program Global Directory?
Step 1
Take a piece of paper and a pen and make a list of telephone numbers.
Step 2
Use following command to program a telephone number in global directory:
1801-Location Code-Number-#*/Press <hold>
Where,
Location Code is from 100 to 999.
1 Lift the handset. Dial tone
2 Dial 1071-Location Code-Number-#*-TAC. Confirmation tone
3 Replace the handset.
Location Code OGTBG Number Name Alternate No. Group
Global Directory Part I
100 01 Blank Blank 000
: : : : :
399 01 Blank Blank 000
Global Directory Part II
400 01 Blank Blank 000
: : : : :
699 01 Blank Blank 000
Global Directory Part III
700 01 Blank Blank 000
: : : : :
999 01 Blank Blank 000
1 Lift the Handset Dial tone
2 Dial 8-Location Code Number dialed out
Matrix
76 Eternity V8 System Manual
Number is the telephone number (maximum 16 digits).
Use following command to clear a telephone number from a location in the global directory:
1801-Location Code-#*
By default, the numbers are blank.
Step 3
Use following command to program a name in global directory:
1802-Location Code-Name-#*/Press <hold>
Where,
Location Code is from 100 to 999.
Name is a string of alphanumeric characters. (Max. 12 char.)
Use following command to clear a name from a location in the global directory:
1802-Location Code-#*/Press <hold>
By default, the name in global directory is blank.
Step 4
Use the COS command to assign global directory part 1/part 2/part 3 to SLT or DKP.
Step 5
Use following command to program the OGTBG for global directory:
1803-1-Location Code-OGTBG
1803-2-Location Code-Location Code-OGTBG
1803-*-OGTBG
Where,
Location Code is from 100 to 999.
OGTBG is from 01 to 25.
By default, the OGTBG assigned is 01.
Step 6
Use following command to clear a location code in the global directory:
1800-1-Location Code
1800-2-Location Code-Location Code
1800-*
Where,
Location Code is from 100 to 999.
Example:
To program telephone number of police i.e. 100 at location code 100 using OG Trunk Bundle Group 01, dial
1801-100-100-#*
1803-1-100-01
To call police, station user should dial 8100.
The Eternity automatically inserts a pause after grabbing the trunk (TWT) and dialing the first digit on the trunk line. This
is known as Pause Timer and is programmable for each trunk. Refer Trunk Feature Template topic for more details.
Relevant Topics:
1. Class of Service (COS) 200
2. Directory Dialing by Name 298
3. Trunk Feature Template 680
4. Alternate Number Dialing 105
5. Flash Timer 367
=X=X=
Matrix
Eternity V8 System Manual 77
Access Codes
What's this?
Access code is a string of digits dialed by a station to:
Call another Station, Department Group.
Grab a trunk line.
Turn on/off a Digital/Analog Port.
Use a feature.
Access codes can be classified broadly into three categories:
Station Codes: Codes used to access stations viz. SLTs like 2001, 2002, etc., DKPs like 3001, 3002, etc. Analog
Output Ports (For example, PAS) like 3921, 3922, etc.
Logical Group Codes: Codes assigned to call logical groups like Department Numbers-3901, 3902, etc. and access
trunk groups-61, 62, etc.
Feature Codes like '2' for Auto Call Back, '5' for Raid, etc.
Eternity allows changing these codes to codes of your choice. For example, by default to call operator, one has to dial '9'.
It is possible to change this code to '0'. Also, to dial on a trunk in group 1, one has to dial '61'. It is possible to change this
code to '5'.
If you try to assign a number string that is already used to access a station or use a feature then the system would not
accept the command and shall give error tone. In such an event, one has to take the printout of access codes, delete the
conflicting access code and then assign the desired access code.
How it works?
Since no function is possible when the telephone is idle, it is obvious that no access code can be dialed from idle
phase.
Different access codes are making sense during different phases of a call. For example, call forward feature code
makes sense from the dial tone, whereas, Auto Call Back (on busy) feature is meaningful from busy tone.
Please note that each access code in a single call phase must be unique. For example, it is not possible to have
same access code for features like Call Forward and Redial since both these feature codes are used at dial tone.
However same access codes can be used for different features used during different phases, For example, one can
have same access code say '8' for Memory Dialing and Barge-in since both these feature codes are used during
different phases of a call viz. Dial phase and Blocked phase.
An access code can be of maximum 6 digits.
A typical call passes through different phases or stages as shown below:
In one phase, different access codes can be of different length. But all of them must be unique. For example, in
blocked phase we can have following codes:
Feature Code
Auto Call Back 2
Interrupt Request 31
Barge-In 311
Raid 411
Idle
Dialing
Routing
Blocked
Placed Matured Denied
Idle Dial
Dial Tone
Routing Blocked
Busy Tone
Placed
Ring
Matured
Speech
Denied
Error Tone
Matrix
78 Eternity V8 System Manual
Please note that station user cannot dial any code once he reaches the denied phase.
Refer Access Code Table at the end of topic, relevance of different features in different phases. Since no codes can
be dialed from idle phase and denied phase, these are not shown in the table.
Station Codes
SLT Station Numbers
SLT station numbers are the codes dialed from dial phase to call another station. Each SLT station number must be
unique and should not match with any of the features available from the dial phase. For more details, please refer topic
Flexible Numbers.
DKP Station Numbers
DKP station numbers are the codes dialed from the dial phase by a station to call a DKP station. Each DKP station
number must be unique and should not match with any of the features available from the dial phase. For more details,
please refer topic Flexible Numbers. For example, these codes are different then, Access codes for Digital Output Port
(DOP). Please refer Digital Output Port (DOP) for more details.
Logical Group Codes
Department Numbers
Eternity offers a facility of forming groups of stations and assigning a common access code called Department Number to
this group. For more details, please refer topic Flexible Numbers.
OG Trunk Bundle Group (OGTBG)
These are the codes dialed by a station user to grab a trunk line. Each of these codes relates to a group of trunks, which
can be set differently for each station. For more details, please refer topic OG Trunk Bundle Group.
Trunk Access-Selective
This is a code dialed by a station user to grab a particular trunk line. For more details, please refer topic OG Trunk Bundle
Group.
Features Codes
Eternity supports programmable access codes for all the features. The feature codes are divided depending upon the
phase during which these codes are dialed viz. Dial Phase feature code, Routing Phase feature code, etc.
Dial Phase feature codes
Following features are allowed from dial phase (Non-programmable).
Routing Phase feature code
Please note that only Emergency Number dialing is from the routing phase.
Block Phase feature codes
Placed Phase feature code
Please note that since only one feature is available from the placed phase, we can use any digit of our choice as access
code for this feature.
Feature Name Feature Number Access Code
Enter SE Mode 01 1#91
Enter SA Mode 02 1#92
Feature Name Feature Number Access Code
Auto Call Back 08 2
Interrupt Request 21 3
Barge-In 22 4
Raid 23 5
Feature Name Feature Number Access Code
Auto Call Back 08 2
Matrix
Eternity V8 System Manual 79
Matured Phase feature codes
Following features are allowed from dial phase (Non-programmable).
How to program?
Use following command to program the access code for the feature:
3111-1-Feature Number-Access Code-#*
3111-2-Feature No.-Feature No.-Access Code-#*
3111-*-Access Code-#*
Where,
Feature Number is from 01 to 72.
Access Code is a string of maximum 6 digits
How to default Access Codes?
Use the following command to default a feature codes:
3161-1-Feature Number
3161-2-Feature Number-Feature Number
3161-*
Where,
Feature Number is from 01 to 72.
Note for Access Code Tables:
For countries for which Access Codes are not given, use India's Access Code as default value, except for Emergency
Number.
Access Code Table (For India):
Feature Name Feature Number Access Code
Enter SE Mode 01 1#91
Enter SA Mode 02 1#92
The commands explained below should be referred as:
To program a single port: XXXX-1
To program a range of ports: XXXX-2
To program all the ports: XXXX-*
Feature Feature
Number
Access
Codes
Dial Routing Blocked placed Matured
2 way
Matured
3 way
Enter SE Mode 01 1#91 Y Y
Enter SA Mode 02 1#92 Y Y
Call Pick Up-General 03 4 Y Y
Call Pick Up-Selective 04 12 Y Y
Auto Call Back 05 2 Y Y
Cancel Auto Call Back 06 102 Y Y
Redial 07 7 Y Y
Auto Redial 08 17 Y Y
Cancel Auto Redial 09 1070 Y Y
Personal Directory Programming 10 1071 Y Y
Directory Dialing (Global + Personal) 11 8 Y Y
Operator Dialing 12 9 Y Y Y
Call Forward/Call Follow Me 13 13 Y Y
Dynamic Lock 14 14 Y Y
Hot Line 15 15 Y Y
Alarm 16 161 Y Y
Do Not Disturb 17 18 Y Y
Interrupt Request 18 3 Y
Barge-In 19 4 Y
Matrix
80 Eternity V8 System Manual
Raid 20 5 Y
Trunk Reservation 21 6 Y
Call Toggle 22 1 Y
Conference- 3 Party 23 0 Y
Trunk - to - Trunk Transfer 24 # Y
Conference-Multi Party 25 19 Y Y
Call Park 26 115 Y Y
Retrieve Parked Call 27 116 Y Y
Room Monitor 28 1073 Y Y
Last Caller Recall 29 1092 Y Y
Voice Help 30 1090 Y Y
Walk-In Class Of Service 31 111 Y Y
Change User Password 32 114 Y Y
Page Zone 33 1074 Y Y
DISA Log In Code 34 1079 Y Y
Trunk Release Code (Trunk-to-Trunk
Speech)
35 ## Y Y
Cancel All Feature 36 1051 Y Y
Selective Port Access Code 37 69 Y Y
Flashing on Trunk 38 * Y Y
Change User Status 39 104 Y Y
Account Code by Number 40 1058 Y Y
Account Code by Name 41 1059 Y Y
Back Ground Music 42 1099 Y Y
Meet Me Paging 43 1093 Y Y
Hot Desk 44 1091 Y Y
DND Override 45 4 Y
Missed Calls 46 1097 Y Y
VMS Live Call Screening ON/OFF
Request
47 1094 Y Y
VMS Conversation Recording 48 1095 Y Y
Forced Release 49 #* Y
Hold 50 Flash Y
Live Call Supervision 51 1098 Y Y Y
Forced Answer 52 5 Y
Maid In 53 1054 Y Y
Minibar Details 55 1056 Y Y
Mute 56 1052 Y Y
Change Time Zone 57 1053 Y Y
Self Ring Test 58 1057 Y
Set Chain Party 59 1050 Y
SA Command 60 1072 Y Y
Second Trunk Access Code 61 # Y
Floor Service 62 38 Y Y
Keypad Lock DKP 63 Y
CLIR 64 103 Y
Call Cost Display 65 1075 Y
Reminder 66 162 Y Y
Feature Feature
Number
Access
Codes
Dial Routing Blocked placed Matured
2 way
Matured
3 way
Matrix
Eternity V8 System Manual 81
Voice Guided Alarm 67 163 Y Y
Voice Guided Reminder 68 164 Y Y
Blind Transfer to Mail Box (VMS) 69 1078 Y
Message Wait Set 70 1076 Y
Message Wait Retrieval 71 1077 Y
Use Definable Fields 72 1096 Y Y
Emergency Number 1 Y Y Y Y Y Y
Emergency Number 2 Y Y Y Y Y Y
Emergency Number 3 Y Y Y Y Y Y
Emergency Number 4 Y Y Y Y Y Y
Emergency Number 5 Y Y Y Y Y Y
Emergency Number 6 Y Y Y Y Y Y
Emergency Number 7 Y Y Y Y Y Y
Emergency Number 8 Y Y Y Y Y Y
Emergency Number 9 Y Y Y Y Y Y
Emergency Number 10 Y Y Y Y Y Y
SA Commands
Check-In 1 1072-901 Y Y
Check-Out 2 1072-902 Y Y
Guest Name 3 1072-903 Y Y
Guest Group 4 1072-904 Y Y
Guest-In/Out 5 1072-905 Y Y
Guest Title 6 1072-906 Y Y
Change Check-In Profile of Room 7 1072-907 Y Y
Change Room Occupancy Status 8 1072-908 Y Y
Change Room Clean Status 9 1072-909 Y Y
Room Shift 10 1072-910 Y Y
Reprint Check Out Report 11 1072-911 Y Y
Print Room Status Report 12 1072-912 Y Y
Print Alarm Status Report 13 1072-913 Y Y
Delete Checked Out calls 14 1072-914 Y Y
Set DND-Remote 15 1072-001 Y Y
Set Dynamic Lock settings - Remote 16 1072-002 Y Y
Set Alarm -Remote 17 1072-003 Y Y
Assign Call Budget to a station 18 1072-004 Y Y
-Assign/De-assign Mailbox to a Station -
Remote
19 1072-005
Set Call Forward - Remote 20 1072-006 Y Y
Set Call forward for all stations-Remote 21 1072-007 Y Y
Assign Station User Greeting Message 22 1072-008 Y Y
Display & Acknowledge System Activity 23 1072-009 Y Y
Display & Acknowledge System Fault 24 1072-010 Y Y
Station Budget Display 25 1072-011 Y Y
Change User password of a Station 26 1072-012 Y Y
Lock/unlock DKP''s Keypad 27 1072-013 Y Y
User Absent / Present 28 1072-014 Y Y
Change SA password 29 1072-015 Y Y
Change SA mode timer 30 1072-016 Y Y
Feature Feature
Number
Access
Codes
Dial Routing Blocked placed Matured
2 way
Matured
3 way
Matrix
82 Eternity V8 System Manual
Display Registered GSM Network ID 31 1072-017 Y
Set Master Time Zone 32 1072-018 Y
Switch OFF DOP manually 33 1072-019 Y Y
Switch ON DOP manually 34 1072-020 Y Y
Terminate Security dialing 35 1072-021 Y Y
Clear System Activity Log 36 1072-022 Y Y
Start/Abort SAL in Offline mode 37 1072-023 Y Y
Start/Abort SAL in Online mode 38 1072-024 Y Y
Change Time zone of a Port 39 1072-025 Y Y
Cancel Dial in Conference 40 1072-026 Y Y
Start/Abort SFL in Offline mode 41 1072-027 Y Y
Start/Abort SFL in Online mode 42 1072-028 Y Y
Display Port Parameters 43 1072-029 Y Y
Start/Abort Online OG Report 44 1072-101 Y Y
Set filter to print calls made from station/s 45 1072-102 Y Y
Set filter to print calls made from TWT 46 1072-103 Y Y
Set filter to print calls made from BRI 47 1072-104 Y Y
Set filter to print calls made from DS1 48 1072-105 Y Y
Set filter to print calls made from E&M 49 1072-106 Y Y
Set filter to print calls from Mobile 50 1072-107 Y Y
Set filter to print calls from SIP 51 1072-108 Y Y
Set filter to print calls Department Bill
Group wise
52 1072-109 Y Y
Set filter to print calls made on date/s 53 1072-110 Y Y
Set filter to print calls made at time/s 54 1072-111 Y Y
Set filter to print calls made to numbers
matching
the numbers in the List assigned
55 1072-112 Y Y
Set filter to print calls of Duration more
than this time
56 1072-113 Y Y
Set filter to print calls of Units more than
the units programmed
57 1072-114 Y Y
Set filter to print calls made to account
code
58 1072-115 Y Y
Assign default OG filters 59 1072-120 Y Y
Start/Abort offline report 60 1072-121 Y Y
Enable/ Disable OG Schedule Reports 61 1072-122 Y Y
Program Time for Daily OG Scheduled
Reports
62 1072-123 Y Y
Program Day and Time for OG Weekly
Scheduled Reports
63 1072-124 Y Y
Program Date and Time for OG Monthly
Scheduled Reports
64 1072-125 Y Y
Delete calls made by station/s 65 1072-131 Y Y
Delete calls made on/from date 66 1072-132 Y Y
To clear SMDR OG buffer 67 1072-133 Y Y
Start/Abort Internal calls Report 68 1072-136 Y Y
Set filter to print Internal calls Report 69 1072-137 Y Y
Feature Feature
Number
Access
Codes
Dial Routing Blocked placed Matured
2 way
Matured
3 way
Matrix
Eternity V8 System Manual 83
Set filter to print internal calls with duration
greater than that given here
70 1072-138 Y Y
Start/Abort Offline Internal Call Report 71 1072-141 Y Y
Enable/ Disable Internal Scheduled
Reports
72 1072-142 Y Y
Program Time for Internal Daily Scheduled
Reports
73 1072-143 Y Y
Program Day and Time for Internal Weekly
Scheduled Reports
74 1072-144 Y Y
Program Date and Time for Internal
Monthly Scheduled Reports
75 1072-145 Y Y
To Clear SMDR Internal Buffer 76 1072-150 Y Y
Start/Abort Online - IC Report 77 1072-151 Y Y
Set filter to print all Normal calls 78 1072-152 Y Y
Set filter to print all DID calls 79 1072-153 Y Y
Set filter to print all Unanswered calls 80 1072-154 Y Y
Set filter to print all DID Unanswered calls 81 1072-155 Y Y
Set filter to print all DISA calls 82 1072-156 Y Y
Set filter to print all calls with speech
duration More than timer
83 1072-157 Y Y
Set filter to print all calls unanswered for
duration More than timer
84 1072-158 Y Y
Set filter to print all calls kept on hold for
duration more than timer
85 1072-159 Y Y
Set filter to print all IC calls received by the
station
86 1072-160 Y Y
Set filter to print all IC calls recd. On the
TWT
87 1072-161 Y Y
Set filter to print all IC calls recd. On the
BRI
88 1072-162 Y Y
Set filter to print all IC calls recd. On the
DS1
89 1072-163 Y Y
Set filter to print all IC calls recd. On the
E&M
90 1072-164 Y Y
Set filter to print all IC calls from Mobile 91 1072-165 Y Y
Set filter to print calls from SIP 92 1072-166 Y Y
Set filter to print all IC calls recd. On/from
date
93 1072-167 Y Y
Set filter to print all IC calls recd. At/from-
to Time
94 1072-168 Y Y
Set filter to print all IC calls recd. From
nos. matching the External Number List
95 1072-169 Y Y
Default IC Print filters 96 1072-170 Y Y
Abort/Start IC Offline Report 97 1072-171 Y Y
Enable/ Disable IC Scheduled Report 98 1072-172 Y Y
Program Time for IC Daily Scheduled
Reports
99 1072-173 Y Y
Program Day and Time for IC Weekly
Scheduled Reports
100 1072-174 Y Y
Program Date and Time for IC Monthly
Scheduled Reports
101 1072-175 Y Y
Feature Feature
Number
Access
Codes
Dial Routing Blocked placed Matured
2 way
Matured
3 way
Matrix
84 Eternity V8 System Manual
Access Code Table (for other Countries):
Clear SMDR-IC buffer 102 1072-180 Y Y
Start/Abort Printing of Online DS1
Performance Report
103 1072-030 Y Y
Start/Abort Offline DS1 Performance
Report
104 1072-031 Y Y
Signal Strength of Mobile Port 105 1072-032 Y Y
Enable/Disable Call Cost Display for a
Station
106 1072-181 Y Y
Start/Abort Hotel/Motel Activity log in
Offline mode
107 1072-176 Y Y
Start/Abort Hotel/Motel Activity log in
Online mode
108 1072-177 Y Y
Display and Acknowledge Hotel/Motel
Activity
109 1072-178 Y Y
Change Guest VIP Status of Station 110 1072-915 Y Y
Change Phone Ringing Pattern of Room 111 1072-916
Print Reminder Status Report 112 1072-917
Remote Reminder 113 1072-033 Y Y
Remote Voice Guided Alarm 114 1072-034 Y Y
Remote Voice Guided Reminder 115 1072-035 Y Y
Set filter to print calls received on Magneto 116 1072-116 Y Y
Set filter to print calls made from Magneto 117 1072-179 Y Y
Enable/Disable Scheduled Alarm Report 118 1072-036 Y Y
Program Time for Scheduled Alarm
Report
119 1072-037 Y Y
Enable/Disable Scheduled Reminder
Report
120 1072-038 Y Y
Program Time for Scheduled Reminder
Report
121 1072-039 Y Y
Request Database Synchronization to
PMS
122 1072-040 Y Y
Enable/Disable Scheduled Room Status
Report
123 1072-041 Y Y
Program Time for Schedule Room Status
Report
124 1072-042 Y Y
Enable/Disable Scheduled Change of
Room Clean Status
125 1072-043 Y Y
Program Time for Schedule Change of
Room Clean Status
126 1072-044 Y Y
Reserved For Future Use 127 1072-182
Enable/Disable Internal Call Block For
Guest Phones
128 1072-045 Y Y
Software Version Revision Display of
Master Card
129 1072-191 Y Y
User Definable fields 130 1072-920 Y Y
Feature Australia Bangladesh Belgium Bhutan Canada China Germany
Enter SE Mode 1#91 1#91 1#91 1#91 1#91 1#91 1#91
Enter SA Mode 1#92 1#92 1#92 1#92 1#92 1#92 1#92
Feature Feature
Number
Access
Codes
Dial Routing Blocked placed Matured
2 way
Matured
3 way
Matrix
Eternity V8 System Manual 85
Call Pick Up-General 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
Call Pick Up-Selective 12 12 12 12 12 12 12
Auto Call Back 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
Cancel Auto Call Back 102 102 102 102 102 102 102
Redial 7 7 7 7 7 7 7
Auto Redial 17 17 17 17 17 17 17
Cancel Auto Redial 1070 1070 1070 1070 1070 1070 1070
Personal Directory Programming 1071 1071 1071 1071 1071 1071 1071
Directory Dialing (Global + Personal) 8 8 8 8 6 8 8
Operator Dialing 9 9 0 9 0 0 9
Call Forward/Call Follow Me 13 13 13 13 13 13 13
Dynamic Lock 14 14 14 14 14 14 14
Hot Line 15 15 15 15 15 15 15
Alarm 161 161 161 161 161 161 161
Do Not Disturb 18 18 18 18 18 18 18
Interrupt Request 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
Barge-In 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
Raid 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
Trunk Reservation 6 6 6 6 6 6 6
Call Toggle 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Conference- 3 Party 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Trunk - to - Trunk Transfer # # # # # # #
Conference-Multi Party 19 19 19 19 19 19 19
Call Park 115 115 115 115 115 115 115
Retrieve Parked Call 116 116 116 116 116 116 116
Room Monitor 1073 1073 1073 1073 1073 1073 1073
Last Caller Recall 1092 1092 1092 1092 1092 1092 1092
Voice Help 1090 1090 1090 1090 1090 1090 1090
Walk-In Class Of Service 111 111 111 111 111 111 111
Change User Password 114 114 114 114 114 114 114
Page Zone 1074 1074 1074 1074 1074 1074 1074
DISA Log In Code 1079 1079 1079 1079 1079 1079 1079
Trunk Release Code (Trunk-to-Trunk
Speech)
## ## ## ## ## ## ##
Cancel All Feature 1051 1051 1051 1051 1051 1051 1051
Selective Port Access Code 69 69 69 69 69 69 69
Flashing on Trunk * * * * * * *
Change User Status 104 104 104 104 104 104 104
Account Code by Number 1058 1058 1058 1058 1058 1058 1058
Account Code by Name 1059 1059 1059 1059 1059 1059 1059
Back Ground Music 1099 1099 1099 1099 1099 1099 1099
Meet Me Paging 1093 1093 1093 1093 1093 1093 1093
Hot Desk 1091 1091 1091 1091 1091 1091 1091
DND Override 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
Missed Calls 1097 1097 1097 1097 1097 1097 1097
VMS Live Call Screening ON/OFF Request 1094 1094 1094 1094 1094 1094 1094
VMS Conversation Recording 1095 1095 1095 1095 1095 1095 1095
Forced Release #* #* #* #* #* #* #*
Feature Australia Bangladesh Belgium Bhutan Canada China Germany
Matrix
86 Eternity V8 System Manual
Hold Flash Flash Flash Flash Flash Flash Flash
Live Call Supervision 1098 1098 1098 1098 1098 1098 1098
Forced Answer 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
Maid In 1054 1054 1054 1054 1054 1054 1054
Minibar Details 1056 1056 1056 1056 1056 1056 1056
Mute 1052 1052 1052 1052 1052 1052 1052
Change Time Zone 1053 1053 1053 1053 1053 1053 1053
Self Ring Test 1057 1057 1057 1057 1057 1057 1057
Set Chain Party 1050 1050 1050 1050 1050 1050 1050
SA Command 1072 1072 1072 1072 1072 1072 1072
Second Trunk Access Code # # # # # # #
Floor Service 38 38 38 38 38 38 38
Keypad Lock DKP
CLIR 103 103 103 103 103 103 103
Call Cost Display 1075 1075 1075 1075 1075 1075 1075
Reminder 162 162 162 162 162 162 162
Voice Guided Alarm 163 163 163 163 163 163 163
Voice Guided Reminder 164 164 164 164 164 164 164
Blind Transfer to Mail Box (VMS) 1078 1078 1078 1078 1078 1078 1078
Message Wait Set 1076 1076 1076 1076 1076 1076 1076
Message Wait Retrieval 1077 1077 1077 1077 1077 1077 1077
User Definable Fields 1096 1096 1096 1096 1096 1096 1096
Emergency Number 1 000 999 101 110 100 110 110
Emergency Number 2 106 100 112 101 120 112
Emergency Number 3 112 112 113 108 119
Emergency Number 4 112
Emergency Number 5
Emergency Number 6
Emergency Number 7
Emergency Number 8
Emergency Number 9
Emergency Number 10
Feature India Indonesia Italy Jordan Kazakhstan Kenya Kuwait Malaysia
Enter SE Mode 1#91 1#91 1#91 1#91 1#91 1#91 1#91 1#91
Enter SA Mode 1#92 1#92 1#92 1#92 1#92 1#92 1#92 1#92
Call Pick Up-General 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
Call Pick Up-Selective 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12
Auto Call Back 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
Cancel Auto Call Back 102 102 102 102 102 102 102 102
Redial 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7
Auto Redial 17 17 17 17 17 17 17 17
Cancel Auto Redial 1070 1070 1070 1070 1070 1070 1070 1070
Personal Directory Programming 1071 1071 1071 1071 1071 1071 1071 1071
Directory Dialing (Global + Personal) 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 6
Operator Dialing 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 0
Call Forward/Call Follow Me 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13
Dynamic Lock 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14
Feature Australia Bangladesh Belgium Bhutan Canada China Germany
Matrix
Eternity V8 System Manual 87
Hot Line 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15
Alarm 161 161 161 161 161 161 161 161
Do Not Disturb 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18
Interrupt Request 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
Barge-In 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
Raid 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
Trunk Reservation 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6
Call Toggle 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Conference- 3 Party 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Trunk - to - Trunk Transfer # # # # # # # #
Conference-Multi Party 19 19 19 110 19 19 19 19
Call Park 115 115 110 115 115 115 115 115
Retrieve Parked Call 116 116 116 116 116 116 116 116
Room Monitor 1073 1073 1073 1073 1073 1073 1073 1073
Last Caller Recall 1092 1092 1092 1092 1092 1092 1092 1092
Voice Help 1090 1090 1090 1090 1090 1090 1090 1090
Walk-In Class Of Service 111 111 111 111 111 111 111 111
Change User Password 114 114 114 114 114 114 114 114
Page Zone 1074 1074 1074 1074 1074 1074 1074 1074
DISA Log In Code 1079 1079 1079 1079 1079 1079 1079 1079
Trunk Release Code (Trunk-to-Trunk
Speech)
## ## ## ## ## ## ## ##
Cancel All Feature 1051 1051 1051 1051 1051 1051 1051 1051
Selective Port Access Code 69 69 69 69 69 69 69 69
Flashing on Trunk * * * * * * * *
Change User Status 104 104 104 104 104 104 104 104
Account Code by Number 1058 1058 1058 1058 1058 1058 1058 1058
Account Code by Name 1059 1059 1059 1059 1059 1059 1059 1059
Back Ground Music 1099 1099 1099 1099 1099 1099 1099 1099
Meet Me Paging 1093 1093 1093 1093 1093 1093 1093 1093
Hot Desk 1091 1091 1091 1091 1091 1091 1091 1091
Missed Calls 1097 1097 1097 1097 1097 1097 1097 1097
DND Override 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
VMS Live Call Screening ON/OFF
Request
1094 1094 1094 1094 1094 1094 1094 1094
VMS Conversation Recording 1095 1095 1095 1095 1095 1095 1095 1095
Forced Release #* #* #* #* #* #* #* #*
Hold Flash Flash Flash Flash Flash Flash Flash Flash
Live Call Supervision 1098 1098 1098 1098 1098 1098 1098 1098
Forced Answer 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
Maid In 1054 1054 1054 1054 1054 1054 1054 1054
Minibar Details 1056 1056 1056 1056 1056 1056 1056 1056
Mute 1052 1052 1052 1052 1052 1052 1052 1052
Change Time Zone 1053 1053 1053 1053 1053 1053 1053 1053
Self Ring Test 1057 1057 1057 1057 1057 1057 1057 1057
Set Chain Party 1050 1050 1050 1050 1050 1050 1050 1050
SA Command 1072 1072 1072 1072 1072 1072 1072 1072
Second Trunk Access Code # # # # # # # #
Floor Service 38 38 38 38 38 38 38 38
Feature India Indonesia Italy Jordan Kazakhstan Kenya Kuwait Malaysia
Matrix
88 Eternity V8 System Manual
Keypad Lock DKP
CLIR 103 103 103 103 103 103 103 103
Call Cost Display 1075 1075 1075 1075 1075 1075 1075 1075
Reminder 162 162 162 162 162 162 162 162
Voice Guided Alarm 163 163 163 163 163 163 163 163
Voice Guided Reminder 164 164 164 164 164 164 164 164
Blind Transfer to Mail Box (VMS) 1078 1078 1078 1078 1078 1078 1078 1078
Message Wait Set 1076 1076 1076 1076 1076 1076 1076 1076
Message Wait Retrieval 1077 1077 1077 1077 1077 1077 1077 1077
User Definable Fields 1096 1096 1096 1096 1096 1096 1096 1096
Emergency Number 1 100 110 113 191 03 999 777 999
Emergency Number 2 101 118 118 199 112
Emergency Number 3 108 119 115
Emergency Number 4 112 113 112
Emergency Number 5 112
Feature Maldives Mauritius Mexico Namibia Nepal New
Zealand
Oman Pakistan
Enter SE Mode 1#91 1#91 1#91 1#91 1#91 1#91 1#91 1#91
Enter SA Mode 1#92 1#92 1#92 1#92 1#92 1#92 1#92 1#92
Call Pick Up-General 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
Call Pick Up-Selective 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12
Auto Call Back 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
Cancel Auto Call Back 102 102 102 102 102 102 102 102
Redial 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7
Auto Redial 17 17 17 17 17 17 17 17
Cancel Auto Redial 1070 1070 1070 1070 1070 1070 1070 1070
Personal Directory Programming 1071 1071 1071 1071 1071 1071 1071 1071
Directory Dialing (Global + Personal) 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8
Operator Dialing 9 9 0 9 9 9 9 9
Call Forward/Call Follow Me 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13
Dynamic Lock 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14
Hot Line 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15
Alarm 161 161 161 161 161 161 161 161
Do Not Disturb 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18
Interrupt Request 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
Barge-In 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
Raid 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
Trunk Reservation 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6
Call Toggle 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Conference- 3 Party 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Trunk - to - Trunk Transfer # # # # # # # #
Conference-Multi Party 19 19 19 19 19 19 19 19
Call Park 115 110 115 115 115 115 115 115
Retrieve Parked Call 116 116 116 116 116 116 116 116
Room Monitor 1073 1073 1073 1073 1073 1073 1073 1073
Last Caller Recall 1092 1092 1092 1092 1092 1092 1092 1092
Voice Help 1090 1090 1090 1090 1090 1090 1090 1090
Feature India Indonesia Italy Jordan Kazakhstan Kenya Kuwait Malaysia
Matrix
Eternity V8 System Manual 89
Walk-In Class Of Service 111 111 111 111 111 110 111 111
Change User Password 114 114 114 114 114 114 114 114
Page Zone 1074 1074 1074 1074 1074 1074 1074 1074
DISA Log In Code 1079 1079 1079 1079 1079 1079 1079 1079
Trunk Release Code (Trunk-to-Trunk
Speech)
## ## ## ## ## ## ## ##
Cancel All Feature 1051 1051 1051 1051 1051 1051 1051 1051
Selective Port Access Code 69 69 69 69 69 69 69 69
Flashing on Trunk * * * * * * * *
Change User Status 104 104 104 104 104 104 104 104
Account Code by Number 1058 1058 1058 1058 1058 1058 1058 1058
Account Code by Name 1059 1059 1059 1059 1059 1059 1059 1059
Back Ground Music 1099 1099 1099 1099 1099 1099 1099 1099
Meet Me Paging 1093 1093 1093 1093 1093 1093 1093 1093
Hot Desk 1091 1091 1091 1091 1091 1091 1091 1091
DND Override 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
Missed Calls 1097 1097 1097 1097 1097 1097 1097 1097
VMS Live Call Screening ON/OFF
Request
1094 1094 1094 1094 1094 1094 1094 1094
VMS Conversation Recording 1095 1095 1095 1095 1095 1095 1095 1095
Forced Release #* #* #* #* #* #* #* #*
Hold Flash Flash Flash Flash Flash Flash Flash Flash
Live Call Supervision 1098 1098 1098 1098 1098 1098 1098 1098
Forced Answer 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
Maid In 1054 1054 1054 1054 1054 1054 1054 1054
Minibar Details 1056 1056 1056 1056 1056 1056 1056 1056
Mute 1052 1052 1052 1052 1052 1052 1052 1052
Change Time Zone 1053 1053 1053 1053 1053 1053 1053 1053
Self Ring Test 1057 1057 1057 1057 1057 1057 1057 1057
Set Chain Party 1050 1050 1050 1050 1050 1050 1050 1050
SA Command 1072 1072 1072 1072 1072 1072 1072 1072
Second Trunk Access Code # # # # # # # #
Floor Service 38 38 38 38 38 38 38 38
Keypad Lock DKP
CLIR 103 103 103 103 103 103 103 103
Call Cost Display 1075 1075 1075 1075 1075 1075 1075 1075
Reminder 162 162 162 162 162 162 162 162
Voice Guided Alarm 163 163 163 163 163 163 163 163
Voice Guided Reminder 164 164 164 164 164 164 164 164
Blind Transfer to Mail Box (VMS) 1078 1078 1078 1078 1078 1078 1078 1078
Message Wait Set 1076 1076 1076 1076 1076 1076 1076 1076
Message Wait Retrieval 1077 1077 1077 1077 1077 1077 1077 1077
User Definable Fields 1096 1096 1096 1096 1096 1096 1096 1096
Emergency Number 1 102 999 911 911 100 111 9999 15
Emergency Number 2 108 115 112 115
Emergency Number 3 144 911 16
Emergency Number 4 08 911
Emergency Number 5 112
Feature Maldives Mauritius Mexico Namibia Nepal New
Zealand
Oman Pakistan
Matrix
90 Eternity V8 System Manual
Emergency Number 6
Emergency Number 7
Emergency Number 8
Emergency Number 9
Emergency Number 10
Feature Philippines Poland Russia Singapore South
Africa
Spain Sri
Lanka
Sudan
Enter SE Mode 1#91 1#91 1#91 1#91 1#91 1#91 1#91 1#91
Enter SA Mode 1#92 1#92 1#92 1#92 1#92 1#92 1#92 1#92
Call Pick Up-General 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
Call Pick Up-Selective 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12
Auto Call Back 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
Cancel Auto Call Back 102 102 102 102 102 102 102 102
Redial 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7
Auto Redial 17 17 17 17 17 17 17 17
Cancel Auto Redial 1070 1070 1070 1070 1070 1070 1070 1070
Personal Directory Programming 1071 1071 1071 1071 1071 1071 1071 1071
Directory Dialing (Global + Personal) 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8
Operator Dialing 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9
Call Forward/Call Follow Me 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13
Dynamic Lock 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14
Hot Line 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15
Alarm 161 161 161 161 161 161 161 161
Do Not Disturb 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18
Interrupt Request 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
Barge-In 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
Raid 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
Trunk Reservation 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6
Call Toggle 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Conference- 3 Party 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Trunk - to - Trunk Transfer # # # # # # # #
Conference-Multi Party 19 19 19 19 19 19 19 19
Call Park 115 115 115 115 115 115 115 115
Retrieve Parked Call 116 116 116 116 116 116 116 116
Room Monitor 1073 1073 1073 1073 1073 1073 1073 1073
Last Caller Recall 1092 1092 1092 1092 1092 1092 1092 1092
Voice Help 1090 1090 1090 1090 1090 1090 1090 1090
Walk-In Class Of Service 111 111 111 111 111 111 110 111
Change User Password 114 114 114 114 114 114 114 114
Page Zone 1074 1074 1074 1074 1074 1074 1074 1074
DISA Log In Code 1079 1079 1079 1079 1079 1079 1079 1079
Trunk Release Code (Trunk-to-Trunk
Speech)
## ## ## ## ## ## ## ##
Cancel All Feature 1051 1051 1051 1051 1051 1051 1051 1051
Selective Port Access Code 69 69 69 69 69 69 69 69
Flashing on Trunk * * * * * * * *
Feature Maldives Mauritius Mexico Namibia Nepal New
Zealand
Oman Pakistan
Matrix
Eternity V8 System Manual 91
Change User Status 104 104 104 104 104 104 104 104
Account Code by Number 1058 1058 1058 1058 1058 1058 1058 1058
Account Code by Name 1059 1059 1059 1059 1059 1059 1059 1059
Back Ground Music 1099 1099 1099 1099 1099 1099 1099 1099
Meet Me Paging 1093 1093 1093 1093 1093 1093 1093 1093
Hot Desk 1091 1091 1091 1091 1091 1091 1091 1091
DND Override 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
Missed Calls 1097 1097 1097 1097 1097 1097 1097 1097
VMS Live Call Screening ON/OFF
Request
1094 1094 1094 1094 1094 1094 1094 1094
VMS Conversation Recording 1095 1095 1095 1095 1095 1095 1095 1095
Forced Release #* #* #* #* #* #* #* #*
Hold Flash Flash Flash Flash Flash Flash Flash Flash
Live Call Supervision 1098 1098 1098 1098 1098 1098 1098 1098
Forced Answer 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
Maid In 1054 1054 1054 1054 1054 1054 1054 1054
Minibar Details 1056 1056 1056 1056 1056 1056 1056 1056
Mute 1052 1052 1052 1052 1052 1052 1052 1052
Change Time Zone 1053 1053 1053 1053 1053 1053 1053 1053
Self Ring Test 1057 1057 1057 1057 1057 1057 1057 1057
Set Chain Party 1050 1050 1050 1050 1050 1050 1050 1050
SA Command 1072 1072 1072 1072 1072 1072 1072 1072
Second Trunk Access Code # # # # # # # #
Floor Service 38 38 38 38 38 38 38 38
Keypad Lock DKP
CLIR 103 103 103 103 103 103 103 103
Call Cost Display 1075 1075 1075 1075 1075 1075 1075 1075
Reminder 162 162 162 162 162 162 162 162
Voice Guided Alarm 163 163 163 163 163 163 163 163
Voice Guided Reminder 164 164 164 164 164 164 164 164
Blind Transfer to Mail Box (VMS) 1078 1078 1078 1078 1078 1078 1078 1078
Message Wait Set 1076 1076 1076 1076 1076 1076 1076 1076
Message Wait Retrieval 1077 1077 1077 1077 1077 1077 1077 1077
User Definable Fields 1096 1096 1096 1096 1096 1096 1096 1096
Emergency Number 1 117 997 02 999 10111 091 119 110
Emergency Number 2 911 999 03 995 10117 061 110 112
Emergency Number 3 112 998 01 112 10111 080 111 113
Emergency Number 4 112 112 911 112 085
Emergency Number 5 112
Emergency Number 6
Emergency Number 7
Emergency Number 8
Emergency Number 9
Emergency Number 10
Feature Sweden Taiwan Thailand Turkey UAE UK USA
Enter SE Mode 1#91 1#91 1#91 1#91 1#91 1#91 1#91
Feature Philippines Poland Russia Singapore South
Africa
Spain Sri
Lanka
Sudan
Matrix
92 Eternity V8 System Manual
Enter SA Mode 1#92 1#92 1#92 1#92 1#92 1#92 1#92
Call Pick Up-General 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
Call Pick Up-Selective 12 12 12 12 12 12 12
Auto Call Back 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
Cancel Auto Call Back 102 102 102 102 102 102 102
Redial 7 7 7 7 7 7 7
Auto Redial 17 17 17 17 17 17 17
Cancel Auto Redial 1070 1070 1070 1070 1070 1070 1070
Personal Directory Programming 1071 1071 1071 1071 1071 1071 1071
Directory Dialing (Global + Personal) 8 8 8 8 8 8 6
Operator Dialing 9 0 9 9 9 9 0
Call Forward/Call Follow Me 13 13 13 13 13 13 13
Dynamic Lock 14 14 14 14 14 14 14
Hot Line 15 15 15 106 15 15 15
Alarm 161 161 161 161 161 161 161
Do Not Disturb 18 18 18 18 18 18 18
Interrupt Request 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
Barge-In 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
Raid 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
Trunk Reservation 6 6 6 6 6 6 6
Call Toggle 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Conference- 3 Party 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Trunk - to - Trunk Transfer # # # # # # #
Conference-Multi Party 19 19 110 19 19 19 19
Call Park 115 115 115 115 115 115 115
Retrieve Parked Call 116 116 116 116 116 116 116
Room Monitor 1073 1073 1073 1073 1073 1073 1073
Last Caller Recall 1092 1092 1092 1092 1092 1092 1092
Voice Help 1090 1090 1090 1090 1090 1090 1090
Walk-In Class Of Service 111 111 111 111 111 111 111
Change User Password 114 114 114 114 114 114 114
Page Zone 1074 1074 1074 1074 1074 1074 1074
DISA Log In Code 1079 1079 1079 1079 1079 1079 1079
Trunk Release Code (Trunk-to-Trunk Speech) ## ## ## ## ## ## ##
Cancel All Feature 1051 1051 1051 1051 1051 1051 1051
Selective Port Access Code 69 69 69 69 69 69 69
Flashing on Trunk * * * * * * *
Change User Status 104 104 104 104 104 104 104
Account Code by Number 1058 1058 1058 1058 1058 1058 1058
Account Code by Name 1059 1059 1059 1059 1059 1059 1059
Back Ground Music 1099 1099 1099 1099 1099 1099 1099
Meet Me Paging 1093 1093 1093 1093 1093 1093 1093
Hot Desk 1091 1091 1091 1091 1091 1091 1091
DND Override 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
Missed Calls 1097 1097 1097 1097 1097 1097 1097
VMS Live Call Screening ON/OFF Request 1094 1094 1094 1094 1094 1094 1094
VMS Conversation Recording 1095 1095 1095 1095 1095 1095 1095
Forced Release #* #* #* #* #* #* #*
Feature Sweden Taiwan Thailand Turkey UAE UK USA
Matrix
Eternity V8 System Manual 93
Relevant Topics:
1. OG Trunk Bundle Group 474
2. Emergency Dialing 359
3. Default Settings 242
4. Digital Key Phone-Soft Keys Programming 264
5. Flexible Numbers 369
6. Digital Output Port (DOP) 278
7. QSIG 508
=X=X=
Hold Flash Flash Flash Flash Flash Flash Flash
Live Call Supervision 1098 1098 1098 1098 1098 1098 1098
Forced Answer 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
Maid In 1054 1054 1054 1054 1054 1054 1054
Minibar Details 1056 1056 1056 1056 1056 1056 1056
Mute 1052 1052 1052 1052 1052 1052 1052
Change Time Zone 1053 1053 1053 1053 1053 1053 1053
Self Ring Test 1057 1057 1057 1057 1057 1057 1057
Set Chain Party 1050 1050 1050 1050 1050 1050 1050
SA Command 1072 1072 1072 1072 1072 1072 1072
Second Trunk Access Code # # # # # # #
Floor Service 38 38 38 38 38 38 38
Keypad Lock DKP
CLIR 103 103 103 103 103 103 103
Call Cost Display 1075 1075 1075 1075 1075 1075 1075
Reminder 162 162 162 162 162 162 162
Voice Guided Alarm 163 163 163 163 163 163 163
Voice Guided Reminder 164 164 164 164 164 164 164
Blind Transfer to Mail Box (VMS) 1078 1078 1078 1078 1078 1078 1078
Message Wait Set 1076 1076 1076 1076 1076 1076 1076
Message Wait Retrieval 1077 1077 1077 1077 1077 1077 1077
User Definable Fields 1096 1096 1096 1096 1096 1096 1096
Emergency Number 1 112 110 191 155 999 999 911
Emergency Number 2 119 1669 112 998 112 112
Emergency Number 3 199 110 997
Emergency Number 4 112
Emergency Number 5
Emergency Number 6
Emergency Number 7
Emergency Number 8
Emergency Number 9
Emergency Number 10
Feature Sweden Taiwan Thailand Turkey UAE UK USA
Matrix
94 Eternity V8 System Manual
Account Codes
What is this?
Account Code is a unique number. This code can be assigned individually to each client, to know the call details for
that client.
Maximum 999 Account Codes are possible.
Suppose an advertising firm is using Eternity. The firm has 50 clients. Firm makes 100 calls in a day, majority of which
are for their clients only. These calls include calls made to other parties for accomplishing the job of clients as well as
to clients themselves. The firm wishes to find how many calls it has made for or to Client X, Client Y and Client Z.
Eternity helps the firm in analyzing this.
Each Account Code can have a name. Account name is not compulsory.
When the user dials trunk access code, the first name programmed in the Account code directory is displayed.
User can enter directly the Account code or navigate the directory and make a selection.

How to use it?
Take a Paper Pad.
Draw a table having two columns.
Write down the names of all your clients in the first column and assign an account code to each of them in the second
column. This code is of three digits (001-999).
This list should be circulated to everybody in the organizations making outgoing calls for their clients. The table would
look like:
Now when any user makes a call for client X or to client X, he should dial the account code for client X once he is in
speech with client X. This is explained in steps given below:
Where,
Account Code is from 001 to 999.
Enter Account Name as explain in steps given below:
Account Name is of maximum 12 characters, terminate with #*.
If the caller has dialed a wrong account code, he can repeat the procedure to correct it. The system overwrites the last
account code.
Client Name Client A/c Code
ABC Co. Ltd.
XYZ Co. Ltd.
:
001
122
:
01 Lift the Handset. Dial tone
02 Dial the outside Number. Speech with called party.
03 Dial Flash. Called party gets on hold. Caller gets feature tone.
04 Dial 1058-Account Code. Speech with called party.
01 Lift the Handset. Dial tone
02 Dial the outside Number. Speech with called party.
03 Dial Flash. Called party gets on hold. Caller gets feature tone.
04 Dial 1059-Account Name. Speech with called party.
Eternity
Calling
Party
Called
Party
Set Account Code
Set Account Name
During Speech dial,
Flash-1058-A/c Code
During Speech dial,
Flash-1059-A/c Name
Client Name Client A/c Code
ABC Co. Ltd. 001
XYZ Co. Ltd. 122
TUV Pvt . Lt d. 105
: :
PSTN
Matrix
Eternity V8 System Manual 95
How to program?
Use the following command to program the Account Name for the Account Code:
4851-1-Account Code-Account Name
4851-2-Account Code-Account Code-Account Name
4851-*-Account Name
Where,
Account Code is from 001 to 999.
Account Name is of 12 characters. Terminate Account Name with #*.
The user can take the printout (SMDR Report) of the calls made for a particular client using this account code. The
user should use filter command to get the report.
Important Points:
Account Code shall be asked only if Forced Account Code Flag is enabled in topics Station Advanced Feature
Template and Trunk Feature Template.
In other cases Account Code need not be forced.
Account Code will not be asked while making internal call or using a feature.
Account code is asked only in case of external calls.
Account Code if enabled on both station and trunk, will be asked irrespective of dialing method viz. Global
Abbreviated dialing, Personal abbreviated dialing, LCR or selective trunk access. However, if the number is dialed
using selective trunk access and if Forced Account Code flag is enabled on the selected trunk, the system will dial
the number using Store and Forward dialing.
In case of abbreviated dialing or direct dialing, etc. if it is known at any stage that the number cannot be dialed
because the user has not dialed Account Code, an error message is displayed.
Relevant Topics:
1. Station Message Detail Recording 574
2. Station Advanced Feature Template 565
3. Trunk Feature Template 680
4. Class of Service (COS) 200
=X=X=
Matrix
96 Eternity V8 System Manual
Alarms
What's this?
The Eternity is installed at various places like Hospitals, Hotels, Motels and other Corporate and Medium scale
offices. The Alarm feature is an important feature widely used by most of the customers. Using this feature you can
ask Eternity to remind you at some specific time.
Refer chapter System Parameters for setting the mode of Eternity and refer separate manual for more details about
Hotel/Motel features.
However, for all types of reports, it is mentioned 'Hotel/Motel reports', same commands are applicable to assign
destination port and get alarm reports for other applications also. Refer separate manual for Hotel/Motel Applications
for more details on how to get reports.
Various features supported by Eternity are mentioned below:
Alarm setting
Voice guided alarm
Remote alarm - Personalized/Automated
Remote Voice guided alarm
Alarm Status report
Scheduled Alarm Report
Alarm/Reminder Snooze
Alarms/Reminder Notification Type
Alarm Setting
You can set following Alarm Types for the specific time:
Once Only
Daily
Set the Alarm Type as 'Once Only' when you want to use the alarm call only for one time, at the set time. The alarm
will be deleted from the Eternity when you acknowledge it.
Set the Alarm Type as 'Daily', when you want to use the alarm call, everyday at the set time. Doing this, you need not
to configure the 'time' daily. The alarm will be deleted from the Eternity only when you (Guest/Station user) cancel it
using the suitable command.
At the set time, your station starts ringing. In case you do not reply the alarm call because of any reason, the station
will ring for maximum of three attempts (if number of attempts is programmed as '3'). However after three attempts, if
you could not reply the alarm call, the Eternity will place the alarm call on the 'Operator station' so that the Operator
can inform the guest about the alarm call. The number of alarm attempts and interval between alarms are
programmable. This type of flexibility would be very much useful in the event, if the guest could not attend the alarm
call as he was in washroom.
Dial the digits of command before expiry of 'Inter Digit Wait Timer'. Else you will get 'error tone'. The Eternity supports
maximum of '960' Alarms.
Alarm settings will be retained even during power down of the Eternity.
Alarm settings will be retained even during system upgrades of the Eternity.
The alarm calls will be stored in the Hotel-Motel Activity Log. Refer separate Manual for Hotel Applications to know
how to refer the log.
Multiple Alarms: You can use the alarm setting command repeatedly to set different alarms.
Using DKP:
Using DSS Key/Menu:
To set Once Only/Daily Alarm Call:
Press the DSS key for 'Alarm'.
Enter Time in HH:MM
Select 'Once Only' or 'Daily'.
Press 'Enter' key.
You get a confirmatory text message and confirmation tone.
Go Idle or you get dial tone after 3 seconds
To cancel Alarm Calls:
Press 'Alarm' Key.
Select 'Cancel All'.
Press Enter Key.
Matrix
Eternity V8 System Manual 97
Using Commands:
To set Alarm call:
Pick up the handset.
Dial 161.
Enter Time in HH:MM (24-hours format)
Dial 1 for Once Only or Dial 2 for Daily.
Press 'Enter' key.
You get a confirmatory text message and confirmation tone.
Replace Handset on the cradle or you get dial tone after 3 seconds
To cancel Alarm:
Pick up the handset.
Dial 161
Dial #
You get a confirmatory text message and confirmation tone.
Replace Handset on the cradle or you get dial tone after 3 seconds
Using SLT:
To set Alarm Call:
Pick up the handset.
Dial 161.
Dial HH:MM
Dial 1 for Once Only or Dial 2 for Daily.
You get confirmation tone.
Replace the Handset on the cradle.
Default = Once Only.
To cancel Alarm Calls:
Pick up the handset.
Dial 161
Dial #
You get confirmation tone.
Replace the handset.
Where,
HH = 00-23 hours and MM= 00-59 minutes
Thus, Dial 161-HHMM-1 for setting 'Once Only' alarm, Dial 161-HHMM-2 for setting 'Daily' alarm
Example:
From SLT:
Dial 161-1630-1 to set Alarm as 'Once Only' alarm. The alarm will be cancelled after the alarm is served.
Dial 161-1630-2 to set Alarm as 'Daily' alarm. The alarm call will be place daily at 16.30 hours. It will be cancelled only if
the Operator cancels it.
Voice Guided Alarm
You can set the Alarm by following the appropriate voice prompts to set or cancel the Voice Guided Alarms. Refer
chapter Voice Message Applications for using and recording voice messages. For this feature to work, the software
should support it for the VMS card installed in the Eternity.
Using DKP:
Using DSS Key/Menu:
To set Voice Guided Alarm:
Press DSS Key assigned to Voice Guided Alarm call.
Follow the Voice Mail System prompts to set/cancel Voice Guided Alarm.
To set/cancel Voice Guided Alarm calls:
Pick up the handset.
Dial 163
Follow Voice Mail System Prompts.
Replace Handset.
Matrix
98 Eternity V8 System Manual
Using Commands:
To set/cancel Voice Guided Alarm calls:
Pick up the handset.
Dial 163
Follow Voice Mail System Prompts.
Replace Handset.
Thus, Dial 163-Follow VMS Prompts
Using SLT:
To set/cancel Voice Guided Alarm Call:
Pick up the handset
Dial 163
Follow Voice Mail System Prompts.
Replace the handset.
Remote Alarm-Personalized/Automated
The System Administrator can program the alarm on the station of the guest or user. This is called Remote alarm/
Wake-up alarm.
The alarm can be set for specific room number.
The time is entered as 'Hours-Minutes' as HHMM (HH = Hours and MM = Minutes).
The alarm type can be selected as 'Once only/daily' as required by the user of the station.
The alarm category can be set as 'Personal or Automated' as explained below:
Personalized Alarm: If the Alarm is set for this category, the Alarm call will be placed, on the 'Operator' station and
operator station will ring for 'Alarm/Reminder ring timer'. Now following options are possible:
If the operator does not answer the Alarm call, the call will be repeated for programmed number of Alarm/
Reminder Call Attempts at the interval of 'Alarm/Reminder attempt interval'. If still the operator does not reply the
call, the system will place the call, directly on the guest station and the guest station will ring for 'Alarm Ring Timer'.
If the guest station does not answer the call after expiry of ' Alarm/Reminder call attempts' , the system will notify
to the operator about 'No Reply' event only 'Once'. The operator station will ring for 'Alarm Ring Timer'.
If the 'Operator' station answers the Alarm call, the guest station will ring for 'Alarm Ring Timer' and when guest
answers the call, the operator can greet the guest and inform him/her about the wakeup call. But if the guest
station does not answer the call till expiry of Alarm Ring Timer, the operator station will get error tone and the
operator personnel will try for waking up the guest by sending some one to the guest room.
Automated Alarm: If the Alarm is set for this category, the Alarm call is placed on the Guest station and the guest
station will ring at the set time for Alarm/Reminder Ring timer. Now following options will be considered:
If the Snooze is 'Disable' and the guest answers the call, further call processing will be as per 'Alarm Notification
Type' programmed for the guest extension. (Refer chapter Station Advanced Feature Template for assigning
Alarm Notification Type). If the guest does not answer the call till 'Number of call attempts' is exhausted, the
system will notify to 'Operator' only 'Once' and the call is placed on the 'Operator' station. The Operator station will
ring for 'Alarm/Reminder Ring Timer'.
If the Snooze is 'Enable' and the guest answers the call and acknowledges the call by pressing digit '0', further call
processing will be as per 'Alarm Notification Type' programmed for the guest extension. (Refer chapter Station
Advanced Feature Template for assigning Alarm Notification Type). If the guest does not answer the call and does
not acknowledge the call by pressing digit '0', till 'Number of call attempts' is exhausted, the system will notify to
'Operator' only 'Once' and the call is placed on the 'Operator' station. The Operator station will ring for 'Alarm/
Reminder Ring Timer'. (For details of Snooze parameters, refer topic 'Alarm/Reminder Snooze' in this chapter).
Thus, the parameters Number of Alarm Attempts and Alarm Attempt Interval are applicable for both Alarm Types;
'Personalized' and 'Automated'.
After setting the alarm, the display on the user station will be as per the Mode of Eternity configured: Hotel Mode or
Enterprise Mode. Refer chapter System Parameters to select the 'Mode'.
The DSS key with LED, can also be assigned to this feature. On pressing the DSS key, LED will be turned 'ON' and
on pressing again it will be turned 'OFF'. Refer chapter Digital Key Phone-Soft Keys Programming for assigning the
DSS key.
The Eternity supports maximum of 960 remote alarms.
Notes:
The alarm feature with the Personal Alarm category will work even if the DND is set on the station.
The alarm feature with the Personal Alarm category will work even if the Call Forward is set on the station.
Matrix
Eternity V8 System Manual 99
Using DKP:
Using DSS key/Menu:
To set Remote Alarm:
Press the 'Remote Alarm' key.
Enter the Room Number.
Enter Time in HH:MM
Select 'Once Only' or 'Daily'.
Press 'Enter' key.
Select 'Personalized' or 'Automated'.
Press 'Enter' key to set Remote Alarm'
You get a confirmation tone and a text message with the room number for which the alarm is set.
Go Idle or you get dial tone after 3 seconds
To cancel Remote Alarm:
Press 'Remote Alarm' Key.
Enter Room Number.
Select 'Cancel All'.
Press Enter Key.
Using Commands:
To set Remote Alarm for the guest:
Pick up the handset.
Dial 1072-003.
Enter the Room Number Number.
Enter Time in HH:MM
Dial 1 for Once Only or Dial 2 for Daily
Dial 1 for Personalized or Dial 2 for Automated.
Press 'Enter' key to set Remote Alarm.
You get a confirmation tone and a text message with the room number for which the remote alarm is set.
Replace Handset on the cradle or you get dial tone after 3 seconds
For example,
To set 'Daily' alarm at 16.30 hours as Automated alarm on Station '3103', SA will dial:
1072-003-3103-1630-2-2
To cancel Remote Alarm:
Pick up the handset.
Dial 1072-003
Enter the Room Number.
Dial #
You get a confirmation tone and a text message with the room number for which the remote alarm is canceled.
Replace Handset on the cradle or you get dial tone after 3 seconds
Thus,
Dial 1072-003-Room No.-# (To cancel the Remote Alarm)
Using SLT:
Same as mentioned in above topic 'Using Commands'.
Note for Display of Remote alarm:
After setting suitable alarm type and alarm category, the DKP gives Confirmation tone. The display includes, '*' if 'Daily'
option is selected and includes '+' if 'Personalized' option is selected. If options 'Once Only' or 'Automated' is selected, '*'
or '+' will not be displayed. For example, display on EON42/48 for Eternity, will be as:
Alarm Set XXXX HH:MM (if 'Once Only' and 'Automated' type Remote Alarm is set on the station XXXX).
Alarm* Set XXXX HH:MM (if 'Daily' type Remote Alarm is set on the station XXXX).
Alarm+ Set XXXX HH:MM (if 'Personalized' category for Remote Alarm is set on the station XXXX).
Alarm*+ Set XXXX HH:MM (if Personalized and Daily type for Remote Alarm is set on the station XXXX).
Thus,
Dial 1072-003-Room No.-HHMM-1-1 (for Once Only and Personalized)
Dial 1072-003-Room No.-HHMM-1-2 (for Once Only and Automated)
Dial 1072-003-Room No.-HHMM-2-1 (for Daily and Personalized)
Dial 1072-003-Room No.-HHMM-2-2 (for Daily and Automated)
Matrix
100 Eternity V8 System Manual
How to program?
Alarm/Reminder Ring Timer: This is a time for which the station (extension or operator) will get alarm/reminder ring
when alarm/reminder call is placed on the station.
Use following command to program the Alarm/Reminder Ring Timer:
2201-Seconds
Where,
Seconds = 001-255 seconds.
Default = 045 seconds.
Number of Alarm Attempts: This parameter signifies the number of times the Alarm call will be placed on the station
before notifying the operator. SE should program this parameter if default value need to be changed.
Use following command to program the Number of Alarm Attempts:
2202-Number of Alarm Attempts
Where,
Number of Alarm attempts = 1 to 9.
Default = 3.
Alarm Attempt Interval: This parameter signifies the time between subsequent Alarm attempts. SE should program this
parameter if default value need to be changed.
Use following command to program the Alarm Attempt Interval:
2203- Alarm Attempt Interval
Where,
Alarm Attempt Interval = 1 to 9.
Default = 5 Minutes.
Note:
'Number of Alarm Attempts' and 'Alarm Attempt Interval' will also be applicable when Alarm category is programmed
as 'Personalized'.
Remote Voice Guided Alarm:
System Administrator (SA) can set/cancel the Remote Voice Guided Alarm on the User station by following the
appropriate voice prompts. This is called 'Remote voice guided alarm'. Refer chapter Voice Message Applications for
prompts.
The DSS key with LED, can also be assigned to this feature. On pressing the DSS key, LED will be turned 'ON' and
on pressing again it will be turned 'OFF'. Refer chapter Digital Key Phone-Soft Keys Programming for assigning the
DSS key.
How to use it?
Using DSSkey/Menu:
To set/cancel Remote Voice Guided Alarm:
Press DSS Key assigned to Remote Voice Guided Alarm.
Follow the Voice Mail System prompts to set/cancel alarm.
Using Commands:
To set/cancel Remote Voice Guided Alarm:
Pick up the handset.
Dial 1072-034
Follow Voice Mail System Prompts.
Replace Handset.
Thus,
Dial 1072-034-Follow VMS Prompts.
Using SLT:
Same as mentioned in above topic 'Using Commands'.
Matrix
Eternity V8 System Manual 101
Alarm Status Report
The SA can get the report of alarms set on the stations by issuing SA command from DKP/SLT..
The DSS key (without LED) assigned for this feature can also be used to get the alarm status report. Refer chapter
Digital Key Phone-Soft Keys Programming for assigning the LED.
For getting the report SE will be required to assign destination port to the Report.
How to use it?
SE should assign destination port for the 'Hotel/Motel Report' using the command:
Use following command to assign destination port for the 'Hotel/Motel Report':
3701-Flag
Where,
Default = None.
SA Commands for Alarm status report:
Using DKP:
Pick up the handset
Dial 1072-913
SA will get display about printing event of Alarm Status Report. Refer Notes below
Replace the handset.
Notes:
The * is printed if Daily Alarm is set and + is printed if Personal Alarm is set for the station/room.
For multiple alarms, the report will be printed in increasing order of room number with increasing order of time.
Refer the report at the end of chapter.

Using SLT:
When the SA issues the SA command for this feature from SLT, Alarm Status Report will be printed on the destination
port assigned.
Scheduled Alarm Report
The SA can get the alarm report at a fixed programmed time everyday. This feature is called Scheduled Alarm
Report.
This feature is frequently used for where the alarm report will be printed regularly even if the administrator or
receptionist is busy with other assignments at the time of report.
The SA can enable this feature using SA command from DKP and program the scheduled time for the report. SE
should first assign the port for Hotel Reports using the command.
On enabling this feature, the Eternity will print Alarm Report on the destination port assigned for Hotel Reports.
SA can also use the DSS key assigned by SE, to enable the report and to program the scheduled time. Refer chapter
Digital Key Phone-Soft Keys Programming for more details. (Feature number = 118 and 119).
How to use it?
SE should assign destination port for the 'Hotel/Motel Report' using the command:
Use following command to assign destination port for the 'Hotel/Motel Report':
3701-Flag
Where,
Default = None
Flag Meaning
0 None
1 COM1
2 COM2
3 Printer
Flag Meaning
0 None
1 COM1
2 COM2
3 Printer
Matrix
102 Eternity V8 System Manual
SA Commands for Scheduled Alarm Report:
Enable/Disable scheduled alarm report
If SA has enabled this parameter, the system will print Alarm Report on the destination port assigned for Hotel Reports at
the scheduled time.
Using DSS key/Menu:
To Enable/Disable scheduled Alarm report:
Pick up the hand set.
Dial DSS key for 'scheduled Alarm report'
Select the option 'Enable/Disable'
Press Enter key
Scheduled Alarm report feature will be 'ON' or 'OFF'
Replace the handset.
Using Commands:
To Enable/Disable scheduled Alarm report:
Pick up the hand set.
Dial 1072-036
On getting feature tone, Dial '1' to 'Enable' or '0' to 'Disable'
Press Enter key
Scheduled Alarm report feature will be 'ON' or 'OFF'
Replace the handset.
User can get or not get the Alarm report at scheduled time on destination port.
Using SLT:
To enable Scheduled Alarm Report using SLT:
Go OFF-Hook.
Dial 1072-036.
On getting feature tone Dial '1'.
User can get the Alarm report at scheduled time on destination port.
To disable Scheduled Alarm Report using SLT:
Go OFF-Hook.
Dial 1072-038.
On getting feature tone Dial '0'.
User can not get the Alarm report.
Thus,
Dial 1072-036-1 (To enable the Scheduled Alarm Report)
Dial 1072-036-0 (To disable the Scheduled Alarm Report)
Default = Disable.
Scheduled Time for Alarm Report
SA should enable the Scheduled Alarm report to use this feature. This parameter signifies the time at which the Eternity
will print Alarm Report daily.
Using DSS key/Menu:
To program Time for scheduled Alarm report:
Pick the handset.
Press DSS key for scheduled time for Alarm report
Enter the scheduled time in HHMM.
Replace handset. Scheduled Time will be programmed for Alarm Report.
Using Commands:
Pick the handset.
Dial 1072-037 for scheduled time for Alarm report
Enter the scheduled time in HHMM (from 00:00 to 23:59 hours, default = 00:00).
Scheduled Time will be programmed for Alarm Report.
Replace handset. Scheduled Time will be programmed for Alarm Report.
Using SLT:
Matrix
Eternity V8 System Manual 103
Same as mentioned in above topic 'Using Commands'.
Thus,
Dial 1072-037-Scheduled time for Alarm report
Where,
Scheduled time for Alarm report = 00:00 to 23:59 Hours.
Default =00:00
Alarm/Reminder Snooze
Snooze Alarm/Reminder is an Alarm/Reminder that is repeated many times. The Eternity supports this feature which
is very much useful for Hotel/Motels, Hospitals and Offices.
SE should enable/disable the Snooze Alarm/Reminder for the system. The feature cannot be set individually for each
station. Thus if SE has enabled the Snooze, the Alarm/Reminder call will be placed as Snooze Alarm/Reminder on
the station.
If Snooze Alarm/Reminder is enabled, the system gives Alarm/Reminder ring to the station as many times as the
'Number of Alarm Attempts' programmed.
The time interval between two Alarm/Reminder calls of the snooze, called 'Alarm Attempt Interval' is programmable.
A station gets Alarm/Reminder ring for 'Alarm/Reminder Ring Timer' which is programmable. If a station user does not
answer the Alarm/Reminder ring even after the 'Number of Alarm Attempts' is reduced to zero, the system gives ring
to the operator station. The operator station rings for 'Alarm/Reminder Ring Timer'.
Acknowledging Snooze Alarm/Reminder
If snooze Alarm/Reminder is enabled, the station user should acknowledge the Alarm/Reminder call by going OFF-
Hook and following message on LCD display of the DKP for pressing '0'. If the Snooze Alarm/Reminder call is not
acknowledged, the Alarm/Reminder call will be placed on the same station as many times as the 'Number of Alarm
Attempts', programmed. If the station does not acknowledge Alarm/Reminder call till expiry of 'Number of Alarm
Attempts', the Alarm/Reminder call will be placed on operator's group assigned to the station.
Note for SE/Installing person:
It is recommended to SE that, while installing the Eternity, refer chapter Voice Message Applications to include the
phrase "Please press 0 to acknowledge the Alarm/Reminder' as voice prompt. This is used to acknowledge the
Alarm/Reminder call, placed on the station as a Snooze Alarm/Reminder.
How to program?
SE should configure following parameters for Snooze Alarm/Reminder calls:
Enable/disable Snooze Alarm/Reminder:
Use the following command to enable/disable the Snooze Alarm/Reminder:
2204-Code
Where,
By default, Snooze Alarm/Reminder is disabled.
Snooze Attempts:
The command for parameter 'Number of Alarm Attempts - 2202' programmed is also applicable for number of Snooze
attempts.
Snooze attempt interval;
The command for parameter 'Alarm Attempt Interval - 2203' is also applicable for Snooze attempt interval.
Alarm/Reminder Notification Type:
When the user answers the Alarm/Reminder ring, he gets Music on Hold or Voice messages or External Music
(AOP). Alarm/Reminder call can also be placed on the Department Group.
Alarm/Reminder Response depends upon the programming of 'Alarm/Reminder Notification Type' in Station Advance
Feature Template. Please refer Station Advanced Feature Template for more details.
By placing the call on the department group (stations), the user (guest) can be greeted differently. One guest can be
played back greetings followed by date and time, the other can be played back greetings, date and time, humidity,
temperature, etc. Thus each station can be assigned different routing group as per the requirement. This is
programmed as 'Alarm/Reminder Notification Routing Group' in Station Advanced Feature Template. If all the stations
Code Meaning
0 Disable
1 Enable
Matrix
104 Eternity V8 System Manual
of the Routing Group are busy then MoH is played, provided Alarm/Reminder call is not routable due to any other
reason e.g. Group empty etc. (MoH can be internal music or through AOP).
SE can program the routing group number (01-33) in the Alarm/Reminder Notification Routing Group.
While the Alarm/Reminder is served, if the station is 'Busy' or is in 'Standby' mode, the Alarm Reminder call will be
placed as per the flag set for the command for "Alarm/Reminder notification to Operator when Station is stand-by" in
chapter System Parameters as mentioned below:
If this flag is enabled, the call will be placed on operator.
If the flag is disabled, the call will be placed on the station after the station goes in idle state after waiting for 'XXXX'
to be 'Idle'.
When the call is placed on 'Operator' the Alarm/Reminder call will be logged in the Hotel-Motel Activity Log. Refer
separate Manual for Hotel Applications to know how to refer the log.
Important Points:
As a summary, while using the Alarm and Snooze features, take care of following points:
Snooze is applicable only for automated alarm calls. For personalized reminder calls, snooze will not apply even if
enabled.
Alarm Notification Type is applicable only for Automated Alarm and Automated Reminder calls. (Alarm Notification
type determines further call routing once call is answered by the station user. It is assigned to station via station
advance feature template)
Number of alarm attempt and Alarm Attempt Interval are applicable for automated alarms and personalized alarm.
When all the Alarm attempts are exhausted, the system will notify to the Operator, of non-acknowledgement of Alarm
call
The Alarm calls will be printed in the 'Hotel-Motel Activity Logs'.
Refer chapter System Parameters for command to set Hotel Mode or Enterprise Mode of Eternity.
Please refer separate manual for more details about Hotel Applications.
Relevant Topics:
1. Voice Message Applications 708
2. Station Advanced Feature Template 565
3. Real Time Clock (RTC) 520
4. Reminder 521
5. System Parameters 642

Wakeup/Alarm Report AS ON 02-03-2009(Mon) AT 11:40
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Room# Phone# Wakeup D P Room# Phone# Wakeup D P
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3991 3001 06:00 + 3991 3002 06:30
3992 3003 06:10 * + 3992 3004 06:05 *
3993 3006 07:00 3994 3007 10:00 *
3994 3008 09:00 + 3995 3009 09:10
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
* indicates Daily Alarm and + indicates Personal Alarm Page : 1
---End of Report---
=X=X=
Matrix
Eternity V8 System Manual 105
Alternate Number Dialing
Whats this?
The Eternity tries alternate numbers if the dialed number is busy.
We need not keep dialing the alternate numbers. Instead we simply need to Redial the number or set Auto-redial for
the number. Doing so, the system tries alternate numbers. If Auto-Redial is requested, the system gives you the ring
when the number goes through.
How to use it?
The Station user simply has to Redial or Auto-Redial the last number. The system automatically tries Alternate numbers.
How it works?
Global Directory is used to accomplish this feature.
An Alternate group number should be assigned to a number in the Global Directory.
An Alternate group number can be from 000 to 255.
Suppose two numbers programmed at index 100 and 101 are to be used as Alternate numbers then both the
numbers should be programmed as one group.
Doing so, when a station user dials an external number, the system checks for it in the global directory. If the number
is busy and if the user tries Redial then the system automatically opts for Alternate Number dialing. It tries next
number available in the Alternate group. If this number is also busy, it tries next number in the group. All the numbers
are tried in this way. This continues as long as the user tries redial.
If the user tries Auto-Redial, the system tries for all the numbers in the group one by one. If any of the number is
through, it gives the ring to the caller. If all the numbers are busy in the group then the system sets Auto-Redial for
the last number dialed and waits for RBT from the called end. It informs the caller when the call is through by giving a
ring.
For example, ABC Ltd. has four telephone numbers viz. 2640459, 2631235, 2635589 and 2565590 and all are to be
used as Alternate Numbers then these four numbers should be programmed in the global directory from index 110 to
113. All these numbers should be assigned one Alternate group say 001. Doing so, all these numbers act as an Alternate
Numbers for each other. Whenever a user dials any of these numbers and tries Redial or Auto-Redial, Alternate Number
dialing logic gets activated i.e. when a user dials 2640459 and if it is busy and if the user tries redial then the system
automatically dials 2631235. This is repeated every time a redial is tried.
If no alternate number is available for a main number in the global directory then the system redials the last dialed
number while trying redial feature or Auto Redial feature.
How to program?
Step 1
List down the Numbers to be programmed in an Alternate group on a piece of paper.
The commands explained below should be referred as:
To program a single port: XXXX-1
To program a range of ports: XXXX-2
To program all the ports: XXXX-*
Eternity
(Busy)
(B
u
s
y
) Calling Party
2630555
2630556
2630557
Matrix
106 Eternity V8 System Manual
Step 2
Use following command to assign Alternate group number to a location code:
1804-1-Location Code-Alternate Group Number
1804-2-Location Code-Location Code-Alternate Group Number
1804-*-Alternate Group Number
Where,
Location Code is from 100 to 999.
Alternate Group Number is from 000 to 255.
The Global Directory after assigning Alternate Group Number looks as shown below:
By default, Alternate Number Group is 000.
For OGTBG refer chapter OG Trunk Bundle Group.
Use the following command to clear the alternate number group of a location code:
1804-1-Location Code-000
1804-2-Location Code-Location Code-000
1804-*-000
Where,
Location code is from 100 to 999.
Example:
Program the system for following constraints:
ABC Ltd. has five telephone numbers viz. 2640075, 2640076, 2640077, 2635151 and 2635173.
XYZ Ltd. has three telephone numbers viz. 2788856, 2788896, 2788857.
For ABC Ltd. Make a table as shown below:
(If the global directory is not programmed then please program the global directory as explained in the topic
Abbreviated Dialing).
Use following command to program Alternate Group number:
1804-1-100-001
1804-1-101-001
1804-1-102-001
1804-1-103-001
1804-1-104-001
1804-1-105-005
1804-1-106-005
1804-1-107-005
Important Points:
Alternate Numbers are used during Redial and Auto-redial. Hence all the timers related to these features should be
programmed properly.
Location Code Number OGTBG Alternate Number Group
100 022281110001 01 002
101 011234567890 03 002
102 022281110002 00 002
: : : :
999 033298765432 04 001
Location Code Number OGTBG Alternate Number Group
100 2640075 01 001
101 2640076 01 001
102 2640071 01 001
103 2635151 01 001
104 2635173 01 001
105 2788856 01 005
106 2788896 01 005
107 2788857 01 005
Matrix
Eternity V8 System Manual 107
If Auto-Redial is set for a number having Alternate numbers, the system tries all the Alternate numbers first and then
sets the Auto-Redial for the last number dialed.
One number can have one or more than one Alternate number.
Alternate number works even when abbreviated dialing is used. Suppose user dials 8100 and if the dialed out number
is busy then on trying Redial system tries alternate number group related to number at index 100.
Alternate number is allowed to all the stations.
Stations not having access to Global Directory can also use Alternate Number Dialing.
Relevant Topics:
1. Abbreviated Dialing 73
2. Last Number Redial 425
3. Auto Redial 113
4. OG Trunk Bundle Group 474
=X=X=
Matrix
108 Eternity V8 System Manual
Answer Signaling on SLT
Whats this?
As general application, telecom equipment like PCO machine is connected to the SLT port of the system. Now
whenever the called party (remote party) answers i.e. goes OFF-Hook, it is required to inform the SLT port so that the
PCO machine can consider the call as matured and start billing. In absence of this signal, the call is never considered
as matured and hence no billing will be generated.
To avoid such problems the system supports Answer Signalling. It is a signal which will be generated on SLT port,
which indicates that the called party has answered and the call is matured. This helps in accurate billing, avoids
billing of unanswered and unsuccessful call attempts.
During an OG call from SLT to any other port for e.g. TWT/Mobile/SIP/T1E1PRI/BRI whenever called party answers,
they provide an answer signal which can be generated on the SLT port to support any Billing equipment or PCO
machine or PBX, if connected to the SLT port for considering the call to be matured.
It is generated in the form of:
None
Polarity Reversal or Battery Reversal
How it works?
It is applicable only for OG calls made by SLT.
When call is made from SLT port to any other port, system will wait for the call to get matured.
When the call gets matured, the system will check the Answer Signal programmed in the SLT Hardware Template
assigned to the SLT, from where call has been made. The options are as explained below:
None: If this option is set, the system will not generate any answer signaling on the SLT port.
Battery Reversal: The Battery polarity of the SLT port will get reversed. For example, if the battery polarity of the
SLT port is +ve for TIP and -ve for RING in speech condition then after call maturity, TIP will become -ve and Ring
+ve.
How to program?
Refer chapter SLT Hardware Template to program type of answer signaling on the SLT port.
Relevant Topics:
1. Disconnect Signaling on SLT 301
2. SLT Hardware Template 555
=X=X=
Matrix
Eternity V8 System Manual 109
Answer Supervision on TWT
Whats this?
As a general application the telecom equipment like PCO machine will be connected to the SLT port of the system.
Now whenever the called party (remote party) goes OFF-Hook, the caller should know about this, so that the PCO
machine can consider the call as matured and start billing. In absence of this signal, the call will never be considered
as matured and this will result in no billing.
To solve such problems, the system supports Answer Supervision on TWT ports. This helps in considering calls to
be matured, accurate billing, and avoids billing of unanswered and unsuccessful call attempts.
It can be programmed from following options:
None
Polarity Reversal
12/16 KHz Pulse
How it works?
It is a signal which is provided from CO to the calling party, which indicates that the called party has answered and
the call is matured.
This signal is for each TWT port when it is a destination port of the system. It is applicable only for OG calls.
It is in form of None, 12/16KHz or Battery Reversal as explained below. By default, Answer Supervision is set to
None for each TWT port.
None: It is used when no signalling is available from the CO. If this option is selected, the call will be considered
as matured on expiry of Forced Maturity Timer which is fixed 20 seconds irrespective of whether the call actually
gets matured or not. After this, call duration timer is started. Finally system will start detecting Disconnect
Supervision signal programmed for that port.
Polarity Reversal: It is used as maturity signal when answer supervision is signaled in the form of Polarity
Reversal. For example, if the battery polarity of the line is -ve for TIP and +ve for RING then after answering the
call, by the called party, CO network will reverse the battery polarity i.e. TIP becomes +ve and Ring ve. After this,
call duration timer is started. Finally system will start detecting disconnect Supervision signal programmed for that
port.
12 KHz/16 KHz: It is used when answer supervision is signalled in the form of 12/16 KHz metering pulse. When
called party answers the call, CO network generates a 12/16 KHz pulse. Finally system will start detecting
Disconnect Supervision signal programmed for that port.
How to program?
Refer chapter TWT Hardware Template to program type of Answer Supervision and Pseudo Maturity Timer.
Important Points:
It is advisable to set the same Answer Supervision signal as provided by the CO for the TWT port because:
If CO supports no answer supervision signal and if Reversal or 12/16 KHz is selected in the system, the call will
never get matured and thus will not be stored in the SMDR buffer.
If CO supports Polarity Reversal as answer supervision signal and if 12/16KHz is selected in the system or vice-
versa, the call will never get matured and thus will not be stored in the SMDR buffer.
If no Answer supervision signal is supported than only program answer supervision signal as None.
Please note that:
If None option is selected, measured call duration will not match exactly with the actual duration because
maturity timer has no relation with the actual maturity.
If Pseudo Maturity Timer is less, the call which is not answered will also be considered as matured.
If Pseudo Maturity Timer is more, the short matured call will not be considered as matured call.
SE should take care following condition while programming:
It is advisable to set the same Answer Supervision signal as provided by the CO network for the TWT port. This is
explained with following case.
Suppose CO network supports Polarity Reversal signal as Answer and Disconnect supervision.
Answer supervision signal is set as None in the system and Disconnect supervision for the same port is set as
Polarity Reversal in the system.
Thus, when call is made through this TWT port, call will get matured after Pseudo Maturity Timer.
The system will start detecting Disconnect supervision signal programmed for that port.
Now when called party answers the call, CO generates answer supervision signal Polarity Reversal on the port.
As disconnect supervision signal is programmed as Polarity reversal, system would detect this answer
supervision signal as disconnect supervision signal and the call will be disconnected.
Thus, SE will take care while programming Answer Supervision signal which should be same as supported by CO.
Matrix
110 Eternity V8 System Manual
Relevant Topics:
1. Disconnect Information on TWT 299
2. TWT Hardware Template 687
=X=X=
Matrix
Eternity V8 System Manual 111
Auto Answer
What is this?
The calls are answered automatically by the station going OFF-Hook; after a set time. This feature is called Auto
Answer.
This feature is very useful for Operators. Since the calls are answered automatically, the Operator is not required to
pick up the handset or press speaker key again and again to answer the calls. If a headset is used, this feature
becomes extremely helpful, because incoming speech audio can be heard directly.
The operator gets a beep (of 1 sec.) indicating him the arrival of the call. After this the call is answered automatically.
How to use it?
User select On/Off Auto Answer from Menu of DKP.
User can also set Auto Answer Time from Menu of the DKP.
Refer chapter Digital Key Phone-Operation for more details.
Important Points:
This feature is applicable only for DKP users.
The timer starts from the moment the DKP is in idle condition. If the DKP is already in speech when a new call arrives,
the Auto Answer timer will not start.
It is recommended to have an Auto Answer timer of atleast 2 seconds.
=X=X=
No need to pickup the
receiver just start talking
Matrix
112 Eternity V8 System Manual
Auto Call Back (ACB)
User would like that if the called user is not replying or busy, then the system should put his call in queue and should
call when the called user becomes free. This is called Auto Call Back (ACB).
The Eternity offers two types of Auto Call Back viz. Auto Call Back-on Busy, Auto Call Back-on No Reply.
Auto Call Back-On Busy/On No-Reply
Whats this?
You need not keep dialing the station number if it is busy or if is not replying. You can set ACB by dialing '2' when you
get a station as busy or not replying. If it is DKP, you will get LED of DSS key for ACB, as turned ON.
Once you have set ACB, you can cancel it by dialing '102' after getting dial tone.
When both stations get free, you (who had requested ACB) will get ring first and will ring for the ACB Ring Timer. If
you go off-hook (accept the ACB call), the other station (destination station) on which ACB was set, will ring for the
ACB Ring Timer if it is free. If the destination is trunk port, the originating station will be connected with trunk and thus
the ACB will be served.
This ACB request you have made will be applicable for the 60 minutes (service duration) only. If the request (made
from originating station) doesn't get served within 60 minutes it will be cancelled automatically and the DSS Key LED
of the ACB key will be turned OFF if it is DKP.
Different users can request the ACB. The Eternity supports a list of maximum 300 requests with database of
originating station access codes, destination station/trunk and service duration.
Each station can set only one ACB at a time. If one request is pending for the station, the other request made by
station will overwrite the first request.
Each entry will get deleted when the ACB is successfully served or the timer gets expired.
How to use it?
If you dont answer the Auto Call Back ring, it stops after 30 seconds and Auto Call Back request gets cleared. This is
called Auto Call Back Ring Timer and is programmable.
Cancel Auto Call Back-On Busy
Example:
Station 317 is busy. To enable Auto Call Back, dial 2. If you want to cancel Auto Call Back, dial 102 to cancel it.
How to program?
Refer Class of Service (COS) for details on how to allow Auto Call Back-On No Reply to a user.
Timer of Relevance:
Auto Call Back Ring Timer-Time after which the Auto Call Back ring on the station stops.
Command: 3801-Seconds
Default: 030 seconds.
Valid Range: 001 to 255 seconds.
Relevant Topics:
1. Class of Service (COS) 200
2. QSIG 508
=X=X=
1 Lift the Handset. Dial tone
2 Dial Number. Busy tone
3 Dial 2. Confirmation tone
4 Replace the handset.
1 Lift the Handset. Dial tone
2 Dial 102. Confirmation tone
3 Replace the handset.
Matrix
Eternity V8 System Manual 113
Auto Redial
Whats this?
You need not keep trying busy external number repeatedly. You can ask the Eternity to keep trying the number. You
will get ring when the remote party number becomes free. This is called 'Auto Redial' feature.
On applying access code for auto redial, the Eternity keeps dialing the number you were trying to call, by grabbing the
trunk. SE should program number of trials and interval between redialing if default values needed to change.
How it works?
Two types of auto redial are possible: Auto Redial Normal and Auto Redial Priority.
Generally the system should be programmed in such a manner that in Normal type the number of trials made by the
system (count) is less and the time gap between two trials (timer) is more.
Whereas, in Priority type the number of trials (count) is more and the time gap between two trials (timer) is less.
Multiple numbers can be requested for Auto Redial at a time from one station.
More than one station can attempt auto redial simultaneously.
If the system detects busy tone it releases the trunk and redials the number automatically after some time.
If the system does not detect ring back tone for 60 seconds, it releases the trunk and tries after some time. This is
known as Auto Redial RBT Wait Timer and is programmable.
If the system detects ring back tone, it gives ring on your station. When you lift the handset, you get connected with
the desired party.
The system uses the same OG Trunk Bundle Group you used. If you dialed the number on group code 60, the system
takes one of the free trunks from group code 60 for auto redial.
If the number was dialed using selective trunk access at the first time then system will use the same trunk while
executing Auto Redial.
Auto Redial will be suspended if there is any activity (ringing/speech/dialing) on your station. It resumes as soon as
your station becomes free.
If the station is programmed for 'dynamic lock', and user makes use 'Auto Redial' feature, the system will check the
Toll control as per dynamic lock level.
CAUTION!
Auto Redial may not work properly on TWT lines.

How to use?
Example:
You want to dial a number 02652630555, but after grabbing the line TWT-001 from your DKP-3001, you get 'Busy'
tone frequently.
Hence, you disconnect the call by going on hook and ensure that 'Auto Redial' feature is allowed from COS.
Now, you dial the Access Code-17 for Redial to avoid again dialing of the TAC and the number.
Because of 'Redial' feature, the system will grab TWT-001 and out dial the number. 02652630555.
To cancel Auto Redial
1 Lift the Handset. Dial tone
2 Dial Trunk Access Code. Trunk dial tone
3 Dial Number. Busy tone
4
Disconnect by going on-hook, irrespective
of expiry of trunk inter digit wait timer.
5 Lift the Handset. Dial tone
6 Dial 17. Confirmation tone
7 Replace the Handset.
1 Lift the Handset. Dial tone
2 Dial 1070. Confirmation tone
3 Replace the Handset.
Matrix
114 Eternity V8 System Manual
Example:
Dialed number 0265-630555 was busy. Auto Redial was requested. Meanwhile, the person for whom you set Auto Redial
calls you. Now you do not want to talk to him again. Dial 1070 from your station to cancel 'Auto Redial'.
How to program?
Refer Class of Service (COS) for details on how to allow Auto Redial to a user. It is possible to assign Normal or Priority
to the user.
Auto Redial Normal
Use following command to program time duration between two trials for low priority:
1704-Seconds
Default: 045 seconds.
Valid Range: 000 to 255 seconds.
Note:
The time duration between two trials should be set to more than '5' seconds for Australia.
Use following command to program the number of trials for low priority:
1705-Count
Default: 005.
Valid Range: 000 to 255.
Auto Redial Priority
Use following command to program time duration between two trials for high priority:
1706-Seconds
Default: 020 seconds.
Valid Range: 000 to 255 seconds.
Note:
The time duration between two trials should be set to more than '5' seconds for Australia.
Use following command to program the number of trials for high priority:
1707-Count
Default: 020.
Valid Range: 000 to 255.
Note:
The number of trials should be set to less than '15', for Australia.
Timers of Relevance:
Auto Redial Dial Tone Wait Timer-Time for which Eternity waits to sense the dial tone from the PSTN.
Command: 1701-Seconds
Default: 003 seconds.
Valid Range: 000 to 255 seconds. It is recommended to program 2 sec. minimum.
Auto Redial RBT Wait Timer-Time for which Eternity waits to sense RBT from the PSTN after dialing the requested
number.
Command: 1702-Seconds
Default: 060 seconds.
Valid Range: 000 to 255 seconds. It is recommended to program 2 sec. minimum.
Auto Redial Ring Timer-Time for which the station that has requested Auto Redial rings in case of Auto redial call.
Command: 1703-Seconds
Default: 045 seconds.
Valid Range: 000 to 255 seconds. It is recommended to program 2 sec. minimum.
Relevant Topics:
1. Class of Service (COS) 200
2. Dynamic Lock 341
=X=X=
Matrix
Eternity V8 System Manual 115
Automated Control Applications
Whats this?
The Eternity offers a Digital Output Port (DOP) for various control applications. There can be 12 different modes in
which the DOP can be operated. These modes and its applications are given in the table below:
How to program?
Step 1
Use following command to choose the mode:
5003-1-DOP-Mode
Where,
DOP is 1.
Mode is from 00 to 11 as per the table.
By default, the mode is No action (Deactivated).
Mode
Switch
ON
Switch OFF Meaning Typical Applications
00 Deactivated No Action. DOP is deactivated.
01 Manual Manual The DOP will be switched ON and OFF
by issuing a command.
The gadget connected to the DOP can be
operated at any time as per the
requirement. Typical application would be
operating Office lights.
02 Manual Automatic The DOP will be switched ON by
issuing a command and switched OFF
on expiry of the timer.
Door Lock is opened manually and is
expected to be lock automatically after
some time.
03 Automatic Manual The DOP will be switched ON after
fixed time from issuing the ON
command and switched OFF manually.
A command can be issued to shut the door
lock from within the room itself before
leaving the room. Doing, so the door would
be locked when the person goes out of the
room.
04 Automatic Automatic The DOP will be switched ON after
programmed time from issuing the ON
command and switched OFF after
programmed command.
Terrace lights can be operated.
05 Manual Scheduled The DOP will be switched ON by
issuing a command and switched OFF
as per the programmed scheduled.
Glow Sign boards. These are switched
OFF irrespective of when they are switched
ON.
06 Scheduled Manual The DOP will be switched ON as per
the scheduled and switched OFF by
issuing a command.
Porch Light. These can be switched ON at
the set time and can be switched OFF
when required.
07 Scheduled Scheduled The DOP will be switched ON and OFF
as per the programmed scheduled.
School Bell. A school bell can be operated
24 times in a day.
08 Instigation Instigation The DOP will be switched ON on
receiving a signal from the DIP and
switched OFF again on receiving a
signal from DIP.
A Water Pump. A control circuit attached to
the DOP can be switched ON/OFF
depending on the sensors. The water pump
can be turned ON when the tank goes
empty and can be turned OFF when the
tank gets full.
09 Instigation Manual The DOP will be switched ON on
receiving a signal from the DIP and
switched OFF by issuing a command.
A hooter is connected to the DOP can be
switched on receiving a signal from the DIP
to which a sensor like fire-alarm, smoke
sensor, etc. is connected can be switched
OFF when required.
10 Instigation Automatic The DOP will be switched ON on
receiving a signal from the DIP and
switched OFF after programmed time.
An Emergency Siren in a factory. The
instigation is from DIP to which a panic
switch can be connected.
11 Instigation Acknowledge
Command
The DOP will be switched ON
occurrence of a system fault and turns
OFF on acknowledgement command.
A situation where system needs to
continuously.
Matrix
116 Eternity V8 System Manual
Step 2
Use following command to program the scheduled ON time at an index for a DOP:
5004-1-DOP-Index-Scheduled ON Time
Where, DOP is 1.
Index is from 01 to 24.
Scheduled ON Time is in HH-MM-SS, 24-hour format.
By default, Scheduled ON time is 000000.
Step 3
Use following command to program the scheduled OFF time at an index for a DOP:
5005-1-DOP-Index-Scheduled OFF Time
Where,
DOP is 1.
Index is from 01 to 24.
Scheduled OFF Time is in HH-MM-SS, 24-hour format.
By default, Scheduled OFF time is 000000.
Scheduled OFF time should be greater than scheduled ON time. Also the system makes each entry in ascending order of
time i.e. morning time should be programmed before evening time.
Step 4
Use following command to program the Turn DOP ON Response Timer for a DOP:
5006-1-DOP-Turn DOP ON Response Timer
Where,
DOP is 1.
Turn DOP On Response Timer is in seconds from 000 to 255.
By default, Turn DOP ON Response Timer is 005 seconds.
This is the time after which the DOP turns ON automatically on issuing the ON command.
Step 5
Set following command to program the Turn DOP OFF Duration Timer for a DOP:
5007-1-DOP-Turn DOP OFF Response Timer
Where,
DOP is 1.
Turn DOP OFF Response Timer is in seconds from 000 to 255.
By default, Turn DOP OFF Response Timer is 010 seconds.
This is the time after which the DOP turns OFF automatically on issuing the OFF command.
Step 6
Use the following command to associate a DIP port with the DOP port:
5008-1-DOP-DIP
Where,
DIP is 1.
DOP is 1.
This is applicable only when the mode of operation of the DOP (ON/OFF) is by instigation of the DIP. (i.e. If DOP mode is
selected from 08-11).
By default, no DIP port is associated.
From SA mode
Use following command to Switch OFF DOP manually:
1072-019-DOP
Where,
DOP is 1.
Use following command to Switch ON DOP manually:
1072-020-DOP
Where,
DOP is 1.
Matrix
Eternity V8 System Manual 117
Refer the figure for more details on Automated control application:
Important Points:
DOP can be operated remotely (manual mode) using DISA.
When the DOP is programmed to be switched ON/OFF by the instigation from the DIP the trigger time (the time taken
for the DOP to react to the instigation) of the DOP is the same as the event sense timer of the DIP.
Please refer to Digital Input Port (DIP) for more details.
For simulating instigation, DIP signal wires can be shorted for short time.
Relevant Topics:
1. Real Time Clock (RTC) 520
2. Digital Input Port (DIP) 250
3. Digital Output Port (DOP) 278
=X=X=
Automatic
Control
Application
Manual
Manual
Mode
Manual
Automatic
Mode
Automatic
Manual
Mode
Automatic
Automatic
Mode
Manual
Scheduled
Mode
Scheduled
Manual
Mode
Scheduled
Scheduled
Mode
Instigation
Instigation
Mode
Instigation
Manual
Mode
Instigation
Automatic
Mode
Operating Office
Lights
Door Lock
Application
Automatic
Door Lock
Terrace
Light
Glow Sign
Board
Poarch
Light
School
Bell
Water
Pump
Fire Alarm,
Smoke
Sensor
An Emergency
Siren
Terminal
Matrix
118 Eternity V8 System Manual
Automatic Number Translation
Whats this?
User can dial a specific number digit which in turn is translated to the destination number dialed by the system. This
feature is called Automatic Number Translation (ANT).
Eternity supports ANT. It makes use of two types of Number Strings for programming the ANT Table, as mentioned
below:
Dialed Number strings are programmed for the Numbers, which the user has to dial.
Substitute Number strings are programmed for the Numbers, which are to be dialed out by the system for the
number of corresponding index of dialed number string.
After programming the ANT Table, ANT feature is enabled and the specific 'ANT Table' is assigned to the specific
trunk port. Refer chapter OG Trunk Bundle for more details.
Applications:
This feature can be used for translating land line number to compatible mobile number, to dial from mobile port.
The 'ANT' feature can also be used for the application as Phone Book and multi-stage dialing. Refer chapter Multi-
Stage Dialing for more details of the application.
How it works?
You can program 8 ANT Tables. Each table can be programmed with maximum of 32 number strings.
If the number string at Index-X is dialed by the user, the system will dial out the substitute number string which is
programmed in Index-X.
To use ANT feature, it should be enabled for the trunk, by selecting code value in OG Trunk Bundle table and the
specific ANT Table number is to be assigned to the same trunk port.
For example,
As shown in table (ANT Table-1), 95 is programmed as Dialed number string and 91 is programmed as Substitute
number string for same Index-01 of ANT Table-1. The ANT Table-1 is assigned to the Mobile trunk port MOB-01.
Now, if you dial '952652630555', the system will replace '95' by '91' and dial out the number '912652630555' from the
Mobile port.
ANT Table-1:
How to program?
Step 1
Dialed Number string
Use following command to program Dialed Number String for the Index of the ANT Table:
4751-1-ANT Table No.-Index-Dialed Number String-#*
Where,
ANT Table No. = 1 to 8.
Index = 01 to 32
Dialed Number String is maximum of 16 digits using (0 - 9), # , *, A, B, C, D, F., P, + , W and dot ('.'). Use following table
to program special digits:
Index Dialed Number String Substitute Number String
01 95 91
02
03
04
05
06
:
32
Special Digits Code for Programming through Command
Flash (F) #2
Pause (P) #3
A #4
Matrix
Eternity V8 System Manual 119
Step 2
Substitute Number string
Use following command to program Substitute Number String for the Index of the ANT Table:
4752-1-ANT Table No.-Index-Substitute Number String-#*
Where,
ANT Table No. = 1 to 8.
Index = 01 to 32.
Substitute Number String is maximum of 40 digits using (0 - 9), # , *, A, B, C, D, F., P, + , W and dot ('.'). Use following
table to program special digits:
Note for programming Number String for Multi-Stage dialing feature:
It is recommended to SE, to not to program Pause character "P" before "W" character for the number string to be out
dialed from Mobile port. Else, the GSM/CDMA Module may get restart while out dialing the DTMF digits without call
maturity signal. Refer chapter Multi-Stage Dialing for more details.
Step 3
Default ANT Table
Use following command to default the ANT Table
4750-1-ANT Table No.
Where,
ANT Table No. = 1 to 8
By default, all Index are Blank in the ANT Table.
Important Point:
For programming '.' use '#9' when SLT or DKP is used. But for dialing a number with '.' use '*'.
Relevant Topics:
1. OG Trunk Bundle 472
2. Multi-Stage Dialing 456
=X=X=
B #5
C #6
D #7
+ #8
. (dot) #9
# ##
* **
W *1
Special Digits Code for Programming through Command
Flash (F) #2
Pause (P) #3
A #4
B #5
C #6
D #7
+ #8
. (dot) #9
# ##
* **
W *1
Special Digits Code for Programming through Command
Matrix
120 Eternity V8 System Manual
Background Music (BGM)
Whats this?
The SLT/DKP station users can listen to sweet background music when the station is idle.
The stations having access of BGM (In COS Group assigned to it) can only use this feature.
BGM on DKP
How to use it?
To deactivate Back Ground Music
How it works?
The volume of back ground music can be controlled using the Volume key of the DKP.
Internal Music or External Music to be played, can be selected.
When an incoming call comes on the station the background music automatically stops and the DKP rings.
While making an outgoing call, when the user presses speaker key or goes OFF-Hook the background music stops
and the user gets system dial tone.
When any activity is done on the DKP the Back Ground Music stops. When the station user goes ON-Hook, the Back
Ground Music starts again.
BGM on SLT
How to use it?
SLT user wants to listen BGM.
How it works?
SLT user gets a Call (IC, Internal, Alarm, ACB, etc.)
When the SLT user is listening to BGM, if he receives a call then he will get Ring Back Tone (RBT).
Now if user goes ON-Hook, he will get a ring for incoming call.
If he goes OFF-Hook, speech is established.
1 Dial 1099. Confirmation tone
2 Go Idle. Background Music Starts.
1 Dial 1099. Confirmation tone
Action Response
Station user presses speaker key (interpreted as OFF-Hook). Dial tone
Station user dials 1099 (Start BGM Code). Confirmation tone
Go Idle. Station user presses speaker key again (Interpreted as
OFF-Hook).
Dial tone. After expiry of First Digit Wait
Timer, Start BGM.
Station user again presses speaker key (interpreted as ON-Hook). BGM Stop.
Station user presses speaker key (interpreted as OFF-Hook). Dial tone
Station user dials 1099 (Stop BGM Code). Confirmation tone
Soft Music
Matrix
Eternity V8 System Manual 121
Once the call is over he can go ON-Hook. This is a normal condition and all the IC calls will be treated as usual.
Now if the SLT user goes OFF-Hook the BGM starts again. He can cancel BGM by dialing 1099.
BGM on SLT, starts after dial tone time is expired.
SLT user wants to make Call (OG or Internal) or wants to use a feature.
If SLT user can dial the feature access code/station number/external number during dial tone, before BGM starts, the
system responds normally to the dialed codes.
How to program?
Refer Music on Hold (MOH) for more details.
Relevant Topics:
1. Music on Hold (MOH) 459
2. External Music 365
3. Class of Service (COS) 200
=X=X=
Matrix
122 Eternity V8 System Manual
Backup-SMDR
Whats this?
In Eternity there is an embedded FTP server which can be used for Backup of SMDR call records.
There are two ways to backup-SMDR call records through FTP:
Basic Configuration.
Advanced Configuration.
How to use it?
Basic Configuration:
Click on Start Programs Internet Explorer. Enter the IP address in Address bar. Let us say IP address
192.168.1.103 is entered at Address bar on opening page of Microsoft Internet Explorer.
You will get three options for log-in:
Log in as SE
Log in as SA
Log in as Front Desk User
Eternity Jeeves displays Welcome page.
Click on option to 'Log in as SE', if you are a System Engineer. Feature Menu is displayed on the left side of
Welcome page.
Click on 'Upload/Download Call Records-SMDR Files'. No need to enter User Password for this process.
Matrix
Eternity V8 System Manual 123
User gets 'Login As' Window on screen. Enter the user name (se) and Password (1234) in 'User Name' and
'Password' filed. Click on 'Login' button.
On successfully login following display appears on the screen.
Matrix
124 Eternity V8 System Manual
Select all files and right click of using mouse button. Click on 'Copy to Folder' option.
Select a path where you want to keep backup files on your system. Click OK button.
SMDR Backup are on progress as per your path selection.

Matrix
Eternity V8 System Manual 125
Advanced Configuration:
Click on Start Programs Run. In the Run Window enter ftp and Click on OK button.
After clicking the OK button user gets following Window on the screen.
User can make changes in the system as per his requirement from remote location. After changes are over, enter
'bye' to log out from the system from remote location.
Matrix
126 Eternity V8 System Manual
Note:
Uploading a SMDR files in the system. First remove current file present in the system. Then copy the new file from
computer (backup source) to system.
Important Point:
The Eternity will store the Call Records (SMDR) in the text format so that the file can be readable when downloaded
using Jeeves.
Relevant Topic:
1. File Transfer Protocol (FTP) 366
=X=X=
Matrix
Eternity V8 System Manual 127
Backup-System Configuration
Whats this?
In Eternity there is an embedded FTP server which can be used for Backup of System Configuration files.
There are two ways to backup-system configuration through FTP:
Basic Configuration.
Advanced Configuration.
How to use it?
Basic Configuration:
Click on Start Programs Internet Explorer. Enter the IP address in Address bar. Let us say IP address
192.168.1.103 is entered at Address bar on opening page of Microsoft Internet Explorer.
You will get three options for log-in:
Log in as SE
Log in as SA
Log in as Front Desk User
Eternity Jeeves displays Welcome page.
Click on option to 'Log in as SE', if you are a System Engineer. Feature Menu is displayed on the left side of
Welcome page.
Click on 'Upload/Download System Configuration Files'. No need to enter User Password for this process.
Matrix
128 Eternity V8 System Manual
User gets 'Login As' Window on screen. Enter the user name (SE) and password (1234) in 'User Name' and
'Password' filed. Click on 'Login' button.
On successfully login following display appears on the screen.
Matrix
Eternity V8 System Manual 129
Select all files and right click of using mouse button. Click on 'Copy to Folder' option.
Select a path where you want to save backup files on your system. Click OK button.
System Configuration files Backup are on progress is displayed as shown below:
Matrix
130 Eternity V8 System Manual
Note:
Uploading a system configuration files in the system. First remove current file present in the system. Then copy the
new file from computer (backup source) to system.
Advanced Configuration:
Please refer Backup-SMDR topic for more details.
Relevant Topics:
1. Backup-SMDR 122
2. File Transfer Protocol (FTP) 366
=X=X=
Matrix
Eternity V8 System Manual 131
Backup-System Software
Whats this?
In Eternity there is an embedded FTP server which can be used for Backup of System Software files.
There are two ways to backup-system software through FTP:
Basic Configuration.
Advanced Configuration.
How to use it?
Basic Configuration:
Click on Start g Programs g Internet Explorer. Enter the IP address in Address bar. Let us say IP address
192.168.1.103 is entered at Address bar on opening page of Microsoft Internet Explorer.
You will get three options for log-in:
Log in as SE
Log in as SA
Log in as Front Desk User
Eternity Jeeves displays Welcome page.
Click on option to 'Log in as SE', if you are a System Engineer. Feature Menu is displayed on the left side of Welcome
page.
Click on 'System Software'. No need to enter User Password for this process.
Matrix
132 Eternity V8 System Manual
User gets 'Login As' Window on screen. Enter the user name (SE) and password (1234) in 'User Name' and
'Password' filed. Click on 'Login' button.
On successfully login following display appears on the screen.
Matrix
Eternity V8 System Manual 133
Select all files and right click of using mouse button. Click on 'Copy to Folder' option.
Select a path where you backup files on your system. Click OK button.
Software Backup are on progress as per your path selection.
Note:
Uploading a software file in the system. First remove current file present in the system. Then copy the new file from
computer (backup source) to system.
Matrix
134 Eternity V8 System Manual
Advanced Configuration:
Please refer Backup-SMDR topic for more details.
Relevant Topics:
1. Backup-SMDR 122
2. File Transfer Protocol (FTP) 366
=X=X=
Matrix
Eternity V8 System Manual 135
Barge-In
Whats this?
When your call is urgent and you cannot wait for the called person to become free, you can land in his conversation
after intimating him. This is called Barge-In.
While landing, you get ring back tone and the called person gets barge-in beeps for Barge-In Timer. This timer is
called Barge-In timer. This timer is programmable. When a station is barged-in, calling partys number (external/
internal) is also displayed on the LCD of DKP.
During the beeps, the called person can dial Flash to answer your call.
If the called party does not respond during these 10 seconds, caller forcefully gets connected with the called person.
The third party is put on hold, gets music and hence cannot listen to your conversation.
Disconnect once your talk is over. This will automatically restore the original talk of the called person with the held-up
party.
The caller need not have higher priority level then other partys priority level.
How to use it?
Important Points:
Barge-In is ineffective if the called person is having privacy against Barge-In.
Barge-In can be used only if it is allowed in the users Class of Service.
Barge-In works even when the called party is talking on the trunk line.
Barge-In works if the called person is in 2-way, normal speech.
Barge-In can also be used after putting one party on hold. An important trunk call can be transferred to a busy station
after putting the calling party on hold and barging-in on the busy destination to inform him about his call.
This is most advantageous feature for the operator while transferring calls.
How to program?
Refer Class of Service (COS) for details on how to allow Barge-In to a user and how to allow Privacy against Barge-In.
Timer of Relevance:
Barge-In Timer-Time after which the caller gets connected to the called party.
Command: 3803-Seconds
Default: 010 seconds.
Valid Range: 001 to 255 seconds.
Relevant Topics:
1. Class of Service (COS) 200
2. Privacy 500
=X=X=
1 Lift the handset. Dial tone
2 Dial Number. Busy tone
3 Dial 4. Ring Back Tone. The called person gets beeps.
4 The system connects you to the destination after 10 seconds.
5 Replace the handset on completion of talk.
Matrix
136 Eternity V8 System Manual
Behind the PBX Applications
Whats this?
Many times, small and medium range PBX systems are connected behind some bigger PBX systems. Such applications
are used mainly to expand the existing capacity of the big PBX already in use. Stations (SLT) coming from the big PBX
are used as trunks (TWT) of the small PBX. There could also be some PSTN trunks coming directly on the smaller PBX.
Such configurations are known as Behind the PBX application.
In such situations, it is not easy to implement toll control restrictions.
Consider a simple event
Station 21 of PBX B in the figure above is not given long distance dialing facility. It has access to all the trunks (TWT).
Now when he wants to use T4, T5 or T6, which are directly coming from PSTN, he dials 0. He gets PSTN dial tone and
dials the number.
But when he does similar procedure on T1, T2 or T3, he gets error tone. Because, in this case when station 21 grabs T1
by dialing a code, he gets dial tone of the PBX A. Now when he again dials 0 to grab PSTN dial tone, PBX understands
it to be a long distance call and since station 21 is not allowed long distance calls, the system rejects dialing on trunk and
gives error tone to station 21.
Hence if station 21 of PBX B is to be allowed external dialing through T1, T2 and T3, he should be given long distance
dialing access.
The Eternity solves this problem by providing programmable PBX Expansion count for each trunk. This count is the
number of digits to be ignored before toll control check is began. The PBX Expansion count is same as the number of
PBX connected between the main PBX and the last subscriber.
In the figure shown, the PBX Expansion count of T1, T2 and T3 should be kept 1 and for T4, T5 and T6, it should
be kept 0.
CAUTION!
For all normal applications, keep this PBX Expansion count to 0 for all the trunks. Otherwise,
outside dialing may be hampered. LCR and SMDR will also be affected.
The Eternity supports PBX Expansion count for each trunk.
Trunk Port PBX Expansion Count
001 0
002 0
003 0
: :
128 0
27
26
21
23
28
Matrix
Eternity V8 System Manual 137
How to program?
Please refer the topic TWT Hardware Template for more programming details.
Important Point:
PBX Expansion Count is also called as Pre PSTN Digit Count.
=X=X=
Matrix
138 Eternity V8 System Manual
Call Back on Mobile Port
What's this?
Matrix Eternity supports 'Call Back' feature on all the mobile ports. This feature is used to respond to the specific
Incoming call on the mobile port which was disconnected by the caller.
The system will initiate the call back on the same CLI number from which IC call was received on the mobile port.
When the called party attends the call, the call will be established as per the option selected viz. DID call or DISA call
or call routed to the Operator.
Thus the user will not miss the important Incoming calls on his mobile port.
If this feature is not enabled for the mobile port, the system will route the IC call on that port with normal IC call logic
for call routing. Refer chapter Mobile Port to configure other parameters on the Mobile Port.
How it works?
To use this feature, 'Call Back' should be enabled for the mobile port.
Caution!
Ensure that 'IC call mode' is configured as 'Allow', for the mobile port for the 'Call Back' feature to work. Refer chapter
Mobile Port to configure IC call mode.
When the IC call on the mobile port is disconnected by the caller during period, 'Call Back Timer' configured in the
system, the system will initiate the call back if the caller's CLI is matching with the prefix configured in the 'Trusted
Caller List' or 'White Listed Caller List'.
SE will configure this list with specific number strings of the callers or specific 'Prefix' as per user's requirement. Refer
chapter External List to configure the Trusted Caller List.
If the CLI of the caller is not matching with Trusted Caller List, the 'Call Back' feature is not applicable and the IC call
is processed as per normal IC call logic.
Now if the call back is initiated and the call is attended by the remote end, following types of call will be established as
per the option configured:
DID call logic or
DISA call logic or
The call will be routed to Operator of the Eternity.
The 'Operator' is the station which is assigned to the mobile port in the trunk feature template. Refer chapterTrunk
Feature Template for more details.
How to program?
Enable/Disable Call Back Mode
Use following command to Enable/Disable Call Back Mode for the Mobile Port:
8010-1-Mobile-Code
8010-2-Mobile-Mobile-Code
8010-*-Code
Where,
Mobile Port is from 01 to 32.
By default, Call Back Mode is disabled for all Mobile ports.
Program Call Back Timer
Use following command to program Call Back Timer for the Mobile Port:
8011 - 1 - Mobile - Call Back Timer
8011 - 2 - Mobile - Mobile - Call Back Timer
8011 - * - Call Back Timer
The commands explained below should be referred as:
To program a single port: XXXX-1
To program a range of ports: XXXX-2
To program all the ports: XXXX-*
Code Meaning
0 Disable
1 Enable
Matrix
Eternity V8 System Manual 139
Where,
Mobile Port is from 01 to 32
Call Back Timer is from 01 to 99 Sec.
By default, Call Back Timer is 10 Seconds for all Mobile ports
Program Call Back Mode
Use following command to program Call Back Mode for the Mobile Port:
8012 - 1 - Mobile - Call Back Mode
8012 - 2 - Mobile - Mobile - Call Back Mode
8012 - * - Call Back Mode
Where,
Mobile Port is from 01 to 32
If the call initiated by 'Call Back' feature is matured, the IC call will be routed in the Eternity by any of the call logic
selected by the command. Refer chapters Direct Inward Dialing (DID), Direct Inward System Access (DISA) and
Operator for more details about respective call logic.
By default, Call Back Mode is 'Operator' for all Mobile ports
Assign trusted caller list to Mobile Port
Use following to assign Trusted Caller List to the Mobile Port:
8013-1-Mobile-Trusted Caller List Number
8013-2-Mobile-Mobile-Trusted Caller List Number
8013-*-Trusted Caller List Number
Where,
Mobile Port is from 01 to 32
Trusted Caller List Number is from 01 to 24
By default, Trusted Caller List Number is '01' for all Mobile ports
Note:
SE will configure this list with specific numbers of the callers or specific 'Prefix' as per user's requirement. E.g. If '+91'
is configured in Trusted Caller List and '+91XXXXXXXXXX' is the CLI of the caller, then system will allow 'Call Back'
feature. But if '+91' is configured in Trusted Caller List and '919925033046' is the CLI of the caller, then system will not
allow the 'Call Back' feature. Refer chapter External List to configure the Trusted Caller List.
Important Point:
Eternity supports only one call back request at a time, for one Mobile port. The second IC call on that mobile port will
be processed as per normal IC call routing by the system.
Relevant Topics:
1. Mobile Port 451
2. Trunk Feature Template 680
3. External List 362
=X=X=
Call Back Mode Meaning
1 DID
2 DISA
3 Operator
Matrix
140 Eternity V8 System Manual
Call Budget
Whats this?
The total cost of calls made by a station can be controlled using this facility. To prevent misuse of long distance dialing
facility, Eternity provides Toll Control facility and COS programming for different time zones. But, sometimes you cannot
simply deny long distance dialing for people who need to make such calls as part of their job. It makes more sense to limit
their bill to a certain fixed limit. It is desirable that this limit is in terms of amount. The system allows the user to make calls
freely as long as he does not cross his limit. Once he crosses his limit, his station is locked by the system. This facility is
called Call Budget (CB).
How it works?
The flow chart given below explains the Call Budget logic.
How to program?
Step 1
Refer Class of Service (COS) chapter to enable call budget on a station.
Step 2
Use following command to assign Call Budget to a station: (From SA Mode)
1072-004-Flexible Number-Amount
Where,
Flexible Number is 1, 2, 3, 4 digits and unique.
Amount is the Call Budget in rupees. Amount can be from 000000 to 999999.
By default, amount is 999999.
Start
Station makes an
outgoing calls
Is call budgeting
enabled on the
station ?
System goes on
the next process
End
Is current call budget
amount of the station greater
then or equal to alloted call
budget amount for the at
station
No
Yes
System allows the station to make
calls as per the call budget allowed
and denied lists assigned to it
End
System allows the station to
make calls as per the toll
control allowed and denied list
On completion of the call
system adds the call amount to
the station's account
End
No
Yes
Matrix
Eternity V8 System Manual 141
Notes:
To change the call budget amount to less than 6 digits, use leading zero.
For example, to program call budget amount as Rs.10, enter '000010' as Call Budget amount. The system will
consider it as Rs.10.
Default value of Call Budget is programmable. Refer chapter System Parameters for command to program Default
Call Budget Amount.
Step 3
Please refer Station Basic Feature Template for more details on assigning Allowed and Denied Lists for stations.
How to Display Call Budget from SA mode?
The Eternity helps the System Administrator to know the budget assigned for the OG calls to be made from that station
(DKP).
On issuing a command, the system displays the assigned amount (A) and the used amount by a station (U). The display
is retained till the station remains OFF-Hook.
Important Points:
Call Budget can be enabled on all the stations as well as on selected stations.
Each station can be assigned different amount depending on the requirement.
The assigned budget is for one month. It is to be reloaded for every month.
If the budget exceeds anytime during the month, the system locks the station till month end.
Once locked, the station can make calls depending on the external lists assigned as allowed and denied lists for Call
Budget-locked state. Please refer the Station Basic Feature Template for mode details.
From the 1
st
of the next month, the system allows the station user to make calls.
It is also possible to increase the budget amount before the amount is exceeded. Now, new calls will be allowed till
fresh budget gets exhausted.
Call Budget facility is based on cost of each call. Hence the system must be programmed properly with all the SMDR
parameters and long distance codes. Errors in calculation of call cost can lead to malfunction of Call Budget.
A current call does not get disconnected if the budget gets exhausted during the call. However, station user cannot
make calls there after.
The cost of the call is added to the stations account on completion of the call.
The call budget can be set only from SA mode.
Relevant Topics:
1. External List 362
2. Station Message Detail Recording 574
3. Class of Service (COS) 200
4. Station Basic Feature Template 569
5. Call Cost Calculation (CCC) 143
6. Call Cost Display 165
=X=X=
Lift the handset. Dial tone
Dial 1072-011-Station. Confirmation tone
Matrix
142 Eternity V8 System Manual
Call Chaining
Whats this?
The call transferred by an Operator to Station A, comes back to Operator automatically instead of getting
disconnected after the calling party has completed the speech with Station A. This is called Call Chaining.
Call chaining is useful in following situation: A marketing executive calls the office from the field to consult a technical
problem with his boss. The Operator who receives his call realizes that, she has to inform the marketing executive
about the ticket status for his travel in the next week. She needs to inform the boss to transfer the call back to her
which she finds very embarrassing. Call chaining saves her from dilemma. When the speech between marketing
executive and the boss is complete, the call comes back to the Operator. The Operator can now communicate about
the ticket status to the marketing executive.
How to use it?
Set Call Chaining
Call Transfer during Call Chaining
Step 3 to 5 perform the normal call transfer.
If the Station B disconnects, the call comes back to Station A. If Station A is free, speech is established between the
calling party and Station A. If Station A is busy, Calling party gets music and the call is released after the Call Park
Release Timer gets exhausted. In case calling party disconnects, the call is released.
Important Points:
Call chaining can be executed from DKP only.
A DSS key must be programmed to perform call chaining.
Call chaining can be performed when call is transferred from a DKP to DKP, SLT or Trunk.
Call chaining can be performed even for internal calls.
Call chaining can be performed for multiple calls.
Relevant Topics:
1. Call Transfer 192
2. Digital Key Phone-Soft Keys Programming 264
3. Call Park 179
=X=X=
User is in speech with other station/trunk call.
Dial Flash-1050. Feature is set. Display will be as Called Party in Chaining.
1 Lift the handset. Speech with the Calling Party. The calling party requests for Station B.
2
Press the DSS key assigned
for call chaining
The LED of the DSS key glows with red colour.
3 Dial Hold. Calling party gets music.
4 Dial Station B. Ring Back Tone. Speech with B.
5 Dial trf. Calling Party and Station B in speech.
Caller
Operator
Station A
Station B
Station C
Matrix
Eternity V8 System Manual 143
Call Cost Calculation (CCC)
Whats this?
The Eternity can calculate the cost in amount for the calls made by the station. The cost calculation is done at the time of
printing of reports.
How it works?
Few parameters are programmed to calculate the cost of the call. The cost of a call depends on:
Number dialed i.e. local, long distance, international, etc.
Time and day when the call was made i.e. daytime, nighttime, holiday, etc.
Duration of the call.
The pulse rate applied need not be uniform through the length of the call. The total call is divided into two parts.
First unit.
Additional units.
The duration of the call is interpreted in terms of number of units and the number of units depends on the pulse rate.
Cost of Call
If the duration of the call is less or equal to one unit.
Cost of Call = Cost of First Unit + Service Charge
If the duration of the call is more than one unit then,
Cost of Call = [Cost of First Unit + (Number of Additional units x Cost for Additional units)] + Service Charge
If the call answer supervision type is 12/16KHz then,
Cost of Call = (Unit Charge x Total Call units) + Service Charge. The cost of first unit and additional unit depends on the
pulse rates.
How to program CCC parameters?
Step 1
Unit Charge
When call cost is to be calculated on the basis of 16 KHz metering pulses, user can select different unit charge for first
unit and different unit charge for the additional units.
Use following command to program the unit charge for first unit when 16 KHz metering is used:
2600-Unit Charge for First Unit
Where,
Unit charge is the amount in XX.XX format in any currency.
By default, unit charge for first unit is Rs.1.10.
Use following command to program the unit charge for additional units when 12/16 KHz metering is used:
2601-Unit Charge for Additional Unit
Where,
Unit charge is the amount in XX.XX format in any currency.
By default, Unit charge for additional unit is Rs.1.10.
Example1:
Let us program unit change for first unit to Rs. 1.50.
2600-0150
Example2:
Let us program unit charge for additional unit to US$0.75.
2601-0075
Step 2
Service Charge
There are three options for service charges:
Fixed Service Charge: A fixed amount is added as service charge to every call regardless of the cost of that call.
This service charge amount is programmable.
Unit Wise Service Charge: Service charge is added to each unit of the call. Suppose a call worth 10 units was made
then the service charge will also be charged for 10 units instead of once as it is done in case of fixed service charge.
Matrix
144 Eternity V8 System Manual
Percentage Wise Service Charge: A percent of the cost of the call is added as a service charge for that call. This
percent is programmable.
Use following command to select service charge type:
2602-Service Charge Type
Where,
By default, the service charge type is fixed.
Step 3
Use following command to program service charge:
2603-Service Charge
Where,
Service Charge is the amount in XX.XX format in any currency.
By default, Service Charge is Rs.02.00.
Example 1:
Let us program the service charge to Rs.2.00.
2603-0200
Example 2:
Let us program the service charge to US$1.75.
2603-0175
Step 4
Use following command to set the percentage if the service charge is selected based on the percentage:
2604-Percentage
Where,
Percentage is from 000 to 100.
By default, percentage is 005.
Example:
Let us set the percentage to 10% of the cost of each call.
2604-010
Number of Units
Number of Units is derived from the pulse rate at the time of the call and duration of the call. System acquires the pulse
rate type and call duration with the help of in-built RTC.
Total Units = First Unit + Additional Unit.
If the call duration is less than the pulse rate of the first unit then additional unit is zero and total units. Call units when call
answer supervision type is 12/16KHz metering.
Call Units = (Call duration in seconds)/(Pulse rate in seconds).
Step 5
Time Zones
Since different pulse rates are applicable during different time of the day, time zones should be programmed. There are
maximum 4 time zones possible for Call Cost Calculation (CCC). Different pulse rates can be programmed for each time
zone.
Default time zones are given in the following table:
Service Charge Type Meaning
0 Fixed Service Charge
1 Unit wise Service Charge
2 Percentage wise Service Charge
Time Zone Index Start Time End Time
1 08:00 20:00
2 20:00 08:00
3 00:00 00:00
4 00:00 00:00
Matrix
Eternity V8 System Manual 145
Use following command to program a time zone in the CCC Time Zone Table:
2605-Time Zone Index-Start Time-End Time
Where,
Time Zone Index is from 1 to 4.
Start Time and End Time are to be specified in hours and minutes in the 24-hour format.
To program time zone table properly, please do the following:
Find the time zones for long distance national calls.
Find the time zones for international calls.
Divide the day according to above time zones.
For example, we have two time zones for long distance national calls viz. 09.00 to 20.00 and 20.00 to 09.00. The
timings for international time zones is 06.00 to 09.00, 09.00 to 23.00 and 23.00 to 06.00.
Now we can divide the day as per these timings.
Time Zone 1: 06.00 to 09.00
Time Zone 2: 09.00 to 20.00
Time Zone 3: 20.00 to 23.00
Time Zone 4: 23.00 to 06.00
Now program the table as per these timings.
Use following commands to program time zones in the time zone table:
2605-1-0600-0900
2605-2-0900-2000
2605-3-2000-2300
2605-4-2300-0600
Completed time zone table would look as below:
Pulse Rate Types
Pulse rate can differ for normal and holidays. Maximum 16 entries can be made in the pulse rate type. Each pulse rate
type can have different rate and different cost for first and additional unit. The table below shows the format of pulse rate
for normal day.
Step 6
Use following command to program duration of first unit for a pulse rate type on normal days:
2607-Pulse Rate Type-Time Zone-Duration of First Unit
Where,
Pulse Rate Type is from 01 to 16.
Time Zone is from 1 to 4.
Duration of First Unit is from 000.00 to 999.99.
Step 7
Use following command to load default normal pulse rate type:
2606
Time Zone Index Start Time End Time
1 06:00 09:00
2 09:00 20:00
3 20:00 23:00
4 23:00 06:00
Table 1: Normal Pulse Rate
Pulse Rate
Type
Time Zone 1 Time Zone 2 Time Zone 3 Time Zone 4
First Unit Add. Unit First Unit Add. Unit First Unit Add. Unit First Unit Add. Unit
01
Duration 180.00 180.00 180.00 180.00 180.00 180.00 180.00 180.00
Cost 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10
02
Duration : : : : : : : :
Cost : : : : : : : :
: : : : : : : : : :
16
Duration 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
Cost 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10
Matrix
146 Eternity V8 System Manual
Step 8
Use following command to program duration of additional unit for a pulse rate type on normal days:
2608-Pulse Rate Type-Time Zone-Duration of Additional Unit
Where,
Pulse Rate Type is from 01 to 16.
Time Zone is from 1 to 4.
Duration of Additional Unit is from 000.00 to 999.99.
Step 9
Use following command to program the cost of first unit of a pulse rate type for normal days:
2609-Pulse Rate Type-Time Zone-Cost of first Unit
Where,
Pulse Rate Type is from 01 to 16.
Time Zone is from 1 to 4.
Cost of first Unit is from XX.XX.
Table 2: Default Normal Pulse Rate Type
Pulse Rate
Type
Time Zone 1 Time Zone 2 Time Zone 3 Time Zone 4
First Unit Add. Unit First Unit Add. Unit First Unit Add. Unit First Unit Add. Unit
01
Duration 180.00 180.00 180.00 180.00 180.00 180.00 180.00 180.00
Cost 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10
02
Duration 300.00 300.00 300.00 300.00 300.00 300.00 300.00 300.00
Cost 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10
03
Duration 90.00 90.00 90.00 90.00 90.00 90.00 90.00 90.00
Cost 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10
04
Duration 120.00 120.00 120.00 120.00 120.00 120.00 120.00 120.00
Cost 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10
05
Duration 30.00 30.00 30.00 30.00 30.00 30.00 30.00 30.00
Cost 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10
06
Duration 30.00 30.00 30.00 30.00 30.00 30.00 30.00 30.00
Cost 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10
07
Duration 16.00 16.00 16.00 16.00 16.00 16.00 16.00 16.00
Cost 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10
08
Duration 3.30 3.30 3.30 3.30 3.30 3.30 3.30 3.30
Cost 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10
09
Duration 2.10 2.10 2.10 2.10 2.10 2.10 2.10 2.10
Cost 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10
10
Duration 1.70 1.70 1.70 1.70 1.70 1.70 1.70 1.70
Cost 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10
11
Duration 2.10 2.10 2.10 2.10 2.10 2.10 2.10 2.10
Cost 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10
12
Duration 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
Cost 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10
13
Duration 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
Cost 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10
14
Duration 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
Cost 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10
15
Duration 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
Cost 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10
16
Duration 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
Cost 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10
Matrix
Eternity V8 System Manual 147
Step 10
Use following command to program the cost of additional unit of a pulse rate type for normal days:
2610-Pulse Rate Type-Time Zone-Cost of Additional Unit
Where,
Pulse Rate Type is from 01 to 16.
Time Zone is from 1 to 4.
Cost of Additional Unit is from XX.XX.
Holiday Pulse Rate Table
Separate pulse rate table is used for holidays. This allows total Flexibility of rates for holidays.
Step 11
Use following command to load default holiday pulse rate type:
2611
Step 12
Use following command to program duration for a first unit of a pulse rate type on holidays:
2612-Pulse Rate Type-Time Zone-Duration of First Unit
Pulse rate type is from 01 to 16.
Pulse Rate
Type
Time Zone 1 Time Zone 2 Time Zone 3 Time Zone 4
First Unit Add. Unit First Unit Add. Unit First Unit Add. Unit First Unit Add. Unit
01
Duration 180.00 180.00 180.00 180.00 180.00 180.00 180.00 180.00
Cost 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10
02
Duration 300.00 300.00 300.00 300.00 300.00 300.00 300.00 300.00
Cost 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10
03
Duration 90.00 90.00 90.00 90.00 90.00 90.00 90.00 90.00
Cost 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10
04
Duration 120.00 120.00 120.00 120.00 120.00 120.00 120.00 120.00
Cost 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10
05
Duration 30.00 30.00 30.00 30.00 30.00 30.00 30.00 30.00
Cost 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10
06
Duration 30.00 30.00 30.00 30.00 30.00 30.00 30.00 30.00
Cost 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10
07
Duration 16.00 16.00 16.00 16.00 16.00 16.00 16.00 16.00
Cost 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10
08
Duration 3.30 3.30 3.30 3.30 3.30 3.30 3.30 3.30
Cost 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10
09
Duration 2.10 2.10 2.10 2.10 2.10 2.10 2.10 2.10
Cost 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10
10
Duration 1.50 1.50 1.50 1.50 1.50 1.50 1.50 1.50
Cost 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10
11
Duration 2.10 2.10 2.10 2.10 2.10 2.10 2.10 2.10
Cost 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10
12
Duration 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
Cost 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10
13
Duration 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
Cost 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10
14
Duration 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
Cost 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10
15
Duration 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
Cost 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10
16
Duration 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
Cost 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10
Matrix
148 Eternity V8 System Manual
Time Zone from 1 to 4.
Duration of First Unit is from 000.00 to 999.99.
Step 13
Use following command to program duration for additional unit for a pulse rate type on holidays:
2613-Pulse Rate Type-Time Zone-Duration of Additional Unit
Where,
Pulse rate type is from 01 to 16.
Time Zone from 1 to 4.
Duration of Additional Unit is from 000.00 to 999.99.
Step 14
Use following command to program the cost of first unit of a pulse rate type for holidays:
2614-Pulse Rate Type-Time Zone-Cost of First Unit
Where,
Pulse Rate Type is from 01 to 16.
Time Zone is from 1 to 4.
Cost of First Unit is from XX.XX.
Step 15
Use following command to program the cost of additional unit of a pulse rate type for holidays:
2615-Pulse Rate Type-Time Zone-Cost of Additional Unit
Where,
Pulse Rate Type is from 01 to 16.
Time Zone is from 1 to 4.
Cost of Additional Unit is from XX.XX.
Area Code Table
The pulse rate of a call depends on the destination number dialed. Generally, pulse rate varies depending on the
distance. Different destination locations can have different pulse rates depending on the distance from the caller. Hence
pulses rates can vary with different area codes.
The Eternity supports programming of pulse rates for different area codes. This table is known as Area Code table and
looks like:
Maximum 999 entries are provided in the area code table.
At the time of calculating cost of a call, the Eternity performs following steps:
Search for the best fitting area code.
Get pulse rate type from the area code table.
Get the applicable pulse rate using the pulse rate type, day & time of the call.
Calculate the cost of the call using the pulse rate and durations.
In case the dialed number does not match with any of the area code table entries, pulse rate type 01 is used as a default.
Destination Location Area Code Pulse Rate Type
USA 001 15
Japan 0071 14
Singapore 0065 13
Sri Lanka 0094 12
Kolkata and Eastern Region 03 08
New Delhi 011 08
Southern Region 04 08
Mumbai 022 06
Rajkot 0281 05
Waghodia 952668 04
Halol 95 03
Surat 95261 04
Ahmedabad 9579 00
Matrix
Eternity V8 System Manual 149
This pulse rate type is retained even during power failure conditions. The Area Code table can be printed or can be
downloaded on a computer for reference. Refer Default Area Code Table for USA at the end of chapter.
How to compress Area codes?
To program the area code table, we need all the area codes with applicable pulse rates. This information can be obtained
from the local PSTN service provider. Many telephone directions also publish this information. Once you have all the
area codes with pulse rates, follow given steps to compress this information so that it fits the area code table provided in
the system:
Sort the area codes in increasing order. Write applicable rate codes against each area code.
Select area codes having common digits (2, 3, 4 or more) with same pulse rate.
Select this group of codes and find out maximum common digits.
Use this truncated area code as a common area code for all the area codes in the group.
Program this common area code with the common pulse rate for the whole group.
Repeat this procedure to find out other such groups with common pulse rates.
The codes, which do not belong to any group, should be entered individually as separate entries.
Usually, area codes of places in the remote area from your city can be compressed in one common code.
Example 1
Assume following entries in the stored, uncompressed area code table.
Note that all the above area codes have same pulse rates. Hence it is possible to compress them to one code: 011. You
can program this code with the common pulse rate 03. Thus, one entry in the system area code table will cover 10
entries.
The compressed area code table would look as shown below:
Example 2
Index Area Code Pulse Rate Type
01 0111 03
02 0112 03
03 0113 03
04 0114 03
05 0115 03
06 0116 03
07 0117 03
08 0118 03
09 0119 03
10 0110 03
Area Code Pulse Rate
1 0111
Index Area Code Pulse Rate
01 0131 03
02 0132 03
03 0133 03
04 0134 03
05 0135 03
06 0136 03
07 01372 03
08 01374 03
09 01376 03
10 0138 03
11 0139 03
Matrix
150 Eternity V8 System Manual
In the above table, two pulse rates are different from others. You can program a common entry for area code 013. And
the exceptions can be entered separately as under:
Note: Refer Default Area Code Table for Region USA at the end of chapter.
Step 16
How to program Area codes?
Use following command to program an area code:
2620-Area Code Index-Area Code-#*
Where,
Area Code Index is from 001 to 999.
Area Code is a number string of maximum of 4 digits.
Use the following command to clear the area code for an index:
2620-Area Code Index-#*
Example:
Program area code 022 for Mumbai at area code index 001.
2620-001-022-#*
Step 17
Use following command to program pulse rate for the area code:
2621-Area Code Index-Pulse Rate Type
Where,
Area Code Index is from 001 to 999.
Pulse Rate Type is from 01 to 16.
By default, pulse rate type is 1.
Example:
Program pulse rate type 01 for Mumbai.
2621-001-01
(Since the area code for Mumbai has been programmed at area code index 001, the pulse rate type should also be
programmed at the corresponding area code index only).
Step 18
Use following command to delete the complete Area Code Table:
2622-Reverse SE Password
Example:
To delete the area code table use command:
2622-4321 (The SE password is assumed to be 1234).
Please note that there is no command to delete a single entry from the area code table. However, these can be
cleared or overwritten.
Step 19
Use following command to program ignore digit count when SP_SP LCR is to be used:
2623-Area Code Index-Ignore Digit Count
Where,
Area Code Index is from 001 to 999. Refer Default Area Code Table for USA at end of the chapter.
Ignore Digit Count is from 0 to 9.
By default, Ignore digit is 0.
Please refer topic Least Cost Routing-An Introduction for more details on SP-SP LCR Type and Ignore Digit Count.
Index Area Code Pulse Rate
01 013 03
02 0137 03
03 01372 03
Matrix
Eternity V8 System Manual 151
Holidays
Step 20
Use following command to program a weekly off:
2630-Day-Code
Where,
If any week day is programmed as holiday then holiday pulse rates will be applicable.
By default, Sunday is programmed as holiday.
Example:
To program Tuesday is a holiday:
2630-3-1
To program Sunday as working day (not a holiday)
2630-1-0
Step 21
Use following command to program a holiday date:
2631-Holiday Date Index-Date-Month
Where,
Holiday Date Index is from 1 to 5 (Five dates can be programmed).
Date is from 01 to 31.
Month is from 01 to 12.
By default, holiday is shown below:
Use the following command to clear a holiday date index:
2632-Holiday Date Index
Example:
To program 1
st
May as a holiday as use following command:
2631-1-01-5
Step 22
Use the following command to program Area code name:
2633-Area Code Index-Name
Where,
Area Code Index is from 001 to 999.
Name is character string is of maximum 12 characters.
Use following command to clear area code name:
2633-Area Code Index-#*
Default Area Code Table for the Region-USA:
Holiday Index 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Day Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat
Code Meaning
0 Not a Holiday
1 Holiday
Holiday Date Index Day
1 26-01
2 15-08
3 02-10
4 Blank
5 Blank
Index Area Code Area Name Pulse Rate Type Ignore Digit Count
1 1201 NJ 2 0
2 1202 DC 2 0
Matrix
152 Eternity V8 System Manual
3 1203 CT 2 0
4 1204 Manitoba 2 0
5 1205 AL 2 0
6 1206 WA 2 0
7 1207 ME 2 0
8 1208 ID 2 0
9 1209 CA 2 0
10 1210 TX 2 0
11 1212 NY 2 0
12 1213 CA 2 0
13 1214 TX 2 0
14 1215 PA 2 0
15 1216 OH 2 0
16 1217 IL 2 0
17 1218 MN 2 0
18 1219 IN 2 0
19 1224 IL 2 0
20 1225 LA 2 0
21 1226 Ontario 2 0
22 1228 MS 2 0
23 1229 GA 2 0
24 1231 MI 2 0
25 1234 OH 2 0
26 1239 FL 2 0
27 1240 MD 2 0
28 1242 Bahamas 2 0
29 1246 Barbados 2 0
30 1248 MI 2 0
31 1250 BC 2 0
32 1251 AL 2 0
33 1252 NC 2 0
34 1253 WA 2 0
35 1254 TX 2 0
36 1256 AL 2 0
37 1260 IN 2 0
38 1262 WI 2 0
39 1264 Anguilla 2 0
40 1267 PA 2 0
41 1268 Antigua 2 0
42 1269 MI 2 0
43 1270 KY 2 0
44 1276 VA 2 0
45 1281 TX 2 0
46 1284 BVI 2 0
47 1289 Ontario 2 0
Index Area Code Area Name Pulse Rate Type Ignore Digit Count
Matrix
Eternity V8 System Manual 153
48 1301 MD 2 0
49 1302 DE 2 0
50 1303 CO 2 0
51 1304 WV 2 0
52 1305 FL 2 0
53 1306 Saskatchewan 2 0
54 1307 WY 2 0
55 1308 NE 2 0
56 1309 IL 2 0
57 1310 CA 2 0
58 1312 IL 2 0
59 1313 MI 2 0
60 1314 MO 2 0
61 1315 NY 2 0
62 1316 KS 2 0
63 1317 IN 2 0
64 1318 LA 2 0
65 1319 IA 2 0
66 1320 MN 2 0
67 1321 FL 2 0
68 1323 CA 2 0
69 1325 TX 2 0
70 1330 OH 2 0
71 1331 IL 2 0
72 1334 AL 2 0
73 1336 NC 2 0
74 1337 LA 2 0
75 1339 MA 2 0
76 1340 USVI 2 0
77 1345 Cayman 2 0
78 1347 NY 2 0
79 1351 MA 2 0
80 1352 FL 2 0
81 1360 WA 2 0
82 1361 TX 2 0
83 1386 FL 2 0
84 1401 RI 2 0
85 1402 NE 2 0
86 1403 Alberta 2 0
87 1404 GA 2 0
88 1405 OK 2 0
89 1406 MT 2 0
90 1407 FL 2 0
91 1408 CA 2 0
92 1409 TX 2 0
Index Area Code Area Name Pulse Rate Type Ignore Digit Count
Matrix
154 Eternity V8 System Manual
93 1410 MD 2 0
94 1412 PA 2 0
95 1413 MA 2 0
96 1414 WI 2 0
97 1415 CA 2 0
98 1416 Ontario 2 0
99 1417 MO 2 0
100 1418 Quebec 2 0
101 1419 OH 2 0
102 1423 TN 2 0
103 1424 CA 2 0
104 1425 WA 2 0
105 1430 TX 2 0
106 1432 TX 2 0
107 1434 VA 2 0
108 1435 UT 2 0
109 1438 Quebec 2 0
110 1440 OH 2 0
111 1441 Bermuda 2 0
112 1443 MD 2 0
113 1450 Quebec 2 0
114 1456 NANParea 2 0
115 1469 TX 2 0
116 1473 Grenada 2 0
117 1478 GA 2 0
118 1479 AR 2 0
119 1480 AZ 2 0
120 1484 PA 2 0
121 1500 NANParea 2 0
122 1501 AR 2 0
123 1502 KY 2 0
124 1503 OR 2 0
125 1504 LA 2 0
126 1505 NM 2 0
127 1506 NewBrunswick 2 0
128 1507 MN 2 0
129 1508 MA 2 0
130 1509 WA 2 0
131 1510 CA 2 0
132 1512 TX 2 0
133 1513 OH 2 0
134 1514 Quebec 2 0
135 1515 IA 2 0
136 1516 NY 2 0
137 1517 MI 2 0
Index Area Code Area Name Pulse Rate Type Ignore Digit Count
Matrix
Eternity V8 System Manual 155
138 1518 NY 2 0
139 1519 Ontario 2 0
140 1520 AZ 2 0
141 1530 CA 2 0
142 1540 VA 2 0
143 1541 OR 2 0
144 1551 NJ 2 0
145 1559 CA 2 0
146 1561 FL 2 0
147 1562 CA 2 0
148 1563 IA 2 0
149 1567 OH 2 0
150 1570 PA 2 0
151 1571 VA 2 0
152 1573 MO 2 0
153 1574 IN 2 0
154 1575 NM 2 0
155 1580 OK 2 0
156 1585 NY 2 0
157 1586 MI 2 0
158 1600 Canada 2 0
159 1601 MS 2 0
160 1602 AZ 2 0
161 1603 NH 2 0
162 1604 BC 2 0
163 1605 SD 2 0
164 1606 KY 2 0
165 1607 NY 2 0
166 1608 WI 2 0
167 1609 NJ 2 0
168 1610 PA 2 0
169 1612 MN 2 0
170 1613 Ontario 2 0
171 1614 OH 2 0
172 1615 TN 2 0
173 1616 MI 2 0
174 1617 MA 2 0
175 1618 IL 2 0
176 1619 CA 2 0
177 1620 KS 2 0
178 1623 AZ 2 0
179 1626 CA 2 0
180 1630 IL 2 0
181 1631 NY 2 0
182 1636 MO 2 0
Index Area Code Area Name Pulse Rate Type Ignore Digit Count
Matrix
156 Eternity V8 System Manual
183 1641 IA 2 0
184 1646 NY 2 0
185 1647 Ontario 2 0
186 1649 T&CIsland 2 0
187 1650 CA 2 0
188 1651 MN 2 0
189 1660 MO 2 0
190 1661 CA 2 0
191 1662 MS 2 0
192 1664 Montsrat 2 0
193 1670 CNMI 2 0
194 1671 GU 2 0
195 1678 GA 2 0
196 1682 TX 2 0
197 1684 AS 2 0
198 1700 NANParea 2 0
199 1701 ND 2 0
200 1702 NV 2 0
201 1703 VA 2 0
202 1704 NC 2 0
203 1705 Ontario 2 0
204 1706 GA 2 0
205 1707 CA 2 0
206 1708 IL 2 0
207 1709 Newfoundland 2 0
208 1710 US 2 0
209 1712 IA 2 0
210 1713 TX 2 0
211 1714 CA 2 0
212 1715 WI 2 0
213 1716 NY 2 0
214 1717 PA 2 0
215 1718 NY 2 0
216 1719 CO 2 0
217 1720 CO 2 0
218 1724 PA 2 0
219 1727 FL 2 0
220 1731 TN 2 0
221 1732 NJ 2 0
222 1734 MI 2 0
223 1740 OH 2 0
224 1754 FL 2 0
225 1757 VA 2 0
226 1758 St.Lucia 2 0
227 1760 CA 2 0
Index Area Code Area Name Pulse Rate Type Ignore Digit Count
Matrix
Eternity V8 System Manual 157
228 1762 GA 2 0
229 1763 MN 2 0
230 1765 IN 2 0
231 1767 Dominica 2 0
232 1769 MS 2 0
233 1770 GA 2 0
234 1772 FL 2 0
235 1773 IL 2 0
236 1774 MA 2 0
237 1775 NV 2 0
238 1778 BC 2 0
239 1779 IL 2 0
240 1780 Alberta 2 0
241 1781 MA 2 0
242 1784 St. V&G 2 0
243 1785 KS 2 0
244 1786 FL 2 0
245 1787 PrtoRico 2 0
246 1800 NANParea 2 0
247 1801 UT 2 0
248 1802 VT 2 0
249 1803 SC 2 0
250 1804 VA 2 0
251 1805 CA 2 0
252 1806 TX 2 0
253 1807 Ontario 2 0
254 1808 HI 2 0
255 1809 DomRepub 2 0
256 1810 MI 2 0
257 1812 IN 2 0
258 1813 FL 2 0
259 1814 PA 2 0
260 1815 IL 2 0
261 1816 MO 2 0
262 1817 TX 2 0
263 1818 CA 2 0
264 1819 Quebec 2 0
265 1828 NC 2 0
266 1829 DomRepub 2 0
267 1830 TX 2 0
268 1831 CA 2 0
269 1832 TX 2 0
270 1843 SC 2 0
271 1845 NY 2 0
272 1847 IL 2 0
Index Area Code Area Name Pulse Rate Type Ignore Digit Count
Matrix
158 Eternity V8 System Manual
273 1848 NJ 2 0
274 1850 FL 2 0
275 1856 NJ 2 0
276 1857 MA 2 0
277 1858 CA 2 0
278 1859 KY 2 0
279 1860 CT 2 0
280 1862 NJ 2 0
281 1863 FL 2 0
282 1864 SC 2 0
283 1865 TN 2 0
284 1866 NANParea 2 0
285 1867 Yukon 2 0
286 1868 Tri&Tob 2 0
287 1869 St. K&N 2 0
288 1870 AR 2 0
289 1876 Jamaica 2 0
290 1877 NANParea 2 0
291 1878 PA 2 0
292 1888 NANParea 2 0
293 1900 NANParea 2 0
294 1901 TN 2 0
295 1902 N Scotia 2 0
296 1903 TX 2 0
297 1904 FL 2 0
298 1905 Ontario 2 0
299 1906 MI 2 0
300 1907 AK 2 0
301 1908 NJ 2 0
302 1909 CA 2 0
303 1910 NC 2 0
304 1912 GA 2 0
305 1913 KS 2 0
306 1914 NY 2 0
307 1915 TX 2 0
308 1916 CA 2 0
309 1917 NY 2 0
310 1918 OK 2 0
311 1919 NC 2 0
312 1920 WI 2 0
313 1925 CA 2 0
314 1928 AZ 2 0
315 1931 TN 2 0
316 1936 TX 2 0
317 1937 OH 2 0
Index Area Code Area Name Pulse Rate Type Ignore Digit Count
Matrix
Eternity V8 System Manual 159
318 1939 PrtoRico 2 0
319 1940 TX 2 0
320 1941 FL 2 0
321 1947 MI 2 0
322 1949 CA 2 0
323 1951 CA 2 0
324 1952 MN 2 0
325 1954 FL 2 0
326 1956 TX 2 0
327 1970 CO 2 0
328 1971 OR 2 0
329 1972 TX 2 0
330 1973 NJ 2 0
331 1978 MA 2 0
332 1979 TX 2 0
333 1980 NC 2 0
334 1985 LA 2 0
335 1989 MI 2 0
336 0117 Kazkstan 2
337 01120 Egypt 2
338 01127 South Africa 2
339 01130 Greece 2
340 01131 Netherlands 2
341 01132 Belgium 2
342 01133 France 2
343 01134 Spain 2
344 01136 Hungary 2
345 01139 VaticanCity 2
346 01140 Romania 2
347 01141 Switzerland 2
348 01143 Austria 2
349 01144 UK 2
350 01145 Denmark 2
351 01146 Sweden 2
352 01147 Norway 2
353 01148 Poland 2
354 01149 Germany 2
355 01151 Peru 2
356 01152 Mexico 2
357 01153 Cuba 2
358 01154 Argentine 2
359 01155 Brazil 2
360 01156 Chile 2
361 01157 Colombia 2
362 01158 Venezuela 2
Index Area Code Area Name Pulse Rate Type Ignore Digit Count
Matrix
160 Eternity V8 System Manual
363 01160 Malaysia 2
364 01161 Australia 2
365 01162 Indonesia 2
366 01163 Philippines 2
367 01164 NZ 2
368 01165 Singapore 2
369 01166 Thailand 2
370 01181 Japan 2
371 01182 Korea 2
372 01184 VietNam 2
373 01186 China 2
374 01190 Turkey 2
375 01191 India 2
376 01192 Pakistan 2
377 01193 Afghanistan 2
378 01194 Sri Lanka 2
379 01195 Myanmar 2
380 01198 Iran 2
381 011212 Morocco 2
382 011213 Algeria 2
383 011216 Tunisia 2
384 011218 Libya 2
385 011220 Gambia 2
386 011221 Senegal 2
387 011222 Mauritania 2
388 011223 Mali 2
389 011224 Guinea 2
390 011225 IvoryCoast 2
391 011226 BurkinaFaso 2
392 011227 Niger 2
393 011228 Togolese 2
394 011229 Benin 2
395 011230 Mauritius 2
396 011231 Liberia 2
397 011232 SierraLeone 2
398 011233 Ghana 2
399 011234 Nigeria 2
400 011235 Chad 2
401 011236 CenAfrica 2
402 011237 Cameroon 2
403 011238 CapeVerde 2
404 011239 SaoTome 2
405 011240 Equtl_Guinea 2
406 011241 Gabonese 2
407 011242 Congo 2
Index Area Code Area Name Pulse Rate Type Ignore Digit Count
Matrix
Eternity V8 System Manual 161
408 011243 CongoDem 2
409 011244 Angola 2
410 011245 GuineaBissa 2
411 011246 DiegoGarcia 2
412 011247 Ascension 2
413 011248 Seychelles 2
414 011249 Sudan 2
415 011250 Rwandese 2
416 011251 Ethiopia 2
417 011252 SomalianRep 2
418 011253 Djibouti 2
419 011254 Kenya 2
420 011255 Tanzania 2
421 011256 Uganda 2
422 011257 Burundi 2
423 011258 Mozambiqu 2
424 011260 Zambia 2
425 011261 Madagascar 2
426 011262 Reunion 2
427 011263 Zimbabwe 2
428 011264 Namibia 2
429 011265 Malawi 2
430 011266 Lesotho 2
431 011267 Botswana 2
432 011268 Swaziland 2
433 011269 Comoros 2
434 011290 StHelena 2
435 011291 Eritrea 2
436 011297 Aruba 2
437 011298 FaroeIsland 2
438 011299 Greenland 2
439 011350 Gibraltar 2
440 011351 Portugal 2
441 011352 Luxembourg 2
442 011353 Ireland 2
443 011354 Iceland 2
444 011355 Albania 2
445 011356 Malta 2
446 011357 Cyprus 2
447 011358 Finland 2
448 011359 Bulgaria 2
449 011370 Lithuania 2
450 011371 Latvia 2
451 011372 Estonia 2
452 011373 Moldova 2
Index Area Code Area Name Pulse Rate Type Ignore Digit Count
Matrix
162 Eternity V8 System Manual
453 011374 Armenia 2
454 011375 Belarus 2
455 011376 Andorra 2
456 011377 Monaco 2
457 011378 SanMarino 2
458 011379 VaticanCity 2
459 011380 Ukraine 2
460 011381 Yugoslavia 2
461 011385 Croatia 2
462 011386 Slovenia 2
463 011387 Bosnia 2
464 011389 Macedonia 2
465 011420 Czech Repub 2
466 011421 Slovakia 2
467 011423 Liechtensten 2
468 011500 Falkland 2
469 011501 Belize 2
470 011502 Guatemala 2
471 011503 El Salvador 2
472 011504 Honduras 2
473 011505 Nicaragua 2
474 011506 CostaRica 2
475 011507 Panama 2
476 011508 St.Pierre 2
477 011509 Haiti 2
478 011590 Guadeloupe 2
479 011591 Bolivia 2
480 011592 Guyana 2
481 011593 Ecuador 2
482 011594 FrenchGuiana 2
483 011595 Paraguay 2
484 011596 Martinique 2
485 011597 Suriname 2
486 011598 Uruguay 2
487 011599 NethAntilles 2
488 011670 East Timor 2
489 011672 Antarctic 2
490 011673 Brunei 2
491 011674 Nauru 2
492 011675 PapuaNewGuin 2
493 011676 Tonga 2
494 011677 SolomonIslnd 2
495 011678 Vanuatu 2
496 011679 Fiji 2
497 011680 Palau 2
Index Area Code Area Name Pulse Rate Type Ignore Digit Count
Matrix
Eternity V8 System Manual 163
498 011681 Wallis Island 2
499 011682 Cook Islands 2
500 011683 Niuel Island 2
501 011684 AmerSamoa 2
502 011685 WSamoa 2
503 011686 Kiribati 2
504 011687 NewCaledonia 2
505 011688 Tuvalu 2
506 011689 FrenchPolyne 2
507 011690 Tokelau 2
508 011691 Micronesia 2
509 011692 MarshalIslnd 2
510 011850 Korea North 2
511 011852 Hongkong 2
512 011853 Macau 2
513 011855 Cambodia 2
514 011856 Laos 2
515 011870 SatIndlOcn 2
516 011871 SatEastAtl 2
517 011872 SatPacific 2
518 011873 SatIndianOcn 2
519 011874 SatWestAtl 2
520 011880 Bangladesh 2
521 011960 Maldives 2
522 011961 Lebanon 2
523 011962 Jordan 2
524 011963 SyrianArab 2
525 011964 Iraq 2
526 011965 Kuwait 2
527 011966 SaudiArabia 2
528 011967 Yemen 2
529 011968 Oman 2
530 011971 UAE 2
531 011972 Israel 2
532 011973 Bahrain 2
533 011974 Qatar 2
534 011975 Bhutan 2
535 011976 Mongolia 2
536 011977 Nepal 2
537 011992 Tajikistan 2
538 011993 Turkmenistan 2
539 011994 Azerbaijani 2
540 011995 Georgia 2
541 011996 Kyrgyzstan 2
542 011998 Uzbekistan 2
Index Area Code Area Name Pulse Rate Type Ignore Digit Count
Matrix
164 Eternity V8 System Manual
Relevant Topics:
1. Call Cost Display 165
2. Call Budget 140
3. QSIG 508
=X=X=
543 2
544 2
545 2
546 2
547 2
: 2
998 2
999 2
Index Area Code Area Name Pulse Rate Type Ignore Digit Count
Matrix
Eternity V8 System Manual 165
Call Cost Display
Whats this?
The Eternity supports to check the 'Cost' and the corresponding 'Dialed Number' for the last 10 calls made from the DKP.
This feature is called 'Call Cost Display' (CCD). The last 10 calls can be for the numbers dialed from the Trunk port and
on the Tie line network. The DSS key can also be assigned for this feature.
How to enable/disable Call Cost Display from SA mode?
Use following command to enable/disable 'Call Cost Display' for the station (DKP):
1072-181-Station-Flag
Where,
By Default, the CCD is enabled. You can navigate the up/down key to get the display of cost of last 10 calls.
How to display the Call Cost using Access Code?
The display is retained till the station remains OFF-Hook. The display will be for Cost and the Dialed Number.
For Example:
If the call charge is in 'Cent/Paise' (75 Paise), for the dialed number 02652630555, then the display will be as:
<02652630555 0.75> with the Date and Time of the call.
Relevant Topics:
1. Call Cost Calculation (CCC) 143
2. Call Budget 140
3. QSIG 508
=X=X=
Flag Meaning
0 Disable
1 Enable
Lift the handset Dial tone
Dial 1075. The Cost and Dialed Number will be displayed on the DKP.
Matrix
166 Eternity V8 System Manual
Call Disconnection Tone Detection
Whats this?
When the called party disconnects, the PSTN sends a Tone after some time to the calling party. On detecting this
tone pattern the system releases the TWT port. This tone is called Disconnection Tone.
The disconnect tone detection is supported for TWT port.
The CDT works as described below with Flow Chart.
In TWT hardware template two fields are to be programmed to enable/disable CDT detection at DID No Dial State
and DID Disconnect Tone Detection Timer.
DID Disconnect Tone Detection Timer is of significance only if the CDT detection is enabled at DID No Dial State
and caller doesnt dial any digit during DID Greeting message/Dial beep timer.
DID Disconnect Tone Detection Timer will start after No Dial message (if assigned) or on expiry of the DID Dial Beep
Timer (i.e. there is no input from caller).
If the CDT detection is enabled in DID No Dial State and caller doesnt dial any digit during DID Dial tone timer, then
the system will start new timer DID Disconnect Tone Detection Timer. During this time Eternity will check for the
CDT. If the caller is connected with the call he will get silence for this period of time.
If CDT is detected in this state, TWT port will get released.
If CDT is not detected during this timer, the call will be processed normally (route to programmed destination) but the
Eternity will look for the Call disconnect Tone detection, if it is enabled for the All Call states other than DID No dial
state.
Calls-Other than DID No dial State:
Enabling this will enable tone detection during OG Call, Non-DID IC Calls and DID IC calls after answering of station
user.
Calls-In DID No Dial State:
Enabling this will enable tone detection during DID. IC call in which caller disconnects without dialing any digit. In such
case, this option will prevent routing of this type of DID calls and the previous call will not be generated, by the
system.
For example: (refer below figure).
If during a call from FXS (party X) to TWT, after the conversation if the station user goes ON-Hook, the TWT gets
released, but if the called party (Party Y) disconnects and the station user (party X) doesnt go ON-Hook properly, the
TWT port of calling partys PBX, remains OFF-Hook. Hence it is desirable to release the TWT port as soon as the
called party disconnects.
Refer flowcharts on next page for more details.
How it works?
Both the options mentioned above can be programmed as enable/disable.
Disconnect tones frequency is not programmable. TWT port of the PBX, will detect any frequency from 275 to 655Hz.
The cadence of Disconnect Tone ON-OFF time is programmable.
Tone with frequency within 275 to 655Hz and having cadence matching with programmed ON time and OFF time will
be considered as disconnect tone and the TWT port will be released.
How to program?
Refer chapter TWT Hardware Template.
Program Disconnection tone detection for IC calls as; Enabled/Disable.
Eternity
PSTN
Called
Party (Y)
Calling
Party (X)
Matrix
Eternity V8 System Manual 167
Program ON Time and OFF Time.
Range of ON Time is from: 0001 to 9999 milliseconds. Default: 750 ms.
Range of OFF Time is from: 0001 to 9999 milliseconds. Default: 750 ms.
Important Points:
Disconnect Tones Frequency and ON Time and OFF Time (Cadence) can be known from PSTN Exchange from
which trunk line is subscribed.
This feature is not applicable for the T1E1PRI, Mobile, SIP and BRI trunk because their protocols support specific
messages for the call disconnection, and so the ports get released because of proper disconnection signaling.
Relevant Topics:
1. Disconnect Information on TWT 299
2. Disconnect Signaling on SLT 301
Call comes on TWT port
Is DID activated
on the TWT?
System answers the call by
making TWT off-hook
Is voice message
greeting programmed for
this trunk and current time
zone ?
System routes the call on the
programmed destination station
No
Yes
System plays the greeting message
System plays
the music
No
Yes
System gives beeps to the caller prompting him to
dial the desired station/Dial message and beeps
B
Station user answers the call
CDT detection
for All Call states other
than DID No Dial
state?
Valid CDT
detected?
System release TWT port
Enable
Disable
Yes
No
System start CDT Detection
End
System will not
detect CDT
End
A
System will start DTMF detection
Station user
on-hook?
System release
TWT Port
End
No
Yes
C
Start
Matrix
168 Eternity V8 System Manual
=X=X=
B
Has the
caller dialed any
digit/digits ?
Has the
DID beeps timer
expired?
Ssytem will play DID no
dial message if assigned
Is digit /
digits dialed valid
station
number ?
Is the
station free?
System transfers the call
to the dialed station.
System will play the DID error
message or give error tone
A
System will play DID busy
message or give busy tone
A
Caller is connected
with the station
End
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
No
CDT detection
for DID No Dial
State?
System will start CDT detection
and DID/DISA CDT Detection
timer
Enable
Disable
DID CDT
detection timer
expired?
No
Yes
System will continue
CDT detection
Valid CDT
detected?
System will release
TWT port
End
Yes
No
System will route call to
programmed destination.
Give RBT to caller
System will give
RBT to caller
CDT detection
for all call states other
than DID No Dial
state?
System will start CDT
detection Note
Enable
Disable
Note:
During CDT detection if Valid CDT is
detected
Yes
System will play DID No Reply Msg
(if assigned) or Give Dialing beeps
End
System will play DID no dial
message if assigned
System will stop DTMF
Detection
System will start
DID Ring Timer
System will stop DTMF
Detection
System will start DID
Inactivity Timer
Station user
Answers ?
System will stop DID
Inactivity Timer
Yes
DID Inactivity
Timer Expired?
System will release
TWT Port
End
No
Yes
No
System will stop
Ringing Station
Call Answered
within DID Ring
Timer?
System will start DTMF
Detection Mode
System will stop CDT
Detection if started
C
Matrix
Eternity V8 System Manual 169
Call Duration Control (CDC)
Whats this?
Call Duration Control (CDC) helps the customer to restrict the duration of the calls whether internal, incoming or outgoing
external calls. This feature disconnects internal, incoming or outgoing external calls after a set time. People tend to talk
about sports, movies, politics and such other subjects over telephone. Now, these topics are generally not related to
business. Moreover, such topics tend to take more time than the business talk for which the call was originally made. If
duration of each call can be restricted, people will talk to the point and not drift to other unproductive talk.
There are many advantages:
Reduction in telephone bills.
Trunks will be easily available for other outgoing calls. More business calls can be made during working hours leading
to more business.
Your trunks remain free for incoming calls. More customers can call.
People spend more time on the actual job on hand rather than on telephone. This means increased productivity.
How it works?
Eternity uses Allowed Lists and Denied Lists to support this feature.
When a call is made, the Eternity compares each digit of the dialed number string with the number strings in Allowed
List and Denied List.
If the dialed number string matches with any of the number strings available in allowed list, the Eternity treats CDC to
be OFF and does not disconnect the call.
If the dialed number string matches with any of the number strings available in denied list, the Eternity treats CDC to
be ON and disconnects the call after CDC timer (Provided CDC Disconnection flag is enabled).
If the dialed number matches with a number string that is available in both allowed and denied list then allowed list is
given priority and Eternity treats CDC to be OFF.
The above logic is followed for incoming calls also.
If the CDC for internal call is ON then CDC is applicable to all internal calls.
The Eternity gives warning beep to the user on expiry of the CDC timer. The call continues for another 20 seconds
after the beep and gets disconnected if the disconnection flag is enabled. This timer is fixed.
If the disconnection flag is disabled then the system does not disconnect the call but reloads the CDC timer again.
For Inter PINX or Intra PINX calls (QSIG Calls), the CDC feature will work only if it is enabled on the source port
(Calling station) irrespective of CDC is enabled or disabled on the called station.
The system gives warning beeps every time the CDC timer is matured. This helps the user to know the duration for
which he has been talking.
How to use it?
Call Duration Control can be set for each station.
Call Duration Control for Internal calls can be enabled/disabled.
Call Duration Control for Incoming calls can be enabled/disabled.
Eternity
Calling Party
Called Party
Call Disconnect
after 3 Minutes
Warning Beep
CDC Warn Timer CDC Good-Bye Timer
Total time after which call will be disconnected
Matrix
170 Eternity V8 System Manual
Call Duration Control for External Outgoing calls can be enabled/disabled.
Maximum of 64 CDC processes are available.
At a time, 64 calls can be restricted by Eternity for call duration.
Enabling CDC for different types of calls, defining the CDC timer, assigning External List, etc. forms a table called
CDC Table.
Each CDC Table looks like:
Maximum eight CDC tables can be programmed.
One such table can be assigned to the SLT/DKP user.
Eight CDC tables are available by default, which satisfies most of the requirements. Hence these tables can be
directly assigned to the stations.
By default, CDC Table.
By default, all stations are assigned CDC table 1.
However for special types of requirements, customized Allowed Lists and Denied Lists should be programmed and
should be assigned to a CDC table. Then after this CDC table should be assigned to a station. Please refer External
List for more details.
For example, to disconnect all calls starting with '0' except those starting with '022', program with string '022' and with
string '0' and assign these lists as allowed list and denied in the CDC table.
How to program?
Step 1
Take a pen and a paper pad. Decide the type of calls viz. Outgoing, Incoming or Internal for which CDC is to be enabled.
Step 2
Please refer Station Advanced Feature Template for more details.
Step 3
Use following command to enable CDC for Outgoing Call:
4202-1-CDC Table-Code
4202-2-CDC Table-CDC Table-Code
4202-*-Code
Where,
Parameter Value
Internal Call Control Yes/No
Incoming Call Control Yes/No
Outgoing Call Control Yes/No
Calls Allowed List Number from 01 to 24
Calls Denied List Number from 01 to 24
CDC Timer 001-999 Seconds
CDC Disconnection Flag Yes/No
CDC Table No. Int. CDC IC CDC OG CDC CDC Apply on CDC Don't Apply CDC Timer CDC Dis. Flag
1 No No No Ext. list 07 Ext. list 08 160 Sec. Disable
2 No No Yes Ext. list 07 Ext. list 08 160 Sec. Disable
3 No No Yes Ext. list 07 Ext. list 08 160 Sec. Disable
4 No No Yes Ext. list 07 Ext. list 08 160 Sec. Disable
5 No No Yes Ext. list 07 Ext. list 08 160 Sec. Disable
6 No No Yes Ext. list 07 Ext. list 08 160 Sec. Disable
7 No No No Ext. list 07 Ext. list 08 160 Sec. Disable
8 No No No Ext. list 07 Ext. list 08 160 Sec. Disable
The commands explained below should be referred as:
To program a single port: XXXX-1
To program a range of ports: XXXX-2
To program all the ports: XXXX-*
Matrix
Eternity V8 System Manual 171
CDC Table is from 1 to 8.
Use following command to enable CDC for Incoming Call:
4203-1-CDC Table-Code
4203-2-CDC Table-CDC Table-Code
4203-*-Code
Where,
CDC Table is from 1 to 8.
Use following command to enable CDC for internal call:
4204-1-CDC Table-Code
4204-2-CDC Table-CDC Table-Code
4204-*-Code
Where,
CDC Table is from 1 to 8.
Use following command to assign an external number to a table (Allowed Numbers):
4205-1-CDC Table-External List
4205-2-CDC Table-CDC Table-External List
4205-*-External List
Where,
CDC Table is from 1 to 8.
External List is from 01 to 24.
By default, External List (Allowed) number = 07.
Use following command to assign an external number to a table (Denied Numbers):
4206-1-CDC Table-External Number
4206-2-CDC Table-CDC Table-External Number
4206-*-External Number
Where,
CDC Table is from 1 to 8.
External List is from 01 to 24.
By default, External List (Denied) Number = 08.
Use following command to assign CDC timer to a CDC table:
4207-1-CDC Table-CDC Timer
4207-2-CDC Table-CDC Table-CDC Timer
4207-*-CDC Timer
Where,
CDC Table is from 1 to 8.
CDC Timer is from 001 to 999 seconds.
Use following command to assign disconnection flag to a CDC table:
4208-1-CDC Table-Disconnection Flag
4208-2-CDC Table-CDC Table-Disconnection Flag
4208-*-Disconnection Flag
Where,
CDC Table is from 1 to 8.
Step 4
(To default the CDC table)
Code Meaning
1 CDC Enabled
0 CDC Disabled
Code Meaning
1 CDC Enabled
0 CDC Disabled
Code Meaning
1 CDC Enabled
0 CDC Disabled
Matrix
172 Eternity V8 System Manual
For the default values please refer the default values of different parameter in different table explained earlier.
Use the following command to default a CDC table:
4201-1-CDC Table
4201-2-CDC Table-CDC Table
4201-*
Where,
CDC Table is 1 to 8.
Example 1:
Program SLT 202 (software port number 001) for following constraints:
Disconnect all calls starting with '0' after 240 seconds except calls starting with '022'.
Solution:
As observed this type of requirement cannot be met by default CDC table. Also it is not advisable to disturb any default
CDC table because these might be assigned to other stations. Hence customize any CDC table and assign it to station
201.
Let us customize CDC table 5.
Enable CDC for Outgoing call
4202-1-5-1
Program the number '0' in External List 04 and '022' in External List 05. (This step is necessary because default External
List does not contain such an option whereby 022 is available in allowed list and 0 is available in denied list).
Please refer External List for more details on programming above requirements.
Assign External List 04 as allowed list and External List 05 as denied list in table 5.
4205-1-5-04
4206-1-5-05
Assign CDC timer of 240 seconds
4207-1-5-240
Enable CDC disconnection flag in CDC table 5
4208-1-5-1
Assign CDC table 5 to SLT 202.
Please refer Station Advanced Feature Template for more details.
Important Points:
In case of transferred call, the CDC timer gets reset and starts again afresh on the transferred station.
It is possible to disconnect specific outgoing calls. For example it is possible to disconnect all calls to 022-8765432
after 180 seconds.
In case of Conference and Park state, CDC is treated OFF.
In case of Interrupt Request, Barge-In or Raid CDC is ON.
Relevant Topics:
1. Call Duration Display 173
2. External List 362
3. Station Advanced Feature Template 565
=X=X=
Matrix
Eternity V8 System Manual 173
Call Duration Display
Whats this?
The Eternity helps the user to know the duration of the current outgoing call instantly. The system displays the
duration of the call on the LCD of the Digital Key Phone.
How it works?
When the DKP user goes OFF-Hook, dials an external number, the system waits for inter digit timer after the last digit
dialed. The external number is dialed out. DKP displays dialed external number with duration (5 digits in the format of
MM:SS), when the call is matured.
Important Point:
Only DKP users can use this feature.
Relevant Topic:
1. Call Duration Control (CDC) 169
=X=X=
Matrix
174 Eternity V8 System Manual
Call Forward
Whats this?
In an organisation people move from one place to another place during typical workday. They do not sit at fixed
places. A manager might go on the production floor or remain in conference room for few hours. In such situation, he
cannot afford to miss his calls. He would like to fulfill this requirement. Eternity offers a facility called Call Forward.
Many times the user shuttles between two places frequently. In such case it is cumbersome to forward the call, cancel
it and repeat this activity frequently. Eternity offers flexibility to allow the user to attend the call at either place also.
Access to Call forward is programmable. Calls can be forwarded to an external number or VMS also.
The Call Forward-Dual ring is not supported by QSIG signaling.
How it works?
The following flow chart explains the logic:
The calls of a station can be forwarded to another station, to an External Number/Department Group or the VMS group.
The calls of a station can be forwarded when the station is busy, when the station does not reply and when the station is
busy or does not reply. Eternity allows the user to forward his calls, yet program that both the stations ring. The user can
answer the call from either station. Please refer the topics Routing Group, Department Call and Voice Mail Integration for
more details on Department Group and VMS Group.
How to use it?
1. Call Forward-All calls to another Station
One can forward all the calls to his station to another station where he might be temporarily shifted.
Example:
If Station 23 wants to forward his calls to Station 24, he should dial 131-24.
1 Lift the handset. Dial tone
2 Dial 131-Station/Department Group/VMS Group. Confirmation tone
3 Replace the handset.
Start
Station A calls station B
Has station
B forwarded his
calls?
System routes the call to new
station where calls are forwarded
Is the
new station
free?
System places the call on new station. New
station get ring. Station A gets ring back tone.
End
System checks for other features
End
System blocks the call.
Station A gets busy tone.
End
No
Yes
No
Yes
Matrix
Eternity V8 System Manual 175
2. Call Forward-All calls to external number
One can forward all the calls to his station to any outside number.
Example:
If Station 23 wants to forward his calls to his residence using TAC 61, he should dial 131-61-2630555-#*.
3. Call Forward-If Busy
One can forward all the calls to his station if he is busy with some other station when the call arrives.
Example:
If station 23 wants to forward all his calls to station 24 when he is busy, he should dial 132-24.
4. Call Forward-If Busy-All calls to external number
One can forward all the calls to his station to any outside number.
Example:
If Station 23 wants to forward his calls to his residence using trunk access code 61 when he is busy, he should dial
132-61-2630555-#*.
5. Call Forward-If No Reply
Each station can set different 'Time' after which the call gets forwarded for feature, Call Forward-No Reply. The default
time is 30 seconds. This time is programmable for each station. Refer chapter Station Advanced Feature Template. This
timer is called 'Call Forward Ring Timer'.
Example:
Station 23 wants that if he does not answer the calls within 30 seconds the calls should go to Station 24 (his
colleague), he should dial 133-24.
6. Call Forward-If No Reply-All calls to external number
Each station can set different 'Time' after which the call gets forwarded for feature, Call Forward-No Reply. The default
time is 30 seconds. This time is programmable for each station. Refer chapter Station Advanced Feature Template. This
timer is called 'Call Forward Ring Timer'.
Example:
If Station 23 wants to forward his calls to his residence using trunk access code 61 if he does not answer the call
within 30 secs., he should dial 133-61-2630555-#*.
7. Call Forward-If Busy or No Reply
Each station can set different 'Time' after which the call gets forwarded for feature, Call Forward-No Reply. The default
time is 30 seconds. This time is programmable for each station. Refer chapter Station Advanced Feature Template. This
timer is called 'Call Forward Ring Timer'.
1 Lift the handset. Dial tone
2 Dial 131-Trunk Access Code-Destination Number-#*. Confirmation tone
3 Replace the handset.
1 Lift the handset. Dial tone
2 Dial 132-Station/Department Group/VMS Group. Confirmation tone
3 Replace the handset.
1 Lift the handset. Dial tone
2 Dial 132-Trunk Access Code-Destination Number-#*. Confirmation tone
3 Replace the handset.
1 Lift the handset. Dial tone
2 Dial 133-Station/Department Group/VMS Group. Confirmation tone
3 Replace the handset.
1 Lift the handset. Dial tone
2 Dial 133-Trunk Access Code-Destination Number-#*. Confirmation tone
3 Replace the handset.
Matrix
176 Eternity V8 System Manual
8. Call Forward-If Busy or No Reply-All calls to external number
One can forward all the calls to his station to any outside number if he is busy or does not answer the call.
Example:
If Station 23 wants to forward his calls to his residence using trunk access code 61 when he is busy or does not reply,
he should dial 134-61-2630555-#*.
9. Cancel Call Forward
10. Call Forward-Dual Ring
This feature enables the user to attend the call on either station viz. users station or the forwarded station.
Note: The Call Forward-Dual ring is not supported by QSIG signaling.
On enabling this command:
If the user uses Call Forward-If No Reply then the station on which the call is forwarded will ring for 'Call Forward Ring
Timer', Transfer on no-reply and then after both the stations will ring. Refer chapter Station Advanced Feature Template.
Example:
If Station 23 wants to forward his calls to Station 24, he should dial 131-24. If the user also dials 1361 then both the
stations 23 and 24 will ring simultaneously and the user can answer the call from either station.
11. Disable Call Forward-Dual Ring
How to program?
Call forward is a programmable feature and it can be allowed or denied for a station. Please refer Class of Service (COS)
for more details.
Call Forward Ring Timer: Each station can set different 'Time' after which the call gets forwarded for feature, Call
Forward-No Reply. For this, the station should be assigned the suitable Station Advance Feature template. Refer chapter
Station Advanced Feature Template to assign the template.
Important Points:
If Station A forwards his calls to Station B, then Station C can forward his calls to Station A.
If Station A forward his calls to Station B, Station B can now forward his calls to Station C. All the calls for Station A
now land on Station B only, but the calls of Station B land on Station C.
Only one type of call forward can be set from a station every new call forward set overwrites the previously set call
forward.
In case, a station forwards calls to an external number, the internal calls to the station are not forwarded to the
external number.
1 Lift the handset. Dial tone
2 Dial 134-Station/Department Group/VMS Group. Confirmation tone
3 Replace the handset.
1 Lift the handset. Dial tone
2 Dial 134-Trunk Access Code-Destination Number-#*. Confirmation tone
3 Replace the handset.
1 Lift the handset. Dial tone
2 Dial 130. Confirmation tone
3 Replace the handset.
1 Lift the handset. Dial tone
2 Dial 1361. Confirmation tone
3 Replace the handset.
1 Lift the handset. Dial tone
2 Dial 1360. Confirmation tone
3 Replace the handset.
Matrix
Eternity V8 System Manual 177
Station A (24) belonging to a department group (for e.g. 3901) forwards his calls (on Busy or No Reply or If Busy + No
Reply) to Station B. Now when Station C calls Station A directly, the calls are forwarded to Station B. If Station C calls
the department group, the calls land in sequence on all the stations of the department group. When it is the turn of
Station A, the calls are not forwarded to station B but Station A rings instead.
When Call Forward-No Reply is to a Department Group, please ensure that the RBT timer of the caller is greater than
the Ring Timer of the department.
When the calls are forwarded the user normally gets the feature tone on lifting the handset. This is normally an
indication to the user that the calls of his station are forwarded.
DND is given priority over Call Forward, when both are set.

Relevant Topics:
1. Class of Service (COS) 200
2. Department Call 246
3. OG Trunk Bundle Group 474
4. Voice Mail Integration 705
5. Routing Group 533
6. Call Progress Tones 183
7. Trunk Landing Group (TLG) 684
8. Call Transfer 192
9. Do Not Disturb (DND) 304
10. QSIG 508
=X=X=
Matrix
178 Eternity V8 System Manual
Call Forward-Remote
Whats this?
The Eternity allows a feature Call Forward-Remote. This is possible only from SA mode.
With this a station user can set Call Forward for a remote station from his/her station.
This feature is very useful for Enterprises where the operator or receptionist can forward the calls for Manager and
other users to the destinations where they will be available.
Notes:
The Call Forward-Remote is not supported by QSIG signaling.
Refer separate Manual for Hotel Applications of this feature.
How to use it?
From SA Mode
To set Call Forward-Remote (From SLT/DKP)
To set Call Forward of all the stations (From SLT/DKP)
Where,
Source station could be a SLT (001-512) or DKP (001-128)
Destination can be SLT, DKP, a Department Group, VMS Group or External Number.
How to program?
Access to Call Forward-Remote is programmable. Please refer Class of Service (COS) for more details. Station users
with 'Allow SA Settings' enabled in their COS can execute this feature.
Relevant Topics:
1. Call Forward 174
2. Class of Service (COS) 200
3. Programming the System 503
=X=X=
1 Dial 1072-006-Flexible Number-Call Forward Type-Destination. Confirmation tone
1 Dial 1072-007-Call Forward Type-Destination. Confirmation tone
Call Forward Type Meaning
0 Cancel
1 All Calls
2 If Busy
3 If No Reply
4 If Busy or No Reply
5 Dual Ring
Matrix
Eternity V8 System Manual 179
Call Park
What is this?
The station user can use 'Call Park' feature only if "Call Park" is enabled in COS of the requesting station. Refer
chapter Class of Service (COS).
Current call can be parked and the station user can attend to other calls.
The parked person gets music.
Once the call is parked the station user can use other system features like Call Pick Up, External Call, etc.
The parked call can be retrieved on completion of the current call.
The System hunts the station that has parked the call on expiry of the Call Park Timer. If the station is free, it rings and
the caller now gets Ring Back Tone. If the station is not free then the call remains parked and again hunts on expiry
of the call park timer.
The system keeps hunting the station till the expiry of the Call Park Release Timer. On expiry of the call park release
timer, the call is disconnected.
The Eternity offers two types of Call Park facility viz. Call Park-General Orbit and Call Park-Personal Orbit. The
Station user can park the call either in the General Orbit or the Personal Orbit as per the requirement.
General Orbit:
The Eternity has 8 general orbits. A station can park his call in any of these orbits. Any station user can pick up the
call from anywhere by dialing the code of Retrieve Call Park code followed by the Orbit Number. For retrieving the
parked call, Class of Service is not checked, hence any station user can retrieve the parked call.
Personal Orbit:
Each SLT and DKP has one Personal Orbit. Calls Parked in personal orbit can be picked up only from where the
call is parked. So no other person can pick up this call. In personal orbit multiple calls can be parked at a time. No
programming is required for this.
How to use it?
To Park a call
To retrieve the Parked call
Orbit Number is from 1 to 9.
1 is the Personal Orbit Number.
2-9 is the General Orbit Number.
How to program?
Please refer Class of Service (COS) for more details on how to allow Call Park to a user.
Timers of Relevance:
Call Park Timer-Time after which the call comes back to the station that has parked the call.
Command: 3809-Seconds
Default: 045 seconds.
Range: 002 to 255 seconds.
Call Park Release Timer-Time after which the call gets disconnected.
Command: 3810-Minutes
Default: 003 minutes.
Range: 001 to 255 minutes.
Important Points:
If you dont retrieve the call within 45 seconds, the call comes back to you automatically. If your station is free, it starts
ringing. This timer is called Call Park Timer and is programmable.
If station is busy then the call again gets parked. The system again checks your station after 45 seconds.
The call gets released after 3 minutes if the parked call is not answered. This timer is called Call Park Release Timer.
1 Speech with trunk (or Station)
2 Dial Flash. Feature tone
3 Dial 115-Orbit Number. Call Parked.
1 Lift the handset. Dial tone
2 Dial 116-Orbit Number. Speech established.
Matrix
180 Eternity V8 System Manual
Only one call can be parked in each general orbit. However, multiple calls can be parked simultaneously in the
personal orbit.
If multiple calls are parked in the personal orbit then they can be retrieved one by one. However the call retrieval does
not follow any particular sequence like FIFO or LIFO.
The LED of the parked station keeps on flickering on the DKP of the user who has parked the call thereby giving
visual indication of call park status. Pressing the DSS key assigned for Call Park feature can retrieve the parked call.
In fact, this key works as toggle key. The same key can be used to park a call and retrieve the parked call.
Relevant Topic:
1. Class of Service (COS) 200
=X=X=
Matrix
Eternity V8 System Manual 181
Call Pick Up
Eternity offers two types of call pick up facility viz. Call Pick Up-group and Call Pick Up-selective.
Call Pick Up-Group
Whats this?
You can answer calls of your colleague or co-worker without physically going to his station. You can use this feature to
answer even trunk calls ringing on other stations.
CPU group is assigned to SLT, DKP and ISDN Terminal.
How to use it?
How to program?
Step 1
Take a pen and a piece of paper and list the stations to be grouped in one Call Pick Up Group. Make such groups as per
the need.
Step 2
Use the following command to program Call Pick Group for SLT:
3901-1-SLT-Call Pickup Group
3901-2-SLT-SLT-Call Pickup Group
3901-*-Call Pickup Group
Where,
SLT is from 001 to 512.
Call Pickup Group is from 00 to 99.
Use following command to de-assign Call Pickup Group for SLT:
3901-1-SLT-00
3901-2-SLT-SLT-00
3901-*
Step 3
Use the following command to program Call Pick Group for DKP:
3902-1-DKP-Call Pickup Group
3902-2-DKP-DKP-Call Pickup Group
3902-*-Call Pickup Group
Where,
DKP is from 001 to 128.
Call Pickup Group is from 00 to 99.
Use following command to de-assign Call Pickup Group for DKP:
3902-1-DKP-00
3902-2-DKP-DKP-00
3902-*
Step 4
Use following command to assign call pickup group to ISDN Terminal:
3903-1-ISDN Terminal-Call Pickup Group
3903-2-ISDN Terminal-ISDN Terminal-Call Pickup Group
3903-*-Call Pickup Group
Where,
ISDN Terminal is from 01 to 64.
Call Pickup Group is from 00 to 99.
1 Lift the handset. Dial tone
2 Dial 4. Speech.
The commands explained below should be referred as:
To program a single port: XXXX-1
To program a range of ports: XXXX-2
To program all the ports: XXXX-*
Matrix
182 Eternity V8 System Manual
Call Pickup Group 00 is used to de assign call pick up group to ISDN Terminal
By default, Call Pickup Group to ISDN Terminal is 01.
Step 5
Use the following command to program Call Pick Group for DOP:
3904-1-DOP-Call Pickup Group
Where,
DOP is 1.
Call Pickup Group is from 00 to 99.
By default, Call Pick Up Group is 01.
Use the following command to de-assign the Call Pick Up Group from a DOP:
3904-1-DOP-00
Call Pick Up-Selective
Whats this?
Answer call of a particular ringing station.
Useful when more than one stations are ringing and you want to answer one of them selectively.
How to use it?
How to program?
Please refer Class of Service (COS) for more details on how to allow Call Pickup-Selective to a user.
Important Points:
To pick up a call, using Call Pickup-Group the ringing stations should be in the same Pick Up Group.
In case of more stations ringing, the station with the least port number will be picked up first.
To pick up selective calls, the ringing station need not be in the same Call Pick Up Group.
The call pick up groups can be only 01 to 99, because assigning 00 as the call pick up group is equivalent to clearing
the Call Pick Up Group.
The DKP displays following messages:
If selective call pick up fails due to station in idle condition or in ringing state which cannot be attended due to
some feature set, then display reads as: Pick Up Failed.
If call pick up fails, due to station dialed is invalid station number then display reads as: Chk Stn Number.
Relevant Topics:
1. Class of Service (COS) 200
2. Station Basic Feature Template 569
=X=X=
1 Lift the handset. Dial tone
2 Dial 12-Number of Ringing Station. Speech.
Matrix
Eternity V8 System Manual 183
Call Progress Tones
Whats this?
The Eternity gives various tones in different situations. This is how the Eternity responds to dialing of codes and
commands. The call progress generation type (frequency and timings) is programmable. The Call Progress Tone
Generation (CPTG) type requirements of the various region markets are different. Hence, the Eternity gives flexibility
of choosing the required CPTG.
If an user, on selecting a Region Code for region 'xyz' and defaulting the system, the system is loaded with values to
suit the Region XYZ. CPTG is as per the CPTG type number as per the table below.
CPTG Type:
Eternity supports different CPTG types, stored in the 'Eternity ME Card Switch'. By default, CPTG Type is assigned
for all the region code, as per default table given below.
During following events, Eternity ME Card Master sends the CPTG Type Number to the 'Eternity ME Card Switch'.
On Power ON of the system.
When region code is changed by SE.
When CPTG Type Number is changed by the SE.
Use the following command to select the CPTG type:
3501-CPTG Type Number
Where,
Type
Number
Region Dial tone 1 Dial Tone 2 Ring Back Tone Busy Tone
Freq. Cadence
(sec)
Freq. Cadence
(sec)
Freq. Cadence
(sec)
Freq. Cadence (sec)
1 Eternity Type1 440 Continuous 350+440 Continuous 350+440 0.4on 0.2off
0.4on 2.0off
440 0.75on 0.75off
2 Eternity Type2 400 Continuous 400 Continuous 400 0.6on 0.2off
0.2on 2.0off
400 0.5on 0.5off
3 Eternity Type3 350+440 Continuous 350+440 Continuous 440+480 2.0on 4.0off 480+620 0.5on 0.5off
4 Argentina 425 Continuous 425 Continuous 425 1.0on 4.0 off 425 0.3on 0.2off
5 Australia 425*25 Continuous 425*25 Continuous 400*25 .4on .2off .4on
2.0off
425 0.375on 0.375off
6 Brazil 425 Continuous 425 Continuous 425 1.0on 4.0 off 425 0.25on 0.25off
7 Canada 350+440 Continuous 350+440 Continuous 440+480 2.0on 4.0off 480+620 0.5on 0.5off
8 China 450 Continuous 450 Continuous 450 1.0on 4.0off 450 0.35 on 0.36off
9 Egypt 425*50 Continuous 425*50 Continuous 425*50 2.0on 1.0off 425*50 1.0on 4.0off
10 France 440 Continuous 440 Continuous 440 1.5on 3.5off 440 0.5on 0.5off
11 Germany 425 Continuous 425 Continuous 425 1.0on 4.0off 425 0.48on 0.48off
12 Greece 425 0.2on 0.3off
0.7on 0.8off
425 0.2on 0.3off
0.7on 0.8off
425 1.0on 4.0off 425 0.3on 0.3off
13 India2 400*25 Continuous 400*25 Continuous 400*25 .4on .2off .4on
2.0off
400 0.75on 0.75off
14 Indonesia 425 Continuous 425 Continuous 425 1.0on 4.0off 425 0.5on 0.5off
15 Iran 425 Continuous 425 Continuous 425 1.0on 4.0off 425 0.5on 0.5off
16 Iraq 400 0.4on 0.2off
0.4on 1.5off
400 0.4on 0.2off
0.4on 1.5off
400 Continuous 400 1.0on 1.0off
17 Israel 400 Continuous 400 Continuous 400 1.0on 3.0off 400 0.5on 0.5off
18 Italy 425 Continuous 425 Continuous 425 1.0on 4.0off 425 0.5on 0.5off
19 Japan 400 Continuous 400 Continuous 400*25 1.0on 2.0off 400 .5on .5off
20 Kenya 425 Continuous 425 Continuous 425 0.67on 3.0off
1.5on 5.0off
425 0.2on 0.6off
0.2on 0.6off
21 Korea 350+440 Continuous 350+440 Continuous 440+480 1.0on 2.0off 480+620 0.5on 0.5off
22 Malaysia 425 Continuous 425 Continuous 425 0.4on 0.2off
0.4on 2.0off
425 0.5on 0.5off
23 Mexico 425 Continuous 425 Continuous 425 1.0on 4.0off 425 0.25on 0.25off
24 New Zealand 400 Continuous 400 Continuous 400+450 0.4on 0.2off
0.4on 2.0off
400 0.5on 0.5off
25 Phillippines 425 Continuous 425 Continuous 425+480 1.0on 4.0off 480+620 0.5on 0.5off
26 Poland 425 Continuous 425 Continuous 425 1.0on 4.0off 425 0.5on 0.5off
Matrix
184 Eternity V8 System Manual

27 Portugal 425 Continuous 425 Continuous 425 1.0on 5.0off 425 0.5on 0.5off
28 Russia 425 Continuous 425 Continuous 425 0.8on 3.2off 425 0.4on 0.4off
29 Saudi Arabia 425 Continuous 425 Continuous 425 1.2on 4.6off 425 0.5on 0.5off
30 Singapore 425 Continuous 425 Continuous 425*24 0.4on 0.2off
0.4on 2.0off
425 .75on .75off
31 South Africa 400*33 Continuous 400*33 Continuous 400*33 0.4on 0.2off
0.4on 2.0off
400 .5on .5off
32 Spain 425 Continuous 425 Continuous 425 1.5on 3.0off 425 0.2on 0.2off
33 Thailand 400*50 Continuous 400*50 Continuous 400 1.0on 4.0off 400 0.5on 0.5off
34 Turkey 450 Continuous 450 Continuous 450 2.0on 4.0off 450 0.5on 0.5off
35 UAE 350+440 Continuous 350+440 Continuous 400+450 0.4on 0.2off
0.4on 2.0off
400 0.375on 0.375off
36 UK 350+440 Continuous 350+440 Continuous 400+450 0.4on 0.2off
0.4on 2.0off
400 0.375on 0.375off
37 USA 350+440 Continuous 350+440 Continuous 440+480 2.0on 4.0off 480+620 0.5on 0.5off
38 VisUltra Italy 400 Continuous 400 Continuous 400 1.0on 2.0off 400 0.5on 0.5off
39 Belgium 425 Continuous 425 1.0on 0.25off 425 1.0on 3.0off 425 0.5on 0.5off
40 VisUltra India 350+440 Continuous 350+440 Continuous 350+440 0.4on 0.2off
0.4on 2.0off
400 0.75on 0.75off
Type
Number
Region Error Tone Confirmation Tone Feature Tone CCWT ICWT
Freq. Cadence (sec) Freq. Cadence
(sec)
Freq. Cadence
(sec)
Freq. Cadence
(sec)
Freq. Cadence
(sec)
1 Eternity Type1 440 0.25on 0.25 off 350+440 0.1on
0.1off
350+
440
0.1on
0.9off
350+
440
0.1on 0.1off
0.1on 2.7off
440 0.1on 2.9off
2 Eternity Type2 400 0.25on 0.25 off 400 0.1on
0.1off
400 1.5on
0.1off
400 0.2on 4.8off 400 0.2on 4.8off
3 Eternity Type3 440 0.25on 0.25 off 350+440 0.1on
0.1off
350+
440
0.1on
0.9off
440+
480
0.1on 0.1off
0.1on 2.7off
440 0.1on 2.9off
4 Argentina 425 0.3on 0.4off 425 0.1on
0.1off
425 0.1on
0.9off
425 0.3on
10.0off
425 0.1on 2.9off
5 Australia 425 0.375on 0.375off 425*25 0.1on
0.1off
425*
25
0.1on
0.9off
425 0.2on 0.2off
0.2on 4.4off
425 Continuous
6 Brazil 425 0.25on 0.25 off 425 0.1on
0.1off
425 0.1on
0.9off
425 0.05on
1.0off
425 0.1on 2.9off
7 Canada 480+620 0.25on 0.25off 350+440 0.1on
0.1off
350+
440
0.1on
0.9off
440 0.3on
10.0off
480+
620
0.5on 0.5off
8 China 450 0.7on 0.7off 450 0.1on
0.1off
450 0.1on
0.9off
450 0.4 on 4.0off 450 0.2on 0.2off
0.2on 0.6off
9 Egypt 450 0.5on 0.5off 425*50 0.1on
0.1off
425*
50
0.1on
0.9off
425*
50
0.1on 0.1off
0.1on 2.7off
450 0.5on 0.5off
10 France 440 0.25on 0.25off 440 0.1on
0.1off
440 0.1on
0.9off
440 0.3on
10.0off
440 0.1on 2.9off
11 Germany 425 0.24on 0.24off 425 0.1on
0.1off
425 0.1on
0.9off
425 0.2on .2off
.2on 5.0off
425 0.1on 2.9off
12 Greece 425 0.15on 0.15off 425 0.1on
0.1off
425 0.1on
0.9off
425 0.3on
10.0off
0.3on
10.0off
425 0.15on
0.25off
0.15on
1.45off
13 India2 400 0.25on 0.25off 400 1.0on
4.0off
400*
25
0.1on
0.9off
400 0.2on 0.1off
0.2on 7.5off
400 0.15on
4.85off
14 Indonesia 425 0.25on 0.25off 425 0.1on
0.1off
425 0.1on
0.9off
425 0.15on
0.15off
0.15on
10.0off
425 0.1on 2.9off
Type
Number
Region Dial tone 1 Dial Tone 2 Ring Back Tone Busy Tone
Freq. Cadence
(sec)
Freq. Cadence
(sec)
Freq. Cadence
(sec)
Freq. Cadence (sec)
Matrix
Eternity V8 System Manual 185
15 Iran 425 0.25on 0.25off 425 0.1on
0.1off
425 0.1on
0.9off
425 0.2on 0.2off
0.2on
10.0off
425 0.1on 2.9off
16 Iraq 400 0.25on 0.25off 400 0.1on
0.1off
400 0.1on
0.9off
400 0.1on 0.1off
0.1on 2.7off
400 0.1on 2.9off
17 Israel 400 0.25on 0.25off 400 0.17on
0.14off
0.34on
5.0off
400 0.1on
0.9off
400 0.5on
10.0off
400 0.1on 2.9off
18 Italy 425 0.2on 0.2off 425 0.1on
0.1off
425 0.1on
0.9off
425 0.4on 0.1off
0.25on
0.1off
0.15on
5.0off
425 0.1on 2.9off
19 Japan 400 0.25on
0.25off
400 0.1on
0.1off
400 0.1on
0.9off
400*
25
0.5on 2.0off
0.05on
0.45off
0.05on
3.45off
400*
25
0.1on 2.9off
20 Kenya 425 0.2on 0.6off 425 0.1on
0.1off
425 0.1on
0.9off
425 0.1on 0.1off
0.1on 2.7off
425 0.1on 2.9off
21 Korea 480+620 0.3on 0.2off 350+440 0.1on
0.1off
350+
440
0.1on
0.9off
350+
440
0.25on
0.25off
0.25on
3.25off
350+
440
0.1on 2.9off
22 Malaysia 425 2.5on 0.5off 425 0.1on
0.1off
425 0.1on
0.9off
425 0.2on 0.2off
0.2on 5.0off
425 0.1on 2.9off
23 Mexico 425 0.25on 0.25off 425 0.1on
0.1off
425 0.1on
0.9off
425 0.1on 0.1off
0.1on 2.7off
425 0.1on 2.9off
24 New Zealand 400 0.25on 0.25off 400 0.1on
0.1off
400 0.1on
0.9off
400 0.2on 3.0off
0.2on 5.0off
425 0.1on 2.9off
25 Phillippines 480+620 0.25on 0.25off 425 0.1on
0.1off
425 0.1on
0.9off
440 0.3on
10.0off
440 0.1on 2.9off
26 Poland 425 0.5on 0.5off 425 0.1on
0.1off
425 0.1on
0.9off
425 0.15on
0.15off
0.15on
4.0off
425 0.1on 2.9off
27 Portugal 450 0.33on 1.0off 425 1.0on
0.2off
425 0.1on
0.9off
425 0.2on 0.2off
0.2on 5.0off
425 0.2on 1.4off
28 Russia 425 0.25on 0.25off 425 0.1on
0.1off
425 0.1on
0.9off
950 0.333on
1.0off
425 0.1on 2.9off
29 Saudi Arabia 425 0.25on 0.25off 425 0.1on
0.1off
425 0.1on
0.9off
425 0.15on
0.2off
0.15on
10.0off
425 0.1on 2.9off
30 Singapore 425 0.25on 0.25off 425 0.125on
0.125off
425 0.1on
0.9off
425 0.3on 0.2off
0.3on 3.2off
425 0.25on
2.0off
31 South Africa 400 0.25on 0.25off 400*33 0.1on
0.1off
400*
33
0.1on
0.9off
400*
33
0.4on 4.0off 400 0.15on
0.25off
0.15on
1.45off
32 Spain 425 0.25on 0.25off 425 0.1on
0.1off
425 0.1on
0.9off
425 0.175on
0.175off
0.175on
3.5off
425 0.1on 2.9off
33 Thailand 400 0.3on 0.3off 400*50 0.1on
0.1off
400*
50
0.1on
0.9off
400 0.1on 0.1off
0.1on 2.7off
400 0.1on 2.9off
34 Turkey 450 0.2on 0.2off .6on
.2off
450 0.04on
0.04off
450 0.1on
0.9off
450 .2on .6off
.2on 8.0off
450 0.1on 2.9off
35 UAE 400 0.4on 0.35off
0.225on 0.525off
350+440 0.1on
0.1off
350+
440
0.1on
0.9off
350+
440
0.1on 0.1off
0.1on 2.7off
350+
440
0.1on 2.9off
Type
Number
Region Error Tone Confirmation Tone Feature Tone CCWT ICWT
Freq. Cadence (sec) Freq. Cadence
(sec)
Freq. Cadence
(sec)
Freq. Cadence
(sec)
Freq. Cadence
(sec)
Matrix
186 Eternity V8 System Manual
By default, CPTG Type are as under:
Notes:
Data is considered from ITU standard.
Many countries use different frequencies/cadences for the same tone e.g., U.S. use five different frequency/cadence
for dial tone. For such cases, only one frequency/cadence among the group, is considered.
Error tone is considered as Congestion/Refusal tone as given by ITU.
Confirmation tone is considered as Acceptance tone as given by ITU.
Internal Call Waiting Tone (ICWT) is considered as Intrusion tone.
External Call Waiting Tone (CCWT) is considered as Call Waiting Tone.
The meaning of frequency notation is as follows:
f1*f2: f1 is modulated by f2.
f1+f2: The juxtaposition of two frequencies f1 and f2 without modulation.
36 UK 400 0.4on 0.35off
0.225on 0.525off
350+440 0.1on
0.1off
350+
440
0.1on
0.9off
350+
440
0.1on 0.1off
0.1on 2.7off
400 0.2on 4.8off
37 USA 480+620 0.25on 0.25off 350+440 0.1on
0.1off
350+
440
0.1on
0.9off
440 0.3on
10.0off
480+
620
0.5on 0.5off
38 VisUltra Italy 400 0.25on 0.25 off 400 0.1on
0.1off
400 1.75on
0.1off
400 0.2on 2.5off 400 0.2on 0.2off
0.2on 2.5off
39 Belgium 425 0.167on 0.167
off
425 0.1on
0.1off
425 0.1on
0.9off
1400 0.175on
0.175off
0.175on
3.5off
440 0.1on 2.9off
40 VisUltra India 400 0.25on 0.25 off 350+440 0.1on
0.1off
350+
440
0.1on
0.9off
350+
440
0.1on 0.1off
0.1on 2.7off
350+
440
0.5on 0.5off
1.0on 5.0off
Type
Number
Region Error Tone Confirmation Tone Feature Tone CCWT ICWT
Freq. Cadence (sec) Freq. Cadence
(sec)
Freq. Cadence
(sec)
Freq. Cadence
(sec)
Freq. Cadence
(sec)
Re gi on
Code
Me a ning
CPTG
Type No.
Regi on
Code
Meani ng
CPTG
Type No.
Re gi on
Code
Me a ni ng
CPTG
Type No.
001 Afghanist an 036 Greece 12 071 Oman
002 Algeria 037 Guyana 072 Pakist an
003 Ant igua and Barbuda 038 Holland 073 Paraguay
004 Argentina 04 039 Hong kong 074 Peru
005 Aust ralia 05 040 Hungary 075 Philippines 25
006 Aust ria 041 India 01 076 Poland 26
007 Bahamas 042 Indonesia 14 077 Port ugal 27
008 Bahrain 043 Iran 15 078 Qat ar
009 Bangladesh 044 Iraq 16 079 Romania
010 Belarus 045 Ireland 080 Russia 28
011 Belgium 046 Israel 17 081 Singapore 30
012 Bhut an 047 It aly 18 082 Slovakia
013 Bolivia 048 Japan 19 083 Sout h Africa 31
014 Bosnia 049 Jordan 084 Spain 32
015 Bot swana 050 Kazakhst an 085 Sri Lanka
016 Brunei 051 Kenya 20 086 Sudan
017 Brazil 06 052 Korea-Nort h 21 087 Sweden
018 Bulgaria 053 Korea-Sout h 21 088 Swit zerland
019 Cambodia 054 Kuwait 089 Syria
020 Cameroon 055 Kyrgyzst an 090 Taiwan
021 Canada 03 056 Lebanon 091 Tajikist an
022 Chile 057 Libya 092 Thailand 33
023 China 08 058 Malaysia 22 093 Turkey 34
024 Colombia 059 Maldives 094 Uganda
025 Cost a Rica 060 Maurit ius 095 Ukraine
026 Croat ia 061 Mexico 03 096 Unit ed Arab Emirates 35
027 Cuba 062 Mongolia 097 Unit ed Kingdom 02
028 Cyprus 063 Mozambique 098 Unit ed St at es 03
029 Czech Republic 064 Myanmar 099 Uzbekist an
030 Denmark 065 Namibia 03 100 Venezuela
031 Egypt 09 066 Nepal 101 Viet nam
032 Fiji 067 Net herlands 102 Yemen
033 Finland 068 New Zealand 24 103 Yugoslavia
034 France 10 069 Nigeria 104 Zambia
035 Germany 11 070 Norway 105 Zimbabwe
Matrix
Eternity V8 System Manual 187
Dial Tone
When you lift the handset you get dial tone. Dial tone stays for 7 seconds. This Dial Tone Timer is programmable. After
that error tone starts.
Sound: Toooooooooooo
Use following command to program the Dial Tone Timer:
3502-Seconds
Default = 007 seconds.
Valid Range = 002 to 255 seconds.
Ring Back Tone
When you dial internal number and if that number is free, you will get the Ring Back Tone (RBT). The ring back tone
continues for 45 seconds. This Ring Back Tone Timer is programmable.
Sound: Turroo... Turrroo
Use following command to program the Ring Back Tone Timer:
3503-Seconds
Default = 045 seconds.
Valid Range = 001 to 255 seconds.
Busy Tone (Engage Tone)
High pitch beeps with equal ON and OFF periods. When you dial any station that is busy, you get busy tone. Busy tone
continues for 7 seconds. This Busy Tone Timer is programmable.
Sound: Tooooooo.........Toooooooo
Use following command to program the Busy Tone Timer:
3504-Seconds
Default = 007 seconds.
Valid Range = 001 to 255 seconds.
Error Tone
The Error Tone is made of fast beeps. When you perform some wrong operation or try using a feature without access,
you get error tone.
Sound: TooTooTooToo
Use following command to program the Error Tone timer:
3505-Seconds
Default = 030 seconds.
Valid Range = 001 to 255 seconds.
Internal Call Waiting Tone
Short beep followed by longer OFF duration repeated every second. This is also known as intrusion tone. Busy user gets
this tone over his speech when some other station attempts interrupt request/barge-in.
Sound: Beep.Beep
The user gets this tone till the Interrupt request timer or the barge in timer.
External Call Waiting Tone
This tone is of two ticks followed by a longer off time of approximately 3 seconds. Busy programmed destination station
gets this tone when there is a fresh TELCO call.
Sound: Beep...Beep....Beep...Beep
This tone continues for transfer-On busy timer.
Hold Tone
Short beep followed by a longer OFF duration repeated every second. The hold tone is given when you put a person
on hold. Hold tone continues for 7 seconds. This timer is same as Dial Tone Timer.
Confirmation Tone
This tone is continuous, fast beeps. The Eternity confirms successful usage of features with this tone. The confirmation
tone remains for 7 seconds. This is called Confirmation Tone Timer and is programmable.
Sound: Beep... Beep... Beep
Matrix
188 Eternity V8 System Manual
Use following command to program the Confirmation Tone Timer:
3506-Seconds
Default = 007 seconds.
Valid Range = 001 to 255 seconds.
Programming Tone
This is exactly same as the feature tone. Short beep followed by a longer off duration repeated every second. The
Eternity prompts you to enter fresh commands during programming with this tone. Programming tone remains
continuous till, you go ON-Hook or dial a command.
Sound: Beep.............Beep
Programming Confirmation Tone
This is exactly same as the feature confirmation tone. This tone is continuous, fast beeps. During programming, this tone
indicates that valid command is received by the system and it has taken necessary action. This tone remains for 3
seconds. This is called Programming Confirmation Tone Timer and is programmable.
Sound: Beep... Beep... Beep
Use following command to program the Programming Confirmation Tone Timer:
3509-Seconds
Default = 003 seconds.
Valid Range = 001 to 255 seconds.
Programming Error Tone
This tone is exactly same as the Error Tone. This tone is given when some wrong programming command is dialed. This
tone remains for 3 seconds. This Programming Error Tone Timer is programmable.
Sound: TooTooTooToo
Use following command to program the Programming Error Tone Timer:
3508-Seconds
Default = 003 seconds.
Valid Range = 001 to 255 seconds.
Use following command to select a Dial Tone:
5307-Flag
Where,
Demonstration of Tones
It is possible to demonstrate these tones. When a customer purchases a PBX, he feels to get acquainted with different
types of tones given by the system. Unless one is familiar with these tones, he would not understand their meaning.
Use following commands to demonstrate call progress tones:
3541-Code
Where,
Flag Meaning
1 Dial Tone1
2 Dial Tone 2
Code Meaning
01 Dial Tone 1
02 Dial Tone 2
03 Ring Back Tone
04 Busy Tone
05 Error Tone
06 Confirmation Tone
07 Feature Tone
08 Routing Tone
09 Programming Tone
10 Intrusion Tone (ICWT)
Matrix
Eternity V8 System Manual 189
It is advisable to use a hands free telephone instrument if a group of people wants to listen to these tones. For example,
when the command 3541-03 is executed the selected RBT is demonstrated.
Timer of Relevance:
Demonstration Timer-Time for which the system demonstrates the tone/ring to the user.
Command: 3542-Seconds
Default: 030 seconds.
Valid Range: 001 to 255 seconds.
Relevant Topics:
1. Region Code 518
2. Default Settings 242
=X=X=
11 External Call Waiting Tone (CCWT)
Code Meaning
Matrix
190 Eternity V8 System Manual
Call Splitting
Whats this?
This feature enables you to talk to two persons alternately.
Call Splitting is also known as Hold-Consult or Hold-Toggle.
How to use it?
Call Splitting can be used in any of the following three combinations:
Two stations.
One station and one trunk.
Two trunks.
Call Splitting between two stations:
Call Splitting between a station and a trunk:
Call Splitting between two trunks:
Important Points:
Only one of the two persons will be in conversation with you at a time. The third person is on hold. He gets music and
cannot hear your conversation.
When in speech with a station and getting external call waiting tone, you can dial Flash to answer the trunk call.
The station is put on hold and gets music. Now, you can split between the two persons.
Interrupting station can also be answered very much in the same way as described above. Your current call is put on
hold and speech with the interrupting station is established. Once again, you can split between the two persons.
From SLT, 3-Party conference can be invoked to include both the parties by dialing Flash-0.
From DKP, 3-party conference can be invoked to include both the parties by pressing Conference key or Flash-0.
You can also transfer the active person (one who is in conversation with you) to the third person.
You can also park the current person.
Access to Call Splitting is programmable.
How to program?
Refer Class of Service (COS) for details on how to allow call splitting to a user.
Relevant Topics:
1. Conference-3 Party 221
2. Call Park 179
3. Class of Service (COS) 200
=X=X=
1 Speech with Station/Trunk.
2 Dial Flash. Feature Tone
3 Dial another Station/Trunk. Ring Back Tone
4 Speech with the station/Trunk when the call is answered
5 Dial Flash-1. Speech with held party and station/trunk will get MoH.
1 Speech with trunk.
2 Dial Flash. Feature Tone, Trunk goes on hold.
3 Dial #. Feature Tone
4 Grab another trunk by dialing Trunk Access Code. Trunk dial tone
5 Dial Telephone Number. Ring Back Tone
6 Speech with called party when the call is answered.
7 Dial Flash-1. Speech with held party and other station will get MoH.
Matrix
Eternity V8 System Manual 191
Call Taping
Whats this?
Calls made/received by a station to/from another station (internal) or any other external number (outgoing/incoming)
can be taped.
The call is taped in the designated mailbox of the VMS connected to the PBX.
How it works?
Whenever a station makes an external call (outgoing) system checks for Call Taping parameters. If the number dialed
matches with any number in the External List assigned for outgoing call taping the conversation is recorded in the
VMS.
Whenever a station receives an external call, the system checks for Call Taping parameters. If the calling number
matches with any number in the number list assigned for incoming call taping, the conversation is recorded in the
VMS.
Whenever the station makes/receives an internal call then the call taping parameters are checked. If the station's flag
is enabled for internal call taping, the conversation is recorded in the VMS.
The external numbers list assigned for incoming and outgoing calls can range from 01 to 24: Assigning 00 means the
call taping is not enabled.
Please refer Station Advanced Feature Template for programming call taping parameters for a station.
Use the following command to program the port in whose mailbox the call is to be taped:
4701-Station Type-Station
Where,
When call taping begins the system beeps. These beeps can be enabled/disabled.
Use the following command to enable/disable beeps during conversation recording:
5332-Code
Where,
Important Point:
If Call Taping and Conversation Recording both are enabled for a station, then priority is given to Conversation
Recording.
Relevant Topics:
1. Conversation Recording 232
2. Voice Mail Integration 705
3. Station Advanced Feature Template 565
=X=X=
Station Type Meaning Station
00 Null --
01 SLT 001-512
02 DKP 001-128
Code Meaning
0 Disable
1 Enable
Matrix
192 Eternity V8 System Manual
Call Transfer
Eternity offers four types of call transfer:
Call transfer-Screened.
Call transfer-While ringing.
Call transfer-On busy.
Call transfer to VMS
Call transfer-Trunk-to-Trunk.
Call Transfer-Screened
What's this?
It is most widely used.
Operators can use this method to transfer incoming calls.
While waiting for the station to answer, you can abandon the transfer by dialing Flash. The ring on the station is
stopped and you get connected to the person on hold.
How to use it?
Call Transfer-While Ringing
What's this?
Transfer a call without waiting for the destination to answer.
An operator can use this feature when there are other calls pending and she cannot wait for the station to respond to
intimate the call.
This is also known as "Wait For Ring Transfer".
If the called station does not respond to the ring within 30 seconds, the call comes back to the station that transferred
the call. This is known as Transfer-While Ringing Timer and is programmable.
Use following command to program this timer:
3806-Seconds
Default = 030 seconds.
Valid Range = 001 to 255 seconds.
How to use it?
Call Transfer-On Busy
What's this?
Transfer a call on a station already in speech with some other person.
Operators can transfer calls without even checking for the status of the destination station.
This is also known as "Blind Transfer".
The busy destination station gets intrusion tone.
He can speak to the calling person by dialing 'Flash'.
A call can be transferred on busy station only if he is not programmed with call privacy from intrusion tone.
If the called station does not respond to the intrusion ton within 30 seconds, the call comes back to you. This is known
as Transfer-On Busy Timer and is programmable.
Use following command to program this timer:
3807-Seconds
Default = 030 seconds.
Valid Range = 001 to 255 seconds.
1 Speech with trunk.
2 Dial Flash. Feature tone
3 Dial Station. Ring Back Tone
4 Wait for the station to answer. Speech with ring answered.
5 Replace the handset. Call is transferred.
1 Speech with calling or called party
2 Dial Flash. Feature Tone
3 Dial Station. Ring Back Tone
4 Replace the handset.
Matrix
Eternity V8 System Manual 193
How to use it?
Blind Transfer to VMS:
What's this?
User can Blind transfer the call directly to the VMS of the station if the Mail Box is assigned to the station. Thus the
user need not use Call Forward feature on VMS. User can do the Blind transfer to VMS using the specific access
code. Refer chapter Access Codes for feature number and access code details.
If the mail box is not assigned, to the station the user will get error tone while transferring the call to the mail box of the
station.
Note:
Allow, Call Transfer feature from Class of Service, to use this feature.

If Blind transfer to mail box is successful, transferor will get confirmation tone and the held party will get connected to
VMS
How to use it?
Following SA command is used for Blind Transfer to VMS:
Speech-Flash-Access Code of Blind Transfer to VMS-Station on which call to be transferred
For example,
Suppose following parties are interfaced with Eternity:
Party A = Station user of Eternity
Party B = Station user of Eternity or External Party
Party C = Station user of Eternity to which mail box is assigned (2001)
Party A and B are in speech and 'B' wants to transfer the Call is to mail box of Party C (Station number 2001). For
this 'B' will follow the steps below:
Using SLT:
Party B dials Flash followed by Access Code of Blind Transfer to VMS and station number 2001 of 'C':
Speech-Flash-1078-2001
Using DKP:
Party B dials:
Speech-Flash-1078-2001
OR
Speech-Press DSS key assigned for Blind Transfer to VMS -2001
On successful call transfer, Party B will receive confirmation tone, and party A will get transferred to mail box of party
C, where he will get voice prompts from VMS.
How to program?
Refer Class of Service (COS) to allow Call Transfer feature.
Call Transfer: Trunk-to-Trunk
What's this?
An external call can be transferred on another trunk line.
The operator need not remain in speech. Two external persons can speak through the Eternity.
In case a colleague has not come to the office, his incoming calls can be transferred on his residence's phone line or
on his mobile.
In case a remote colleague is not having long distance or international dialing facility from his present location. He can
dial his office and request the operator to connect him to the desired number.
A warning tone is given after Trunk-to-Trunk inactivity timer. To extend the call, either of the persons has to dial a digit
in tone (DTMF). Dialing of '##' terminates the call and both the trunks are released.
1 Speech with trunk.
2 Dial Flash. Feature tone
3 Dial Station. Busy Tone
4 Disconnect. Call will be transferred on the busy station and it will get intrusion tone.
Matrix
194 Eternity V8 System Manual
How to use it? (From SLT/DKP)
How to program?
Refer Class of Service (COS) for details on how to allow call transfer to a user.
Timer of Relevance:
Trunk-to-Trunk Inactivity Timer-The system disconnects the call after this time.
Command: 3808-Seconds
Default: 090 Seconds.
Valid Range: 001 to 255 Seconds.
Important Points:
Internal station calls can also be transferred to some other station.
If the station that transferred the call is free at the time of call return, caller gets ring.
If the station that transferred the call is busy at the time of call return and if it was an internal call transfer then the
caller gets busy tone.
If the station that transferred the call is busy at the time of call return and if it was a trunk call transfer then the system
waits for the station to become free. The caller gets Ring Back Tone (RBT).
In case of call transfer, the Eternity provides a flexibility to display either the station number that is transferring the call
or the calling party's number. This is called CLIP-Hold Party. CLIP-Hold Party is also a programmable feature.
Relevant Topics:
1. Class of Service (COS) 200
2. Privacy 500
3. Conference-3 Party 221
4. Direct Inward System Access (DISA) 286
5. Calling Line Identification and Presentation (CLIP) 195
6. Station Advanced Feature Template 565
7. QSIG 508
8. Access Codes 77
=X=X=
1 3-way mode as described in call splitting.
2 Dial Flash. Feature Tone
3 Dial #. Station disconnects. Trunk 1 and Trunk 2 remain in speech.
Matrix
Eternity V8 System Manual 195
Calling Line Identification and Presentation (CLIP)
Whats this?
The Eternity provides a facility to detect the calling number and present it to the station. This is called Calling Line
Identification and Presentation. The Calling number can be presented on a SLT, DKP and ISDN Terminal.
The Eternity supports the following signaling protocols for CLI viz. DTMF, FSK-ITU-T, FSK-Bellcore signaling on trunk
as well as on stations. Hence, any type of trunk line whether supporting DTMF or FSK signaling can be interfaced
with the Eternity. Likewise any type of telephone instrument whether supporting DTMF or FSK can be connected to
the SLT port.
How it works?
The CLIP can be enabled/disabled on a station or trunk.
If CLI is enabled on a trunk then the Eternity senses the digits/codes sent by PSTN. It sends this information to the
landing station/operator along with the ringing signal. In case of, Internal calls the calling stations name and number
both shall be presented to called station. When the operator transfers the call to a station, the system sends this
information to the transferred station. If CLIP is enabled on the station, the calling partys number is displayed. The
calling party could be a station or an external party.
The incoming telephone number is stored in the Incoming SMDR buffer also.
In case of Call transfer, the Eternity provides a flexibility to display either the station number that is transferring the call
or the calling partys number. This is called CLIP-Hold Party. CLIP-Hold Party is also a programmable feature. Refer
chapter Call Transfer.
How to program?
Please refer the Topics Station Advanced Feature Template and SLT Hardware Template for details on programming.
Important Point:
Please note that CLIP and CLIP-Hold would work only if CLIR is not enabled on the station that has transferred
the call. Please refer the topic Calling Line Identity Restriction (CLIR).
Relevant Topics:
1. SLT Hardware Template 555
2. Station Advanced Feature Template 565
3. Calling Line Identity Restriction (CLIR) 196
4. Call Transfer 192
5. QSIG 508
=X=X=
Matrix
196 Eternity V8 System Manual
Calling Line Identity Restriction (CLIR)
Whats this?
The Eternity provides a facility that allows the Station user to restrict his identity, when he calls other station. This is
known as Calling Line Identity Restriction. CLIR should be enabled in COS.
CLIR Override
The Eternity also supports a feature 'CLIR Override'. If the called station has 'CLIR Override' facility, the CLIP and
CNIP or COLP and CONP (as appropriate) to the called station will be presented on the display, irrespective of CLIR
activation of calling station.
CLIR Override feature should be allowed in COS 'CLIR Override'.
How it works?
The CLIR can be enabled/disabled on a station from Class of Service Group. CLIR enabled means that your station
number will not be displayed on the station to which you have called. CLIR disabled means that your station number
will be displayed on the station to which you have called.
When a CLIR enabled station transfers a call, the recipient station does not get the identity of the station or of the
external calling party.
If the calling station has 'CLIR Override' facility the COLP and CONP to the connected station will be presented to
calling station irrespective of CLIR activation of connected station.
How to use it?
Use following Access Code to enable/disable CLIR:
103-Code
Where,
Default: Disable
Notes:
Following Table explains the display on DKP when CLIR is disabled on the station and if the station user now presses
the DSS key assigned for CLIR/Presses the feature code of CLIR:
When CLIR is enabled on the station and the station user presses he CLIR key, the user will get CLIR Disabled
messages, displayed with confirmation tone.
How to program?
Please refer the topic Class of Service (COS) to enable the feature in the COS Group assigned to the station to be
used.
Please refer the topic 'Class of Service (COS)' to enable 'CLIR override' feature in the Class of Service group
assigned to the station to be used.
Important Points:
This is a feature of the PBX and not of PSTN. It is applicable for stations only.
Please note that CLIP and CLIP-Hold would work only if CLIR is not enabled on the station that has transferred the
call.
Code Meaning
0 Disable
1 Enable
Action (when CLIR is disabled) Display on Eon42/45
Press DSS Key or dial the feature code
CLIR Enable
CLIR Disable
User selects 'CLIR Enable' by pressing
'Hold' Or Dials "1"
CLIR Enable
LED glows continuous Red
User selects 'CLIR Disable' by scrolling
and pressing 'Hold' Or Dials "0
CLIR Disabled
LED turns off
Matrix
Eternity V8 System Manual 197
Relevant Topics:
1. SLT Hardware Template 555
2. Calling Line Identification and Presentation (CLIP) 195
3. Class of Service (COS) 200
4. Access Codes 77
=X=X=
Matrix
198 Eternity V8 System Manual
Cancel All Station Features
Whats this?
The Eternity supports separate cancellation code for each feature. But it is desirable to have a master command to
cancel all the features with a single command.
How to use it?
After the above command is issued, features like:
Alarms
Auto Call Back
Auto Redial
Call Follow-Me
Call Forward
Do Not Disturb
Hot Line
Hot Outward Dialing
Walk-In Class of Service
Back Ground Music
Auto Answer
Trunk Reservation, are cancelled from the station
=X=X=
1 Lift the handset. Dial tone
2 Dial 1051. Confirmation tone
3 Replace the handset.
Matrix
Eternity V8 System Manual 199
Central Ringer
Whats this?
The Eternity provides a facility to divert the unattended calls on DOP. A ringer connected to the DOP starts ringing
when the call lands on the DOP. This feature is called Central Ringer.
How it works?
The DOP is programmed as one of the destinations in the trunk-landing group.
It is advisable to make DOP as the last destination in the trunk-landing group, thus ensuring the calls unattended by
other stations of the trunk-landing group are only diverted to the DOP.
The call landed on the DOP can be picked up by dialing 4 from any station belonging to the same call pick up group
or by dialing 12-DOP access code (e.g. 12-3961).
If a ringer is connected to a DOP, then any station can dial the DOP access code and inform about the emergency to
the person who answers the call.
How to program?
DOP is programmed as one of the destinations (preferably last destination of the group) of the trunk landing group.
Please refer Trunk Landing Group (TLG) for more details.
Important Point:
If a DOP is used for Central Ringer application, it cannot be used for any other purpose. The DOP mode must be
programmed to 00 (Deactivated mode).
Relevant Topics:
1. Trunk Landing Group (TLG) 684
2. Digital Output Port (DOP) 278
3. Automated Control Applications 115
4. Call Pick Up 181
=X=X=
Matrix
200 Eternity V8 System Manual
Class of Service (COS)
What's this?
All users in an organization are not equal. Some users are important and their time is more valuable. Further, their
nature of job also differs. Keeping this diversity in mind, it is imperative that the features they need from a system
differ from person to person.
The feature requirements can also vary from time to time. For example, the features required during working hours
and during lunch/non-working hours need not be the same.
It is the system's engineer responsibility to allow or deny a feature access to a user depending on his needs. The
system should support flexible allocation of features to different users. This accessibility of different features for a user
is known as his Class of Service (COS).
How it works?
The Eternity supports very flexible programming of COS for important features. Each user can be assigned different COS
depending on his and the organization's needs. All the features supported by the system are presented in the form of a
list.
Each feature in the list is identified with a 2-digits number called 'COS Feature Number'.
The COS Table for giving the lists all the features with feature number to be used during programming is shown at end of
chapter.
Following Table provides Default values of enable/disable status for the features in a specific COS Group.
Default COS Table:
(Y=Allowed (Enable), N=Not Allowed (Disable), COS Gp-No.= COS Group Number)
COS-
Feature
number
Feature
Name
COS
Gp-
No.1
COS
Gp-
No.2
COS
Gp-
No.3
COS
Gp-
No.4
COS
Gp-
No.5
COS
Gp-
No.6
COS
Gp-
No.7
COS
Gp-
No.8
COS
Gp-
No.9
COS
Gp-
No.10
COS
Gp-
No.11
COS
Gp-
No.12
COS
Gp-
No.13
COS
Gp-
No.14
COS
Gp-
No.15
COS
Gp-
No.16
01 Internal Call N Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N N N N Y Y
02 Call Hold N Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N N N N Y Y
03 Call Split N Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N N N N Y Y
04 Call Transfer N Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N N N N Y Y
05 Call Pickup N N Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N N N N Y Y
06 ACB Busy N N Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N N N N Y Y
07 ACB No
Reply
N N Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N N N N Y Y
08 Operator
Access
N Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N N N N Y Y
09 Redial N Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N N N N Y Y
10 Mute N Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N N N N Y Y
11 Change
Time Zone
N Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N N N N Y N
12 Auto Redial N N N N Y Y Y Y Y Y N N N N Y Y
13 Auto Redial
Priority
N N N N Y Y Y Y Y Y N N N N Y Y
14 Forced
Answer
N N N N Y Y Y Y Y Y N N N N N N
15 Global
Directory
Part#1
N Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N N N N Y Y
16 Global
Directory
Part#2
N N N Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N N N N Y N
17 Global
Directory
Part#3
N N N N Y Y Y Y Y Y N N N N Y N
18 Call Forward N N Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N N N N Y Y
19 Do Not
Disturb
N N N N Y Y Y Y Y Y N N N N Y Y
Matrix
Eternity V8 System Manual 201
20 Dynamic
Lock
N N N Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N N N N Y N
21 Department
Call
N N N Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N N N N Y Y
22 Conference N N N N N Y Y Y Y Y N N N N Y Y
23 Interrupt
Request
N N Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N N N N Y N
24 Barge-in N N N N Y Y Y Y Y Y N N N N N N
25 Raid N N N N N Y Y Y Y Y N N N N N N
26 Hotline N N Y N N Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y
27 Call Budget N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N Y
28 Paging N N N N Y N Y Y Y Y N N N N Y N
29 DISA N N N N N N N N Y Y N N N N Y N
30 DND-
Override
N N N N N N N N N Y N N N N N N
31 Call Park N N N Y Y N Y Y Y Y N N N N Y N
32 Conversation
Recording
N N N N N N N Y Y Y N N N N N N
33 Privacy from
Interrupt
Request and
Barge-in
N N N N N N N Y Y Y N N N N N Y
34 Privacy from
Raid
N N N N N N N N N Y N N N N N Y
35 Privacy from
DID
N N N N N N N Y Y Y N N N N N N
36 Privacy from
Trunk
Landing
when in
speech
N N N N N N Y Y Y Y N N N N N N
37 Live Call
Screening
N N N N Y Y Y N Y Y N N N N N N
38 Trunk
Reservation
N N N N Y N N N Y Y N N N N Y N
39 Room
Monitor
N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N
40 Direct Port
Access
N N Y N Y Y Y Y Y Y N N N N Y N
41 Trunk-Trunk
Transfer
N N N N N N N N Y N N N N N Y N
42 Continued
Dialing
N N Y N Y Y Y Y Y Y N N N N Y Y
43 Account
Code
N N N N N N N N Y Y N N N N N N
44 Hot Desking
Access
N N N N N N N N Y Y N N N N N N
45 Message
Wait Set/
Cancel
N N N N N N N N N N N N N N Y N
46 Forced
Release
N N N N N N N N N N N N N N Y N
47 Live Call
Supervision
N N N N N N N N Y Y N N N N N N
48 Help Desk N N N N N N N N N Y N N N N N N
COS-
Feature
number
Feature
Name
COS
Gp-
No.1
COS
Gp-
No.2
COS
Gp-
No.3
COS
Gp-
No.4
COS
Gp-
No.5
COS
Gp-
No.6
COS
Gp-
No.7
COS
Gp-
No.8
COS
Gp-
No.9
COS
Gp-
No.10
COS
Gp-
No.11
COS
Gp-
No.12
COS
Gp-
No.13
COS
Gp-
No.14
COS
Gp-
No.15
COS
Gp-
No.16
Matrix
202 Eternity V8 System Manual
Relevant features from the list of features can be Enabled or Disabled and put in a group. For example, one can make
few feature access groups depending upon the requirement. First group may contain none of the features. Second group
may contain very common features like Call Forward, Call Transfer, Internal Dialing etc. Third group may contain move
advanced features and so on. Fifth group may contain all the features.
Please refer the topic Station Advanced Feature Template for details on how to assign COS to station.
Now, these groups can be allocated to the users depending upon the hierarchy of the user in the organization. A user can
be assigned three different COS groups for three time zones. For example, Once these groups are assigned to users, the
user COS table looks like:
Following points are relevant:
Maximum 16 COS groups can be formed (01-16).
Each feature can be enabled or disabled in each group.
49 Change
Room Clean
Status (using
maid
command)
N N N N N N N N Y N N N N N N Y
50 Mini Bar
details
N N N N N N N N Y N N N N N Y Y
51 SA Mode N N N N N N N N Y N N N N N N N
52 SA Station
(always in
SA mode)
N N N N N N N N N N N N N N Y N
53 Dynamic
Lock Internal
Flag
N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N
54 Back Ground
Music
N N Y N N Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y
55 CLIR N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N
56 CLIR
Override
N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N
57 Privacy from
DND-
Override
N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N
Station Number COS Group for WH COS Group for BH COS Group for NWH
001 01 02 08
002 08 10 15
003 11 12 13
004 16 20 05
005 01 09 11
: : : :
COS-
Feature
number
Feature
Name
COS
Gp-
No.1
COS
Gp-
No.2
COS
Gp-
No.3
COS
Gp-
No.4
COS
Gp-
No.5
COS
Gp-
No.6
COS
Gp-
No.7
COS
Gp-
No.8
COS
Gp-
No.9
COS
Gp-
No.10
COS
Gp-
No.11
COS
Gp-
No.12
COS
Gp-
No.13
COS
Gp-
No.14
COS
Gp-
No.15
COS
Gp-
No.16
Matrix
Eternity V8 System Manual 203
The following flowchart elaborates this procedure.

How to program?
Step 1
Take a pen and a paper pad and decide the number of groups to be formed and what all features are to be assigned to
each group.
Step 2
Use following command to enable or disable a feature in a COS group:
1302-1-COS Group-Feature Number-Code
1302-2-COS Group-COS Group-Feature Number-Code
1302-*-Feature Number-Code
Where,
COS Group from 01 to 16.
The commands explained below should be referred as:
To program a single port: XXXX-1
To program a range of ports: XXXX-2
To program all the ports: XXXX-*
Matrix
204 Eternity V8 System Manual
Feature Number from 01 to 57.
(Please note that default COS groups meet most of the requirements and hence this command is seldom used.)
Use the following command to default the COS group:
1301-1-COS Group
1301-2-COS Group-COS Group
1301-*-COS Group
Where,
COS Group is from 01 to 16.
By default, COS Groups are as shown in Default COS Table in How it Works? Topic, of this chapter.
Example:
Make a COS group '15' having features like internal dialing, call hold, call transfer, call pick up, DND, conference and call
park. Assign it to SLT 201 and 202 (ports 007 and 008 respectively) for all the time zones.
1302-1-15-01-1
1302-1-15-02-1
1302-1-15-04-1
1302-1-15-05-1
1302-1-15-19-1
1302-1-15-22-1
1302-1-15-31-1
Relevant Topics:
1. Time Tables 668
2. Station Basic Feature Template 569
3. QSIG 508
=X=X=
Code Meaning
0 Feature Disabled
1 Feature Enabled
Matrix
Eternity V8 System Manual 205
CLI Based Routing
What is this?
The Eternity offers a facility to detect the calling partys number. This is known as Calling Line Identification. The calling
partys number is stored in the Incoming SMDR buffer of the system. This number can also be presented to the stations if
desired. If name of the calling person is programmed then the name is presented on the station in place of the number.
This makes the calling partys identification more easier. The Eternity also provides a facility to route incoming calls
based on CLI to particular stations. This is known as CLI Based Routing.
How it works?
On arrival of an incoming call, the system identifies the calling partys number and compares it with the numbers in
the CLI table. (The CLI table is constructed by the system internally when the programming is done). If the number is
present in the CLI table, the call is routed according to CLI programming else call is routed according to incoming call
management logic.
How to program?
All the incoming numbers will be stored in the incoming SMDR buffer and will be displayed on the Operator station/
landing destination if Calling Line Identification is enabled.
However if it is required to land the calls from a particular telephone number on a particular station or stations then the
system needs to be programmed. Also name of the caller can be programmed, if desired.
Step 1
Use following command to program the incoming telephone number in a CLI table:
4101-Index-Telephone Number-#*
Where,
Index is from 001 to 400.
Telephone Number is the calling partys telephone number (Max. 16 digits). Terminate the command with #*.
Use following command to clear a telephone number from the CLI table:
4101-Index-#*
Step 2
Use following command to program name of calling party (this corresponds to the calling partys telephone number):
4102-Index-Name-#*
Where,
Index is from 001 to 400.
Name can be maximum of 8 characters.
The commands explained below should be referred as:
To program a single port: XXXX-1
To program a range of ports: XXXX-2
To program all the ports: XXXX-*
Director
Operator
IP
N/w
Calling Party
00
1
6
3
0
8
1
0
0
4
3
1
Matrix
206 Eternity V8 System Manual
Use following command to clear a name for an incoming telephone number:
4102-Index-#*
By default, all the names and numbers are blank.
Please note that it is compulsory to terminate the name by #*. If less than 8 characters.
Step 3
Use following command to assign the landing destination for the incoming telephone number in the CLI table: Using CLI
based routing, it will be possible to route the call on Station/DKP only.
4103-Index-Port Type-Port Number
Where,
Index is from 001 to 400.
By default, the port type is 00 (NULL).
On using these commands, the incoming calls will be routed according to the landing destinations programmed for the
number. On doing the above programming, a CLI table shown below is constructed by the system internally.
Step 4
Use following command to clear a location index in the CLI based routing table:
4104-1-Index
4104-2-Index-Index
4104-*
Where,
Index is from 001 to 400.
By using this command Telephone number, name and the Port type-Port number will be cleared.
Example:
Calls from Rakesh (033-5656565) should land on DKP 128 whereas calls from Mahesh (022-8787878) should land on
SLT 200.
Solution:
Since two incoming numbers have to be landed on specific stations, these two stations should be programmed along with
their names and landing groups.
4101-001-0335656565-#*
4101-002-0228787878-#*
4102-001-Rakesh-#*
4102-002-Mahesh-#*
4103-001-02-128
4103-002-01-200
Important Point:
Programming of + is also supported.
Relevant Topic:
1. Calling Line Identification and Presentation (CLIP) 195
=X=X=
Port Type Meaning Port Number
00 Null 000
01 SLT 001-512
02 DKP 001-128
03 TWT 001-128
10 DOP 001
28 ISDN Terminal 01-64
Index Telephone Number Name Port Type Port Number
001 224356782 Raju 01 322
002 33123456 Rajni 02 98
: : : : :
400 824215467 Meera 07 28
Matrix
Eternity V8 System Manual 207
Clock Synchronization
Whats this?
When data is transmitted from the Eternity to external lines or Eternity receives data from the external lines, it is required
that the transmitter and receiver are properly synchronized. If not clock slips can occur. A clock slip can generate a loss
or addition of data to the data stream.
How it works?
This can be done in three ways viz. using the data clock or using the external clock (clock is sent by the network on a
dedicated cable pair) or using the internal clock. Eternity does not support external clock. When the Eternity is connected
to the PSTN, then it is recommended to extract the clock from the incoming data whereas if the Eternity is used to form a
private network then it is recommended to use internal clock. For example if a private network is formed by connecting
three Eternity systems, then one system should be programmed as master clock whereas other two should be
programmed in the slave mode.
If two or more T1E1PRI Ports are connected to the PSTN (or a Private Network) then in such case, clock will be
extracted from the first T1E1PRI Software port whereas the transmit data on all other ports whether connected to PSTN
or private network will be clocked as per received.
How to program?
We can define 4 clock sources for the system. These clock sources are programmable.
Use the following command to program the clock sources:
5341-Clock Source Index-Port Type-Port Offset
Where,
Port Offset is 01 to 32.
Clock Source Index is from 1 to 4.
0 is a valid port to follow internal clock.
By default,
Clock Source 1 is T1E1PRI 01.
Clock Source 2 is T1E1PRI 02.
Clock Source 3 is T1E1PRI 03.
Clock Source 4 is T1E1PRI 04.
The system tries to find out a system clock master from this table. If none of the port is synchronized out of this table, the
system gives priority to internal clock. If any one port is synchronized, a system selects that port as a system clock
master. Here index is given priority, i.e. if 2nd port of this table is selected as clock master and suddenly first port is
synchronized then a system changes its master from 2nd port to first port. Now if first port has lost its synchronization
then in this case again 2nd port is selected as system clock master.
Relevant Topics:
1. RTC Synchronization 537
2. Real Time Clock (RTC) 520
=X=X=
Port Type Meaning Port Offset
05 T1E1PRI 1-8
04 BRI 01-32
00 Null 000
Matrix
208 Eternity V8 System Manual
Closed User Group (CUG)
Whats this?
To have private networks, few PBXs can be connected to each other using E&M, T1/E1, QSIG, etc. The requirement
demands that the PBXs connected to each other forming the network behave as a single group. The users need not dial
a separate code to access a station user of other PBX. The entire network should behave as a single unit. The station
user will not know whether he is dialing a station number of his own PBX or other PBX. This is called Closed User Group.
In the above figure, 3 PBX systems are connected through E&M connectivity.
T1 to Tn are trunk lines from the local central office (CO).
S1 to Sn are stations.
E&M1 to E&M3 are E&M lines between the three PBX systems.
How it works?
For Closed User Group, it is mandatory to have unique station number in all the systems i.e. one cannot have station
number 2001 in PBX-A as well as in PBX-B or PBX-C.
Few new words have been used to explain this application, each of these words have been explained below:
Routing Table: This table has five parameters viz. Route Index, Route Code, OG Trunk Bundle Group, Strip Digit Count
and Self Route flag. The closed user group programming works according to this table.
Route Index: Maximum 250 different routes (001-250) can be programmed.
Route Code: Route code could be of maximum sixteen digits. Digits 0 to 9 are allowed. However, * and # are not
allowed. Generally route code will be a truncated number of the station numbers. For example in the figure given above,
route code for PBX-B can be defined as 3 and that for PBX-C can be defined as 4.
If PBX-B were having station numbers from 3100 to 3199 and PBX-C were having station numbers from 3200 to 3299
then route code for PBX-B can be defined as 31 and that for PBX-C can be defined as 32. If PBX-B were having station
numbers from 301 to 399 and 401 to 499 then two route codes can be defined for PBX-B viz. 3 and 4. Likewise for
PBX-C.
OG Trunk Bundle Group: An OG Trunk Bundle Group (OGTBG) is assigned to each route code. Whenever a call is to
be made on that route, a free trunk from the OGTBG is selected and the station number is dialed on it. The same logic of
Rotation On/Off for trunk selection from the OGTBG is used. If rotation is OFF then always the first trunk in the OGTBG is
selected. If it is busy then the next trunk in the group is selected. This helps to select an alternate route. Whereas if
Rotation is ON then the trunks in the OGTBG are selected in round robin fashion.
Route Index Route Code OGTBG Strip Digit Count Self Router Flag Max. Dialed Digits
001
:
250
PSTN PSTN
PBX-A PBX-B
PBX-C
T1
T2
Tn
E&M1
E&M2 E&M3
S1 S2 Sn S1 S2 Sn
2001 2002 2003 3001 3002 3003
S1 S2 Sn
4001 4002 4003
T1
T2
Tn
Matrix
Eternity V8 System Manual 209
Strip Digit Count: It has no significance for Closed User Group application. But it has to be programmed as 0.
Self-Route Flag: It has no significance for Closed User Group application. But it has to be programmed as 0.
Maximum dialed digits: When digits are dialed on the trunk, the system waits for inter digit timer after the last digit is
dialed. In order to avoid this timer and number of digits dialed to be routed without further delay, count for the number of
digits to be programmed in this field. If the number of digits received are equal to the parameters programmed then the
number is dialed out immediately without waiting for the inter digit timer. If the number of digits dialed by the user are not
equal to the digits programmed, the number is dialed after inter digit timer.
The Eternity has only one routing table. The same table is used for Closed User Group and Close User Group-
With Exchange ID applications. Hence the table has to be programmed keeping the application in mind.
How to program?
Step 1
Use following command to program route code:
4502-1-Route Index-Route Code-#*
4502-2-Route Index-Route Index-Route Code-#*
4502-*-Route Code-#*
Where,
Route Index is from 001 to 250.
Route Code is a sixteen digits string of numbers.
Use following command to clear a particular route code:
4502-1-Route Index-#*
4502-2-Route Index-Route Index-#*
4502-*-#*
Where,
Route Index is from 001 to 250.
By default, Program Route Code is Blank.
Step 2
Use following command to assign OG Trunk Bundle Group to the route code:
4503-1-Route Index-OG Trunk Bundle Group
4503-2-Route Index-Route Index-OGTBG
4503-*-OG Trunk Bundle Group
Where,
Route Index is from 001 to 250.
OG Trunk Bundle Group is from 01 to 25.
By default, OG Trunk Bundle Group is 01.
Step 3
Use following command to program strip digit count for a route:
4504-1-Route Index-Strip Digit Count
4504-2-Route Index-Route Index-Strip Digit Count
4504-*-Strip Digit Count
Where,
Router Index is from 001 to 250.
Strip Digit Count is from 0 to 9.
By default, Strip Digit Count is 0.
Step 4
Use following command to program self-route flag for a route:
4505-1-Route Index-Code
4505-2-Route Index-Route Index-Code
4505-*-Code
The commands explained below should be referred as:
To program a single port: XXXX-1
To program a range of ports: XXXX-2
To program all the ports: XXXX-*
Matrix
210 Eternity V8 System Manual
Where,
Route Index is from 001 to 250.
By default, Self-route flag is disabled.
Step 5
Use following command to program maximum dialed digits to select router for a route code:
4506-1-Route Index-Maximum Dialed Digits
4506-2-Route Index-Route Index-Maximum Dialed Digits
4506-*-Maximum Dialed Digits
Where,
Route Index is from 001 to 250.
Maximum dialed digits is from 00 to 99.
Step 6
Use following command to clear an entry in a routing table:
4501-1-Route Index
4501-2-Route Index-Route Index
4501-*
Where,
Route Index is from 001 to 250.
Important Points:
Eternity offers few features associated with closed user group. Each of these are discussed below:
Alternate Route:
This feature provides flexibility of accessing a station of other exchange through alternate routes if the normally used
route (the shortest route) is not free. To achieve this, the trunks that offer shortest routes should be programmed first
in the OGTBG followed by the trunks that provide alternate routes. Also the rotation within the OGTBG should be
OFF. In figure the requirement is that if E&M1 is busy then E&M2 should be used to call 3001 from PBX-A. In this
case a OGTBG is to be so formed that it has E&M1 as first trunk and E&M2 as second trunk and should be assigned
to route code 3. However, the rotation within the OGTBG should be disabled. Similarly, if the call is to be made to
4001 then E&M2 should be used. Hence another OGTBG should be programmed with E&M2 as first trunk and E&M1
as second trunk and it should be assigned to route code 4. Also the round robin option for the OGTBG should be
selected.
Transit Barring:
This feature helps to bar the Transit calls through the exchange. Consider figure 1. It is required that a station user in
PBX-A can access station 3001 using alternate route through PBX-C but a station user in PBX-B cannot access
stations 2001 to 2010 using alternate route through PBX-C. This can be accomplished using Transit Barring. To
achieve this, a denied list containing 10 numbers viz. 2001 to 2010 should be assigned as Toll Control for the SLT
port programmed for the E&M2. Doing so when a station user from PBX-B dials 2001, if E&M1 is busy, the system
would try dialing through E&M2 but since E&M2 does not have requisite toll control, it will give error tone to station
user. Transit Barring adds value to the Alternate Route by allowing a selective access to the station with alternate
route.
Each system in the network has a routing table. By default, the routing is blank and hence E&M works as per normal
E&M connectivity. After programming the routing table as per the requirement, when the user dials a station number,
the system first searches for the dialed number in the same system by considering Self Route flag. If it is not
available in its own system, it checks for it in the routing table, finds the best fit, selects a free E&M path and reaches
the dialed port.
Please refer figure 1. When a station in PBX-A dials a station number 3001, the system searches for this number in
PBX-A. Since there is no station with flexible number 3001 in PBX-A, the system checks the E&M routing table. The
system follows the routing table, identifies that the dialed number is in PBX-B, selects a free E&M path and reaches
the dialed port.
As shown in figure 1, the shortest path to reach station 3001 from PBX-A is through E&M1. But if E&M1 is busy then
the network can be programmed to reach station 3001 through E&M2 and E&M3. For this both PBX-A and PBX-B
have to be programmed to accomplish this.
Forced Call Disconnection:
Please refer Forced Call Disconnection for more details.
Code Meaning
0 Disable Self-route Flag
1 Enable Self-route Flag
Matrix
Eternity V8 System Manual 211
Relevant Topics:
1. E&M Connectivity 343
2. Forced Call Disconnection 375
3. Closed User Group-With Exchange ID 212
4. OG Trunk Bundle Group 474
=X=X=
Matrix
212 Eternity V8 System Manual
Closed User Group-With Exchange ID
Whats this?
To have private networks, few PBXs can be connected to each other using E&M, T1/E1, QSIG, etc. The requirement
demands that the PBXs connected to each other forming the network behave as a single group. The users need not
dial a separate code to access a station user of other PBX. The entire network should behave as a single unit. The
station user will not know whether he is dialing a station number of his own PBX or other PBX. This is called Closed
User Group. However, it is possible that the PBXs connected to form a network may have same station numbers.
Also, all the exchanges within the network may have their own identity (called Exchange ID). In such cases, the
routing scheme (the routing table) has to be programmed keeping the Exchange ID (EID) in mind. This is known as
Closed User Group-With Exchange ID.
This facility is generally used in PLCC Applications wherein new power stations (and hence PBXs) are added in the
network. It is not feasible to have unique station numbers throughout the network. In such cases, an Exchange ID is
assigned to the newly added PBX and a routing table is programmed in the exchange. Also, the routing tables of
other exchanges are modified to include the newly added exchange in the network.
Figure 1: Open User Group Application
In the below figure, 3 PBX systems are connected through E&M connectivity.
T1 to Tn are trunk lines from the local central office (CO).
S1 to Sn are stations.
E&M1 to E&M3 are E&M lines between the three PBX.
How it works?
In this application, it is possible to have same station number in two or more PBXs of the network. Few new words have
been used to explain Closed User Group-With Exchange ID application, each of these words have been explained
above.
Routing Table: This table has five parameters viz. Route Index, Route Code, OG Trunk Bundle Group, Strip Digit Count
and Self Route flag. The Closed User Group-With Exchange ID programming works according to this table.
Route Index: Maximum 250 different routes (001-250) can be programmed.
Route Code: Route code could be of maximum six digits (XXXXXX). Digits 0 to 9 are allowed. Generally, route code will
be a unique number. The route code should not clash with any of the station numbers of same PBX. For example in the
figure given above, route code for PBX-A can be defined as 21, route code for PBX-B can be defined as 22 and that for
PBX-C can be defined as 23. This means that no station in PBX-A can start with 22 or 23. Similarly, no station in PBX-
B can start with 21 or 23 and no station in PBX-C start with 21 and 22.
Route Index Route Code OGTBG Strip Digit Count Self Router Flag Max. Dialed Digits
001
:
250
PSTN PSTN
PBX-A PBX-B
PBX-C
T1
T2
Tn
E&M1
E&M2 E&M3
S1 S2 Sn S1 S2 Sn
2001 2002 2099
S1 S2 Sn
T1
T2
Tn
2001 2002 2099
2001 2002 2099
21
22
23
Matrix
Eternity V8 System Manual 213
OG Trunk Bundle Group: An OG Trunk Bundle Group (OGTBG) is assigned to each route code. Whenever a call is to
be made on that route, a free trunk from the OGTBG is selected and the station number is dialed on it. The same logic of
rotation On/Off for trunk selection from the OGTBG is used. If rotation is OFF then always the first trunk in the OGTBG is
selected. If it is busy then the next trunk in the group is selected. This helps to select an alternate route. Whereas if
rotation is ON then the trunks in the OGTBG are selected in round robin fashion.
Strip Digit Count: This count signifies the number of digits to be striped of while dialing/decoding a number. To
elaborate: Consider figure 1. The requirement is that if station 2001 of PBX-B dials 212002 and if E&M 1 is busy then the
call should reach station 2002 of PBX-A through alternate route. In this case the strip digit count of PBX-A should be
programmed as 2 and that of PBX-B and PBX-C should be programmed as 0. Doing so, when station 2001 of PBX-B
dials 212002 and if E&M1 is busy then the call is routed through PBX-C. In this case, PBX-B dials 212002 on E&M3,
PBX-C receive this code and dials out the same code i.e. 212002 on E&M2 without striping of any digit. On receiving
212002, PBX-A strips of two digits as per the programming and routes the call to station 2002.
Self-Route Flag: This flag signifies that the digits being dialed are for the same PBX and are not to be dialed on the E&M
trunk.
Maximum dialed digits: When digits are dialed on the trunk, the system waits for inter digit timer after the last digit is
dialed. In order to avoid this timer and number of digits dialed to be routed without further delay, count for the number of
digits to be programmed in this field. If the number of digits received are equal to the parameters programmed then the
number is dialed out immediately without waiting for the inter digit timer. If the number of digits dialed by the user are not
equal to the digits programmed, the number is dialed after inter digit timer.
Please note that the Eternity has only one routing table. The same table is used for Closed User Group and Closed User
Group-With Exchange ID. Hence the table has to be programmed keeping the application in mind.
How to program?
Please refer topic Closed User Group (CUG) for more details.
Important Points:
Eternity offers few features associated with Closed User Group-With Exchange ID. Each of these are discussed below:
Alternate Route
Please refer Closed User Group (CUG) for more details.
Transit Barring
Please refer Closed User Group (CUG) for more details.
Strip Digit Count is of significance in a network in which few exchanges possess Exchange ID whereas others do
not. Refer figure 2. PBX-A and PBX-B are made to work as Closed User Group since they have unique stations. But
since PBX-C possess stations whose flexible number clashes with stations in PBX-A, it cannot be made a part of
Closed User Group. In such case Closed User Group-with Exchange ID can be used with the combination of PBX-A
+ PBX-B and PBX-C forming the network.
In this case, if 2001 of PBX-A wants to access 3001 through E&M1, he has to dial 3001. But if E&M1 is busy then
system will allot him E&M2 and since there would not be any programming done, it will give error tone to the caller. To
avoid this condition, the station user of PBX-A should be asked to call 3001 by dialing 223001. For this, the strip digit
count for the route index with route code 22 in the routing table of PBX-B should be programmed as 2 and the strip
digit count for the route index with route code 22 in the routing table of PBX-C should be programmed as 0. Doing
so, if the call to 3001 is made through E&M1, then PBX-B would strip of the first two digits on receiving 223001 and
make the caller reach 3001. If the call to 3001 is routed through E&M2, the PBX-C will not strip of any digit and would
dial out 223001 on E&M3. On receiving 223001, PBX-B as per the programming would strip of 22 and make the call
land on 3001.
Strip Digit Count is also of importance in following case:
For example in figure 1, if station 2001 of PBX-A dials 212002 then also the call should go to 2002 of PBX-A only. To
accomplish this, the strip digit count should be programmed as 2 and Self Route flag should be enabled. Doing so
when 2001 dials 212002, the system strips off first two digits and checks for the remaining digits, which in this case
would be 2002 and thereby the user reaches 2002 of the same PBX.
Forced Call Disconnection
Please refer Forced Call Disconnection for more details.
Prefix String Feature:
This feature is programmed only for few Exchanges like ET1, Genesis, or BPL which does not send 0 when user
dials a number to call an extension number of the exchange. For other Exchanges like ET2 it is not required to be
programmed as it sends 0 also if it is dialed.
Maximum of 4-characters can be programmed as Prefix String.
Matrix
214 Eternity V8 System Manual
Prefix String is a string of characters which is prefixed to the string, dialed by the user and then CUG Routing-Table
is applied.
Example:
Detailed application for Prefix String feature is explained by following steps:
If this feature is not programmed for Exchange of type: ET1 or BPL, and Prefix String is blank, then, only 2223 is
dialed by the Exchange when 02223 is dialed by the user, to call station 23.
Now when 2223 reaches Exchange B, since there is no entry in the CUG table, the feature-extension flexible number
table is checked. Now since a match starting from 22.. is found, the call is routed to station 22 instead of 23,
because station number 22 is present on the Extension.
To avoid this, an entry is made in the routing table containing 22 as the route code with strip digit count 2. But then
since the system checks CUG Routing-table first, the first two digits out of 2223 always get striped off and the call is
not routed to station 22. i.e. the other stations of Exchange B will never be able to call station 22.
To solve this problem Prefix String feature is programmed in the E&M Feature Template with 0 as prefix string, so
that string with prefix (022) is matched with the entries of CUG Routing Table (as shown in figure). When user dials
02223, first 3-digits are stripped off and the required Extension 23 can be called.
Please refer topic E&M Feature Template to program this feature.
Relevant Topics:
1. E&M Connectivity 343
2. Forced Call Disconnection 375
3. Closed User Group (CUG) 208
4. OG Trunk Bundle Group 474
5. E&M Feature Template 346
=X=X=
Matrix
Eternity V8 System Manual 215
Communication Ports
The Eternity supports two communication ports viz. COM1 and COM2. Each communication port is of serial,
asynchronous and RS232C type.
Both these communication ports are provided on the Eternity ME Card Master of the system. The connectors (DB-9
male) are provided on the front panel of the Eternity ME Card Master.
Following facilities of Eternity need a COM port:
SMDR-Posting
Programming using a PC
SMDR-Online
For more details on individual application, please refer respective chapter in this manual.
As there are two communication ports available at a time, two applications can be activated simultaneously.
A communication port has following programmable attributes:
Speed in bps.
Number of data bits.
Number of stop bits.
Parity.
These attributes of a COM port have to be set keeping in mind the application for which the communication port is used.
Each application can use its own settings.
How to program a Communication Port?
Use following command to set data transfer rate (speed) of a COM port:
3201-Port-Speed
Where,
By default, Speed is 115200bps.
Use following command to set data-bits of a COM port:
3202-Port-Data Bits
Where,
By default, Data Bits is 8.
Use following command to set the parity of a COM port:
3203-Port-Parity
Port Meaning
1 COM 1
2 COM 2
Speed Meaning
0 1200 bps
1 2400 bps
2 4800 bps
3 9600 bps
4 19200 bps
5 38400 bps
6 57600 bps
7 115200 bps
Data Bits Meaning
0 7 data bits
1 8 data bits
Matrix
216 Eternity V8 System Manual
Where,
By default, Parity is None.
Use following command to set stop-bits of a COM port:
3204-Port-Stop Bits
Where,
By default, Stop Bit is 1.
Use following command to set the flow control of a COM port:
3205-Port-Flow Control
Where,
By default, Flow Control is None.
Use following command to default parameters to a COM Port:
3210-Port
Where,
Example 1:
Let us program COM1 with following parameters:
Speed = 9600 bps.
Data Bits = 8 bits.
Parity = None.
Stop Bits = 1.
Flow Control = None.
Use following commands:
3201-1-3
3202-1-1
3203-1-0
3204-1-0
3205-1-0
Example 2:
Let us program COM2 with following parameters
Speed = 2400 bps
Data Bits = 7 bits.
Parity = Even.
Stop Bits = 2.
Flow Control = Hardware (RTS/CTS).
Parity Meaning
0 None
1 Odd
2 Even
3 Mark
4 Space
Stop Bits Meaning
0 1 stop bit
1 2 stop bit
Flow Control Meaning
0 None
1 Hardware (RTS/CTS)
2 Software (XON/XOFF)
Port Meaning
1 COM 1
2 COM 2
Matrix
Eternity V8 System Manual 217
Use following commands:
3201-2-1
3202-2-0
3203-2-2
3204-2-1
3205-2-1
Following parameters for communication ports are recommended for computer connectivity or programming through
computer:
Speed = 9600 bps.
Data Bits = 8.
Parity = None.
Stop Bits = 1.
Flow Control = None.
How to Connect the Eternity with a Computer?
The Eternity is capable of interfacing itself with a computer through RS232C ports. All PCs have communication ports
called COM1 and COM2. The Eternity can communicate with the PC through COM1 or COM2. Matrix provides optional
communication cable for this purpose. Please contact Matrix dealer or the company for the same. This communication
cable is provided with DB-9 female connectors on both ends. You may connect any end to the Eternity and the other end
to PC. If the PC COM port is on USB connector, you have to use USB to DB-9 converter. Such converters are easily
available in the market. Following diagram shows how Eternity is connected to a computer.
Following diagram shows how two communication port applications can work simultaneously on the same PC.
Following table gives the pin-out details of the COM ports.
Pin No. Signal Name
1 Data Carrier Detect (DTD)
2 Receive Data (RXD)
3 Transmit Data (TXD)
4 Data Terminal Ready (DTR)
5 Ground (GND)
6 Data Set Ready (DSR)
COM 1
COM 2
Eternity
COM 1
Computer
RS-232
Communication
Cable
COM 1
COM 2
Eternity
COM 1
Computer
RS-232
Communication
Cable
COM 2
RS-232
Communication
Cable
Matrix
218 Eternity V8 System Manual
DSR sensing
Eternity offers a flexibility to monitor the physical connection between the ports. It allows us to enable/disable DSR
sensing. If DSR sensing is enabled the system continuously monitors the physical connection. If the physical connection
is inactive at any time, the system is informed and data transfer is stopped. If DSR is disabled the physical connection
between the ports is not monitored. Hence, even when the physical connection is down the data continuous and this data
is lost.
Use the following command to program the DSR sensing:
3206-Port-DSR Sensing
Where,
Port is 1 or 2.
By default, DSR Sensing is disabled.
Relevant Topics:
1. Station Message Detail Recording 574
2. Programming Using a Computer 506
3. Station Message Detail Recording 574
=X=X=
7 Request To Send (RTS)
8 Clear To Send (CTS)
9 Ring Indicator (IR)
DSR Sensing Meaning
0 Disable
1 Enable
Pin No. Signal Name
Matrix
Eternity V8 System Manual 219
Conference Dial-In
Whats this?
A Conference can be scheduled for a convenient time. The participants can be informed about the scheduling. The
participants can join the on-going conference by dialing a code without any assistance. The participant can be an internal
station or an external caller. For e.g. A set of executives in the field need to report to their boss in office and also
exchange feedback on field experiences amongst each other. Each one can individually report to the boss, and talk to
colleagues at their convenient time. This may lead to repetition of certain information. There are chances of non
communication of some important matter also. To avoid this clumsy situation the set of people who need to communicate
can decide on a time that is convenient to all and Schedule a Dial-In Conference. The Eternity ME supports maximum of
7 simultaneous Dial-In conferences. The maximum number of participants a Dial-In Conference can have is 21. Eternity
GE supports maximum of 15 parties conference.
How it works?
Scheduling a Conference
Every Dial-In Conference has to scheduled. The conference has to be scheduled by an internal station user (SLT/DKP)
or DISA Login. The participants are informed of the scheduled conference and they join the conference without any
assistance. The participant can be a internal party or an external party.
Initiating a Conference
The conference can be initiated by anybody.
Joining a Conference
Once the conference is initiated, the other participants can join at their own convenience.
During the Conference
Any internal/external user can be included into the conference by any participants mid way of the conference. The
participants can release themselves by going ON-Hook. If all the participants release themselves one-by-one, the
conference is not released. At this point any participant can join the conference. Participants can also exclude
themselves midway of the conference.
Cancelling a Conference
The conference is cancelled by dialing the cancellation code from the dial tone. All the participants are released from the
conference (if the conference is going on) and the resources are freed for a new conference. The participants get error
tone. The conference can be cancelled when the conference is in program or after its completion.
How to use it?
Schedule a Conference
Initiate a Conference
To include a Station in the mid of the Conference.
1 Lift the handset. Dial tone
2 Dial 194-Conference Number-Conference Password. Confirmation tone
1 Lift the handset. Dial tone
2 Dial 194-Conference Number-Conference Password. Confirmation tone
1 All in Speech.
2 Go ON-Hook. Go OFF-Hook. Dial tone
3 Dial Station. Ring Back Tone, speech.
4 Dial Flash. Feature tone, station gets music.
5 Dial 191. Confirmation tone. Party included in conference.
6 Dial 191. You are included in conference.
Matrix
220 Eternity V8 System Manual
Cancel a Conference
Dialing 196-Conference Number-Conference Password releases the scheduled and frees the resources.
Dialing 190 cancel the conference but does not release the resources. The conference can be initiated later on.
Conference can be cancelled even after conference is over.
Conference can be cancelled from SA mode also (From SLT/DKP).
1072-026-Conference Number
This is useful when the participants forget the password and cannot join the conference or cannot initiate the conference.
Join a Conference (Internal station)
Join a Conference (External)
How to program?
Access to Dial-In Conference is programmable. Hence this feature can be allowed or denied to each user. Refer topic
Class of Service (COS) for details on programming of this feature.
Important Points:
Any participant (internal) in conference can exclude himself simply by disconnecting the telephone.
It is possible to schedule or join a Dial-In Conference through DISA. All you have to do is:
Dial a DISA enabled trunk.
Dial DISA login code i.e 1079-Station Number-User Password.
After you get the DISA login beeps you dial the code for Scheduling the conference or Joining the conference.
During your conversation use the following wherever required.
Go on-hook (Dial #0).
Go off-hook (Dial #1).
To release your self (Dial #0#0).
You can include the party midway.
Please take care not to dial Flash to put the participant on hold else the call will get disconnected since you are in
DISA mode. Keep dialing any digit to continue the conference since you are in DISA mode.
If Station A has held Station B and dials the code for joining the conference, Station B joins the conference. Now if
Station A wishes to join the conference it has to dial the Conference joining code again.
If Station A is a participant in a Conference he cannot participate in any other conference till the conference is
released. A participant of one conference can release himself from the conference and join a second conference. At
any instance of time the participant is participating only in one conference. If he wishes to join back the first
conference he has to release himself from the current and dial the join in code for the first conference.
To release himself the user has to dial 193. Just going ON-Hook does not permit him to join another conference.
1111 cannot be made the conference password.
When an external user is included in conference, then the external user gets DISA beeps (for DISA Inactivity Timer)
and is expected to dial digits before the DISA Inactivity timer elapses.
Relevant Topics:
1. Conference-3 Party 221
2. Conference-Multi Party 224
3. Class of Service (COS) 200
4. Access Codes 77
=X=X=
1 All participants in Speech.
2 Go ON-Hook. Go OFF-Hook. Dial tone
3 Dial 196-Conference Number-Conference Password/190. Conference Cancelled.
1 Lift the handset. Dial tone
2 Dial 195-Conference Number-Conference Password. Join the conference if the conference activated.
1 Lift the handset. Dial tone
2 Dial the access code of the trunk that has DID set on it. Dial beeps in DID.
3 Dial 5. Voice prompt to input the Conference Number.
4 Input the Conference Number. Voice prompt to input the Conference Password.
5 Input the Conference Number Password. Join the Conference if the conference activated.
Matrix
Eternity V8 System Manual 221
Conference-3 Party
Whats this?
The Eternity allows three methods for conducting conferences:
3-Party Conference
Multiparty Conference
Dialing-In Conference
3-Party conference is an easier and faster way to set up a conference. It does not allow more than 3 parties to be
included in the conference. Whereas, multi party conference allows up to 21 parties in a conference. Please refer topic
Conference-Multi Party for more details. Maximum of 7 simultaneous are supported. Eternity GE supports maximum of
15 parties in a conference.
3-Party conference can be conducted at a spur of the moment without much prior planning. If a user is talking to some
one and he feels he should include a third person in his present talk and have a conference, he can do so without
disconnecting his present talk. All he has to do is to hold present person, dial the third person and then dial conference
code.
How to use it?
Following three combinations are allowed in 3-party conference:
All three stations
Two stations and one trunk
One station and two trunks
1 Speech with Station.
2 Dial Flash. Feature tone
3 Dial another Station. Ring Back Tone
4 Speech with the station when the call is answered.
5 Dial Flash-0. 3-way speech established (conference-3 party)
1 Speech with Trunk.
2 Dial Flash. Feature tone
3 Dial another Station. Ring Back Tone
4 Speech with the station when the call is answered.
5 Dial Flash-0. 3-way speech established (conference-3 party)
1 Speech with Trunk.
2 Dial Flash. Feature tone, Trunk goes on hold.
3 Dial #. Feature tone
4 Dial 0 to grab another trunk. Trunk dial tone
5 Dial Telephone Number. Ring Back Tone
6 Speech with called party when the call is answered.
7 Dial Flash-0. 3-way speech established (Conference-3 party).
Matrix
222 Eternity V8 System Manual
How it works?
Flow chart on the next page explains these steps.
It is possible to have Conference-Unsupervised
This feature enables the operator to connect two trunks through the system and getting him free from the discussion.
This feature is used quite often nowadays to connect two local lines which otherwise if try to talk would be charged at
long distance rates.
Suppose you are at city A. Other two colleagues are at city B and city C. City B and City C is charged at STD rates from
each other. City B and City C are charged at local rates from city A. Now using this feature, you being at City A can make
conference with City B and City C and once in conversation, if you disconnect then City B and City C can talk at local
rates.
Start
Station A is speaking to Station B
They need to include Station C in their talk.
Station A puts Station B on hold. Staion A
gets feature tone. Station B gets music
Station A dials Station C
Station C answers the call. Station A and
Station C are in speech. This is a normal
situation occuring during a call transfer.
Station A dials flash-0 to activate
3-party conference
Station A, Station B and Station
C are in speech
Any station
disconnects ?
Remaining two station in
normal 2-way speech
Once again they can conduct a
conference with a new station
End
Station A
dials flash ?
No
Yes
Station C goes on hold and gets music.
Station A and Station B remain in speech
Yes
No
This is normal situation occuring
during a call transfer
End
Matrix
Eternity V8 System Manual 223
How to use it?
How to program?
Access of Conference is programmable. Hence it can be allowed or denied to each user. Please refer topic Class of
Service (COS) for details on programming this feature.
When a new party joins the conference the existing users get beeps which inform them of the new inclusion, this is
programmable.
Use the following command to enable/disable beeps during conference:
5331-Code
Where,
Relevant Topics:
1. Conference-Multi Party 224
2. Class of Service (COS) 200
3. Direct Inward System Access (DISA) 286
4. QSIG 508
=X=X=
1 Speech with Trunk.
2 Dial Flash. Feature tone, trunk goes on hold.
3 Dial #. Feature tone
4 Dial 0 to grab another trunk. Trunk dial tone
5 Dial Telephone Number. Ring Back Tone
6 Speech with called party when the call is answered.
7 Dial Flash-0. 3-way speech established (conference-3 party)
8 Dial Flash. One of the trunks goes on hold. Operator is in speech with other trunk.
9 Dial #. Trunk1-Trunk2 are in speech.
Code Meaning
0 Disable
1 Enable
Matrix
224 Eternity V8 System Manual
Conference-Multi Party
Whats this?
Telephonic conference is a useful facility because it saves time. It allows internal and external users to meet over the
telephone without physically traveling to remote areas.
There are total 7 conferencing circuits in the system. The Eternity supports maximum of 21-party conference. As it
employs digital conferencing circuits, the number of parties involved in a conference does not affect the speech level.
Eternity GE supports maximum of 15 parties conference.
Maximum conference participants 21
Maximum simultaneous conferences (If all the conferences involve 3 parties) 7
Maximum parties involve in conference (If all 21 parties in a single conference) 21
Matrix
Eternity V8 System Manual 225
Following flow chart high lights the conference logic:
Start
Any station decides to
hold a tele-conference
He prepare a list of all the participants
to be included in the conference
He contacts the participants
He informs the participants
about the planned conference
He dials flash. Participant gets music
He dials conference inclusion code.
He gets confirmation tone
He goes on hook(idle) and then off hook
or waits for completion of confirmation
tone. He gets dial tone.
Any more
participant to be
included ?
Yes
No
He dials conference inclusion
code again
He joins the conference. All
participants can converse.
any participant decides to
involve a new participant.
A
Conference
Initiation
Conference
Activation
Matrix
226 Eternity V8 System Manual
A
He goes on-hook(idle).
The participant contact the new praticipant
He informs the participant
about the conference
He dials Flash. New
participant also gets music.
He dials conference inclusion code. He gets
confirmation tone. The new participant is included.
He dials conference inclusion
code again to include yourself.
He decides to disconnect a participant
He goes on-hook(idle).
He dials the conference
disconnection code followed by the
internal participant's number
The two parties are connected. You can
ask the particular participant to go onhook
and disconnect the phone
He dials conference inclusion code. You
are in included in the conference again.
Include
a new
participant
Disconneting
a participant
Conference
Termination
Any paticipant can dial
conference termination code
End
Matrix
Eternity V8 System Manual 227
How to use it?
To Initiate conference between Station A, Station B, Station C and Station D:
Above same steps are followed to include to a participant at midway of a conference.
To exclude, station C in the mid of the conference (From DKP Only):
To terminate a conference:
Note:
Refer Important Points for Conference-Multi Party used by external party with DISA feature.
Few possible cases:
Multiparty conference among few stations.
1 Lift the handset (from Station A). Dial tone
2 Dial Station B. Ring Back Tone, Speech.
3 Dial Flash. Feature tone, Station B gets music.
4 Dial 191. Dial tone
5 Dial Station C. Ring Back Tone, Speech.
6 Dial Flash. Feature tone, Station C gets music.
7 Dial 191. Dial tone
8 Dial Station D. Ring Back Tone, Speech.
9 Dial Flash. Feature tone, Station D gets music.
10 Dial 191. Dial tone
11 Dial 191. All in Speech.
Go ON-Hook. Go OFF-Hook. Dial tone
Dial 192. Press Up/Down key.
Station will display name and number of station B, C and D
one by one.
Select Station C by pressing Hold when
station C name and number is displayed.
Station C will be excluded from the conference. Station C will
get error tone. User will get confirmation tone.
1 Go ON-Hook. Go OFF-Hook. Dial tone
2 Dial 190. Confirmation tone. Participant get error tone.
PSTN
Eternity
S1
S2
S3
S4
S5
A, B, C and D are in Conference
A
C
E
D
B
Matrix
228 Eternity V8 System Manual
Several Multi Party conference among few Stations simultaneously.
Multiple conferences between few trunks and few stations.
Multi party conferences between one trunk and few stations
Multiparty Conference between few trunks and one station
PSTN
Eternity
S1
S2
S3
S4
S5
S6
S7
S8
S9
S10
S11
S12
A, B, C, D and E are in Conference1
W, X, Y and Z are in Conference2
F, G and H are in Conference3
A
C
E
D
B
W
Y
F
Z
X
H
G
PSTN
Eternity
S1
S2
S3
S4
S5
S6
S7
S8
S9
A
C
E
D
B
F
H
I
G
T1
T2
T3
T4
T5
T6
PSTN
Eternity
S1
S2
S3
S4
S5
A
C
E
D
B
T1
T2
T3
T4
T5
PSTN
Eternity
S1
S2
S3
S4
S5
A
C
E
D
B
T1
T2
T3
T4
T5
Matrix
Eternity V8 System Manual 229
Multiparty conference between few trunks and few stations only simultaneously.
How to program?
Access to Multiparty Conference is programmable. Hence this feature can be allowed or denied to each user. Refer topic
Class of Service (COS) for details on programming of this feature.
When a new party joins the conference the existing users get beeps which inform them of the new inclusion, this is
programmable. Please refer chapter Conference-3 Party for more details.
Important Points:
The feature codes of Conference are programmable. Please refer Access Codes for more details.
Any participant in conference can exclude himself simply by disconnecting the telephone.
It is possible to have Multiparty conference from a remote location also. Suppose you want to have conference with
your friends at Mumbai and Delhi but since it is Sunday the office is closed. All you have to do is:
Dial your office on a DISA enabled trunk. Call your Mumbai friend. Put him on hold by dialing #-1.
Please note that you do not dial Flash to put the participant on hold, else the call will get disconnected since you
are in DISA mode. Mumbai participant gets music. Dial conference inclusion code. You get confirmation tone.
Go on-hook (Dial #0).
Go off-hook (Dial #1).
Call your Delhi friend and include him in conference mode. Dial inclusion code. All can converse. Keep dialing any
digit to continue the conference since you are in DISA mode.
When an external user is included in conference, then the external user gets DISA beeps (for DISA Inactivity Timer)
and is expected to dial digits before the DISA Inactivity timer elapses.
When external party dials #0, #9, he will get disconnected from the DISA call and the DISA call is terminated.
Relevant Topics:
1. Conference-3 Party 221
2. Class of Service (COS) 200
3. Access Codes 77
4. Digital Key Phone-Soft Keys Programming 264
=X=X=
PSTN
S1
S2
S3
S4
S5
S6
S7
A
C
E
D
B
F
G
T1
T2
T3
T4
T5
T6
Eternity
Matrix
230 Eternity V8 System Manual
Conflict Dialing
Whats this?
Eternity allows overlapping among feature codes and station flexible numbers i.e one access code can be a part of
(subset) another access code viz. 4, 41, 412, etc. or the flexible number of stations can be 201, 2011 etc.
When an access code that is a subset of any other access code is dialed, the system waits for some time for the user
to dial the next digit. In case the user does not dial any digit within that time, the system interprets it as the smaller
access code.
The time for which the system waits for the next digit to be dialed before resolving the access codes is called Conflict
Dialing Timer.
For Example, Let the access code of Call Pick Up be 4 and access code for Alarms be 41 and Auto Call Back be
412. Now when the user dials 4, the system waits for time=conflict dialing timer before resolving the digit dialed. If
no other digit is dialed before the conflict dialing wait timer expires, the system interprets the code as 4. If 1 is
dialed before the conflict dialing wait timer elapses the system interprets it as 41. Now the system again waits for the
next digit again for time=conflict dialing wait timer. If no other digit is dialed before the conflict dialing wait timer
expires, the system interprets the code as 41. If 2 is dialed before the conflict dialing wait timer expires the system
interprets the code as 412 (if there are no access codes like 4121 or 4123 etc. If any such access code exists the
system waits for another time=conflict dialing wait timer for another digit). Once the access code is resolved the
system responds accordingly.
This allows faster response to features having sub set access codes.
How to program?
Use the following command to program conflict dialing timer:
Command: 5351-Seconds
Default: 002 seconds.
Valid Range: 001 to 255 seconds.
Important Points:
This is different from Trunk Digit-Digit Wait Timer and Internal Digit-Digit Wait Timer.
If the value is very large could be a delay in the systems response to the feature. If the value is too small there are
chances of misinterpreting the access codes. So the value programmed must be optimum.
Relevant Topics:
1. Emergency Dialing 359
2. Emergency Detection and Reporting 358
3. Access Codes 77
4. Flexible Numbers 369
=X=X=
Matrix
Eternity V8 System Manual 231
Continued Dialing
Whats this?
Continued Dialing allows a station to dial the desired digits even after the speech has been established on a trunk.
This helps users to access services like Auto Attendant, Voice Mail and Interactive Voice Response Systems.
Continued Dialing is allowed to all users on all trunks by default.
Relevant Topic:
1. Flashing on Trunks 368
=X=X=
Matrix
232 Eternity V8 System Manual
Conversation Recording
Whats this?
Eternity provides a facility to the station user to record his conversation with the opposite party.
The Conversation is recorded in the mailbox of the station user.
This feature works only if a Matrix VMS (e.g. Cadence) is interfaced with the Eternity.
How to use it?
How it works?
When the station user dials the command for Conversation Recording, the Eternity sends a string of digits to the VMS
to initiate Conversation Recording. The conversation gets recorded in the mailbox of the user that issued the
Conversation Recording command.
When conversation recording begins the system beeps. These beeps can be enabled/disabled.
Use the following command to enable/disable beeps during conversation recording:
5332-Code
Where,
How to program?
Please refer Class of Service (COS) for details on how to allow Conversation Recording to a user.
Important Point:
The station user must possess a mailbox in VMS if Conversation Recording is to be used.
Relevant Topic:
1. Voice Mail Integration 705
=X=X=
1 You are in speech with the opposite party.
2 Dial Flash. Feature tone
3 Dial 1095. You get Ring Back Tone
4 Return in speech with the opposite party.
Code Meaning
0 Disable
1 Enable
Eternity
Recording
Calling Party
Called Party
Matrix
Eternity V8 System Manual 233
Customer Emergency Services Identification Dialing
Whats this?
Whenever, an emergency number is dialed, the PBX dials out the programmed information of the subscriber to the
network. The network in turn sends it to the called party (may be Police Head Quarter, Fire Brigade). The called party
gets complete information of the subscriber who has dialed the emergency number.
This is supported for the calls made on BRI/T1E1PRI lines only.
If the emergency number is dialed on BRI/T1E1PRI line, then the DDI number are also sent, irrespective of whether
the DDI OG flag is enabled on the station from where the emergency number is dialed.
This feature is very helpful to get complete information of the party that needs emergency help.
=X=X=
Matrix
234 Eternity V8 System Manual
Customer Name
What's this?
Customer's name can be programmed. Once it is programmed, it gets printed as a header in various print reports. i.e.
SMDR Incoming, outgoing and Internal reports, T1E1PRI Performance reports, Alarm Status reports etc.
A customer's name can be of maximum 80 characters consisting of alphanumeric characters, punctuation marks and
spaces.
How to program?
Customer name can be programmed from the DKP or using the Jeeves.
Use following command to program the customer name:
5401-Customer Name-#*
Where,
Customer name is a string of alphanumeric characters (maximum 80).
By default, Customer Name is Blank.
The method of entering customer name is same as typing short messages in mobile. Terminate the string with #*. For
example, to enter 'SUMER', Press '7' four times. Wait for the cursor to go to next position. Now press '8' two times. Wait
for next cursor to go to next position. Likewise enter all the alphabets and then press '#*'. The DKP would show 'OK!' on
the LCD.
Example:
Program the customer name 'Holiday Inn'.
5401-Holiday Inn-#*
Use following command to clear the customer name:
5401-#*
=X=X=
Matrix
Eternity V8 System Manual 235
Daylight Saving Time (DST)
Whats this?
It is the new local time a region is assigned for a portion of the year, usually an hour forward from its standard official
time.
The clocks are advanced at the beginning of the daylight saving time and delayed at the end of the daylight saving
time.
How it works?
The advancement of clocks. (DST Mode) can be:
Disabled
Manual
Scheduled
The daylight saving time is not applicable to certain regions (viz. Asia, South America etc). The system users of these
regions should program the DST Mode as Disabled.
In certain regions like Australasia, North America and Europe etc. the DST time is fixed. The users of these regions
should program the DST Mode as Scheduled and choose the DST Type to suit their requirements. The table below
describes the different DST types and the DST Timings.
If the DST Mode is Scheduled, the advancement and changing of the clock is automatic.
There are certain regions which do not have a scheduled DST, but have their own requirements. In such regions the
DST type is to be programmed as manual and the time at which the clock is to be advanced and the time at which the
clock is to be delayed has to be programmed separately.
How to program?
Use following command to program the DST Mode:
1010-DST Mode
Where,
DST
Type
DST Timings
Applicable in Countries
Start Time (From and To) End Time (From and To)
01 Last Sun MAR 01:59 03:00 Last Sun OCT 02:59 02:00 Austria, Poland, Russia, Spain
02 Last Sun OCT 01:59 03:00 Last Sun MAR 02:59 02:00 Australia, Australia-Tasmania, Belgium,
France, Germany, Greece, Hungary, Italy,
Sweden, Switzerland
03 Second Sunday MAR 01:59 03:00 First Sunday NOV 01:59 01:00 Bahrain, Mexico, Turks, United States
04 First Sun NOV 23:59 01:00 Third Sun FEB 23:59 23:00 Brazil
05 Second Sunday MAR 01:59 03:00 First Sunday NOV 01:59 01:00 Canada
06 Second Sat OCT 23:59 01:00 Second Sat MAR 23:59 23:00 Chile
07 Last Sun MAR 00:59 02:00 Last Sun OCT 01:59 01:00 Denmark, Ireland, Portugal, United
Kingdom
08 Last Sun MAR 02:59 04:00 Last Sun OCT 03:59 03:00 Finland
09 First APR 02:59 04:00 First OCT 03:59 03:00 Iraq
10 Last Sun MAR 02:29 03:30 Last Sun OCT 02:29 01:30 Kyrgyzstan
11 Last Fri APRIL 23:59 01:00 Last Thu SEP 23:59 23:00 Egypt
12 Last Sun MAR 23:59 01:00 Last Sun OCT 23:59 23:00 Lebanon
13 First Sun SEP 01:59 03:00 First Sun APRIL 01:59 01:00 Namibia
14 First Sun OCT 01:59 03:00 Third Sun MAR 02:59 02:00 New Zealand
15 Last Sun MAR 01:59 03:00 Last Sun OCT 02:59 02:00 Norway
16 First Sun OCT 23:59 01:00 First Sun APRIL 23:59 23:00 Paraguay
17 First APRIL 23:59 01:00 First OCT 23:59 23:00 Syria
18 First APRIL 23:59 01:00 Last Sun OCT 23:59 23:00 Cuba
DST Mode Meaning
0 Disabled
Matrix
236 Eternity V8 System Manual
By default, value is based on Region Code.
Use following command to program the time for clock advancement at the beginning of the DST (Required only if the
DST mode is Manual):
1011-Date-Month-Current Time-Advance Time
Where,
Date=01 to 31 (leading zero must in case of single digit date) (Default 01).
Month=01 to 12 (leading zero must in case of single digit month) (Default 01).
Current Time is in HH:MM format, HH from 00 to 23 (leading zero must) and MM from 00 to 59 (leading zero must)
(Default 00:00).
Advance Time is in HH:MM format, HH from 00 to 23 (leading zero must) and MM from 00 to 59 (leading zero must)
(Default 00:00).
The current time is the time that is presently followed by the system. The advance time is the time to which the Real time
Clock (RTC) should be set to. Please note that the advance time will be greater than the current time.
Use following command to program the time for clock delay at the end of the DST (Required only if the DST mode is
Manual):
1012-Date-Month-Current Time-Delay Time
Where,
Date=01 to 31 (leading zero must in case of single digit date) (Default 01).
Month=01 to 12 (leading zero must in case of single digit month) (Default 01).
Current Time is in HH:MM format (leading zero must), HH from 00 to 23 and MM from 00 to 59 (Default 00:00).
Advance Time is in HH:MM format (leading zero must), HH from 00 to 23 and MM from 00 to 59 (Default 00:00).
The current time is the time that is presently followed by the system. The delay time is the time to which the Real Time
Clock (RTC) should be set to. Please note that the delay time will be less than the current time.
Use the following command to program the DST Type (Required only if the DST mode is Scheduled):
1013-DST Type
Where,
1 Manual
2 Scheduled
DST Type Meaning
01 Austria, Poland, Russia, Spain
02 Australia, Australia-Tasmania, Belgium, France, Germany, Greece, Hungary, Italy, Sweden, Switzerland
03 Bahrain, Mexico, Turks, United States
04 Brazil
05 Canada
06 Chile
07 Denmark, Ireland, Portugal, United Kingdom
08 Finland
09 Iraq
10 Kyrgyzstan
11 Egypt
12 Lebanon
13 Namibia
14 New Zealand
15 Norway
16 Paraguay
17 Syria
18 Cuba
DST Mode Meaning
Matrix
Eternity V8 System Manual 237
Relevant Topics:
1. Real Time Clock (RTC) 520
2. Default Settings 242
3. Region Code 518
=X=X=
Matrix
238 Eternity V8 System Manual
DDI Routing Table
What's this?
The DDI Routing Table is a set of general features that define the complete logic of identifying the flexible numbers and
DDI equivalent numbers when there is an incoming or outgoing call on a BRI/T1E1PRIand SIP trunk. The Eternity offers
128 such tables each of which can be programmed as per the requirement.
How it works?
The DDI Routing Table is made up of Parameters like:
DDI Routing Reference ID-This is the reference number acts as an identifier to the mapping logic programmed in the
DDI Routing Table. Any number of table can have the same reference number. A Reference ID is assigned to both IC
reference tables and OG reference tables of the trunks. For more details on call resolving, please refer the topics
Direct Dialing-In (DDI), IC Reference Table and OG Reference Table.
Start DDI Number-This is the First DDI Number for the ISDN Installation Number (MSN).
Total DDI Numbers-The total number of DDI numbers supported for an ISDN Installation Number. Suppose an ISDN
Trunk supports 200 DDI numbers, then total DDI Number is 200.
DDI Number of Digit-The number of digits in a DDI number. Suppose 200 DDI numbers are supported on an ISDN
Trunk, then the Number of Digits for that Trunk should be programmed as 3. Suppose 10 DDI numbers are supported
on another ISDN Trunk, then the Number of Digits for that Trunk should be programmed as 2.
Port Type-This parameter is to be programmed as listed in the parameter value in the DDI Routing Table.
Port Number-Number of port, range of which depends upon selected port type. Refer parameter value given in the
DDI Routing Table. This field is of no significance if port type is selected as 'Flexible Number'.
Start Flexible Number-If port type is 'Flexible Number' you can program station number of the first DDI Number for
the Index. Once this is programmed based on the start DDI number the rest of the flexible number of stations to which
DDI Number is assigned is calculated. 'Start Flexible Number' field is of significance only if the port type is 'Flexible
Number'.
How to program?
Use the following command to program the feature in a DDI Routing Table:
6322-1-DDI Routing Table Index-Parameter Number-Value
6322-2-DDI Routing Table Index-DDI Routing Table Index-Parameter Number-Value
6322-*-Parameter Number-Value
Where,
DDI Routing Table Index is from 001 to 128.
Parameter Number is from 01 to 06.
Code takes different values that vary from parameter to parameter. Please refer default table, which provides all the
values that can be assigned to various parameters.
Use following command to default a DDI Routing Table:
6321-1-DDI Routing Table Index
6321-2-DDI Routing Table Index-DDI Routing Table Index
6321-*
Where,
DDI Routing Table Index is from 001 to 128.
The commands explained below should be referred as:
To program a single port: XXXX-1
To program a range of ports: XXXX-2
To program all the ports: XXXX-*
Matrix
Eternity V8 System Manual 239
Following table shows default DDI Routing Table
Parameter Value:
Refer to above table. Whenever the port type is selected as Flexible number, the range concept of Start flexible
number becomes relevant. In all other cases, range concept is not relevant.
When a call is placed on SLT/DKP port, the calling party number is displayed on the terminal.
When the call is placed on BRI-NT or PRI-NT, the calling party number and the called party number both are sent to
the NT port. Doing so, the PBX connected to the NT port can resolve the DDI number and place the call on the
programmed station.
Relevant Topics:
1. Direct Dialing-In (DDI) 280
2. ISDN-BRI 398
3. DS1 Trunks 307
4. IC Reference Table 386
5. OG Reference Table 470
=X=X=
Para. No./
Table Index
01 02 03 04 05 06
DDI Routing
Ref. ID
Start DDI
Numbers
Total DDI
Numbers
DDI Number
of Digit
Port Type
Port
Number
Start Flexible
Number
001 00 000000 000000 0 Null Blank Blank
002 00 000000 000000 0 Null Blank Blank
003-127 Same as 128
128 00 000000 000000 0 Null Blank Blank
Code
00 00-99
000001-
999999
000000-
999999
0-4 Null -- Max. 6-digits
04 BRI 01-32
05 T1E1PRI 1-8
06 E&M 001-128
08 AOP 1
10 DOP 1
11 Dept Grp 01-16
12 Quick Dial 100-999
20 RG 01-32
21 VMS Grp. 1
25 Mobile 01-32
26 SIP 01-32
27 Flex. No. 4-digits
Matrix
240 Eternity V8 System Manual
Debug for the VoIP Ethernet Port
What's this?
Matrix Eternity supports a feature by which SE can view the system debugs on the server over IP network. This is
done by 'Syslog Client' in the Eternity which supports multiple debug levels.
Each debug message includes the MAC Address of syslog client who is sending debug messages in 'syslog' format.
How it works?
The debug can be enable/disable.
If Debug flag is 'Disable', syslog client will not send any debug to 'syslog server address'.
If Debug flag is 'Enable', syslog client will send debug to 'syslog server address' and the 'Debug Level' which is
enabled, can be viewed on the syslog server. The Server will use the MAC address data to filter the debug of the
specific gateway.
The Server address and port number are used as programmed values.
Following different DEBUG levels are supported:
APPL
CONFIG
SYS
SIP
CALL
VoPP
CHNL
REG
STACK
NAT
STUN
SNTP
As per the level selected, debug log will be generated. For example: if debug log of Call is required, enable 'CALL'
level and disable all other debug levels.
How to program?
Enable/disable Debug
Use following command to enable/disable Debug for the VoIP Ethernet Port:
7791-1-VoIP Ethernet Port -Debug
7791-2-VoIP Ethernet Port -VoIP Ethernet Port-Debug
7791-*-Debug
Where,
VoIP Ethernet Port is from 01 to 16.
By default: Disable.
Syslog Server Address
Use following command to program Syslog Server Address on which Debug parameter is to be sent for the VoIP
Ethernet Port:
7792-1-VoIP Ethernet Port-Syslog Server Address
7792-2-VoIP Ethernet Port-Syslog Server Address
7792-*-Syslog Server Address
Where,
VoIP Ethernet port is from 01 to 16
Syslog Server Address is of 15 digits maximum.
By default, Blank.
The commands explained below should be referred as:
To program a single port: XXXX-1
To program a range of ports: XXXX-2
To program all the ports: XXXX-*
Debug Meaning
0 Disable
1 Enable
Matrix
Eternity V8 System Manual 241
Syslog Port Address
Use following command to program Server Port Address on which Debug parameter is to be sent for the VoIP Ethernet
Port:
7793-1-VoIP Ethernet Port-Server Port Address
7793-2-VoIP Ethernet Port-Server Port Address
7793-*-Server Port Address
Where,
VoIP Ethernet Port is from 01 to 16.
Server Port Address is from 1024 to 65535 and 514.
By default: 514.
Note:
If Debug flag is Enable and Syslog Server IP address is Blank, debug log will be generated on Console port i.e COM
port. The Baud rate on Hyper terminal should be set to 115200.
Debug Level
Use following command to enable debug level for the VoIP Ethernet port:
7794-1-VoIP Ethernet Port-Index-Code
7794-2-VoIP Ethernet Port-VoIP Ethernet Port-Index-Code
7794-*-Index-Code
Where,
VoIP Ethernet Port is from 01 to 16.
Index is from 01 to 11.
By default, Enable for all indices.
Relevant Topics:
1. VoIP Ethernet Port Parameters 715
2. System Debug 635
3. Communication Ports 215
=X=X=
Index Meaning
01 CALL
02 REGISTER
03 SIP
04 RTP
05 VoPP
06 STACK
07 NAT
08 STUN
09 APPLICATION
10 SERIAL
11 OTHER
Code Meaning
0 Disable
1 Enable
Matrix
242 Eternity V8 System Manual
Default Settings
Whats this?
Every system comes with pre-defined set of variable like station's flexible numbers, timers and other parameters.
These pre-defined settings are called default settings. The default value of each programmable parameter is
mentioned in the respective section. If the default setting suits your requirement then, you may not even require to
program the system and the system will work with the default settings.
If you use the command to default the system, all the programmable parameters except Network Port Parameters
(viz. IP Address, Subnet Mask, Primary DNS, Secondary DNS, Host Name, Domain Name, DHCP Server) and the
region code will get default values.
When to use it?
Many times it happens that due to some programming error, the system goes haywire and you are unable to analyses the
problem. During such a situation, it is advisable to default the system. However, software default of the system can be
done from the programming mode and hence programming password should be known. If you forget the password
default cannot be done and in that case hardware default of the SE Password should be done.
How to use it?
The Eternity offers default values to suit the customers worldwide. By default, the values programmed are relevant to suit
the Indian Users. The other users can load the default parameters to suit their requirements. Firstly the user has to select
the suitable region code. Please refer Region Code for more details. After choosing the region the user has to default the
system to load the suitable default parameters.
Use the following command to load the default parameters:
5302-Reverse SE Password
On giving this command, all the programmable parameters except Network Port Parameters and the region code will be
set to default values. The default values depend on the region code programmed in the system.
Note:
To default Network port parameters, click on 'Default' link in the "Master Ethernet Port Parameters" page.
The following table lists the default values of various parameters. Refer chapter Access Codes for TAC and Emergency
Number for various countries:
Reg.
Code
Region
Name
Opr.
DST-
Mode
DST-
Type
CPTG Ring Date
Selective
TAC
SLT-H/w
Tmp
Stn. Bas.
Fea. Tmp.
TWT
H/w Tmp.
Abbr.
Dial
1 Afghanistan
2 Algeria
3 Antigua and Barbuda
4 Argentina 04
5 Australia (Note2) 9 2 2 05 12 01 09
6 Austria 9 2 1
7 Bahamas 9 0 0
8 Bahrain 9 2 3
9 Bangladesh
10 Belarus
11 Belgium 0 2 2
12 Bhutan
13 Bolivia
14 Bosnia
15 Botswana
16 Brunei
17 Brazil 0 2 4 06
18 Bulgaria
19 Cambodia
20 Cameroon
21 Canada 0 2 5 03 T3 MM 89-T-XXX 06 01 06 6
Matrix
Eternity V8 System Manual 243
22 Chile 0 2 6
23 China 0 0 0 08
24 Colombia
25 Costa Rica
26 Croatia
27 Cuba 0 2 18
28 Cyprus
29 Czech Republic
30 Denmark 0 2 7
31 Egypt 9 2 11 09
32 Fiji
33 Finland 9 2 8
34 France 9 2 2 10
35 Germany 9 2 2 11
36 Greece 9 2 2 12
37 Guyana
38 Holland 9 0 0
39 Hong kong 9 0 0
40 Hungary 9 2 2
41 India 9 0 0 01 T1 DD 69-T-XXX 01 01 01 8
42 Indonesia 14
43 Iran 9 0 0 15
44 Iraq 9 2 9 16
45 Ireland 9 2 7
46 Israel 17
47 Italy 9 2 2 18
48 Japan 19
49 Jordan
50 Kazakhstan
51 Kenya 20
52 Korea - North 21
53 Korea - South
54 Kuwait
55 Kyrgyzstan 9 2 10
56 Lebanon 9 2 12
57 Libya
58 Malaysia (Note1) 00 22 01 01 01 6
59 Maldives
60 Mauritius
61 Mexico 0 2 3 03 T3 MM 89-T-XXX 06 01 06 6
62 Mongolia
63 Mozambique
64 Myanmar
65 Namibia 9 2 13 03 T3 MM 89-T-XXX 06 01 06 6
66 Nepal
67 Netherlands
68 New Zealand 9 2 14 24
69 Nigeria
70 Norway 9 2 15
71 Oman
72 Pakistan
Reg.
Code
Region
Name
Opr.
DST-
Mode
DST-
Type
CPTG Ring Date
Selective
TAC
SLT-H/w
Tmp
Stn. Bas.
Fea. Tmp.
TWT
H/w Tmp.
Abbr.
Dial
Matrix
244 Eternity V8 System Manual
Note1:
For Malaysia, defaults are as mentioned below:
TAC0=9, TAC1=81, TAC2=82, TAC3=83, TAC4=84
Station Advanced Feature Template = 01
Distinctive Rings for Malaysia are as explained below:
For Internal Call: Ring Type 06, which has Cadence of 1000 ms On - 4000 ms off
For external call (incoming call): Ring Type 08 which has cadence 400ms On - 200 ms Off - 400 ms On - 2000
ms off.
For Other call types: Same as for Country - India. Refer chapter Distinctive Rings for ring types

Note2:
For Australia, default Station Advanced Feature Template = 01
To load default timers, refer chapter System Parameters.
Important Points:
When the default command is issued the parameters are loaded to suit the region code of the system at that time.
Default command does not default the region code. (The region code has to be changed explicitly).
The user has to select his region code and then default the system to load the default parameters to suit the region.
i.e By default, the region code is Indian and the default values of programmable parameters are to suit the Indian
73 Paraguay 9 2 16
74 Peru 9 0 0
75 Philippines 25 08
76 Poland 9 2 1 26
77 Portugal 9 2 7 27
78 Qatar
79 Romania
80 Russia 9 2 1 28
81 Singapore 9 0 0 30
82 Slovakia
83 South Africa 31
84 Spain 9 2 1 32
85 Sri Lanka
86 Sudan
87 Sweden 9 2 2
88 Switzerland 9 2 2
89 Syria 9 2 17
90 Taiwan 0 0 0
91 Tajikistan
92 Thailand 33
93 Turkey 9 2 3 34
94 Uganda
95 Ukraine
96 United Arab Emirates 9 0 0 35
97 United Kingdom 9 2 7 02 T2 DD 69-T-XXX 11 01 05 8
98 United States 0 2 3 02 T3 MM 81-T-XXX 01 06 Bell 6
99 Uzbekistan
100 Venezuela
101 Vietnam
102 Yemen
103 Yugoslavia
104 Zambia
105 Zimbabwe
Reg.
Code
Region
Name
Opr.
DST-
Mode
DST-
Type
CPTG Ring Date
Selective
TAC
SLT-H/w
Tmp
Stn. Bas.
Fea. Tmp.
TWT
H/w Tmp.
Abbr.
Dial
Matrix
Eternity V8 System Manual 245
market. Now when the system is shipped to Canada, the user has to first set the region code to Canada and then
default the system to load the Canadian default values. If the same unit is shipped back to India, the user has to again
set the region code to India and then default the system to load Indian defaults.
Relevant Topics:
1. Programming the System 503
2. System Security 648
3. System Parameters 642
4. Region Code 518
5. Emergency Dialing 359
6. VoIP Ethernet Port Parameters 715
7. Distinctive Rings 302
=X=X=
Matrix
246 Eternity V8 System Manual
Department Call
Whats this?
Many times it is required to call any one of the persons in a department. It is not important to talk to a particular person.
The caller just wants any member from the Department. Eternity offers flexibility to group stations belonging to a
particular department. The call made to this group using a code is called Department Call. The access code used to
make such call is called Department Number. Hence now the caller has to dial the Department Number to access the
Department. However the caller can access individual station of the group also by dialing the station number.
Department Call is allowed through DID call also. Hence if the caller is making a call to you for the first time and wants
some information about your company then he may dial the Information Department instead of dialing any particular
station or waiting for the operator.
How it works?
Maximum 16 department groups can be formed.
16 stations can be grouped in a Department Group.
The stations can be a SLT, DKP, DOP or ISDN Terminal.
The time for which each station rings can be programmed.
The sequence in which various stations in the group should ring can be arranged.
The number of stations that should ring at a time can be programmed.
Once a station receives a ring, it can be set to ring continuously till the call matures. Such a station continues ringing
even when other stations of the group are hunted. This is called "Continuous" ringing and can be programmed for
each station.
If the call is not answered even after hunting the last station, the system will loop back and start from the first station
once again.
A fresh call can start hunting either from the first station or from the final station of the previous call. This method is
called Rotation Method and can be set for each group. If rotation method is enabled, the fresh call will land on the
destination next to the one, which received the last call. This would enable equal distribution of incoming calls to all
the destinations within the group. If the rotation method is disabled, the fresh call will always land on first station of the
department group.
Any station in the Group can answer the call.
Association Of the Department Call with Routing Group.
Eternity allows to program related stations into groups known as Routing Groups. Please refer the topic Routing Group
for more details. We can program the stations that fall under one department in a Routing Group. This Routing Group can
be programmed as a Department Group. An Access Code can be assigned to the Department Group. This Access Code
is known as the Department Number and the Group of stations can be accessed with this Number.
Association of Department Group and ISDN Terminal:
If more than two 'ISDN terminals' associated with same BRI port are programmed as member of the Department group
and if call is made using department group access code, only two ISDN terminals of the associated BRI port will ring.
This limitation is because of the BRI protocol.
How to use it?
How to program?
Step 1
Please refer the topic Routing Group.
1 Lift the handset. Dial tone
2
Dial Department Number
(3901-3916).
Ring Back Tone (The call lands on the programmed
station within the department group).
The commands explained below should be referred as:
To program a single port: XXXX-1
To program a range of ports: XXXX-2
To program all the ports: XXXX-*
Matrix
Eternity V8 System Manual 247
Step 2
Use following command to assign routing group to the department group:
2001-1-Department Group Index-Routing Group
2001-2-Department Group Index-Department Group Index-Routing Group
2001-*-Routing Group
Where,
Department Group Index is from 01 to 16.
Routing Group is from 00 to 32.
By default, 01 is assigned as routing group.
Use the following command to clear the routing group assigned to department group:
2001-1-Department Group Index-00
2001-2-Department Group Index-Department Group Index-00
2001-*-00
Step 3
How to assign an access code of your choice to Department Group?
Department number is an access code dialed from the dial phase to call a Department Group. There are maximum 16
Department Groups. Each department group access code must be unique and should not match with either SLT station
number or DKP station number or any of the features available from the dial phase.
Use following command to program the access code for a department number:
3113-1-Department Group Index-Access Code-#*
3113-2-Department Group Index-Department Group Index-Access Code-#*
3113-*-Access Code-#*
Where,
Department Group Index is from 01 to 16.
Access Code is maximum of 6 digits.
How to default the Access Codes?
By default, every department group has a default access code. The default access codes for different department groups
are:
Use following command to default the access code for a department group:
3163-1-Department Group Index
3163-2-Department Group Index-Department Group Index
3163-*
It is recommended to use default codes.
How to clear the Access Codes?
Use following command to clear the access code for a department group:
Department Group Index Default Code
01 3901
02 3902
03 3903
04 3904
05 3905
06 3906
07 3907
08 3908
09 3909
10 3910
11 3911
12 3912
13 3913
14 3914
15 3915
16 3916
Matrix
248 Eternity V8 System Manual
3113-1-Department Group Index-#*
3113-2-Department Group Index-Department Group Index-#*
3113-*-#*
Example:
Program the system for following constraints.
Marketing department in a company has four stations viz. 201, 202, 203 and 204 (S/w ports (001, 002 and 003, 004).
201 and 202 are SLTs whereas 203 and 204 are DKPs.
The stations should ring in a sequence viz. 201, 202, 203, 204.
First 201 should ring for 20 seconds.
If no reply, 201 should continue and 202 should ring for 10 seconds.
If still no reply, 201 should continue and 203 should ring for 15 seconds.
If still no reply, 201 should continue and 204 should ring for 20 seconds.
Call traffic should be distributed equally on all four destinations.
Assign Access Code 51 to access this group.
Use following commands:
Program the four stations in the Routing Group 01.
6502-1-01-1-01-001
6502-1-01-2-01-002
6502-1-01-3-02-003
6502-1-01-4-02-004
Program the Ring Timer for the individual stations of the Routing Group.
6503-1-01-1-020
6503-1-01-2-010
6503-1-01-3-015
6503-1-01-4-020
Program the Continuous Ring on the stations of the Routing Group.
6504-1-01-1-1
6504-1-01-2-0
6504-1-01-3-0
6504-1-01-4-0
Turn Rotation ON for the Routing Group.
6505-1-01-1
Program the Routing Group as a Department Group.
2001-1-01-01
Assign an Access Code for the Department Group.
3113-1-01-51-#*
Relevant Topics:
1. Routing Group 533
2. Security Dialing and Reporting 538
3. Class of Service (COS) 200
4. Access Codes 77
=X=X=
Matrix
Eternity V8 System Manual 249
Dialed Number Directory
Whats this?
Eternity retains the list of dialed out numbers (16 numbers) in a directory for every DKP user.
The numbers include the numbers dialed out using Abbreviated Dialing, Quick Dial, Redial or a simple call.
Numbers dialed out from Walk-In Mode are also noted in the directory.
How to use it?
Important Points:
The trunk access code used by the system to dialout the number is same as the trunk access code used the first time.
Toll control is not applied while dialing number using abbreviated dialing.
Number dialed using abbreviated dialing also gets stored in this dialed number directory.
When dialing out the same number stored in dialed number directory, the toll control applies.
Relevant Topics:
1. Abbreviated Dialing 73
2. Quick Dial 516
=X=X=
Action Response
Dial 7. Last Number stored in the dialed number directory is dialed out.
Matrix
250 Eternity V8 System Manual
Digital Input Port (DIP)
Whats this?
The Eternity provides highly reliable, solid-state Digital Input Ports for various control applications.
An external device like fire alarm sensor, smoke sensor, glass breaking detector etc. which conforms to the
specifications of the DIP can be connected to it.
Eternity supports one DIP ports only.
How it works?
When the sensor connected to the DIP instigates the DIP, the system works as per the programming. Suppose the
system is programmed to make an external call on receiving instigation from DIP then in such case when the DIP
receives a signal from the sensor, the system makes an external call to a programmed destination as per the
programming.
DIP can be programmed as Active high or Active Low depending upon the application.
Active High state signifies that the DIP is normally open.
Active Low state signifies that the DIP is normally close.
How to connect the external device to DIP?
Technical Specifications of the DIP
How to program?
Step 1
Use the following command to enable/disable DIP:
4902-1-DIP-Code
Where,
DIP is 1
By default, DIP is disabled.
Step 2
Use the following command to program the DIP as Active High/Active Low:
4903-1-DIP-Code
Where,
DIP is 1.
By default, DIP is programmed as Active High.
Type Loop Open/Close Sensing
Loop Current Supplied 10mA (Max.)
Code Meaning
0 Disable DIP
1 Enable DIP
Code Meaning
0 Program DIP as Active Low
1 Program DIP as Active High
Sensor
Matrix
Eternity V8 System Manual 251
Step 3
Use the following command to program the Event Sense Time for a DIP:
4904-1-DIP-Event Sense Timer
Where,
Event Sense Time is from 000 to 255 seconds.
This time signifies the time for which the instigation signal should remain present on DIP for it to be identified as a
genuine signal and for the DIP to respond.
DIP is 1.
By default, Event sense timer is 000 seconds.
How to default a DIP?
Use the following command to assign default values to a DIP:
4901-1-DIP
Where,
DIP is 1.
On issuing any of the above commands, following parameters are assigned default values.
DIPs are disabled.
DIPs are programmed as Active High.
Event sense timer for all DIPs is programmed as 000 seconds.
Relevant Topics:
1. Automated Control Applications 115
2. Digital Output Port (DOP) 278
3. Security Dialing and Reporting 538
4. Access Codes 77
=X=X=
Matrix
252 Eternity V8 System Manual
Digital Key Phone-Operation
Whats this?
Matrix offers Eon45/Eon42/Eon48, a digital key phone (DKP). The key of specific locations on the DKP, are also
programmable for the required functions.
Refer chapter Digital Key Phone-Soft Keys Programming for more details.
Eon45
Eon45 is a feature-rich, easy to use station with following characteristics:
2-line x 16 character LCD.
Total 45 Keys.
Total 26 programmable keys.
Dual Color LEDs to show status of ports. Green LED gives the status for called station ringing (Green LED blinks), in
speech with station or incoming call (Green LED continuous ON). Red LED indicates various status like going OFF-
Hook, internal dialing, dialing on trunk, on hold, other two stations in speech, etc.
Hands free operation.
Adjustable ringer tune and level.
Adjustable speech levels.
Photograph of Eon45
DKP being a more powerful station, it supports many additional features, which are not supported by a SLT. Few of them
are:
LCD Messages.
Status of other ports.
Feature keys.
Ringer tune selection.
Speech level controls.
Paging.
Hence, DKP features are superset of SLT features as shown in the following diagram.
How to use it?
Maximum 128 DKPs can be connected to the Eternity. The Eternity supports 4 built-in DKP ports viz. DKP1, DKP2, DKP3
and DKP4. These ports are located on the Eternity ME Card Switch and the connection for these ports are available from
the Amphenol connector of the Eternity ME Card Switch the Eternity supports three configurations of Eternity ME Card
DKP viz Eternity ME Card DKP8 and Eternity ME Card DKP16. The user can use these cards to meet his requirement of
DKP
SLT
Matrix
Eternity V8 System Manual 253
DKP's. If fewer number of DKPs are to be connected then one may use the In-built DKP ports only. Please note that if
four In-built ports are used then maximum of 124 DKPs can be connected using Eternity ME Card DKP.
Eon42
The Eternity support two type of Eon42 phones:
Eon42S (2X24 LCD Display)-Standard model with 2-line, 24 character display.
Eon42P (6X24 LCD Display)-Premium model with 6-line, 24-character display.
You can detach Eon45 and attach Eon42S or Eon42P on the same DKP Port. The Eternity will identify the attached
type of DKP itself. There is no user command to distinguish type of DKP attached to DKP port. By default, all the
DKP's are assumed to be Eon45.
Messages related to events are different for Eon45 and Eon42.
The Eternity will show relevant messages for Eon45 or Eon42, on its LCD.
Key map of Eon45 and Eon42 is shown on the next page.
In Eon45, keys from 01 to 26 are programmable whereas in Eon42, DSS keys from 01 to 25 are programmable. Each
DSS key has in built LED which is of dual colour.
DSS Key's LED status is common for both Eon45 and Eon42.
In Eon42, there is a Ringer LED on the top of Right side. The ringer LED cadence is same as loop key LED cadence
(ring cadence) when there is an incoming call on that port.
There is no 'func' key in Eon42. The job of 'func' key is done by 'Enter' key in Eon42. Hence, while in idle state when
the user presses 'Enter' (P) key, you will enter to 'Menu'.
Up and down arrow keys are used for navigating the Menu.
Left arrow key is used to go to previous Menu.
The job done by 'Hold' key (i.e. making selection) in Eon45 is also done by 'Enter'(P) key.
Following table explains functions associated with keys in Eon42.
LCD Back Light Function for Eon42:
Eon42 supports this feature for power saving. If no activity is performed on/by Eon42 within defined time, back light of the
Eon42 LCD display will get turned OFF.
Following parameters can be programmed for Display settings. These parameters can be programmed from Eon42 from
Menu (Display Settings) and from SE commands.
LCD Contrast: It is programmable from minimum contrast to maximum contrast.
LCD Back Light Intensity Level: It is programmable from minimum intensity to maximum intensity.
LCD Back Light OFF Timer: It signifies time period after which the LCD back light will get turned off if no activity is
performed by/on Eon42 within the configured time. The back light will remain continuously ON irrespective of LCD
Back Light OFF Timer, when user is in speech.
The LCD Back Light will remain ON for programmed "LCD Back Light OFF Timer".
The LCD backlight will be turned ON, in following conditions:
Incoming call comes on the Eon42.
User goes OFF-Hook.
Any key pressed from the Eon42 in any state Eon42 user goes ON-Hook.
The LCD back light will NOT be turned ON, in following conditions:
If Eon42 is being monitored (Room Monitoring is performed by another station user on the Eon42).
While updating RTC-Date and Time on Eon42.
If LCD Back light level is set to '0'.
Eon42SR:
Eon42SR is a new version of Eon42 DKP supported by Matrix. Eon42SR has only 2 line 24 characters LCD. It does not
support 6 line 24 character LCD. It does not support setting of contrast levels. The handset and hands free speech levels
The Enter Key;
To enter the Menu;
To make a selection in the Menu or to complete an action.
The Up Key;
To scroll upwards when navigating the Menu/sub-menu.
The Down Key;
To scroll downwards when navigating the Menu/sub-menu.
The Forward Key;
To increase the volume of the Ringer and Speech.
The Back Key;
To decrease the volume of the Ringer and Speech.
Matrix
254 Eternity V8 System Manual
can be adjusted from 0 to 9. The DTMF Tx level can be adjusted from 0 to 9. It has 25 programmable keys. Other
parameters are as mentioned below:
Priority feature for Eon42/Eon48:
Case-1: When more than one call is waiting at the Eon42/Eon48, the user will get ICWT, irrespective of the priority of
internal calling station.
Feature Value for Eon42 Value for Eon42SR
Keyboard Settings
Programmable Keys 25 25
Static Keys 12 12
Navigation Keys 5 - Up/Down/Left/Right/enter 5 - Up/Down/Left/Right/enter
Speech Mode
Handset Supported Supported
Hands free Supported Supported
Headset Supported - Hardware Controlled Supported - Hardware Controlled
Speech Levels
Handset MIC Levels 1-4 0-9
Handset SPK Levels 1-4 0-9
Hands free MIC levels 1-4 0-9
Hands free SPK levels 1-4 0-9
Headset MIC Levels Not supported 0-9
Headset SPK Levels Not supported 0-9
Display Settings
LCD Parameters 2/6 lines 24 Characters 2 lines 24 Characters
LCD Backlight/Brightness Levels 0-4 0-4 (0-OFF, 1-4 ON)
LCD Contrast Levels 1-4 NA
LED Settings
Programmable Key LED 25 25
Ringer LED 1 1
Name Programming
Allowed Characters A-Z . A-Z .
2nd Call Parameters
Send Ring while speech
Not Supported( Note: It is not possible
in Hardware)
Supported
Hook Flash
Supported Supported
Timer 1-9 0-9
Tx Mute/Un mute Supported
Ringer Settings
Ring Type 1-8 0-9
Ringer Level 1-9 0-9
Ringer LED Supported Supported
Ringer Selection Supported Supported
DTMF Settings
DTMF On/Off ON-100ms/ OFF - 100ms ON-100ms/ OFF - 100ms
DTMF Tx Levels 1-4 0-9
Side Tone/Key click Level 0-9 0-9
Key Click On/Off Supported - By default ON Supported - By default ON
A/Mu Law Supported Supported
Matrix
Eternity V8 System Manual 255
Case-2: When trunk call is waiting on the Eon42/Eon48, the user will get trunk call warning beep form of CCWT, if the
trunk call has higher priority than the other waiting call.
In both Case-1 and Case-2, when the Eon42/Eon48 user goes on-hook, the priority will be considered and the user
will get first the call with higher priority.
Keys Map for Eon45:
Key Map for Eon42:
Key Map for Eon42SR:
Refer Key Map for Eon42
Eon48
Matrix supports the Digital Key Phone, which is identical to 'Eon42'. It is called 'Eon48' phone.
It supports: 29 programmable keys, 12 keypad keys, 1 'menu' key, 1 'Speaker' key, navigation keys, up/down keys,
and +/- keys.
LCD messages for different call events, for the Eon48-S are same as that for Eon42-S.
LCD messages for different call events for the Eon48-P are same as that for Eon42-P.
The DKP port of Eternity ME/GE can be connected with any of the following types of Matrix Digital Key Phone:
Eon42-S
1 2 3 redial
spd 6 5 4
7 8 9 trf/fl
hold 0
Fun
01
06
11
16
21
02
07
12
17
22
03
08
13
18
23
04
09
14
19
24
05
10
15
20
25
* #
Vol 26
Fixed
Keys
Programmable
Keys (01-25)
Programmable Key
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
13
14
15
16
17
18
08
09
10
11
12
Key Key
Fixed
Keys
Programmable
Keys
Ringer LED
* 0 #
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
Programmable
Keys
19
20
21
22
23
24
25 Programmable Key
Matrix
256 Eternity V8 System Manual
Eon42-P
Eon42SR
Eon45
Eon48-S
Eon48-P
There is no user command to distinguish type of DKP attached to DKP port. While switching 'ON' the Eternity ME/GE
will automatically identify the DKP connected.
Types of 'Eon48':
The 'Eon48' is available in two variants:
Eon48-S (2X24 LCD Display), 2-line, 24-characters.
Eon48-P (6X24 LCD Display), 6-line, 24-characters.
Keys explanation:
'Menu' feature can be accessed by pressing 'P' key.
The up (^) key and down (v) key are used to navigate the 'menu' options up and down, i.e. scrolling up and down
The left key (<) and right key (>) are used to navigate menu backward and forward direction respectively.
The 'P' key also acts as selection key for required feature, after scrolling the options for 'Menu' (Same as implemented
in the Eon42).
The (+) key is used to increase the ringer volume if the phone is in ringing state, or if the phone is OFF-Hook (working
in Speaker mode), will be used to increase the volume level during speech.
The (-) key is used to decrease the ringer volume if the phone is in ringing state, or if the phone is OFF-Hook, will be
used to decrease the volume level.
The Key map for the 'Eon48' digital key phone is shown below:
Key Map for Eon48
Keys which support LED are shown with 'dot'. Rest of all DSS keys does not support built-in LEDs.
The key functions for the 'Operator' functionality can be programmed by assigning the keys to the functions as
required.
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
0
*
#
abc def
ghi jkl mno
pqrs tuv wxyz
Forward
Call Back Cancel
DND
Voice Mail
Names
Mute Conference Transfer
Hold Release Redial
DKP001
TWT004
TWT003
TWT002
TWT001
CA03
CA02
CA01
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17 18
19
20 21
22
23
24 25
28 27 26
CA04
SLT001
SLT002
SLT003
SLT004
DKP002
DKP003
DKP004
29
Matrix
Eternity V8 System Manual 257
How to program?
Step 1
Please refer the topic Software Port and Hardware ID for more details.
Step 2
Please refer Flexible Numbers to know how to assign a Flexible number to the DKP.
Step 3
Headset Connectivity
Use following command to enable Headset connectivity on a DKP port:
1213-1-DKP-Headset Connectivity
1213-2-DKP-DKP-Headset Connectivity
1213-*-Headset Connectivity
Where,
DKP is the software port from 001 to 128.
Note:
Eon-48 will sense the Headset connectivity as soon as the Headset is connected. Hence this command should not b
used for Eon-48.
By default, Headset Connectivity is disabled.
Step 4
Loop Count
The Eternity offers a feature viz. Loop Count (Call Capacity) which allows the station user to attend more than one
party at a time or hold more than one party at a time.
This feature is very helpful to the Operator who has to handle more number of calls at a time.
This feature is also helpful to executives who need to talk to more than one person keeping one or more persons on
hold to solve problems, discuss important issues, etc.
The station user can have minimum two loops and a maximum of ten loops.
Two loops significantly mean that the station user can hold one person and converse with the second. Three loops
means that the station user can hold two persons at a time and converse with the third.
Following two conditions elaborate the application of loop count:
If the user of DKP is an important person like a 'Manager', he needs only 2 loops. The executive calls a station,
talks to him, holds him and calls other person. Now he can toggle between the two stations. However, the
executive cannot hold both the persons and call third person. Such DKPs will be programmed for only 3 loops.
But, if the user of DKP is an Operator, she needs as many as 6 loops. The Operator can attend 6 calls at a time.
This is very helpful in conditions when the operator tries to transfer a call to a person who keeps moving in the
office. In such cases, if the Operator could not locate the person, she can hold the calling party and attend another
caller. On completing all the activities, the Operator can attend the held party and transfer him to the desired
station. Such DKPs will be programmed for 6 loops.
Each loop should be assigned a DSS key.
The DSS keys assigned for loops helps the Operator to locate a particular held party among many held parties.
Holding a party and Retrieving a party
The Station user can hold a party using any of the following methods:
Pressing Flash key.
Pressing Hold key.
Pressing the DSS key programmed for the station in speech.
Pressing the loop key for the current party in speech.
Using hook key.
The Station user can retrieve a particular held party (selective retrieve) using any of the following method:
The commands explained below should be referred as:
To program a single port: XXXX-1
To program a range of ports: XXXX-2
To program all the ports: XXXX-*
Headset Connectivity Meaning
0 Disabled
1 Enabled
Matrix
258 Eternity V8 System Manual
Pressing the loop key of the held party.
Using hook key (the held parties are retrieved at random).
Using hold key (the held parties are retrieved at random).
Using flash key (the held parties are retrieved at random).
The Station user can retrieve a particular held party (selective retrieve) using following method:
Pressing the loop key of the held party.
The calls remain in the respective loops till:
The call is released.
The caller disconnects.
Only the DKP users can be assigned Call loops.
LED logic for loop keys is explained in the table. This will be same for ringer key LED also for the Incoming call.
Use the following command to assign number of loops to a DKP:
1201-1-DKP-Loopcount
1201-2-DKP-DKP-Loopcount
1201-*-Loopcount
Where,
DKP=Software port number of the station is from 001-128.
Loopcount is from 02 to 10.
By default, Loopcount is 02.
Step 5
Ringer Tune
The Eternity supports programmable ringer tunes. Each DKP user can select ringer tune of his choice.
Use following commands to set the ringer tune to a DKP:
1202-1-DKP-Ringer Tune
1202-2-DKP-DKP-Ringer Tune
1202-*-Ringer Tune
Where,
DKP=Software port number of the station is from 001-128.
Ringer Tune is 0-9 (Eon45) and 1-8 (Eon42/Eon48).
Assigning 0 to ringer tune means, ringer is OFF.
By default, Ringer Tune is 1.
Ringer Volume
The Eternity supports programmable ringer volume. Each DKP user can select ringer volume of his choice. There are 9
different ringer volume levels to choose from. When you press the key to increase/decrease volume level, the
corresponding count of '>' symbol is displayed on LCD for Eon42/Eon48. For example, [ > > > >] will be displayed for
maximum of 4 steps.
Use following commands to set the ringer volume to a DKP:
1203-1-DKP-Ringer Volume
1203-2-DKP-DKP-Ringer Volume
1203-*-Ringer Volume
Where,
DKP=Software port number of the station is from 001 to 128.
Ringer Volume Level from 0-9 (Eon45) 1-9 (Eon42/Eon48).
Assigning 0 to Ringer Volume means, Volume is OFF.
By default, Ringer Volume is 5.
Indication LED Continuously ON Slow Blink Fast Blink
Green LED
When you are in
speech with station
When you have put a
on hold
When any station
is calling
Orange LED
When you are in
speech with trunk
When you have put a
trunk on hold
When any trunk
is calling
Matrix
Eternity V8 System Manual 259
Ringer Mode
The Eternity supports programmable ringer mode. This mode decides when the ring on the DKP should start. There are
four options:
Ring immediately as soon as a fresh calls lands on the DKP.
Ring only if the DKP is idle and not doing some activity.
Ring after a delay if the call is still not answered.
Ring always off (Silence mode).
Each DKP user can select ringer mode of his choice.
Use following commands to program the ringer mode to a DKP:
1204-1-DKP-Ringer Mode
1204-2-DKP-DKP-Ringer Mode
1204-*-Ringer Mode
Where,
DKP=Software port number of the station is from 001 to 128.
By default, Ringer Mode is 1.
Ringer Delay Timer
If delayed ringer mode is selected for a DKP, the Eternity supports programmable timer. This is called Ringer Delay
Timer. Each DKP user can select the timer value of his choice.
Use following commands to program the Ringer Delay Timer to a DKP:
1205-1-DKP-Ringer Delay Timer
1205-2-DKP-DKP-Ringer Timer
1205-*-Ringer Delay Timer
Where,
DKP=Software port number of the station is from 001 to 128.
Ring Delay Timer from 01 to 99 seconds.
By default, The ringer delay timer value is 10 seconds.
Ringer Auto Acknowledge
The Eternity supports programmable Ringer Auto Acknowledge Mode. This mode decides when the ring on the DKP
should stop. There are two options:
Stop only when the call is answered or manually acknowledged.
Stop after delay.
Each DKP user can select Ringer Auto Acknowledge Mode of his choice.
Use following commands to program the Ringer Auto Acknowledge Mode to a DKP:
1206-1-DKP-Ringer Auto Acknowledge Mode
1206-2-DKP-DKP-Ringer Auto Acknowledge Mode
1206-*-Ringer Auto Acknowledge Mode
Where,
DKP=Software port number of the station is from 001 to 128.
By default, Ringer Auto Acknowledge Mode is OFF.
Ringer Mode Meaning
1 Ring Immediately
2 Ring if Idle
3 Ring After Delay
4 Ring OFF
Mode Meaning
0 Ringer Auto Acknowledge OFF
1 Ringer Auto Acknowledge ON
Matrix
260 Eternity V8 System Manual
Ringer Auto Acknowledge Timer
If Ringer Auto Acknowledge mode is selected for a DKP, the Eternity supports programmable timer. This is called Ringer
Auto Acknowledge Timer. Each DKP user can select the timer value of his choice. This timer is programmable in the
range from 01 to 99 seconds.
Use following commands to program the Ringer Auto Ack Timer to a DKP:
1207-1-DKP-Ringer Auto Ack Timer
1207-2-DKP-DKP-Ringer Auto Ack Timer
1207-*-Ringer Auto Ack Timer
Where,
DKP=Software port number of the station is from 001 to 128.
Ringer Auto Ack Timer from 01 to 99 seconds.
By default, the Ringer Auto Ack Timer is 00. Assigning 00 means acknowledgment is Off.
Step 6
Handset MIC Volume
It is possible to vary the Handset MIC Volume.
Use following command to set the Handset MIC Volume to a DKP:
1208-1-DKP-Handset MIC Volume
1208-2-DKP-DKP-Handset MIC Volume
1208-*-Handset MIC Volume
Where,
DKP=Software port number of the station is from 001 to 128.
Handset MIC Volume is 0-9 (Eon45) and 1-4 (Eon42/Eon48).
By default, Handset MIC Volume is 5 (Eon45) and 2 (Eon42/Eon48). Assigning 0 means volume is OFF.
Handset Speaker Volume
Use following command to set the handset speaker volume to a DKP:
1209-1-DKP-Handset Speaker Volume
1209-2-DKP-DKP-Handset Speaker Volume
1209-*-Handset Speaker Volume
Where,
DKP=Software port number of the station is from 001 to 128.
Handset Speaker Volume is 0-9 (Eon45) and 1-4 (Eon42/Eon48).
By default, Handset Speaker Volume is 5 (Eon45) and 2 (Eon42/Eon48). Assigning 0 means Volume is OFF.
Step 7
Speaker Phone MIC Volume
It is possible to change the speaker phone MIC volume.
Use following command to set speaker phone MIC volume to a DKP:
1210-1-DKP-Speaker Phone MIC Volume
1210-2-DKP-DKP-Speaker Phone MIC Volume
1210-*-Speaker Phone MIC Volume
Where,
DKP=Software port number of the station is from 001 to 128.
Speaker Phone MIC Volume is 1-9 (Eon45) and 1-4 (Eon42/Eon48).
By default, Speaker Phone MIC Volume is 5 and 2 (Eon42/Eon48). Assigning 0 means volume is OFF.
Speaker Phone Speaker Volume
Use following command to set the speaker phone speaker volume to a DKP:
1211-1-DKP-Speaker Phone Speaker Volume
1211-2-DKP-DKP-Speaker Phone Speaker Volume
1211-*-Speaker Phone Speaker Volume
Where,
DKP=Software port number of the station is from 001 to 128.
Speaker Phone Speaker Volume is 0-9 (Eon45) and 1-4 (Eon42/Eon48).
By default, Speaker Phone Speaker Volume is 5 (Eon45) and 2 (Eon42/Eon48).
Step 8
Key Click Volume
Matrix
Eternity V8 System Manual 261
It is possible to set the Key Click Volume (Key DTMF Side tone).
Use following command to set the key click volume to a DKP:
1212-1-DKP-Key Click Volume
1212-2-DKP-DKP-Key Click Volume
1212-*-Key Click Volume
Where,
DKP=Software port number of the station is from 001 to 128.
Key Click Volume is from 1 to 9 (Eon45), 1-4 (Eon42/Eon48). 0 is for Volume OFF.
By default, Key Click Volume is 5 (Eon45).
Step 9
Auto Call Answer Mode
Use following command to program auto call answer mode of a DKP:
1214-1-DKP-Auto Call Answer Mode
1214-2-DKP-DKP-Auto Call Answer Mode
1214-*-Auto Call Answer Mode
Where,
DKP is from 001 to 128.
By default, Auto Call Answer Mode is 0.
Step 10
Auto Call Answer Timer
Use following command to program auto call answer timer for auto answer mode set for a DKP:
1215-1-DKP-Auto Call Answer Timer
1215-2-DKP-DKP-Auto Call Answer Timer
1215-*-Auto Call Answer Timer
Where,
DKP is from 001 to 128.
Auto Call Answer Timer is from 1 to 9 seconds.
By default, Auto Call Answer Timer is 1 second, when Auto Answer Timer is ON.
Step 11
LCD Backlight Level
Use following command to adjust the LCD Backlight Level of Eon42:
1216-1-DKP-LCD Backlight Level
1216-2-DKP-DKP-LCD Backlight Level
1216-*-LCD Backlight Level
Where,
DKP=Software port number of the station from 001 to 128
Brightness = 0 to 4.
0=Backlight OFF, 1=Minimum Intensity, 4=Maximum Intensity
Intensity will increase in steps from 0 towards 4. This intensity will get controlled by the Back light given on LCD.
Step 12
LCD Contrast Level
Use following command to adjust the LCD Contrast Level of the characters on the LCD of Eon42:
1217-1-DKP-LCD Contrast Level
1217-2-DKP-DKP-LCD Contrast Level
1217-*-LCD Contrast Level
Where,
DKP=Software port number of the station is from 001 to 128.
LCD Contrast Level = 1 to 4.
1 =minimum and 4 = Maximum.
Contrast will increase in steps from 1 towards 4.
Auto Call Answer Mode Meaning
0 OFF (Manual)
1 ON (Auto)
Matrix
262 Eternity V8 System Manual
Step 13
DTMF Transmit Level
Use following command to adjust DTMF Transmit Level of DKP:
1218-1-DKP-DTMF Transmit Level
1218-2-DKP-DKP-DTMF Transmit Level
1218-*-DTMF Transmit Level
Where,
DKP is from 001 to 128
DTMF Transmit Level is 0 to 9 for Eon45 and 1 to 4 for Eon42/Eon48.
Step 14
LCD Backlight OFF Timer
Use following command to program 'LCD Backlight OFF Timer' for Eon42:
1219-1-DKP-LCD Back Light OFF Timer
Where,
Back light off timer = 000-999 seconds.
000 = Back light will remain continuously ON.
999 = Back light will remain on for 999 seconds.
By default = 060 seconds.
Step 15
Ringer Selection
User can select the 'destination' to play the ring for ring event on the Eon42/Eon48 as per two options: Ring on
Speaker Phone and Ring on Headset.
Note that the speech path of the 'headset' and 'handset' are common. If the Headset is not connected and the user
has set the option to play ring on the Headset, the ring will get played on the speaker of the handset.
Use following command for setting the destination to play ring on Eon42 and Eon48:
1220-1-DKP-Ring Destination
1220-2-DKP-DKP-Ring Destination
1220-*-Ring Destination
Where,
Default = Play Ring on Speaker of Speaker Phone.
Note:
In Eon45, only speaker of speaker phone will ring during ring event, even if the DKP port it is configured to play ring
on handset/headset.
Step 16
Headset Rx Volume Level (Headset Speaker Volume level)
Use following command to set Rx level of Headset for DKP (Headset Speaker Volume level)
1222-1-DKP-Headset Rx Level
1222-2-DKP-DKP-Headset Rx Level
1222-*-Headset Rx Level
Where,
Headset Rx level is from 1 to 9 (for Eon42SR)
By default, Headset Rx Level is 5
Headset Tx Volume Level (Headset Speaker Volume level)
Use following command to set Tx level of Headset for DKP (Headset MIC Volume Level)
1223-1-DKP-Headset Tx Level
1223-2-DKP-DKP-Headset Tx Level
1223-*-Headset Tx Level
Where,
Headset Tx level is from 1 to 9 (for Eon42SR)
By default, Headset Tx Level is 5
Ring Destination Meaning
1 Play Ring on Speaker of Speaker Phone
2 Play Ring on Speaker of Headset/Handset
3 Play Ring on Speaker of Headset and Speaker Phone
Matrix
Eternity V8 System Manual 263
Step 17
DTMF Generation Control
Use following command to enable/disable DTMF generation flag to a DKP:
1241-1-DKP-DTMF Generation
1241-2-DKP-DKP-DTMF Generation
1241-*-DTMF Generation
Where,
DKP is from 001 to 128.
By default, DTMF Control is Enabled.
Step 17
DKP Personal Settings
To Change DKP personal settings, you need to navigate through the menu. Three keys are used for navigation.
'Func' key is used to go one-step back. It is analogous to 'ESC' of the computer keyboard (Eon45).
'Vol' key has two in-built keys. Left side of the key is used to decrement values (we call it 'Dec') and right side of the
key is used to increment values (we call it 'inc'). It is analogous to 'down arrow' and 'up arrow' key of the computer
keyboard.
'Hold' key is used to enter a submenu. It is analogous to enter key of computer keyboard.
You need not press 'Enter' key when 4 digit password is entered to access the phone settings menu for DKP.
Navigation is protected by user password. Hence only authorized person can change the DKP personal settings.
Relevant Topic:
1. Digital Key Phone-Soft Keys Programming 264
=X=X=
DTMF Generation Meaning
0 Disable
1 Enable
Matrix
264 Eternity V8 System Manual
Digital Key Phone-Soft Keys Programming
Whats this?
It is possible to program the nature of the function that the DSS keys can perform. The Eternity supports programming of
DSS key of any DKP (Eon45/Eon42/Eon42SR/Eon48). It is possible that on pressing a key a particular station is
accessed or a particular trunk is accessed or a feature is activated, etc. Each DSS key possesses a LED, which glows
when a station/trunk is accessed or a feature is activated. However, LED does not glow for few features like while doing
Raid/Interrupt Request/Barge-In, Last Caller Recall, etc. Refer chapter Digital Key Phone-Operation for more details.
Soft Keys (Programmable keys on Eon45/Eon42/Eon42SR/Eon48)
The keys of specific location on the DKP are programmable. A location is made up of two entities viz. a DSS key and a
LED. DSS key can be programmed to perform any function. If LED is relevant for the function then the LED glows on
executing the function else it remains inactive. For example, a DSS key can be assigned for Call Pick Up feature but
since LED is not relevant for this function, LED remains inactive for this function. Likewise, a DSS key can be assigned
for Auto Redial feature and since LED is relevant for this feature, it glows on setting Auto-Redial feature.
The flexibility of assigning any function to a DSS key is useful in following situations:
Different users can program these keys to access different stations of their choice.
Desirable and frequently used features can be accessed at a single touch.
A Key can be programmed to perform any function. There are two attributes of a key:
Physical location where the key is situated.
Function the key should perform.
The function which can be programmed by the key, depends on the programming of function type or feature name.
'Headset' and 'Speaker' keys:
User can program any programmable key of Eon42 as 'Speaker' key or 'Headset' key after enabling Headset
connectivity using specific command.
Eon45 doesn't support headset feature.
Eon48 does not require command to enable Headset connectivity because it can sense the connectivity as soon as
Headset is connected.
If the user is communicating using the speaker phone, then he can shift the call on headset by pressing the 'Headset'
key.
Similarly, while communicating from headset, if the user wants to shift the call to speaker phone's speaker and MIC,
he can do so by pressing the 'Speaker' key.
The LED on the key will glow when pressed. If the key is again pressed, the call will be released and LED will be
turned OFF.
'Cancel' Key
Cancel key is a Special Key (Function Type = 24). There is no LED associated with Cancel Key.
You can assign the Cancel key for Eon45, Eon42, and Eon48 (all types of DKP supported by Eternity)
When you are in Menu mode, it shall be possible to come out of Menu and go to the previous state (if any) by pressing
Cancel Key.
If you have any held call and while in 'Menu', pressing the Cancel key, you will come out of Menu mode and get
feature tone as if you have just put a call on hold.
If you have no held call and when you are in Menu from Speaker Phone mode or headset mode, on pressing Cancel
key the DKP will go in idle mode.
If you have no held call and when you are in Menu from Hand set mode, by pressing cancel key, you will come out of
Menu mode and get dial tone or feature tone (if the call forward is activated).
While you are not in Menu state Cancel key will be redundant. You will not get error tone when you press Cancel key
in state other than menu. In such case event will be ignored.
'Answer' Function
DKP supports the Answer function by which, pressing only one key the incoming calls will get answered.
SE can assign Answer feature to any programmable key of DKP. This is a special function key option, from the Table
of Function Type 24.
DKP Key Templates and key maps
Depending upon different class of users, DKP function keys are programmed for four categories: Operator, Executive,
Hotel Attendant and Guest. To avoid one by one programming for all keys of all types of DKP using the key maps,
Matrix
Eternity V8 System Manual 265
Eternity supports specific 'Key Template' for each type of DKP (Eon 45, Eon42, Eon48). Four such templates are
supported depending upon various functions required for each category. Thus SE can just select the Template
Number and DKP type for the category of a user.
The Eternity also provides the flexibility to assign Default Customized key template (Default key map) to the DKP if
the assigned Key Template is 'Customized'.
How to program?
Using Key Map:
Various functions can be assigned to specific key on the DKP, by referring Key Map to locate the key number, using
following command:

Use following command to assign a function to a DKP key:
1252-1-DKP-Key Location-Function Type-Port
1252-2-DKP-DKP-Key Location-Function Type-Port
1252-*-Key Location-Function Type-Port
Where,
Port = DKP Software Port Number is from 001 to 128.
Key Location is as per Key Map given for the type of DKP used.
Function Type and Port are as listed in the table given in topic 'Function'.
For example, to program Answer key for DKP-001 at key no. 01 dial following command from SE mode.
1252-1-001-01-24-016
Note:
This command is not applicable if the DKP is assigned the DKP Key Template (from 1 to 4). However it will be applied if
the DKP Key Template is assigned as 'Customized'. Refer command '1221' in this chapter for assigning DKP Key
Template.
The Key Location can be selected by using following key Maps for DKPs:
Keys Map for Eon45: (Used for Key Location)
The commands explained below should be referred as:
To program a single port: XXXX-1
To program a range of ports: XXXX-2
To program all the ports: XXXX-*
1 2 3 redial
spd 6 5 4
7 8 9 trf/fl
hold 0
Fun
01
06
11
16
21
02
07
12
17
22
03
08
13
18
23
04
09
14
19
24
05
10
15
20
25
* #
Vol 26
Fixed
Keys
Programmable
Keys (01-25)
Programmable Key
Matrix
266 Eternity V8 System Manual
Key Map for Eon42: (Used for Key Location)
Key Map for Eon42SR:
Refer Key Map for Eon42
Key Map for Eon48: (Used for Key Location)
Using DKP Key Template:
Different sets of functions can be assigned to specific keys on the DKP using the SE command. These functions can be
selected by configuring the DKP-Key Templates for the specific users, using following commands:
Step 1
Use following command to program the DKP Key Template:
1261-1-DKP Key Template-Eon Terminal Type-Key Number-Function Type-Function Number
Where,
DKP Key Template is from 0 to 4. You can not program the Template '0' as the Key Template '0' is customized for the DKP
type. Refer this Customized default key map, at the end of chapter for all DKP types.
Eon Terminal Type Meaning
1 Eon45/EonSoft
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
13
14
15
16
17
18
08
09
10
11
12
Key Key
Fixed
Keys
Programmable
Keys
Ringer LED
* 0 #
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
Programmable
Keys
19
20
21
22
23
24
25 Programmable Key
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
0
*
#
abc def
ghi jkl mno
pqrs tuv wxyz
Forward
Call Back Cancel
DND
Voice Mail
Names
Mute Conference Transfer
Hold Release Redial
DKP001
TWT004
TWT003
TWT002
TWT001
CA03
CA02
CA01
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17 18
19
20 21
22
23
24 25
28 27 26
CA04
SLT001
SLT002
SLT003
SLT004
DKP002
DKP003
DKP004
29
Matrix
Eternity V8 System Manual 267
Key Number is 1 to 25 for Eon45/EonSoft, 1 to 25 for Eon42S/P and 1 to 29 for Eon48S/P.
Function Type and Function Number are as per Tables mentioned below, except Function Numbers; 55, 56 and 57 (as
per S/W version V7R4).
Notes for using the command for programming the Template:
While configuring the key template, if change is made in any DKP key template from 1 to 4, the same is applied on
DKPs which are assigned this template. For example, if DKP001 to DKP010 (Eon48) are assigned DKP key
template-1, and programming of key template-1 of Eon48 is changed the same change is applied on DKP001 to 010.
For this, the user is not required to switch off and on the Eternity.
If the SE selects Eon Terminal Type = Eon45 and enters Key number = 29, then on execution of this command, SE
will get Error tone rather than confirmation tone.
Eon45 has 26 programmable keys including the speaker key but to keep compatibility with EonSoft also, program the
number of keys only up to 25. Range and * commands are not supported for this command.
Step 2
Use following command to program the name of the DKP-Key Template:
1262-1-DKP Key Template-DKP Key Template Name
Where,
DKP Key Template is from 1 to 4 (Template 0 is Customized template).
DKP Key Template Name is of 24 characters.
By default, the DKP-Key Template Names are
Note1:
Range and * commands are not supported for this command.
Step 3
Use following command to assign DKP Key template to a DKP:
1221-1-DKP-DKP Key Template
1221-2-DKP-DKP-DKP Key Template
1221-*-DKP Key Template
Where,
DKP is from 001 to 128.
DKP Key Template is from 1 to 4 (Template '0' is Customized template)
Notes for using the command for assigning the Template:
In Enterprise mode, all DKPs (of station type Admin and Guest) are assigned Key template-1. Refer chapter System
Parameters for details of Station Type and Enterprise/Hotel Mode.
When SE has assigned any key template (other than type 'customized') to the DKP, DSS keys will automatically get
assigned functions as per the programming of the assigned DKP template. Hence the system does not allow feature
programming of the DSS key for the DKP using the command.
When SE has assigned 'Customized' key template to the DKP, DSS keys are programmable for the specific features.
This programming will be retained after power on/off, of the DKP.
However, when SE has assigned 'Customized' key template to the DKP and if DKP type is changed than the default
customized key map for the new DKP type will be applicable. For example, if the DKP is changed from Eon42/45 to
Eon48 for the DKP port, the default key map (non programmable) defined for Customized Eon48 will be applied.
Default 'DKP Key Templates' for each Eon Terminal type for using in above command syntex:
2 Eon42S/P
3 Eon48S/P
DKP Key Template Meaning
1 Operator
2 Executive
3 Hotel Attendant
4 Guest
Eon Terminal Type Meaning
Matrix
268 Eternity V8 System Manual
Eon45
Eon42
Key#
Key Temp.1
(Operator)
Key Temp.2
(Executive)
Key Temp.3 (Hotel Attendant)- Refer
separate manual for
HotelApplications
Key Temp.4 (Guest)- Refer separate
manual for Hotel Applications
01 SLT001 SLT001 Remote Voice Guided Alarm Operator
02 SLT002 SLT002 Remote- Call Forward Floor Service
03 SLT003 SLT003 Remote-DND Voice Guided Alarm
04 SLT004 SLT004 Remote - Call Budget Reservation Desk (Macro4)
05 Flash Flash Set Message Wait Retrieve Message
06 DKP001 DKP001 Floor Service Voice Mail (VMS Group)
07 DKP002 DKP002 DKP001 DND
08 DKP003 DKP003 DKP002 Voice Help
09 DKP004 DKP004 Voice Mail (VMS Group) Mute
10 Conference Conference Conference Conference
11 TWT001 TWT001 Retrieve Message Wait DKP001
12 TWT002 TWT002 Prnt Rm Sts DKP002
13 TWT003 TWT003 Prnt Alrm Rprt SLT001
14 TWT004 TWT004 Remote -Change Room Clean Status SLT002
15 Call Forward Call Forward Call Forward Call Forward
16 TWT005 TWT005 TWT001 TWT001
17 TWT006 TWT006 TWT002 TWT002
18 TWT007 TWT007 Call Block Missed Calls
19 TWT008 TWT008 Auto Redial BGM
20 Auto Call Back Auto Call Back Auto Call Back Auto Call Back
21 CA1 CA1 CA1 CA1
22 CA2 CA2 CA2 CA2
23 CA3 CA3 CA3 Last Caller Recall
24 CA4 CA4 CA4 Release
25 Auto Redial Auto Redial Transfer to VMS (mailbox) Auto-Redial
26 Speaker Speaker Speaker Speaker
Key#
Key Temp.1
(Operator)
Key Temp.2
(Executive)
Key Temp.3 (Hotel Attendant)- Refer
separate manual for Hotel
Applications
Key Temp.4 (Guest)- Refer separate
manual for Hotel Applications
01 DKP004 DKP004 Remote Voice Guided Alarm Operator
02 DKP003 DKP003 Floor Service Floor Service
03 DKP002 DKP002 Set message wait Reservation Desk (Macro4)
04 DKP001 DKP001 Remote-Call Frwd Voice Mail (VMS Group)
05 TRK004 TRK004 Remote-DND Voice Help
06 TRK003 TRK003 Remote - Call Budget SLT001
07 TRK002 TRK002 Call Block DKP002
08 TRK001 TRK001 Voice Mail (VMS Group) DKP001
09 CA04 CA04 Retrieve Message Wait TRK002
10 CA03 CA03 TRK001 TRK001
11 CA02 CA02 CA02 CA02
12 CA01 CA01 CA01 CA01
13 SLT003 SLT003 Prnt Rm Sts Voice Guided Alarm
14 SLT002 SLT002 Prnt Alrm Rprt Retrieve Message Wait
15 SLT001 SLT001 Remote- Change Room Clean Status Missed Calls
Matrix
Eternity V8 System Manual 269
Eon48
16 ACB ACB ACB DND
17 Conf Conf Conf ACB
18 Frwd Frwd Frwd Conf
19 Dial by Name Dial by Name Dial by Name Frwd
20 Auto Redial Auto Redial Redial Dial by Name
21 Redial Redial Release Redial
22 Release Release Transfer to VMS (mailbox) Release
23 Transfer Transfer Transfer Transfer
24 Hold Hold Hold Hold
25 Speaker Speaker Speaker Speaker
Key#
Key Temp.1
(Operator)
Key Temp.2
(Executive)
Key Temp.3 (Hotel Attendant)-
Refer separate manual for Hotel
Applications
Key Temp.4 (Guest)- Refer
separate manual for Hotel
Applications
01 DKP004 DKP004 Remote Voice Guided Alarm Operator
02 DKP003 DKP003 Floor Service Floor Service
03 DKP002 DKP002 Remote Call Frwd Reservation Desk (Macro4)
04 DKP001 DKP001 Remote DND Voice Mail (VMS Group)
05 TWT004 TWT004 Remote Call Budget Missed Calls
06 TWT003 TWT003 Call Block Voice Help
07 TWT002 TWT002 Set message wait TWT002
08 TWT001 TWT001 TWT001 TWT001
09 SLT004 SLT004 Transfer to VMS (mailbox) Voice Guided Alarm
10 SLT003 SLT003 Prnt Rm Sts BGM
11 SLT002 SLT002 Prnt Alrm Rprt SLT002
12 SLT001 SLT001
Remote - Change Room Clean
Status
SLT001
13 CA04 CA04 Voice Mail (VMS Group) DKP002
14 CA03 CA03 CA03 DKP001
15 CA02 CA02 CA02 CA02
16 CA01 CA01 CA01 CA01
17 Retrieve Message Retrieve Message Retrieve Message Retrieve Message
18 ACB ACB ACB ACB
19 Cancel Cancel Cancel Cancel
20 Frwd Frwd Frwd Frwd
21 DND DND DND DND
22 Dial by Name Dial by Name Dial by Name Dial by Name
23 Mute Mute Mute Mute
24 Conf Conf Conf Conf
25 Xfer Xfer Xfer Xfer
26 Redial Redial Redial Redial
27 Release Release Release Release
28 Hold Hold Hold Hold
29 Spk Spk Spk Spk
Key#
Key Temp.1
(Operator)
Key Temp.2
(Executive)
Key Temp.3 (Hotel Attendant)- Refer
separate manual for Hotel
Applications
Key Temp.4 (Guest)- Refer separate
manual for Hotel Applications
Matrix
270 Eternity V8 System Manual
'Function Type' and 'Port/Function Number' for using in above command syntex:
A function can be assigned to these Keys, which they should perform. Different type of functions, can be assigned to a
key as per user's requirement. Refer chapter Key Board Macro for more details about Function Type, 'Macros'.
Each function that can be assigned to a key is given unique number. Following table lists all the function types supported
by Eternity:
Function Type:
Function Type 18: Features
Function Type Meaning Port/Function Number
00 Null --
01 SLT Ports 001 to 512
02 DKP Ports 001 to 128
03 TWT Trunks 001 to 128
04 BRI Trunks 001 to 032
05 DS1 Trunks 001 to 008
06 E&M Trunks 001 to 128
07 AIP 001
08 AOP 001
09 DIP 001
10 DOP 001
11 Department Groups 001 to 016
12 Quick Dial 001 to 025, 100 to 999
13 Loop 001 to 010
14 Macros 001 to 025
15 Trunk Access Codes 001 to 006
16 OG Trunk Bundle Groups 001 to 025
17 Closed User Group NA
18 Features (Access Code) 01 to 72
19 DISA NA
20 Route Group NA
21 VMS Port 1
22 SA Commands 001 to 130
23 System Port NA
24 DKP Special keys 001 to 015
25 Mobile Trunks 01 to 32
26 SIP Trunks 01 to 32
27 Flexible Number Ports 01 to 64
28 ISDN Terminals 01 to 64
29 Magneto Trunks 001 to 128
Feature Name
Access Code
Feature Number
DSS LED
Enter SE Mode 01
Enter SA Mode 02 Yes
Call Pick Up-General 03
Call Pick Up-Selective 04
Auto Call Back 05 Yes
Cancel Auto Call Back 06
Redial 07
Auto Redial 08 Yes
Matrix
Eternity V8 System Manual 271
Cancel Auto Redial 09
Personal Directory Programming 10
Directory Dialing (Global + Personal) 11
Operator Dialing 12
Call Forward/Call Follow Me 13 Yes
Dynamic Lock 14 Yes
Hot Line 15 Yes
Alarm 16 Yes
Do Not Disturb 17 Yes
Interrupt Request 18
Barge-In 19
Raid 20
Trunk Reservation 21
Call Toggle 22
Conference- 3 Party 23
Trunk - to - Trunk Transfer 24
Conference-Multi Party 25 Yes
Call Park 26
Retrieve Parked Call 27
Room Monitor 28
Last Caller Recall 29
Voice Help 30
Walk-In Class Of Service 31
Change User Password 32
Page Zone 33
DISA Log In Code 34
Trunk Release Code (Trunk-to-Trunk Speech) 35
Cancel All Feature 36
Selective Port Access Code 37
Flashing on Trunk 38
Change User Status 39
Account Code by Number 40
Account Code by Name 41
Back Ground Music 42 Yes
Meet Me Paging 43
Hot Desk 44
DND Override 45
Missed Calls 46 Yes
VMS Live Call Screening ON/OFF Request 47 Yes
VMS Conversation Recording 48 Yes
Forced Release 49
Hold 50
Live Call Supervision 51
Forced Answer 52
Maid In 53
Minibar Details 55
Mute 56
Feature Name
Access Code
Feature Number
DSS LED
Matrix
272 Eternity V8 System Manual
Function Type 22: SA Commands
Change Time Zone 57 Yes
Self Ring Test 58
Set Chain Party 59
SA Command 60 Yes
Second Trunk Access Code 61
Floor Service 62
Keypad Lock DKP 63 Yes
CLIR 64
Call Cost Display 65
Reminder 66
Voice Guided Alarm 67
Voice Guided Reminder 68
Blind Transfer to Mail Box (VMS) 69
Message Wait Set 70
Message Wait Retrieval 71
Use Definable Fields 72
Feature Name
SA Command
Feature Number
DSS LED
Check In 001
Check Out 002
Guest Name 003
Assign Guest Group 004
Guest In/Guest Out 005
Guest Title 006
Change Check-In Profile of Room 007
Change Room Occupancy Status 008
Change Room Clean Status 009
Room Shift 010
Reprint Checkout Report 011
Print Room Status Report 012
Print Alarm Status Report 013
Delete Checkout Calls 014
Set DND-Remote 015
Set Dynamic Lock Setting-Remote 016
Set Alarm-Remote 017
Assign Call Budget to a Station 018
Assign/De-assign Mailbox to a Station - Remote 019
Set Call Forward-Remote 020
Set Call Forward-Remote for all Stations 021
Assign Station User Greeting Message 022
Display and Acknowledge System Activity 023 Yes
Display and Acknowledge System Fault 024 Yes
Station Budget Display 025
Change User Password of a Station 026
Lock/Unlock the Station's Keypad (DKP Only) 027
Feature Name
Access Code
Feature Number
DSS LED
Matrix
Eternity V8 System Manual 273
Station Absent/Present 028
Change SA Password 029
Change SA Mode Timer 030
Display Registered Network ID 031
Set Master Time Zone 032
Switch OFF DOP Manually 033
Switch ON DOP Manually 034
Terminate Security Dialing 035
Clear the System Activity Log 036
Start/Abort commands for SAL on offline mode 037
Start/Abort commands for SAL on online mode 038
Change Time Zone of a Port 039
Cancel Dial in Conference 040
Start/Abort commands for SFL on offline mode 041
Start/Abort commands for SFL on online mode 042
Display Port Parameters 043
Start/Abort OG Online Report 044
Set Filter to Print Calls Made from Station/s 045
Set Filter to Print Calls Made from TWT 046
Set Filter to Print Calls Made from BRI 047
Set Filter to Print Calls Made from T1E1PRI 048
Set Filter to Print Calls Made from E&M 049
Set Filter to Print All OG Calls from Mobile 050
Set Filter to Print Calls Made from SIP 051
Set Filter to Print Calls of Department Group 052
Set Filter to Print Calls Made on Date/s 053
Set Filter to Print Calls Made from at Time/s 054
Set Filter to Print Calls Made to Numbers Matching the Number in the List Assigned 055
Set Filter to Print Calls of Duration more than this time 056
Set Filter to Print Calls of Duration more than the Units Programmed 057
Set Filter to Print Calls Made to Account Code 058
Assign Default OG Filters 059
Start/Abort Offline Report 060
Enable/Disable Daily/Weekly/Monthly Report 061
Program Time for Daily Report 062
Program Day and Time for Weekly Report 063
Program Date and Time for Monthly Report 064
Delete Calls Made by Station/s 065
Delete Call Made on/from Date 066
To Clear SMDR OG Buffer 067
Start/Abort Internal Calls Report 068
Set Filter to Print Internal Calls Report 069
Set Filter to Print Internal Calls with Duration Greater than that Given Here 070
Start/Abort Offline Internal Call Report 071
Enable/Disable Daily/Weekly/Monthly Report 072
Program Time for Daily Report 073
Program Day and Time for Weekly Report 074
Feature Name
SA Command
Feature Number
DSS LED
Matrix
274 Eternity V8 System Manual
Program Date and Time for Monthly Report 075
To Clear SMDR Internal Buffer 076
Start/Abort Online-IC Report 077
Set Filter to Print All Normal Calls 078
Set Filter to Print all DID Calls 079
Set Filter to Print all Unanswered Calls 080
Set Filter to Print all DID Unanswered Calls 081
Set Filter to Print all DISA Calls 082
Set Filter to Print all Calls with Speech Duration More than Timer 083
Set Filter to Print all Calls Unanswered for Duration More than Timer 084
Set Filter to Print all Calls Kept on Hold for Duration More than Timer 085
Set Filter to Print All IC Calls Received by the Station 086
Set Filter to Print all IC Calls received on TWT 087
Set Filter to Print all IC Calls received on BRI 088
Set Filter to Print all IC Calls received on T1E1PRI 089
Set Filter to Print all IC Calls received on E&M 090
Set Filter to Print all IC Calls From Mobile 091
Set Filter to Print calls from SIP 092
Set Filter to Print all IC Calls received on/from Date 093
Set Filter to Print all IC Calls received at/from to Time 094
Set Filter to Print all IC Calls received from numbers matching the external number list 095
Set Filter to Print all IC Calls From Mobile 091
Assign default IC Filters 096
Abort/Start the IC Offline Report 097
Enable/Disable Daily/Weekly/Monthly Reports 098
Program Time for Daily Reports 099
Program Day and Time for Weekly Reports 100
Program Date and Time for Monthly Reports 101
Clear SMDR-IC Buffer 102
Start/Abort Printing of Online T1E1PRI Performance report 103
Start/Abort Printing of Offline T1E1PRI Performance report 104
To Check Signal Strength of Mobile Port 105
To enable/disable Call Cost Display 106
Start/Abort Hotel/Motel Activity log in Offline Mode 107
Start/Abort Hotel/Motel Activity log in Offline Mode 108
Display and Acknowledge Hotel/Motel Activity 109
Change Guest VIP Status of Station 110
Change Phone Ringing Pattern of Room 111
Print Reminder Status Report 112
Remote Reminder 113
Remote Voice Guided alarm 114 Yes
Remote Voice Guided Reminder 115
Set filter to print call received on Magneto 116
Set filter to print call made from Magneto 117
Enable/Disable Scheduled Alarm Report 118
Program Time for Scheduled Alarm Report 119
Enable/Disable Scheduled Reminder Report 120
Feature Name
SA Command
Feature Number
DSS LED
Matrix
Eternity V8 System Manual 275
Function Type 24: Special Keys
Default Key Functions for DKP: ( Default Customized Key Template )
At Power ON, the DKP keys will be set for following functions as shown below: (for all DKP Ports)
Default key functions - Eon45: ( Default Customized Key Template )
Program Time for Scheduled Reminder Report 121
Request Database Synchronization to PMS 122
Enable/Disable Scheduled Room Status Report 123
Program Time for Schedule Room Status Report 124
Enable/Disable Scheduled Change of Room Clean Status 125
Program Time for Schedule Change of Room Clean Status 126
Reserved For Future 127
Enable/Disable Internal Call Block For Guest Phones 128
Software Version Revision Display of Master Card 129 Y
User Definable fields 130
Special Key Name Number DSS LED
Flash 001 No
Pause 002 No
Digit 'A '003 No
Digit 'B '004 No
Digit 'C '005 No
Digit 'D '006 No
Release 007 No
Ring Acknowledge 008 No
Enter 009 No
Dial By Name 010 No
Call Transfer 011 No
Speaker 012 Yes
Headset 013 Yes
Cancel 014 No
Answer 015 No
SLT001 SLT002 SLT003 SLT004 Flash
DKP001 DKP002 DKP003 DKP004 Conference
TWT001 TWT002 TWT003 TWT004 Call Forward
TWT005 TWT006 TWT007 TWT008 Auto Call Back
Loop01 Loop02 Loop03 Loop04 Auto Redial
1 2 3 Redial
4 5 6 Memory Dial
7 8 9 Transfer
* 0 # Hold
Function Volume Speaker
Feature Name
SA Command
Feature Number
DSS LED
Matrix
276 Eternity V8 System Manual
Default key functions - Eon42: (Default Customized Key Template)
Default key functions - Eon48: (Default Customized Key Template)
Note: Symbol '.' (dot) indicates the Key with LED
Command to copy entire key map from one DKP to another DKP:
Use the following command to copy entire key map of one DKP to another DKP:
1255-Source DKP-Destination DKP
Where,
Source DKP is 001 to 128.
Destination DKP is from 001 to 128.
Please note that on issuing copy commands, the key map of DSS64 (if attached) also gets copied.
Important Point:
Following table shows the relationship between the colour of the LED and various events. Three different colors are
used to indicate various events (1) Green LED indicates the state of the station you are involved with (2) Red LED
indicates the state of the other station/trunk (3) Orange LED indicates the state of the trunk you are involved with.
LED Color LED status-Continuously ON LED status-Slow Blink LED status-Fast Blink
Green LED The key assigned for the station
you are in speech.
The key assigned for the
station you have kept on hold.
The key assigned for the station
you are calling or you are being
called.
Matrix
Eternity V8 System Manual 277
Relevant Topics:
1. Digital Key Phone-Operation 252
2. Access Codes 77
3. Key Board Macro 422
4. System Parameters 642
=X=X=
Red LED The key assigned for the station
that is now busy with another
station/trunk.
The key assigned for the
station which has held a
station/trunk.
The key assigned for the station/
trunk that is called or being called
by another station/trunk.
Orange LED You are talking on a trunk. You have held a trunk. You have an incoming call on the
trunk.
LED Color LED status-Continuously ON LED status-Slow Blink LED status-Fast Blink
Matrix
278 Eternity V8 System Manual
Digital Output Port (DOP)
Whats this?
Eternity provides one, solid state Digital Output Port for various control applications.
A DC contactor (60VDC Max.) will be connected to the DOP. All external devices are interfaced to the DOP via this
DC contactor. Please ensure the external devices adhere to the specifications of the DC contactor.
Eternity remembers the state of DOP during power failure. Suppose, a water pump is being controlled using this
feature and if while it is running, power failure occurs then the operator need not turn the water pump again on power
restoration. Eternity will retain the last state and will switch ON the water pump on power restoration.
The DOP can be operated from DISA also.
How it works?
The DOP can be programmed as active high or active low depending upon the application.
Active high state signifies that the relay port is normally open (NO).
Active low state signifies that the relay port is normally close (NC).
By default, the DOP is programmed as active high or Normally Open.
Technical Specifications of the DOP.
How to connect the external devices to the DOP?
How to program?
Step 1
Use the following command to program the DOPs as Normally Open/Normally Close:
5002-1-DOP-Code
Where,
DOP is 1.
By default, DOP is programmed as Normally Open.
Step 2
How to assign an access code to DOP?
Use the following command to program the access code for a DOP.
3104-1-DOP-Access Code-#*
Where,
DOP is 1.
Terminate the access code with #* if access code is of less than 4 digits.
By default, Access Code for DOP is 3961.
Relay Type Solid State (CMOS) Relay
Contact Arrangement 1 Normally Open, 1-Form-A
Contact Rating(Resistive Load) 60VDC Max. @0.15 Amp.
Operation Time 5ms
Code Meaning
0 DOP as Normally Open
1 DOP as Normally Close
R Y B N
R Y B N
AC Mains
Load
Contactor 1-Phase/
3-Phase
depending on load
Battery
24VDC
Matrix
Eternity V8 System Manual 279
Use following command to clear the access code of a DOP:
3104-1-DOP-#*
Where,
DOP is 1.
Use following command to assign default the access code of a DOPs:
3154-1-DOP
Where,
DOP is 1.
By default, Access code is 3961.
Step 3
Use following command to default the DOP Parameters:
5001-1-DOP
Where,
DOP is 1.
Relevant Topics:
1. Automated Control Applications 115
2. Digital Input Port (DIP) 250
3. Central Ringer 199
4. Access Codes 77
=X=X=
Matrix
280 Eternity V8 System Manual
Direct Dialing-In (DDI)
Whats this?
DDI is an ISDN Service which allows the caller to call the user on an ISDN compatible PBX or private network directly
without operator intervention.
Using the DDI feature of ISDN, the calls can be made to land directly on the desired stations.
The T1E1PRI and BRI trunks must be assigned a IC ReferenceNumber and OG Reference Number which in turn
definesthe translation logic to handle an IC/OG. For more details refer DDI Routing Table, IC Reference Table and OG
Reference Table corresponding topics.
Each ISDN Trunk is given an Installation Number by the SP. This is the combination of Main Number (MSN No.) and
the DDI Number. The Number is of max.16 digits. This is also known as ISDN Installation Number.
The MSN number is given by the SP whereas the Directory Numbers can be selected by the User. However the
number of digits to be used for the Directory Number should be informed to the SP.
Each station is assigned a unique directory number.
Please refer the topics DDI Routing Table, DS1 Trunks and ISDN-BRI for details on programming.
How it works?
Incoming Call
When the call lands on the ISDN trunk of the PBX, the PBX checks if CLI based routing is enabled on the trunk. If Yes,
the call is routed accordingly. If CLI based routing is not enabled, then the PBX checks the IC Reference Number
assigned to the Trunk.
If the IC Reference Number assigned to the trunk is 00, then the system further follows the logic of Incoming Call
management. For more details please refer the topic Incoming Call Management.
If any other number is assigned as IC Reference Number to the trunk, the PBX searches the different IC reference
tables for a match. When a match is found, the system matches channel number of the trunk with the channels of the
table. If it does not match then the next table with the same IC reference number is searched.
When the channel number matches, the system uses the DDI Flexible Reference No. of the table to identify the DDI
Flexible Number table. This table helps the system to route the call to the target station. The system first compares
the received DDI number (called party number) with the DDI numbers programmed in the DDI Flexible Number table.
If a match (DDI Number) is found, the system goes ahead with further interpreting the translation logic in the IC
reference table else the system searches the next matching DDI Flexible Number table and repeats the above
procedure.
If the number does not match with any number in the DDI Flexible Number tables assigned to the trunk, it routes the
call to the TLG assigned to the trunk.
Once a perfect match is found, the system checks for the DDI routing flag on first station in the IC reference table. If it
is enabled, the system routes the call to the first station in the DDI Flexible Number Table else identifies the station
according to the DDI logic.
Once the station is identified the system checks the DDI IC routing flag of the station (Please refer the topic Station
Advanced Feature Template for more details) on which the call is to be routed. If the flag is enabled the call lands on
the station else the call is routed to the TLG assigned to the Trunk.
When the call lands on the DDI station, the caller gets the Ring Back Tone. The station rings for time=DDI Timer, If the
call is not answered the system checks for the Route when No reply flag in the IC reference Table. If it is enabled the
call is routed to the TLG programmed in the IC Reference Table (Trunk Template) else the call is disconnected.
When DDI station being called is busy, the caller gets the busy tone. The system checks for the Route when busy flag
in the IC Reference Table. If it is enabled the call is routed to the TLG programmed else the call is disconnected.
When the call is answered the system checks for DDI OG flag. If the flag is disabled the system does not send the
answering party number to the network. If the flag is enabled the system prepares the OG number (Answering party
number) and sends it to the ISDN Network.
Outgoing Call (Reverse DDI)
The station user dials the trunk access Code.
A Channel is assigned to the user (Based on availability and LCR).
Depending on the Channel Number and the port grabbed, the OG reference number assigned to the port is identified.
After the OG reference number is identified, the ISDN installation no. is identified from the OG reference table.
The DDI Flexible reference number is also identified from the OG reference table and this helps in identifying the
flexible number of the calling station. The equivalent DDI number is found out from the flexible number. The DDI
number replaces the last digits (Number of DDI digits parameter in the DDI Flexible Number table) of the ISDN
installation number. This forms the answering/calling party number. This is sent to the ISDN network.
When an OG is made by a DDI station, the MSN Number + DDI number of the station is sent in the calling party field.
When an outgoing call is made by a Non-DDI station, the MSN Number + the first DDI number of the ISDN =Trunk is
sent in the calling party field.
Matrix
Eternity V8 System Manual 281
Relevant Topics:
1. DDI Routing Table 238
2. ISDN-BRI 398
3. Trunk Feature Template 680
4. DS1 Trunks 307
5. OG Reference Table 470
6. IC Reference Table 386
=X=X=
Matrix
282 Eternity V8 System Manual
Direct Inward Dialing (DID)
Whats this?
The system can perform the task of an operator by greeting the external caller and transferring the call to the desired
station. This facility is called Auto Attendant or Direct Inward Dialing (DID).
By using this facility, frequent callers can reach desired stations by dialing the station numbers from their phone. There
are following advantages:
Reduced traffic burden on the operator.
Calls are transferred faster and hence save the callers time.
Useful even during non-working hours and holidays.
Professional image of the Company.
Eternity also supports 'Delayed DID' feature. Using this feature, it is possible to get the incoming call landed on the
auto attendant if the user could not answer the call within certain time. This time is programmable as 'DID Delayed
Time'.
Thus user has following options to select in the Trunk Feature Template, for using DID feature:
OFF: User can select this option if DID feature is to be disabled for the Time Zone
ON: User can select this option to enable DID after expiry of 'DID Answer Wait Timer'. For this, user should
program suitable timer for the Time Zone.
Delayed DID: User can select this option for DID feature to work after expiry of 'DID Delayed Timer' for specific
Time Zone. For this, user should program suitable timer. Note that when Delayed DID is enabled, DID Answer
Wait Timer will not be applicable. Refer the flowchart for more details.
How it works?
Flow charts on the next pages depict the logic the system follows for DID call. First flow chart gives an over all view of it
whereas second flow chart gives the detailed logical structure.
DID Feature Flow Chart:
DID Detailed Flow Chart:
Start
Caller makes a call
System detects the incoming ring
and answers the call
System plays appropriate voice
greeting to the caller and prompts
him to dial station number
Caller dials the desired
numbers in tone (DTMF)
The system transfers the call
End
Matrix
Eternity V8 System Manual 283
Start
Caller makes a call
Is DID activated
on the trunk?
System answers the call by
going off-hook
Is voice message
greeting programmed for
this trunk and current time
zone ?
System routes the call on the
programmed destination station
End
No
Yes
System plays the greeting message System plays the music
No
Yes
System gives beeps to the caller prompting him to
dial the desired station/Dial message and beeps
A
Has the
caller dialed any
digit/digits ?
Has the
DID beeps timer
matured
Play DID no dial
message or route to
programmed destination
End
Is digit /
digits dialed valid
station
number ?
Is the
station free?
System transfers the call to the dialed
station. The caller gets ring back tone
Play the DID error message
or give error tone
A
Play DID busy message
or give busy tone
A
Is the call
answered within
DID ring timer ?
Play the DID no reply message
or give routing tone
A
System connects caller to the
dialed station
End
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Matrix
284 Eternity V8 System Manual
Recording of Voice Messages Flow Chart:
Delayed DID Flow Chart:
Start
Activate DID on required trunks
as per the time table
Program and record messages
for the time zones
Record other DID voice messages
for error, busy and no reply cases
Set privacy for station for DID calls,
if required.
End
Start
Incoming call on Trunk Line
DID option
Ring Stations of TLG for
Delayed DID Timer
Speech with Answering Station
Delayed DID
Timer expired?
Call Answered
by any Station?
Delayed DID
DID OFF
DID ON
Answer call after DID
Answer Wait Timer
Apply Logic and Timers
set for DID.
End
End
Route call to TLG as
programmed
End
Yes
No
No
Yes
Matrix
Eternity V8 System Manual 285
How to program DID on Trunks?
Step 1
Please refer Trunk Feature Template for more details.
Step 2
Use following commands to set the various timers:
Significance of Timers
DID Inactivity Timer is the time after which the Eternity releases the trunk if no digit has been dialed during thistime.
DID Answer Timer is the time after which the Eternity answers a DID call.
DID Music Timer is the time for which the Eternity plays music after answering the DID call.
DID Beeps Timer is the time for which the Eternity gives beeps to the caller prompting him to dial the desired station
number.
DID Ring timer is the time for which the Eternity rings the non-responding station.
DID Busy tone Timer is the time for which the Eternity hunts the busy station.
DID Error tone Timer is the time for which the Eternity gives error tone to the caller if he has dialed an invalid code.
Step 3
For programming and recording voice messages, please refer topic Voice Message Applications.
Step 4
For setting privacy from DID call for each user, please refer topic Privacy.
Relevant Topics:
1. Trunk Feature Template 680
2. Voice Message Applications 708
3. Privacy 500
4. Class of Service (COS) 200
=X=X=
Timer Name Command Default Range
DID Inactivity Timer 2411-Seconds 060
000 to 255
DID Answer Wait Timer 2412-Seconds 005
DID Music Timer 2413-Seconds 005
DID Beeps Timer 2414-Seconds 010
DID Ring Timer 2415-Seconds 030
001 to 255 DID Busy Tone Timer 2416-Seconds 015
DID Error Tone Timer 2417-Seconds 005
Matrix
286 Eternity V8 System Manual
Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
Whats this?
Direct Inward System Access (DISA) permits a user to use the systems resources from a remote location. The user can:
Call any of the stations (Generally known as DID).
Make external calls (Generally known as DOSA).
Activate/deactivate features of his station.
Use PAS and such other facilities of the system.
Program or Administer the system.
DISA is a programmable facility for each trunk. In order to use DISA, one or more trunks should be programmed for
DISA. Further, the station or DKP user has to have Class of Service rights to use DISA.
How to use it?
Dial a DISA enabled trunk.
PBX answers the call.
Dial DISA login code i.e. 1079-Station Number-User Password (Note1).
You get DISA log-in beeps.
Go off-hook by dialing OFF-Hook code.
Dial a station or grab a trunk line and dial an external number.
To continue the speech, dial any digit.
To terminate the speech, dial ON-Hook command.
To terminate DISA mode, dial ON-Hook command again.
Note:
User should not use default password here. Change the password from the station, then use here.
How it works?
Following flow chart elaborate the steps involved in using DISA:
Eternity
T1
T2
T3
T4
S1
S2
S3
PSTN
Trunks
Stations
Matrix
Eternity V8 System Manual 287
Start
System receives a call on a trunk
Is DISA or
DID activated for the
trunk ?
System answers the call
Route the call on the hunt
destinations
End
Is voice
message programmed for
the trunk and current time
zone ?
System plays the voice message greeting
Once the greeting is over system gives
beeps prompting the caller to dial
System gives music to the caller
The caller dials
DISA access code
Is DISA
activated on the
trunk ?
System gives beep to the caller prompting him
to login by dialing his station number
The caller dials his station number
System checks for DID and
route call accordingly
End
B
A
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
Matrix
288 Eternity V8 System Manual
B
Is the station
number valid?
System gives DID error message
or error tone to the caller
A
System gives beeps to caller
prompting him to his password.
No
Yes
The caller dials his password
Is the
password
valid?
System gives DID error message
or error tone to the caller
A
No
Yes
System gives beeps/login message tot he
user indicating successfully DISA login
E
The caller is assumed in idle condition while he
gets the beeps. This is called DISA idle state.
Caller remains in DISA idle
state for time=DISA idle timer
What has
the caller dialed
during DISA idle
timer?
System gives system
dial tone the the caller
C
F
System reloads
DISA idle timer
Wrong
digit dialed
Off-Hook
Code
System release the turnk
Caller gets error tone of PSTN
End
On-Hook code
dialed/No digit
dialed
Matrix
Eternity V8 System Manual 289
While using DISA facility, it is required to dial flash. Since the current loops are separate for different exchange lines,
it is not feasible to sense following codes:
OFF-Hook.
ON-Hook (Making-breaking of loop-current).
Flash (momentarily breaking of loop-current).
What is the
activity done by
the caller
Caller does not dial any digit
for time = inactivity timer
Caller goes to DISA idle state
E
Caller dials a
feature code
System responds
accordingly
End
Caller grabs a
trunk line
Caller dials a
telephone number
System loads inactivity timer
on completion of dialing
Caller dials a station
Is the
called party
free
Called party/answer the call
Caller and called party are in speech
Caller gets warning beeps for 15 seconds
Caller goes on-hook
by dialing #0
Caller goes off-hook
by dialing #1
Caller gets system
dial tone
No
Yes
Does the
caller dial a digit
within 15
seconds
Both caller and called person remain
in speech warning beeps stops
System release the grabbed
trunk line/called station
Caller goes in DISA idle state
E
F
No
Yes
C
Matrix
290 Eternity V8 System Manual
The Eternity allows dialing of these codes by using combination of DTMF digits as under:
Following flow chart explains the dialing of these special digits.
Calling a Station
Calling a station from DISA is same as a call made from local station. Only differences are in the off hook and on hook
steps. As the caller is not physically connected with the system, he has to use appropriate code for going OFF-Hook and
ON-Hook.
Once speech is established between the caller and any other external person, it is likely that the caller will not dial a digit
as long as he is talking to the called person. This delay in the dialing might be taken as an event of no activity state by the
system and it might terminate the DISA session forcing the caller to make a fresh call.
To overcome this problem, Eternity gives warning tone after time = DISA Inactivity timer. The Eternity waits for 15
seconds (fixed) after the warning tone for the caller to dial a digit. If the caller does not dial any digit even after this,
Eternity disconnects the call and the caller gets slow beeps of the DISA idle state.
Special Digit Code
ON-Hook #0
OFF-Hook #1
Flash #2
Pause #3
A #4
B #5
C #6
D #7
+ #8
Not Used #9
# ##
End of String #*
Start
Wait for DTMF digit
Is digit #
dialed ?
Interprete the dialed
code as per the logic
End Is 0/1/2/No
digit dialed within
2 seconds ?
No
Yes
Interprete as
off-hook
Interprete as
on-hook
Interprete as
Flash
Interprete #
as per logic
End End End End
1 dialed 0 dialed 2 dialed No digit dialed
Matrix
Eternity V8 System Manual 291
The caller can reach any station user just by dialing the respective station number. As such he cannot dial his own station
number. He can reach and request a third person to transfer him on his own station.
Making an external call using DISA
As shown in the diagram the DISA caller can make an external outgoing call by grabbing a trunk and then dialing the
required external number.
Following points are relevant:
The remote user is allowed all the features, trunk access and toll control programmed for his local station.
The outgoing trunks are subjected to the same treatment as if they were made from local station.
Call Budget, Call Duration Control and SMDR features work in the same way.
Start
Wait for DTMF digit
Any digit
dialed within 20
seconds ?
DISA session terminated.
The trunk released
End
The caller has dialed the off-hook
code and dialed an extension. DKP
or external number
No
Yes
Any digit
dialed within 90
seconds ?
Reload the
Inactivity timer
The caller gets
warning tone
Yes
No
Any digit
dialed within 15
seconds ?
The call is
disconnected
Yes
No
Eternity
T1
T2
T3
T4
S1
S2
S3
PSTN
Stations
Matrix
292 Eternity V8 System Manual
When such calls are stored in the SMDR buffer, they are marked specifically and printed with D character in the
remarks column.
Using features through DISA:
Remote caller can use the features available on his station. He can activate or cancel any feature from DISA, as he
would have done from his local station. These include:
Call Pickup
Call Forward/Call Follow Me
Setting and canceling Alarms
Personal Lock settings
Conference
PAS
Abbreviated Dialing
Others
Some of the features involve ring on station from the system. In such cases, the ring is given on the local station
instead of the remote end. Obviously the Eternity does not know from where the caller is using DISA. And hence
cannot reach him at the remote location.
Programming through DISA
Eternity can be programmed through DISA mode since after DISA login, the remote end behaves as normal local station.
Programming is done the same way as is done from a Local Station.
Terminating a DISA session
If the caller dials the on-hook code from the DISA idle state, the DISA session is terminated and the trunk is released.
During DISA state, the Eternity monitors dialing of the caller. In case there is no dialing of a digit for 90 seconds, the
system assumes that the caller has hung-up. Accordingly, it terminates the DISA session and releases the trunk.
Step 1
Please refer Trunk Feature Template for more details.
Step 2
Use following commands to program DISA timers:
Step 3
To program and record DISA voice messages; please refer the topic Voice Message Applications.
Step 4
Please refer the topic Class of Service (COS) how to allow DISA to a desired station.
By default, DISA is OFF on all the trunks in all the time zones.
Important Points:
DISA is a facility used from a remote location and the user is not directly connected with the system. Theconnection is
through the PSTN where only voice is transmitted and received between the caller and the system. Due to this,
activities like off hook (active), ON-Hook (idle) and dialing of flash are not possible and hence codes like #1, #2, etc.
are used.
DISA inactivity timer is not applicable for T1E1PRI line, BRI, SIP and Mobile.
Relevant Topics:
1. Direct Inward Dialing (DID) 282
2. Voice Message Applications 708
3. Class of Service (COS) 200
4. Remote Programming 530
5. Trunk Feature Template 680
=X=X=
Timer Name Command Valid Range Default
DISA Idle State Timer 2420-Seconds 000-255 020
DISA Inactivity Timer 2421-Minutes 000-255 002
DISA Warning Beeps Timer Non Programmable -- 15 sec.
DISA Inter Digit Timer Non Programmable -- 2 sec.
Matrix
Eternity V8 System Manual 293
Direct Station Selection Console
Whats this?
Matrix supports the state of the art design of the small 'Console' which is used to select a station or to select the
'function'; just by pressing the assigned key on it.
It is called 'Direct Station Selection Console' (DSS). The DSS console is a feature rich 2-wire Digital Terminal. The
DSS console occupies a separate digital port.
Two types of DSS Terminal types are supported:
DSS64 with 64-keys
DSS72 with 72-keys
With DSS72, user can assign additional eight SLTs to the DSS keys as compared to DSS64.
Dual color LEDs on the console, show the status of the ports. For example, the status for an activity like called station
ringing is indicated by the Green LED blinking. The status of speech with the station or incoming call is indicated by
the Green LED continuously ON.
The Red LED on the console indicates the status for other stations like other stations going OFF-Hook, ringing, calling
other station, dialing on trunk, on 'Hold', etc.
For some functions, the color of LED may turn Orange. For example, a loop key will glow to orange color for a call
returned to your station or for unanswered calls.
How to attach the DSS to a DKP?
The DSS console can be attached with the Eternity in the same way as the DKP. Once DSS is attached to the
Eternity, it should be programmed as an attachment (console) for any one of the DKPs connected to the system.
In order to use all the programmable keys two DSS can be attached with DKP using following options:
DKP+DSS72+DSS72
DKP+DSS64+DSS64
DKP+DSS72+DSS64
DKP+DSS64+DSS72
DKP+DSS64 DKP+DSS64+DSS64
When one DSS64 is attached with a DKP; the DSS keys of DKP as well as all 64 keys of DSS64 can be used. If
DSS72 is used, 72 keys can be used as DSS keys.
Similarly if two DSS64 are connected, 128 additional keys can be used as DSS keys.
Thus if only one DSS is used, keys will not be available for accessing some of SLTs out of all SLTs. But for accessing
these SLTs you can assign the keys.
By default, all the DSSs are assumed to be DSS72. Eternity does not identity all the DSS types differently because in
current implementation it is not known whether the terminal is first attachment to DKP or the second attachment.
Matrix
294 Eternity V8 System Manual
DSS64/DSS72/DSS64 (16x4) key Map is as shown below:
Following options are available for connecting two DSS stations:
How to program?
Use following command to assign a function to a key of DSS assigned to a DKP:
1254-1-DKP-DSS-Key Location-Function Type-Function Number
1254-2-DKP-DKP-DSS-Key Location-Function Type-Function Number
1254-*-DSS-Key Location-Function Type-Function Number
Where,
DKP = DKP Software Port Number from 001 to 128.
DSS = DSS Number from 1 to 2.
Key Location is from 01 to 72. For 'Function Type and 'Function Number' refer Tables in chapter Digital Key Phone-Soft
Keys Programming.
Use following command to clear a function of a key of DSS of a DKP:
1254-1-DKP-DSS-Key Location-00-000
1254-2-DKP-DKP-DSS-Key Location-00-000
1254-*-DSS-Key Location-00-000
Default First DSS64 Console for Operator:
1st DSS
(DSS1)
2nd DSS
(DSS2)
Default
DSS1
Default
DSS2
Remarks
DSS72 DSS72 005-076 077-148 All SLTs can be assigned a key as per number of keys.
DSS64 DSS64 005-068 077-140
If user keeps the default assignment for both DSS: First 64 keys of DSS64
will be assigned SLT 005 to 068 whereas second DSS64 will be assigned
SLT 077 to 140. Due to this SLTs 069 to 076 and 141 to 148 cannot be
accessed from DSS. Hence DSS1 and DSS2 will be required to be
programmed.
DSS72 DSS64 005-076 077-140 All SLTs can be assigned a key as per number of keys.
DSS64 DSS72 005-068 077-148
If user keeps the default assignment for both DSS: First 64 keys of DSS64
will be assigned SLT 005 to 068 whereas second DSS72 will be assigned
SLT 077 to 148. Due to this SLTs 069 to 076 cannot be accessed from DSS.
Hence only DSS2 will be required to be programmed.
The commands explained below should be referred as:
To program a single port: XXXX-1
To program a range of ports: XXXX-2
To program all the ports: XXXX-*
SLT005 SLT006 SLT007 SLT008 SLT009 SLT010 SLT011 SLT012
SLT013 SLT014 SLT015 SLT016 SLT017 SLT018 SLT019 SLT020
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08
09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40
41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56
57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
01
DSS64 DSS72 DSS64 (16 x 4)
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
01 17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
Matrix
Eternity V8 System Manual 295
Default Second DSS64 Console for Operator:
Default First DSS72 for Operator Console:
Default Second DSS72 for Operator Console:
SLT021 SLT022 SLT023 SLT024 SLT025 SLT026 SLT027 SLT028
SLT029 SLT030 SLT031 SLT032 SLT033 SLT034 SLT035 SLT036
SLT037 SLT038 SLT039 SLT040 SLT041 SLT042 SLT043 SLT044
SLT045 SLT046 SLT047 SLT048 SLT049 SLT050 SLT051 SLT052
SLT053 SLT054 SLT055 SLT056 SLT057 SLT058 SLT059 SLT060
SLT061 SLT062 SLT063 SLT064 SLT065 SLT066 SLT067 SLT068
SLT077 SLT078 SLT079 SLT080 SLT081 SLT082 SLT083 SLT084
SLT085 SLT086 SLT087 SLT088 SLT089 SLT090 SLT091 SLT092
SLT093 SLT094 SLT095 SLT096 SLT097 SLT098 SLT099 SLT100
SLT101 SLT102 SLT103 SLT104 SLT105 SLT106 SLT107 SLT108
SLT109 SLT110 SLT111 SLT112 SLT113 SLT114 SLT115 SLT116
SLT117 SLT118 SLT119 SLT120 SLT121 SLT122 SLT123 SLT124
SLT125 SLT126 SLT127 SLT128 SLT129 SLT130 SLT131 SLT132
SLT133 SLT134 SLT135 SLT136 SLT137 SLT138 SLT139 SLT140
SLT005 SLT029 SLT053
SLT006 SLT030 SLT054
SLT007 SLT031 SLT055
SLT008 SLT032 SLT056
SLT009 SLT033 SLT057
SLT010 SLT034 SLT058
SLT011 SLT035 SLT059
SLT012 SLT036 SLT060
SLT013 SLT037 SLT061
SLT014 SLT038 SLT062
SLT015 SLT039 SLT063
SLT016 SLT040 SLT064
SLT017 SLT041 SLT065
SLT018 SLT042 SLT066
SLT019 SLT043 SLT067
SLT020 SLT044 SLT068
SLT021 SLT045 SLT069
SLT022 SLT046 SLT070
SLT023 SLT047 SLT071
SLT024 SLT048 SLT072
SLT025 SLT049 SLT073
SLT026 SLT050 SLT074
SLT027 SLT051 SLT075
SLT028 SLT052 SLT076
SLT077 SLT101 SLT125
SLT078 SLT102 SLT126
SLT079 SLT103 SLT127
SLT080 SLT104 SLT128
SLT081 SLT105 SLT129
SLT082 SLT106 SLT130
Matrix
296 Eternity V8 System Manual
Default First DSS64 (16x4) for Operator Console:
Default Second DSS64 (16x4) for Operator Console:
SLT083 SLT107 SLT131
SLT084 SLT108 SLT132
SLT085 SLT109 SLT133
SLT086 SLT110 SLT134
SLT087 SLT111 SLT135
SLT088 SLT112 SLT136
SLT089 SLT113 SLT137
SLT090 SLT114 SLT138
SLT091 SLT115 SLT139
SLT092 SLT116 SLT140
SLT093 SLT117 SLT141
SLT094 SLT118 SLT142
SLT095 SLT119 SLT143
SLT096 SLT120 SLT144
SLT097 SLT121 SLT145
SLT098 SLT122 SLT146
SLT099 SLT123 SLT147
SLT100 SLT124 SLT148
SLT005 SLT021 SLT037 SLT053
SLT006 SLT022 SLT038 SLT054
SLT007 SLT023 SLT039 SLT055
SLT008 SLT024 SLT040 SLT056
SLT009 SLT025 SLT041 SLT057
SLT010 SLT026 SLT042 SLT058
SLT011 SLT027 SLT043 SLT059
SLT012 SLT028 SLT044 SLT060
SLT013 SLT029 SLT045 SLT061
SLT014 SLT030 SLT046 SLT062
SLT015 SLT031 SLT047 SLT063
SLT016 SLT032 SLT048 SLT064
SLT017 SLT033 SLT049 SLT065
SLT018 SLT034 SLT050 SLT066
SLT019 SLT035 SLT051 SLT067
SLT020 SLT036 SLT052 SLT068
SLT077 SLT093 SLT109 SLT125
SLT078 SLT094 SLT110 SLT126
SLT079 SLT095 SLT111 SLT127
SLT080 SLT096 SLT112 SLT128
SLT081 SLT097 SLT113 SLT129
SLT082 SLT098 SLT114 SLT130
SLT083 SLT099 SLT115 SLT131
SLT084 SLT100 SLT116 SLT132
SLT085 SLT101 SLT117 SLT133
SLT086 SLT102 SLT118 SLT134
SLT087 SLT103 SLT119 SLT135
SLT088 SLT104 SLT120 SLT136
Matrix
Eternity V8 System Manual 297
=X=X=
SLT089 SLT105 SLT121 SLT137
SLT090 SLT106 SLT122 SLT138
SLT091 SLT107 SLT123 SLT139
SLT092 SLT108 SLT124 SLT140
Matrix
298 Eternity V8 System Manual
Directory Dialing by Name
What is this?
Eternity provides a facility to call a station or an external party by dialing the name of the person. The station user
need not remember the station number/telephone number of the person he wishes to call. Also, he need not
remember the abbreviated dialing codes. He needs to simply key-in first three characters of the name of the person
and make a call.
This feature is allowed only to DKP users.
How it works?
When the station user presses Spd/Dial by name key and enter a character, the system points to the first name in the
stations list and displays it on the DKP.
If the station user presses Up or Down key, the system takes the user to other stations in the list.
Likewise, if the user dials two characters, the system narrows down the search to names starting with the two
characters keyed in. For e.g. the user dials SU and presses hold key, then the system sorts out the names starting
with SU and displays the first name from the sorted list.
The user is given an option to search/navigate the sorted list using Up and Down key. The moment the user presses
hold key, the system calls the selected person.
How to use it?
To Call a Station
To enter the name, press the key corresponding to the character/s. For example, to call Sumer, press 7 four times.
Wait for the cursor to go to next position and press 8 two times. Wait for the cursor to go to next position and press
6 once. The DKP displays SUM. The process of entering the name is same as in mobile phones for entering short
messages.
How to program?
No Class of Service programming is required to use this feature.
Important Points:
The name of the person should be programmed as the station name.
The name of the person should be programmed in the personal/global directory against his telephone number.
Only the stations having access to internal dialing can use this feature.
Only the stations having access to abbreviated directory can make external calls using this feature.
Relevant Topic:
1. Abbreviated Dialing 73
=X=X=
1 Press spd. DKP displays Enter Name.
2 Enter the first character.
DKP displays the first name beginning with that character.
User the up/down arrows to navigate the name menu.
3
Press hold to select the person.
The system calls the person.
You get RBT/Busy tone
Matrix
Eternity V8 System Manual 299
Disconnect Information on TWT
Whats this?
As a general application telecom equipment like PCO machine is connected to the SLT port of the system. Now
whenever the called party (remote party) disconnects i.e goes ON-Hook it is required to inform the SLT port so that
the PCO machine can consider the call as complete and stop billing. In absence of this signal, the call is considered
as complete when the caller goes on hook. But this will result in inaccurate billing.
When PBX is used for Gateway kind of application, it is desirable to disconnect the call when the call is terminated by
either end. If the called party (subscriber of PSTN, in this case) disconnects whereas the calling party doesnt, the
call within the system remains live. This becomes more critical when a call is routed from TWT to TWT.
To avoid such problems, the system supports a feature Disconnect Information on TWT. The detection is supported
as:
Disconnect Supervision on TWT Port
Disconnect Tone Detection on TWT Port
(Note: Please contact your Authorised dealer to know about Hardware compatibility for Open Loop
Disconnect on TWT)
How it works?
Disconnect Information on TWT Port (for IC and OG Calls)
The parameter is applicable only for both IC and OG calls made through TWT ports.
Detection of the parameter is started when call gets matured.
Following options are supported:
None
Polarity Reversal
Open Loop Disconnect
None: It is used when no signalling is available from the CO.
Polarity Reversal: It is used when call disconnection is signalled in the form of Polarity Reversal. The polarity of line
gets reversed when call is disconnected from remote user. TWT port will be released (free) and caller will get error
tone.
Open Loop Disconnect: It is used when call disconnections signalled in the form of Open Loop Disconnect pulse.
System will check Open Loop Disconnect signal for the time programmed for Open Loop Disconnect Timer for each
TWT port. It is programmable. If Open Loop signal is detected for the time less than the Open loop disconnect timer
programmed, it will not be considered as valid open loop signal for releasing the port. But if Open loop is detected
continuously at least for the time programmed in the Open Loop Disconnect timer, it is considered as a valid
Disconnect supervision signal.The call will be released and caller will get error tone. This timer can be programmed
only if Open Loop Disconnect option is selected.
Disconnect Tone Detection on TWT Port (for IC/OG calls)
This parameter is applicable only for both IC and OG calls made on TWT ports.
Disconnect Tone: It is used when call disconnection is signalled in the form of disconnect tone. The Disconnect tone
consists of Cadence (ON-OFF time) and frequency.
ON time and OFF time are programmable and by defaultprogrammed as 750ms. The frequency can be detected in
the range of 275-665Hz. If the cadence of tone from CO, matches with programmed values and the frequency is in
detectable range, then system will detect it and will consider it as valid Disconnect Tone. The call will be released and
caller will get Error tone.
When there is call on TWT port and call is answered i.e goes OFF-Hook from ringing state, system will check
programming of following flag:
Disconnect Tone Detection is enabled in DID No Digit Dial State.
Disconnect Tone detection is enabled in OG Call + All IC Call states other than DID No Digit Dial State.
If flag is disable for the particular state as mentioned above:
System will not detect Disconnect tone.
TWT port will be released (free) only if called party goes ON-Hook
If flag is Enabled, same logic for Cadence and Frequency is applicable as explained in above design (for Outgoing
Calls).
Disconnect Tone detection for DSP Based Trunk Card:
Eternity supports some of the TWT cards which have DSP based TWT ports.
The DSP cannot detect the frequency from the tone present. DSP can detect that tone only for which frequency and
cadence is provided by application while initialization. Hence, frequency and cadence should be programmed for
such cards. Frequency1 and Frequency2 are programmable as explained below:
Matrix
300 Eternity V8 System Manual
Frequency 1 can be detected from 300 to 1400 Hz.
Frequency 2 can be detected from 20 to 1400 Hz. Frequency 2 will be addition or modulation to frequency 1. One
more parameter is programmed viz. "Operator".
This parameter is programmable with 3 options:
No operator
Modulation (*)
Addition (+)
If No operator is programmed, frequency 2 will not be applicable.
If Modulation is programmed, than frequency 1and frequency 2 will be used as modulation i.e F1* F2
If Addition is programmed, than frequency 1 and frequency 2 will be used as addition i.e F1 + F2.
Cadence is programmable from 0040-4000 msec for On-Off time 1 and 2.
When disconnect tone is detected on port as per the Frequency and Cadences programmed, the disconnect tone is
detected and call will be disconnected.
Refer chapter TWT Hardware Template for programming following parameters:
Cadence (First cycle and Subsequent cycle)
Operator
Frequency1
Frequency2
Frequency 1 = 300-1400 Hz
Frequency 2 = 20-1400 Hz
Operator = No, *, +
Cadence is from 0040-4000 msec for On-Off time 1 and 2.
How to program?
Refer chapter TWT Hardware Template to program Disconnect Supervision, Open Loop Disconnect Timer and
Disconnect Tones Cadence as ON or OFF Time and Disconnect Tone Detection.
Important Point:
With this TWT hardware Template user can check the programming of both Disconnect supervision (as programmed)
+ Disconnect Tone, during a call.
Relevant Topics:
1. Answer Supervision on TWT 109
2. TWT Hardware Template 687
3. Call Disconnection Tone Detection 166
=X=X=
Port
Number
Call Disconnect Tone Detection
Frequency
1 (Hz)
Operator
Frequency
2 (Hz)
Cadence (in msec)
First Cycle Subsequent Cycle
On time 1 Off time 1 On time 2 Off time 2
1 400 No 25 750 750 750 750
2 400 No 25 750 750 750 750
Operator Meaning
No No Operator
* Modulation of Frequency 1 and Frequency 2
+ Addition of Frequency 1 and Frequency 2
Matrix
Eternity V8 System Manual 301
Disconnect Signaling on SLT
Whats this?
As a general application, telecom equipment like PCO machine is connected to the SLT port of the system. Now
whenever the called party (remote party) disconnects i.e goes ON-Hook it is required to inform the SLT port so that
the PCO machine can consider the call as complete and stop billing. In absence of this signal, the call is considered
as complete when the caller goes on hook. But this will result in inaccurate billing.
To solve such problems, the system supports Disconnect Signaling. It is a signal which is generated on SLT port,
when the called party has disconnected. This helps to avoid excessive billing.
When call is made from SLT to any other port for e.g. TWT/Mobile/SIP/T1E1PRI/BRI whenever called party
disconnects, they provide a disconnect signal. This information is generated on the SLT port, so that billing of call can
be stopped.
It can be in the form of:
None
Polarity Reversal
Open Loop Disconnect
How it works?
Disconnect signaling is programmed for OG calls, IC calls and Internal calls made by SLT.
When a call is made from SLT port to any other port and call gets matured, the system will wait for any disconnection
signaling.
When other port gets disconnected due to disconnection information available on the port, the system will check the
Disconnect Signal programmed in the hardware template assigned to the SLT port from where call has been made
as explained below:
None-It is used when no signalling is to be generated on SLT for call disconnection. When call is disconnected.
User will get error tone.
Polarity Reversal-it is used when the call disconnection is to be signalled in the form of Polarity Reversal. The
Battery polarity of the SLT port will be reversed. For example, if the battery polarity of the SLT port is +ve for TIP
and -ve for RING in speech condition then on disconnection on other port, TIP will become -ve and Ring +ve.
When call is disconnected, user will get Error tone.
Open Loop Disconnect-It is used when call disconnection is to be signalled in the form of Open Loop Disconnect
pulse. During this:
The Battery voltage on SLT port will be removed for time of Open Loop Disconnect Timer programmed for that
SLT port and will be restored again.
But the Polarity of the SLT port battery voltage will not be changed. When call is disconnected, user gets Error
tone.
Open Loop Disconnect Timer can be programmed by SLT hardware Template and is applicable only if Open Loop
Disconnect option is selected for Disconnect Signalling on SLT.
User will get error tone after disconnect signal is generated on the SLT port.
How to program?
Refer chapter SLT Hardware Template for programming Disconnect Signaling Type and Open Loop Disconnect Timer.
Important Points:
Polarity Reversal is change of status while the Open Loop Disconnect is in form of pulse.
While detecting the Open Loop Disconnect on TWT port, if the battery voltage remains absent at least for the
programmed Open Loop Disconnect Timer, the TWT port will go idle.
While generating open loop disconnect on the SLT, SLT battery voltage will be removed for the programmed Open
Loop Disconnect Timer and after that the battery voltage will be restored (The voltage will be same as it was before
generating the open loop).
Relevant Topics:
1. Answer Signaling on SLT 108
2. SLT Hardware Template 555
3. Call Disconnection Tone Detection 166
=X=X=
Matrix
302 Eternity V8 System Manual
Distinctive Rings
Whats this?
The Eternity support flexible rings. It is possible to use ring cadence of our choice during different situations. One can set
Triple ring for 'Internal Call-High Priority' situation and long ring for 'Alarm Call'. There are twelve situations possible:
Internal Call
Priority Internal Call
External Call
Alarm Call
Auto Call Back Call
Auto Redial Call
Message Wait Call
SE Mode
Operator Alarm
Emergency
Self Ring
Call Supervision
A set of ring type is called as Distinctive Ring type. The Distinctive Ring type is not programmable. On selecting the
Region Code and Defaulting the System the Distinctive Ring type to suit the Region is loaded.
Table for default settings: (Refer Note1 below the Table).
Note1:
For Region Code for Malaysia, default Distinctive Rings will be as mentioned below:
For Internal Call: Ring Type 06, which has Cadence of 1000 ms On - 4000 ms off
For external call (incoming call): Ring Type 08 which has cadence 400ms On - 200 ms Off - 400 ms On - 2000 ms off.
For Other call types: Same as for Country - India. Refer chapter Default Settings for other default parameters.
How to use it?
Lift the handset. Dial out following command and keep the handset back on the cradle. The telephone instrument rings
depending upon the ring type.
How to program?
Use following command to assign a ring type to a situation:
4002-Situation-Ring Type
Where,
Type1 Type2 Type3
Internal Call Short Very Slow Double Double
Trunk Call Double Long Slow Long Slow
ACB Short Long Short Long Short Long
Auto Redial Very Long Slow Very Long Slow Very Long Slow
Self Alarm Long Fast Long Fast Long Fast
Emergency Long Fast Long Fast Long Fast
Operator Alarm Long Fast Long Fast Long Fast
Message Wait Short Fast Short Fast Short Fast
Programming Ring Continuous Continuous Continuous
Self Ring Short Long Short Long Short Long
Priority Triple Triple Triple
Call Supervision Continuous Continuous Continuous
Situation Meaning
01 Internal Call
02 Trunk Call
03 Auto Call Back Call
04 Auto Redial Call
05 Self Alarm Call
Matrix
Eternity V8 System Manual 303
Demonstration of rings
It is possible to demonstrate these various types of rings. When a customer purchases a PBX, he feels to get acquainted
with different types of rings given by the system. Unless one is familiar with these rings, he would not understand their
meaning. For programming the demonstration timer, refer chapter Call Progress Tones.
Use following commands to demonstrate the ring:
4003-Ring Type
Where,
Use following command to default all ring type situation:
4001
Timer of Relevance:
Demonstration Timer-Time for which the system demonstrates the tone/ring to the user.
Command: 3542-Seconds.
Default: 30 seconds.
Valid Range: 000 to 255 seconds.
Relevant Topics:
1. Default Settings 242
2. Call Progress Tones 183
=X=X=
06 Emergency
07 Operator Alarm
08 Message Wait Call
09 Programming Ring
10 Self Ring
11 Priority Call
12 Call Supervision
Ring Type Meaning Cadence (in ms)
00 OFF
01 Continuous
02 Short Fast 750-750
03 Short Long 500-1500
04 Short Very Slow 750-2250
05 Long Fast 1500-500
06 Long Slow 1000-4000
07 Very Long Slow 2000-4000
08 Double 400-200-400-2000
09 Triple 400-200-400-200-400-2000
Ring Type Meaning
0 OFF
1 Continuous
2 Short Fast
3 Short Long
4 Short Very Slow
5 Long Fast
6 Long Slow
7 Very Long Slow
8 Double
9 Triple
Situation Meaning
Matrix
304 Eternity V8 System Manual
Do Not Disturb (DND)
Whats this?
Many times it happens that a user wishes privacy for some duration and would not like to be disturbed by phone calls.
Do Not Disturb (DND) feature is very useful in such situations. This feature is useful for Managers and other staff of
Enterprise who would not like to be disturbed because of phone calls during important meetings or conference. For
Hospitals, this feature is useful to avoid phone calls during meeting of doctors. Refer separate Manual for Hotel
Applications of this feature.
If the user has set 'DND' feature, other station users can still call to that user if they have access to 'DND Override' as
well as they have same or higher priority than the user. (the user should not have enabled 'Privacy from DND
Override')
To use this feature, the user should enable 'DND' and/or 'DND Override' from Class of Service. Refer chapter Class of
Service (COS) for more details.
If the user has set DND on his station, other station users will get 'Routing Tone' when they try to call the user who has
set DND feature.
The user can also set the suitable 'text message' while setting DND on his station. This will help the remote party who
is calling to this station, to know more details about the status of the user viz. he is in meeting or he is on leave etc.
The Eternity offers a service feature called DND-Remote. Using this feature, the SA can set/cancel this feature on the
user's station or press DSS key for DND, to set the feature on the DKP. Refer chapter Digital Key Phone-Soft Keys
Programming for details about DSS key.
How to use it?
Different class of users can have following flexibilities while using DND feature:
DND Override
DND Message
DND Remote
DND Override:
DND Override and priority features are interconnected as explained below:
User can set/cancel DND feature, using the Access Code.
Suppose User A has set DND and User B wants to call to User A.
If User B makes call to the User A, the User B will get 'routing tone' as User A has set DND on his station.
But due to urgency, if User B needs to call User A, User B will request to allow DND Override from COS for his
station.
If SE has allowed this feature, User B will dial access code (dial '4') or press DSS key for override.
Now, the User B can override DND feature, successfully only if User B has same or higher priority than User A
and at the same time, SE has not allowed User A the feature 'Privacy from DND Override' from COS.
On successful override, Use B can place a call on User A, if user A is free. Else User B will get busy tone.
Thus, User B can override the DND feature, set by User A if following other features are configured:
SE has allowed DND Override from COS for User B
SE has not allowed Privacy from DND Override from COS for User A
SE has configured priority of User B same as or higher than priority of User A, using specific commands.
Refer chapter Priority for more details.
DND Message:
If the DKP user has set or not set, the DND feature and dials the access code for DND, he can select the suitable text
message from the display on the DKP, e.g. 'Cancel DND', 'Unavailable', 'In Meeting', 'In Conference', etc.
This text message will be seen by other DKP callers only, while making call to the DKP which has set DND.
SE can edit the specific Text message as required for specific application.
DND Remote:
In an Enterprise, the receptionist can dial the SA command to set/cancel the DND on the specific station of the user or
boss.
How to Configure?
Using Feature Access Code:
User can dial the access code to set/cancel DND feature. Refer chapter Access Codes.
Dial 18-Text Message Number
Where,
For SLT, enter Code = 1 to 9 to Set DND and 0 to Cancel DND.
Matrix
Eternity V8 System Manual 305
For DKP, navigate the list of messages, select the message and press 'Enter'.
Set DND from SLT and DKP:
Dial 18-1 to Set DND with Text message 1
Dial 18-2 to Set DND with Text message 2
Dial 18-3 to Set DND with Text message 3
Dial 18-4 to Set DND with Text message 4
Dial 18-5 to Set DND with Text message 5
Dial 18-6 to Set DND with Text message 6
Dial 18-7 to Set DND with Text message 7
Dial 18-8 to Set DND with Text message 8
Dial 18-9 to Set DND with Text message 9
Cancel DND from SLT and DKP:
Dial 18-0 to Cancel DND.
Note:
Text message will be seen by other DKP callers only, while making call to the DKP which has set DND.
Using SA Command: (Remote DND)
Set DND from SLT and DKP:
Dial 1072-001-Flexible Number-Text message Number
OR
Press DSS key assigned to DND feature (if DND is currently not set-on DKP)
Cancel DND from SLT and DKP:
Dial 1072-001-Flexible Number-0
OR
Press DSS key assigned to DND feature (if DND is currently set-on DKP)
Where,
Flexible Number is the flexible number of the Room/Phone number.
If DKP (Eon) is used, after entering Flexible Number you can navigate the list of text messages, select the
message and press 'Enter'. The List of messages are as given for Access Code '18' .
Use Text Message Number 1 to 9 for SLT.
Using SE Command to edit Text messages:
Step 1
Use following command to default all DND Text Messages:
1501
Step 2
Use following command to Edit the Text Message:
1502-Text Message Number-Text Message
Where,
Text Message Number = 1 to 9
Text Message is a string of max 16 alpha numeric characters. If it is less than 16, terminate with #*
Text Message Number DND Message
1 Do Not Disturb
2 Unavailable
3 In Meeting
4 In Conference
5 Try on Mobile
6 On Vacation
7 On Business Trip
8 Out of Office
9 With a Guest
Matrix
306 Eternity V8 System Manual
Default Text messages are as given below:
Important Points:
Refer chapter Class of Service (COS) to allow or not to allow the features 'DND' and 'Privacy from Override' for the
station.
Refer DND feature in chapter QSIG for more details about DND over QSIG.
Relevant Topics:
1. Access Codes 77
2. Class of Service (COS) 200
3. Priority 497
4. Digital Key Phone-Soft Keys Programming 264
5. QSIG 508
=X=X=
Text Message Number DND Message
1 Do Not Disturb
2 Unavailable
3 In Meeting
4 In Conference
5 Try on Mobile
6 On Vacation
7 On Business Trip
8 Out of Office
9 With a Guest
Matrix
Eternity V8 System Manual 307
DS1 Trunks
Whats this?
Digital Signal Level 1 (DS1) trunks use Bit-Oriented Signaling (BOS) and multiplexes 24 channels (T1 service) or 32
channels (E1 service) into a single data stream. DS1 can be used for voice or voice-grade data and for data-transmission
protocols. T1 trunk service multiplexes 24 channels into a single 1.544-Mbps data stream. E1 trunk service multiplexes
32 channels into a single 2.048-Mbps stream. Both T1 and E1 provide a digital interface for trunk groups.
Signaling Modes:
Common Channel Signaling (CCS) is an industry-standard technique where any one of a group of channels carries the
signals for the other channels. Matrix uses the 24th channel of a group for signaling. This signaling technique differs from
24-channel signaling. When the system is configured for Facility-Associated Signaling, 24-channel signaling uses the
24th channel in a DS1 facility to carry signals. This technique also is called clear channel, out-of-band or alternate voice
data (AVD) signaling.
Channel Associated Signaling (CAS) is similar to common-channel signaling and is used only when the Bit Rate is 2.048
Mbps (the trunk is used with an E1 interface). Signaling is carried on the 16th channel.
Common-channel signaling and channel associated signaling provide a maximum transmission rate of 64 Kbps for
bearer channels.
ROBBED-BIT signaling is a per-channel signaling technique for transmitting signaling bits on each channel in a DS1
facility. The least-significant bit in every 6th transmitted information frame is removed and replaced by a signaling bit.
This technique is also called in-band signaling. The maximum transmission rate for each bearer channel with ROBBED-
BIT signaling is 56 Kbps.
ISDN-PRI signaling is carried on the 24th channel for a 1.544 Mbps connection and on the 16th channel for a 2.048
Mbps connection.
QSIG is an ISDN based protocol for signaling between nodes of a Private Integrated Services network.
Any of the common trunks, except for PCOL (Personal Central Office Line) trunks, can be analog or digital. (PCOL trunks
can only be analog.) Administering a digital trunk group is very similar to administering its analog counterpart, but digital
trunks must connect to a DS1 port and this port must be administered separately.
User interface for E1_PRI and E1_CAS channels:
In case of ISDN_E1_PRI and ISDN_E1_CAS the protocol supports 32 Channels ranging from 00 to 31, out of which
2 channels (channel no. 00 and 16) are used for framing/signaling. So effectively user has 30 channels for OG/IC
calls.
For better understanding of the user the channel IDs are mapped as shown below. Thus for the E1_PRI and E1_CAS
the DS1 portsupports total 30 channels ranging from 01 to 30, which you can use for making and receiving calls.
The system Debug is for trouble shooting and so the channel ID in debug will be as the actual channel ID as
supported by the E1_PRI and E1_CAS protocols.
Similarly, in case of T1 PRI, Protocol supports 24 channels (from 01 to 24), in which channel no. 24 is used for the
signaling, so effectively there are 23 Voice channels are available.
But in case of T1 RBS, Protocol supports 24 channels (from 01 to 24) and the protocol doesnt consume any channel
for signaling so that there are total 24 channels available for the users.
Loop Back Tests for E1 and T1
Eternity supports following types of Loop back tests:
Near end Loop back: These are of two type viz.
Line loop Back test
Payload loop back test
The Eternity will form the line loop back or payload loop back same as required by the other end.
00 01 02 03 04 14 15 16 17 31
01 02 03 04 14 15 16 17 30
18
Channel ID as
per Protocol
Channel ID for
User Interface
Mapping of Actual Channel ID with User Interface (E1_PRI and E1_CAS)
Matrix
308 Eternity V8 System Manual
Far end Loop Back Test: These are of two type viz.
Line loopback test
Payload loopback test
These tests are conducted when the DS1 port is in NT mode and is connected to other PBX and wants to test the line
between itself and the far end. In this mode, Eternity acts as a network.
Near end Loopback:
Near end loop back are of following types:
Line loop back
This can be implemented by shorting of signaling wires RTIP and RRING to TTIP and TRING respectively at the
line side.
This is as good as shorting the Rx pair to Tx pair. In this case DS1 port does not need to be in sync with network.
Payload Loop back:
This is effectively a physical connection of payload channels (Timeslot) with framing generated by DS1 port itself for
the transmit signal. In this case DS1 port will be in sync with the Network.
When the other end connected with the DS1 port of the Eternity wants to perform the loopback tests, the DS1 port will
form the loopback depending upon the type of test the other end wants to perform (i.e. line loopback or payload
loopback).
Method of forming loopback:
Method of forming loopback at the DS1 port side is different for the E1 and T1 carrier. These are explained below.
Case 1:
When line type of the DS1 port is configured as ISDN_E1_PRI or ISDN_E1_CAS:
The protocol doesnt support the facility that the remote end can close/open the loop at the DS1 port side
automatically.
Hence when the remote end wants to perform the loopback test he will inform the person (SE) at the Eternity side to
form the type of loop back as desired (i.e. Line loopback or Payload loopback) on the DS1 port.
When the SE forms the loopback at DS1 port side (by issuing appropriate SE Command), the remote end can start
the test.
On completion of the testing, the remote end person will inform the SE to release/open the loopback formed at the
DS1 port side.
On request of the remote end, the SE will give SE command for the DS1 port to open the Near end loopback.
Case 2:
When line type of the DS1 port is configured as ISDN_T1_PRI or ISDN_T1_RBS,
The protocol supports loopback Activation and deactivation message, whereby the remote end can send the loop up
activation code to the DS1 port and the DS1 port decodes the message and forms the loop back automatically.
On completion of the testing Remote end can send the loop deactivation code and the DS1 port can open the already
formed loopback.
So in this case the SEs intervention is not required to form and release the loop back.
In case the remote end doesnt support facility to automatically form/release the loopback for the DS1 port though the
carrier is T1, the SE can use the command (6141-1-DS1-Type of Loop Back) on request of the remote end and the
loopback will get formed or released, depending on the command issued.
Loopback Activation:
When the system receives the SE command to form Line/Payload loop back (in case of E1):
It will inform the Eternity ME Card DS1 about the received command Eternity ME Card DS1 will release all the calls
supported by the DS1 Port under test.
The Eternity ME Card DS1 will form the required type of loop back.
System will put the DS1 port in maintenance mode. It will release all active calls supported by DS1 port and restrict
the usage of DS1 port for IC/OG calls.
When the loopback activation code is received from far end on the DS1 port, (When carrier is T1)
Eternity ME Card DS1 will inform the system about the received information and the DS1 port number.
Eternity ME Card DS1 will release all the calls supported by the DS1 Port under test.
System will put the DS1 port in maintenance mode. It will release all active calls supported by DS1 port and restrictthe
usage of DS1 port for IC/OG calls.
Loopback Release:
Matrix
Eternity V8 System Manual 309
On receiving the loopback release code or receiving the command to release the loop back (either Payload or Line),
the system will take the DS1 port out from the maintenance mode and now the DS1 port will function normally.
Far end Loop back Test:
Far end loop back test gives facility to Eternity to check the health of the line towards the other end connected on its
DS1 port using loopback tests.
The types of the far end loopback test are:
Line loopback
Payload loopback
Note:
The option Release All Loop Backs is required when the far end requires the universal loop back release code to
release the Loop Back.
Method of forming loopback:
Method of forming loopback at the DS1 port side is different for the E1 and T1 carrier. These are explained below.
Case 1:
When line type of the DS1 port is configured as ISDN_E1_PRI or ISDN_E1_CAS:
The protocol doesnt support the facility that the Eternity can perform the loopback tests automatically.
The SE of the Eternity will inform the far end connected with the DS1 port, to form the loopback as required.
Once the far end has formed the desired loop back the SE can issue command to start the Far end loop back test.
Start Loopback Test:
On receiving the command to start Far End loop back test (either the Line Loopback or Payload loopback test).
The system will put this DS1 port in maintenance mode and inform the Eternity ME Card DS1 about the test to
perform with DS1 port number
Eternity ME Card DS1 will release all the calls supported by the DS1 Port under test.
The Eternity ME Card DS1 will start the PRBS generator and counter.
Eternity ME Card DS1 will send the PRBS count every 1 second to the system.
Eternity ME Card DS1 will increment PRBS Counter for every error encountered during the test during one second.
Eternity ME Card DS1 will reset the PRBS counter to zero, after sending the PRBS Counter to the system, every
second.
The system will store the received PRBS count (received every second) in Performance report, which can be
captured from Serial port or Printer port.
End Loopback Test/Release All Loop Backs
When the SE wants to end the loopback test he will issue the command to end the Far End Loop Back Test, for the
DS1 port under the test.
SE will inform the other ends person that loopback test is finished and now the remote end can open the loop formed.
On receiving the command to end loop back test for the DS1 port, the system will take the DS1 port out of
maintenance state and inform the DS1 port about the received command.
DS1 port will function normal.
Case 2:
When the line type of the DS1 port is configured as ISDN_T1_PRI or ISDN_T1_RBS
Loop back activation/deactivation is automatic.
Important Points:
The activation methods are different for the D4 and ESF framing.
In case of D4 framing only Line loop back is supported.
In case of ESF framing both, Line loopback and Payload loop back are supported.
When Framing = D4
D4 Framing supports only:
Line Loop Back test
Start Line Loop Back Test
The test will start for the DS1 port when SE issues the command to start the Far end line loop back test. When SE
command (6142-1-DS1-1) is issued.
The system will inform the Eternity ME Card DS1 about the command and put this DS1 port in maintenance state.
The Eternity ME Card DS1 will release all calls supported by DS1 port under test.
Matrix
310 Eternity V8 System Manual
The Eternity ME Card DS1 will send the line loop back Activation Code and will start the PRBS generator and
counter.
Eternity ME Card DS1 will send the PRBS count every 1 second to Master.
Eternity ME Card DS1 will increment PRBS Counter for every error encountered during the test during one second.
Eternity ME Card DS1 will reset the PRBS counter to zero, after sending the PRBS Counter to the system, every
second.
The system will store the received PRBS count (received every second) in Performance report, which can be
captured from Serial port or Printer port.
Stop Loop Back Test
When SE command (6142-DS1-2) or (6142-DS1-5) to end the Far end loop back test is issued.
The system will inform the Eternity ME Card DS1 about the received command and will take out the DS1 port from the
maintenance mode.
Eternity ME Card DS1 will send the inband Deactivation Code.
When Framing = ESF
ESF framing supports both:
Line Loop back
Payload loop back tests.
Start Loop Back Test:
Depending upon the SE command issued to start the type of Loop Back (Line or Payload) test.
The system will put the DS1 port under test in Maintenance mode and will inform the DS1 Port about the received
command.
Eternity ME Card DS1 will release all the calls supported by the DS1 port.
Eternity ME Card DS1 will send the Loop back Activation Message for the line/payload loop back as informed by the
system.
The Eternity ME Card DS1 will start the PRBS generator and counter.
Eternity ME Card DS1 will send the PRBS count every 1 second to Master.
Eternity ME Card DS1 will increment PRBS Counter for every error encountered during the test during one second.
Eternity ME Card DS1 will reset the PRBS counter to zero, after sending the PRBS Counter to Master, every second.
The system will store the received PRBS count (received every second) in Performance report, which can be
captured from Serial port or Printer port.
Stop Loop Back Test/Release All Loop Backs:
When SE issues command (6142-DS1-2) or (6142-DS1-4) or (6142-DS1-5) to end the Far end loop back test.
The system will inform the Eternity ME Card DS1 about the received command and will take out the DS1 port from the
maintenance mode.
Eternity ME Card DS1 will send the Deactivation Message for the line/payload loopback test as required.
Performance Report:
50 entries will be stored in Performance report.
The report will store the entries in FIFO order.
From SA Mode
User the following command to start/abort online printing of DS1 performance report:
1072-030-Flag
Where,
By default, Flag is 0.
User the following command to start/abort offline printing of DS1 performance report:
1072-031-Flag
Where,
By default, Flag is 0.
Flag Meaning
0 Disable
1 Enable
Flag Meaning
0 Disable
1 Enable
Matrix
Eternity V8 System Manual 311
Notes:
PRBS counter = 0 indicates the healthy condition.
During loop back test the PRBS counter may be greater than zero at initial stage of the loop back stage, but it will be
zero afterwards consistently for the healthy condition.
PRBS counter = greater than zero, indicates the faulty condition for the loop back test.
How to program?
Step 1
Port Status-Used to enable/disable the port. When the Port is disabled, it will not be allotted to the user on grabbing the
port. Instead the user will get error tone.
Use the following command to enable/disable the port:
6101-1-DS1-Port Status
6101-2-DS1-DS1-Port Status
6101-*-Port Status
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
By default, the DS1 Port is enabled.
Step 2
Service Provider-Assign a Service Provider to the DS1 port. This is useful in LCR.
Use following command to assign a name to the DS1 port:
6102-1-DS1-SP
6102-2-DS1-DS1-SP
6102-*-SP
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
SP is from 01 to 99.
By default, Service Provider is 01.
Step 3
Line coding is a pattern that data assumes as it is propagated over a communications channel as following:
AMI: Alternate Mark Inversion. All transmissions generated by digital trunk ports are encoded in AMI Line coding. Voltage
on the line will be a net DC 0.
B8ZS: AMI with 0-code suppression, binary 8-zero substitution.
HDB3: High density bipolar line coding.
For both B8ZS and HDB3, line coding, the terminals at end-to-end will be HDB3-compatible.
Use following command to program the Line Coding Mechanism for the DS1 port:
6103-1-DS1-Line Coding
6103-2-DS1-DS1-Line Coding
6103-*-Line Coding
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
The commands explained below should be referred as:
To program a single port: XXXX-1
To program a range of ports: XXXX-2
To program all the ports: XXXX-*
Port Status Meaning
0 Disable
1 Enable
Line Coding Meaning
1 AMI-Basic
2 B8ZS
3 HDB3
4 CMI (Not Used)
Matrix
312 Eternity V8 System Manual
By default, Line Coding is HDB3.
Set Line Coding = AMI or B8ZS for T1 line. However, B8ZS is recommended.
Set Line Coding = AMI or HDB3 for E1 line. However, HDB3 is recommended.
CMI is used in Japan and since Eternity does not support Japan, this option will never be used.
Step 4
Framing: It is the set of 24 or 32 8-bit time slots that is treated as a single transmission unit.
SF: D4 Superframe. The 12-frame unit that contains the synchronization pattern is known as the Superframe.
ESF: Extended Superframe Unlike the 12-bit synchronization pattern for D4 which utilizes all of the available framing bits
for sync., ESF employs only 6 of the available 24 framing bits to carry a synchronization pattern. Each 24-frame entity
spanning one ESF cycle, is referred to as an ESF superframe. With CEPT1 framing, the framing information is cycled
through sixteen (0-15) frames (each containing channels 0-31). The type of framing used at both ends must be identical,
unless the signaling and framing are converted somewhere in the transmission stream (as might happen in international
communication).
Use following command to program the Framing Mode for the DS1 port:
6104-1-DS1-Framing
6104-2-DS1-DS1-Framing
6104-*-Framing
Where,
By default, Framing is CEPT1 Multi Frame.
Note:
Set Framing = SF or ESF for T1 line. However, ESF is recommended since it supports advanced features like CRC and
FDL, which provide the performance reports.
Step 5
Signal Type/Line Type signifies the type of signaling to be used on the T1/E1 line. The E&M Protocol can be used on
DS1 Port. This can be done by assigning E&M Feature Template to DS1 Port. Refer chapter E&M Feature Template
Use following command to program signalling type/ Line type of a DS1:
6105-1-DS1-Line Type
6105-2-DS1-DS1-Line Type
6105-*-Line Type
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
By default, signalling type/line type of a DS1 is 1.
Step 6
The entry in this field must match the compounding method used by the far-end switch. This field does not appear for all
DS1 ports. Companding is a method of improving the signal-to-noise (S/N) ratio resulting from the pulse code modulation
(PCM) process on voice calls. The analog signals amplitude is compressed before it is quantized and transmitted. Either
of two algorithms are used to compand voice band signals: A-law and m-law. A-law is generally used in countries that use
E1 at 2.048 mbps; while m-law is used in countries that use T1 at 1.544 mbps.
Framing Meaning
1 SF (also called D4)
2 ESF
3 CEPT1 Multi Frame
Line Type Meaning
1 ISDN_E1_PRI
2 ISDN_T1_PRI
3 ISDN_E1_CAS
4 ISDN_T1_RBS
5 ISDN_E1_QSIG
6 ISDN_T1_QSIG
7 ISDN_E1_E&M
8 ISDN_T1_E&M
Matrix
Eternity V8 System Manual 313
Use the following command to program interface companding (PCM coding) of a DS1:
6108-1-DS1-Interface Companding
6108-2-DS1-DS1-Interface Companding
6108-*-Interface Companding
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
By default, the interface companding of a DS1 is 1.
Step 7
Use the following command to program auto receive equalization mode:
6110-1-DS1-Mode
6110-2-DS1-DS1-Mode
6110-*-Mode
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
By default, Auto Receive Equalization Mode is 1.
Step 8
This field increases the strength of incoming signals by a fixed amount to compensate for line losses.
Use the following command to program the receive equalization parameters of a DS1:
6111-1-DS1-Receive Equalization Parameters
6111-2-DS1-DS1-Receive Equalization Parameters
6111-*-Receive Equalization Parameters
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
By default, the receive equalization parameters of DS1 is 1.
Step 9
ISDN glare occurs if the system initiates an out going call on a B-Channel at the same time the network initiates an
incoming call on that same B-channel.
When processing a glare condition, programmed glare option on DS1 port will be considered.
Use following command to program Glare Option for the DS1 port:
6112-1-DS1-Glare Option
6112-2-DS1-DS1-Glare Option
6112-*-Glare Option
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
By default, Glare Option is 2.
Interface Compounding Meaning
1 A-Law (for E1 Service)
2 Mu-Law (for T1 Service)
Mode Meaning
0 Disable
1 Enable
Receive Equalization Parameters Meaning
1 None
2 8 dB
3 16 dB
4 24 dB
5 32 dB
6 40 dB
7 48 dB
8 Reserve
Glare Option Meaning
1 Proceed
2 Held Back
Matrix
314 Eternity V8 System Manual
Set Glare=Proceed, if Eternity is to be given priority in event of Glare.
Set Glare=Held Back, if the other end of the link is to be given priority in event of Glare.
Please note that the Glare settings should be complimentary on either side of the link.
Step 10
It is the 8-bit sequence that occupies the time slot on a E1/T1 trunk channel when it is not being used.
Use the following command to program the Idle Code of a DS1:
6113-1-DS1-Idle Code
6113-2-DS1-DS1-Idle Code
6113-*-Idle Code
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
Idle Code is from 000 to 255 (corresponding to 8 bits).
The binary equivalent of the programmed value (000 to 255) is sent on the channel to signify that the channel is idle. (or
Unused) This setting depends on the network. Most commonly applicable values are 7F and FF (Binary equivalent is
0111 1111 and 1111 1111, decimal equivalent is 127 and 255).
By default, the idle code is 127 (7F).
Note:
Use message mode of the Digital Switch IC to send the idle channel code.
Step 11
Use the following command to program overlap receiving timer:
6114-1-DS1-Timer
6114-2-DS1-DS1-Timer
6114-*-Timer
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
Timer is from 00 to 99.
By default, Overlap Receiving Timer is 15 seconds.
This timer is used to decide timer for next digit and it is used only when we receive the called party number information
from network. If overlap receiving timer value is 0, it means indirectly to support only Enbloc dialing method. By the term
Enbloc we mean sending dialing digit in a single block after collecting all the dialed digits. By the term Overlap we mean
to send dialed digits as per dialed digits i.e. to send digits immediately when user dial it.
Step 12
Use following command to program Orientation Type for the DS1 port:
6106-1-DS1-Orientation Type
6106-2.DS1-DS1-Orientation Type
6106-*-Orientation Type
Where,
DS1=1 To 8.
By default Type = 1
When Orientation = Terminal, the port will be regarded as trunk. All the trunk related parameters will be applicable.
When Orientation = Network, the port will be regarded as station. All the station related parameters will be applicable.
When Orientation = Tie-line, the port will be regarded as station for all IC calls to it and as trunk for all OG calls to be
made through it.
Step 13
Use following command to program OG source calling party TON for a DS1:
6126-1-DS1-Source TON
6126-2-DS1-DS1-Source TON
6126-*-Source TON
Where,
Orientation Meaning
1 Terminal
2 Network
3 Tie Line
Matrix
Eternity V8 System Manual 315
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
By default, OG source calling party TON of DS1 is 1.
Step 14
Use following command to program OG source calling party NPI for DS1:
6127-1-DS1-Source NPI
6127-2-DS1-DS1-Source NPI
6127-*-Source NPI
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
By default, OG source calling party NPI for DS1 is 2.
Step 15
Use following command to program OG Destination Called Party TON for a DS1:
6128-1-DS1-Destination TON
6128-2-DS1-DS1-Destination TON
6128-*-Destination TON
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
By default, OG Destination Called Party TON of DS1 is 1.
Step 16
Use following command to program OG Destination Called Party NPI for DS1:
Source TON Meaning
1 Unknown: This is used when the user or network has no a prior information about the numbering plan. In
this case, the Address Value field is organized according to the network dialing plan. e.g. prefix or escape
digits might be present.
2 International Number.
3 National Number: Prefix or escape digits shall not be included.
4 Network Specific Number: This is used to indicate administration/Service number specific to the serving
network. e.g. used to access an operator.
5 Subscriber Number: This is used when a specific short number representation is stored in one or more
SCs as part of a higher layer application.
6 Abbreviated Number
7 Reserved Number.
Source NPI Meaning
1 Unknown
2 ISDN Numbering Plan
3 Data Numbering Plan
4 Telex Numbering
5 National Numbering Plan
6 Private Numbering Plan
7 Reserved for Extension
Destination TON Meaning
1 Unknown: This is used when the user or network has no a prior information about the numbering
plan. In this case, the Address Value field is organized according to the network dialing plan. e.g.
prefix or escape digits might be present.
2 International Number.
3 National Number: Prefix or escape digits shall not be included.
4 Network Specific Number: This is used to indicate administration/Service number specific to the
serving network. e.g. used to access an operator.
5 Subscriber Number: This is used when a specific short number representation is stored in one or
more SCs as part of a higher layer application.
6 Abbreviated Number
7 Reserved Number.
Matrix
316 Eternity V8 System Manual
6129-1-DS1-Destination NPI
6129-2-DS1-DS1-Destination NPI
6129-*-Destination NPI
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
By default, OG Destination Called Party NPI for DS1 is 2.
Step 17
When the user dials the trunk access code or selective trunk access code for dialing the number directly on the trunk
port, he waits for the dial tone before dialing the number. But some exchange does not give Dial Tone for the DS1
Port. For Example, when DS1 port as E1CAS type is used in Delhi, it is observed that the exchange does not give
dial tone when direct dialing on the trunk is used.
To solve such problems, Eternity supports Dial Tone when the DS1 Port is accessed.
It is applicable only when Online dialing is used as for Store and Forward dialing, the dial tone is given to the user.
The dial tone is played for the Dial tone timer of the PBX.
Use following command to program the dial tone flag for DS1 port:
6115-1-DS1-Flag
6115-2-DS1-DS1-Flag
6115-*-Flag
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
By default, Dial Tone Flag is 0 for all the DS1 ports.
Notes:
When dial tone flag is disabled, user will hear the dial tone of the exchange if provided, otherwise, user will hear the
silence.
If the user is making the call from the FXS port and dial tone is not provided by the exchange, user will not know when
to start dialing the number. In this case, it is possible that some digits are not outdialed on the port and wrong number
is dialed out because system will outdial the number only if Outgoing call Acknowledge is received from the Eternity
ME Card DS1 and user will not know about this condition. Hence, it is required to enable this flag, if exchange is not
providing the dial tone.
Step 18
When online dialing or store and forward dialing is used, some exchange do not provide any tone when call is
proceeding from the exchange.
Thus, the user does not know whether the call is processing or not if for some time there is silence from the
exchange.
In such case, this parameter is required to be programmed by the user.
Routing tone will be stopped when alert message or connect message or disconnect message comes from the
Eternity ME Card DS1.
Use following command to program the routing tone flag for DS1 port
6116-1-DS1-Flag
6116-2-DS1-DS1-Flag
6116-*-Flag
Where,
Destination NPI Meaning
1 Unknown
2 ISDN Numbering Plan
3 Data Numbering Plan
4 Telex Numbering
5 National Numbering Plan
6 Private Numbering Plan
7 Reserved for Extension
Flag Meaning
0 Disable
1 Enable
Matrix
Eternity V8 System Manual 317
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
By default, Routing Tone Flag is 0 for all the DS1 ports.
Step 19
Use the following command to reserved channels for data transmission on DS1:
6135-1-DS1-Channel Count (Data)
6135-2-DS1-DS1-Channel Count (Data)
6135-*-Channel Count (Data)
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
Channel Count (Data) is from 00 to 30.
By default, Channel Count for data transmission is 00.
Step 20
Use the following command to program number of channels reserved for OG channel count:
6136-1-DS1-Channel Count (OG)
6136-2-DS1-DS1-Channel Count (OG)
6136-*-Channel Count (OG)
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
Channel Count (OG) is from 00 to 30. It specifies the number of channels to be reserved for making an OG calls. For
example, If OG channel count is programmed as 15, simultaneous 15 (maximum) OG calls can be made from the DS1
port.
By default, OG Channel Count is 30.
Step 21
Use the following command to program number of channels reserved for IC channel count:
6137-1-DS1-Channel Count (IC)
6137-2-DS1-DS1-Channel Count (IC)
6137-*-Channel Count (IC)
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
Channel Count (IC) is from 00 to 30. It specifies the number of channels to be reserved for making an IC calls. For
example, If IC channel count is programmed as 10, simultaneous 10 (max.) IC calls can be received on the DS1 port.
By default, Channel Count (IC) is 30.
Step 22
Use the following command to assign OG Reference ID to DS1 port:
6131-1-DS1-OG Reference ID
6131-2-DS1-DS1-OG Reference ID
6131-*-OG Reference ID
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
OG Reference ID is from 00 to 99.
By default, OG Reference ID is 00.
Step 23
Use the following command to assign IC Reference ID for Working Hour:
6132-1-DS1-IC Reference ID
6132-2-DS1-DS1-IC Reference ID
6132-*-IC Reference ID
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
IC Reference ID is from 00 to 99.
By default, IC Reference ID is 00.
Step 24
Use the following command to assign IC Reference ID for Break Hour:
Flag Meaning
0 Disable
1 Enable
Matrix
318 Eternity V8 System Manual
6133-1-DS1-IC Reference ID
6133-2-DS1-DS1-IC Reference ID
6133-*-IC Reference ID
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
IC Reference ID is from 00 to 99.
By default, IC Route Reference ID is 00.
Step 25
Use the following command to assign IC Route Reference ID for Non-working Hour:
6134-1-DS1-IC Reference ID
6134-2-DS1-DS1-IC Reference ID
6134-*-IC Reference ID
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
IC Reference ID is from 00 to 99.
By default, IC Route ID is 00.
Step 26
Use the following command to activate/release Near End Loopback for DS1:
6141-1-DS1-Loopback
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
Step 27
Use the following command to start/stop far end loopback test for DS1:
6142-1-DS1-Code
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
Step 28
Use following command to assign the port for online Performance Report Printing:
6143-Port
Where,
Default, None.
Step 29
Use following command to assign the port for offline Performance Report Printing:
6144-Port
Loopback Meaning
1 Activate Line Loopback
2 Release Line Loopback
3 Activate Payload Loopback
4 Release Payload Loopback
Code Meaning
1 Start Line Loop Back Test
2 End Line Loop Back Test
3 Start Payload Loop Back Test
4 End Payload Loop Back Test
5 Release All Loop Backs
Port Meaning
0 None
1 COM 1
2 COM 2
3 Printer
Matrix
Eternity V8 System Manual 319
Where,
Default, None.
Step 30
The following command is applicable when the Bit Rate=E1.
Use following command to program E1 Line Signaling Variant for the DS1 port.
6152-1-DS1-E1 Line Signaling Variant
6152-2-DS1-DS1-E1 Line Signaling Variant
6152-*-E1 Line Signaling Variant
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
By default, E1 Line Signaling Variant is 01.
ITU-T Q.400-Q.490 is the only Line Signaling Variant supported currently. India supports three types of E1 line signaling
protocols. One is same as ITU-T Q.400-Q.490. Other two differ from this standard and hence are not supported currently.
These will be supported on knowing their usage in the field. Most of the Countries follow ITU-T Q.400-Q.490.
Step 31
Use following command to program E1 Register Signaling Variant for the DS1 port:
6153-1-DS1-E1 Register Signaling Variant
6153-2-DS1-DS1-E1 Register Signaling Variant
6153-*-E1 Register Signaling Variant
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
By default, E1 Register Signaling Variants is 3.
E1 CAS Decadic: A-bit is used to transmit the DNIS. The A-bit is toggled as per the Pulse Dial Ratio set.
E1 CAS DTMF: DNIS/ANI is transmitted in the corresponding speech channel using the DTMF signals as
per ITU-T Q.23.
E1 CAS MFC R2: DNIS/ANI is transmitted in the corresponding speech channel using the MFC R2 signals as per ITU-T
Q.400-Q490.
E1 CAS MFC R1: DNIS/ANI is transmitted in the corresponding speech channel using the MFC R1 signals as per ITU-T
Q.300-Q390.
Generally, E1 CAS MFC R2 is only used.
Port Meaning
0 None
1 COM 1
2 COM 2
3 Printer
E1 Line Signaling Variant Meaning
01 ITU T Q.400-Q.490
02 E1 CAS Wink Start
03 E1 CAS Wink Start FGD
04 E1 CAS Delay Dial
05 E1 CAS Immediate Start/Dial
06 E1 CAS FXS Ground Start
07 E1 CAS FXS Loop Start
08 E1 CAS FXO Ground Start
09 E1 CAS FXO Ground Start
10 Indian Line Signaling Variant 1
11 Indian Line Signaling Variant 2
E1 Register Signaling Variant Meaning
1 E1 CAS Decadic
2 E1 CAS DTMF
3 E1 CAS MFC R2
4 E1 CAS MFC R1
Matrix
320 Eternity V8 System Manual
DNIS: Dialed Number In Service.
ANI: Auto Number Identification.
Step 32
E1 Auto Alarm-This command is used to disable/enable E1 Auto Alarm for DS1 port.
Use following command to enable/disable E1 Auto Alarm for the DS1 port for E1 signaling:
6154-1-DS1-Flag
6154-2-DS1-DS1-Flag
6154-*-Flag
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
By default, E1 Auto Alarm is 0.
Step 33
This field reduces the outgoing signal strength by a fixed amount. The appropriate level of loss depends on the distance
between your switch (measured by cable length from the smart jack) and the nearest repeater. Where another switch is
at the end of the circuit, as in campus environments, use the cable length between the 2 switches to select the
appropriate setting from the table below. This field is relevant if the Near-end CSU type field is integrated.
Use the following command to program the line build out parameters of a DS1:
6162-1-DS1-Code
6162-2-DS1-DS1-Code
6162-*-Code
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
By default, the Line Build Out Parameters is 8.
Step 34
Use following command to enable/disable Custom Pulse Width (CPW) Flag for the DS1 port for T1 signaling:
6171-1-DS1-Flag
6171-2-DS1-DS1-Flag
6171-*-Flag
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
Flag Meaning
0 Do not send alarm
1 Send alarm @ 1 second
2 Send alarm @ 2 second
3 Send alarm @ 3 second
4 Send alarm @ 4 second
5 Send alarm @ 5 second
6 Send alarm @ 6 second
7 Send alarm @ 7 second
8 Send alarm @ 8 second
9 Send alarm @ 9 second
Code Meaning
1 0-133ft
2 133-266ft
3 266-399ft
4 399-533ft
5 533-665ft
6 -7.5dB or equidistance
7 -16dB or equidistance
8 -22.5dB or equidistance
Flag Meaning
0 Disable
1 Enable
Matrix
Eternity V8 System Manual 321
By default, Custom Pulse Width Flag is 0.
Step 35
This command is used for Pulse shaping in first phase.
Use following command to program Custom Pulse Width Word 1 for the DS1 port for T1 signaling:
6172-1-DS1-Custom Pulse Width Word 1
6172-2-DS1-DS1-Custom Pulse Width Word 1
6172-*-Custom Pulse Width Word 1
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
Custom Pulse Width Word 1 is from 000 to 127 volt.
By default, Custom Pulse Width Word 1 is 63 volt.
Step 36
This command is used for Pulse shaping in second phase.
Use following command to program Custom Pulse Width Word 2 for the DS1 port for T1 signaling:
6173-1-DS1-Custom Pulse Width Word 2
6173-2-DS1-DS1-Custom Pulse Width Word 2
6173-*-Custom Pulse Width Word 2
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
Custom Pulse Width Word 2 is from 000 to 127 volt.
By default, Custom Pulse Width Word 2 is 58 volt.
Step 37
This command is used for Pulse shaping in third phase.
Use following command to program Custom Pulse Width Word 3 for the DS1 port for T1 signaling:
6174-1-DS1-Custom Pulse Width Word 3
6174-2-DS1-DS1-Custom Pulse Width Word 3
6174-*-Custom Pulse Width Word 3
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
Custom Pulse Width Word 3 is from 000 to 127 volt.
By default, Custom Pulse Width Word 3 is 76 volt.
Step 38
This command is used for Pulse shaping in fourth phase.
Use following command to program Custom Pulse Width Word 4 for the DS1 port for T1 signaling:
6175-1-DS1-Custom Pulse Width Word 4
6175-2-DS1-DS1-Custom Pulse Width Word 4
6175-*-Custom Pulse Width Word 4
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
Custom Pulse Width Word 4 is from 000 to 127 volt.
By default, Custom Pulse Width Word 4 is 00 volt.
Step 39
Use following command to enable/disable Custom Pulse Width (CPW) Flag for the DS1 port for E1 signaling:
6155-1-DS1-Flag
6155-2-DS1-DS1-Flag
6155-*-Flag
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
By default, Custom Pulse Width Flag is 0.
Step 40
This command is used for Pulse shaping in first phase.
Use following command to program Custom Pulse Width Word 1 for the DS1 port for E1 signaling:
Flag Meaning
0 Disable
1 Enable
Matrix
322 Eternity V8 System Manual
6156-1-DS1-Custom Pulse Width Word 1
6156-2-DS1-DS1-Custom Pulse Width Word 1
6156-*-Custom Pulse Width Word 1
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
Custom Pulse Width Word 1 is from 000 to 127 volt.
By default, Custom Pulse Width Word 1 is 109 volt.
Step 41
This command is used for Pulse shaping in second phase.
Use following command to program Custom Pulse Width Word 2 for the DS1 port for E1 signaling:
6157-1-DS1-Custom Pulse Width Word 2
6157-2-DS1-DS1-Custom Pulse Width Word 2
6157-*-Custom Pulse Width Word 2
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
Custom Pulse Width Word 2 is from 000 to 127 volt.
By default, Custom Pulse Width Word 2 is 107 volt.
Step 42
This command is used for Pulse shaping in third phase.
Use following command to program Custom Pulse Width Word 3 for the DS1 port for E1 signaling:
6158-1-DS1-Custom Pulse Width Word 3
6158-2-DS1-DS1-Custom Pulse Width Word 3
6158-*-Custom Pulse Width Word 3
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
Custom Pulse Width Word 3 is from 000 to 127 volt.
By default, Custom Pulse Width Word 3 is 064 volt.
Step 43
This command is used for Pulse shaping in fourth phase.
Use following command to program Custom Pulse Width Word 4 for the DS1 port for E1 signaling:
6159-1-DS1-Custom Pulse Width Word 4
6159-2-DS1-DS1-Custom Pulse Width Word 4
6159-*-Custom Pulse Width Word 4
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
Custom Pulse Width Word 4 is from 000 to 127 volt.
By default, Custom Pulse Width Word 4 is 064 volt.
Step 44
This field selects the variant for ISDN PRI when ISDN PRI is selected as signaling mode. This must match with the other
end of the link.
Use following command to program the ISDN PRI Switch Variant:
6107-1-DS1-ISDN PRI Switch Variant
6107-2-DS1-DS1-ISDN PRI Switch Variant
6107-*-ISDN PRI Switch Variant
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
By default, ISDN PRI Switch Variant of a DS1 is 5.
ISDN PRI Variant Meaning
1 ATT_4ESS
2 ATT_SESS
3 AUSTRALIA
4 DMS
5 NET5
6 NTT_INS64
7 SWV_HONG_KONG
8 US_NI12
Matrix
Eternity V8 System Manual 323
DS1 (E1 CAS) Parameters:
Step 45
Forward tone Maximum ON timer (T1)-This timer signifies the maximum time for which the forward signal can be ON,
from the outbound end.
Use the following command to program Forward Tone Maximum ON Timer:
7101-1-DS1-Forward Tone Maximum ON Timer
7101-2-DS1-DS1-Forward Tone Maximum ON Timer
7101-*-Forward Tone Maximum ON Timer
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
Forward Tone Maximum ON Timer is from 01 to 99 seconds.
By default, Forward Tone Maximum ON Timer is 15 secs.
The DSP (Digital Signalling Processor) device will send the forward tone for this timer and will expect backward signal
within this timer. If no backward signal is received during this time, a timeout condition will occur in which case, an alert
signal will be sent to the Eternity ME Card Master, error tone be issued to the calling party and a clear forward signal will
be sent on the line.
Step 46
Forward Tone Maximum OFF Timer (T2)-This timer signifies the maximum time between two out going forward signals.
During this time the forward tone will remain OFF. If the outbound end does not send a forward signal for this time, the
inbound end will interpret it as per its condition and shall take action accordingly.
Use the following command to program Forward Tone Maximum Off Timer:
7102-1-DS1-Forward Tone Maximum OFF Timer
7102-2-DS1-DS1-Forward Tone Maximum OFF Timer
7102-*-Forward Tone Maximum OFF Timer
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
Forward Tone Maximum OFF Timer is from 01 to 99 seconds.
By default, Forward Tone Maximum Off Timer is 24 seconds. This timer will be less than the Incoming R2 register
timeout timer programmed by the inbound end.
Step 47
Maximum Compelled Cycle Time (T3)-This timer signifies the maximum time within which one Compelled signalling
cycle should end.
Use the following command to program the Maximum compelled cycle time:
7103-1-DS1-Maximum Compelled Cycle Time
7103-2-DS1-DS1-Maximum Compelled Cycle Time
7103-*-Maximum Compelled Cycle Time
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
Total Call Set Up Timer is from 01 to 99 seconds.
By default, Maximum Compelled Cycle Time is 15 secs.
Step 48
Pulse Duration for Pulsed Signals (T1A)-Backward signals A-3, A-4, A-6 and A-15 are pulsed to the outbound end.
Pulse duration of these signals vary from country to country.
Use the following command to program Pulse duration for pulsed signals:
7104-1-DS1-Pulse Duration for Pulsed Signals
7104-2-DS1-DS1-Pulse Duration for Pulsed Signals
7104-*-Pulse Duration for Pulsed Signals
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
Tolerance is fixed at +/-25ms.
By default, the Pulse Duration for Pulsed Signals is 150ms.
Step 49
Pulsed Signal Maximum Wait Timer (T1B)-This timer signifies the time for which the outbound end waits for the pulsed
signal. If the pulsed signal is not received during this time, the compelling signalling is considered to be complete.
Matrix
324 Eternity V8 System Manual
Use the following command to program the Pulsed Signal Maximum Wait Timer:
7105-1-DS1-Pulsed Signal Maximum Wait Timer
7105-2-DS1-DS1-Pulsed Signal Maximum Wait Timer
7105-*-Pulsed Signal Maximum Wait Timer
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
Pulsed Signal Maximum Wait Timer is from 01 to 99 seconds.
By default, Pulsed Signal Maximum Wait Timer is 15 secs.
Step 50
First Forward Tone Wait Timer-This timer signifies the minimum time between receipt of line seizure signal and first
forward signal.
Use the following command to program first forward tone wait timer:
7106-1-DS1-First Forward Tone Wait Timer
7106-2-DS1-DS1-First Forward Tone Wait Timer
7106-*-First Forward Tone Wait Timer
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
First forward tone wait timer is from 08 to 24 seconds.
By default, the First Forward Tone Wait Timer is 15 seconds.
Step 51
Minimum MF Signal Persist Timer-This timer signifies the minimum time for which the forward/backward signal should
persist on the line to be recognized as a forward/backward signal by the receiving end.
Use following command to program Minimum MF Signal Persist timer:
7107-1-DS1-Minimum MF Signal Persist Timer
7107-2-DS1-DS1-Minimum MF Signal Persist Timer
7107-*-Minimum MF Signal Persist Timer
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
Minimum MF Signal Persist timer is from 001 to 255 ms.
By default, Minimum MF Signal Persist timer is 20 ms.
Step 52
DNIS END Type (Outbound)-This parameter is applicable only when the DNIS length is set= 99 (i.e variable). The
outbound end indicates end of DNIS using a group I tone or using time out.
Use following command to program to set DNIS END Type (outbound) for DS1 port:
7108-1-DS1-End of DNIS
7108-2-DS1-DS1-End of DNIS
7108-*-End of DNIS
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
End of DNIS is from 00, 11 to 15.
00 indicates End of DNIS as time out.
01 to 15 indicates group 1 tone to declare End of DNIS.
By default, DNIS End Type (Outbound) is 15.
Step 53
DNIS End Type (Inbound)- This parameter is applicable only when the DNIS length is set = 99 (i.e variable). The
inbound end indicates end of DNIS using a Group I tone or using time out.
Use following command to program DNIS End Type:
7109-1-DS1-DNIS End Type
7109-2-DS1-DS1-DNIS End Type
7109-*-DNIS End Type
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
DNIS End Type is from 00, 11 to 15.
00 indicates End of DNIS as time out.
01 to 15 indicates group 1 tone to declare End of DNIS.
By Default, DNIS End Type (Inbound) is 15.
Matrix
Eternity V8 System Manual 325
Step 54
ANI Send Position (Outbound)This parameter signifies the number of DNIS digits after which to send ANI. As such
ANI is sent on receiving the backward tone Send next digit or send next ANI digit. If send next ANI tone is received then
this parameter is not applicable. But if same tone is used by the inbound end to request next ANI digit and next DNIS digit
then ANI is sent after the number of digits as set in this parameter.
Use following command to program the ANI Send Position:
7110-1-DS1-ANI Send Position
7110-2-DS1-DS1-ANI Send Position
7110-*-ANI Send Position
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
ANI Send Position is from 00 to 99.
By default, ANI Send Position is 00.
Step 55
Is ANI Available (Outbound)-This parameter indicates the Group A tone (received from the inbound tone) that should
be interpreted as a question by the inbound end asking the outbound end whether the outbound end has ANI digits to be
sent.
Use following command to program Is ANI Available (Outbound):
7111-1-DS1-Is ANI Available (Outbound)
7111-2-DS1-DS1-Is ANI Available (Outbound)
7111-*-Is ANI Available (Outbound)
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
Is ANI Available (Outbound) is Group A tone from 00 to 15. If no question by the inbound end, set this parameter to 00.
By default, Is ANI Available is 05.
Step 56
Positive Response to Is ANI Available (Outbound)-This parameter signifies the Group 1 tone that the outbound end
will send to the inbound end as a response to Is ANI Available tone from the inbound end. The tone defined in this
parameters indicates the Group 1 tone with which the Outbound end will respond to the inbound end to indicate that it
has ANI digits to be sent.
Use the following command to program the Positive Response to Is ANI Available (Outbound):
7112-1-DS1-Positive Response to Is ANI Available
7112-2-DS1-DS1-Positive Response to Is ANI Available
7112-*-Positive Response to Is ANI Available
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
Positive Response to Is ANI Available is a Group 1 tone from 01 to 15.
By default, Positive Response to Is ANI Available is 01.
Step 57
Negative Response to Is ANI Available (Outbound)-This parameter signifies the Group 1 tone that the outbound end
will send to the inbound end as a response to Is ANI Available tone from the inbound end. The tone defined in this
parameter indicates the Group 1 tone with which the Outbound end will respond to the inbound end to indicate that it
does not have ANI digits to be sent.
Use following command to program the Negative Response to Is ANI Available (Outbound):
7113-1-DS1-Negative Response to Is ANI Available
7113-2-DS1-DS1-Negative Response to Is ANI Available
7113-*-Negative Response to Is ANI Available
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
Negative Response to Is ANI Available is a Group 1 tone from 01 to 15.
By default, Negative Response to Is ANI Available is 10.
Step 58
ANI End Tone with Presentation Allowed (Outbound)-This parameter signifies the Group 1 tone used to signify end of
ANI digits with Presentation Allowed.
Use the following command to program the End of ANI with Presentation Allowed (Outbound):
7114-1-DS1-ANI End Tone with Presentation Allowed (Outbound)
7114-2-DS1-DS1-ANI End Tone with Presentation Allowed (Outbound)
7114-*-ANI End Tone with Presentation Allowed (Outbound)
Matrix
326 Eternity V8 System Manual
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
ANI End Tone with Presentation Allowed (Outbound) is a Group 1 tone from 00, 11 to 15. If no such tone is sent, set this
parameter to 00.
By default, ANI End Tone with Presentation Allowed (Outbound) is 15.
Step 59
ANI End Tone with Presentation Restrict (Outbound)-This parameter signifies the Group 1 tone used to signify end of
ANI digits with Presentation Restricted.
Use the following command to program the End of ANI with Presentation Restricted (Outbound):
7115-1-DS1-ANI End Tone with Presentation Restrict (Outbound)
7115-2-DS1-DS1-ANI End Tone with Presentation Restrict (Outbound)
7115-*-ANI End Tone with Presentation Restrict (Outbound)
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
ANI End Tone with Presentation Restrict (Outbound) is a Group 1 tone from 00, 11 to 15. If no such tone is sent, set this
parameter to 00.
By default, ANI End Tone with Presentation Restrict (Outbound) is 00.
Step 60
DNIS Digit Length (Inbound)-This parameter specifies the number of DNIS digits that are expected by the Inbound end
to indicate the Called party number during MFC R2 signaling.
Use following command to program the DNIS Digit Length:
7116-1-DS1-DNIS Digit Length
7116-2-DS1-DS1-DNIS Digit Length
7116-*-DNIS Digit Length
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
DNIS Digit Length is from 01 to 99.
By default, DNIS Digit Length is 99.
DNIS Digit length (01 to 98) will be expected by the inbound end. (Practical value would be 01 to 10)
DNIS Digit length 99 indicates DNIS length is variable. Further action is taken after timeout or on receipt of I-15. Refer
parameter DNIS End Type (Inbound).
Step 61
ANI Request Position (Inbound)-The inbound end may request/may not request ANI digits. It may request ANI digits
after receiving first DNIS or after receiving second DNIS or even after receiving all the DNIS digits.
Use following command to program the number of DNIS digits after which ANI digits should be requested by the inbound
end:
7117-1-DS1-ANI Request Position
7117-2-DS1-DS1-ANI Request Position
7117-*-ANI Request Position
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
ANI Request Position is from 00, 01 to 99.
ANI Request Position=00 indicates Never request ANI digits.
ANI Request Position=01 to 98 indicates Request ANI digits on receipt of these many DNIS digits.
ANI Request Position = 99 indicates Request after receiving all the DNIS digits (complete DNIS).
By default, ANI Request Position is 99.
Step 62
ANI Length (Inbound)-This parameter signifies the number
of ANI digits that would be expected by the inbound side as Calling Party Number during MFC R2 signaling. This
parameter at the inbound side guides the inbound register to switch from requesting ANI digits back to requesting DID
digits.
Use following command to program ANI Length (Inbound):
7118-1-DS1-ANI Length
7118-2-DS1-DS1-ANI Length
7118-*-ANI Length
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
ANI Length = 00 to 99.
Matrix
Eternity V8 System Manual 327
By default, ANI Length is 99.
ANI Length=00 indicates ANI is not sent by the Outbound end.
ANI Length = 99 indicates ANI Length is variable. If ANI length is variable, the logic waits for End of ANI from the
outbound side. The inbound end will sense for I-12 and I-15. I-12 is used to signify that no ANI digits are available
whereas I-15 is used to signify end of ANI digits. Some countries like China use I-15 to signify both the events viz. End of
ANI and no ANI digits available.
Step 63
Ask ANI (Inbound)-This parameter specifies the backward group A tone used to ask the outbound end whether it has
ANI digits to be sent. This parameter is also known as Request ANI Category.
Use following command to program the ASK ANI available:
7119-1-DS1-ASK ANI
7119-2-DS1-DS1-ASK ANI
7119-*-ASK ANI
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
ASK ANI Available is from 00 or 01 to 15.
If no such tone is sent by the inbound end, set this parameter to 00. For India, this should be set to 04
By default, Ask ANI (Inbound) is 05.
Step 64
Positive Response to Ask ANI (Inbound)-This parameter specifies the Group 1 forward tone to be received by the
inbound end from the outbound which would indicate that Outbound end has ANI digits to be sent. This parameter is also
known as ANI category.
Use following command to program Positive Response to Ask ANI:
7120-1-DS1-Positive Response to Ask ANI
7120-2-DS1-DS1-Positive Response to Ask ANI
7120-*-Positive Response to Ask ANI
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
Positive Response to Ask ANI is from 01 to 15.
This cannot be zero. This is because; Is ANI Available request would be made by the inbound end only if the country
supports this protocol. In such event, Is ANI Available request will be responded to.
For e.g., In India I-1 or I-10 is sent by the Outbound end. In Kuwait, I-6 is sent.
By default, Positive Response to Ask ANI is 01.
Step 65
Negative Response to Ask ANI (Inbound)-This parameter specifies the Group 1 forward tone to be received by the
inbound end from the outbound which would indicate that Outbound end has ANI digits to be sent. This parameter is also
known as ANI category.
Use following command to program Negative Response to Ask ANI:
7121-1-DS1-Negative Response to Ask ANI
7121-2-DS1-DS1-Negative Response to Ask ANI
7121-*-Negative Response to Ask ANI
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
Negative Response to Ask ANI is from 01 to 15.
This cannot be zero. This is because; Is ANI Available request would be made by the inbound end only if the country
supports this protocol. In such event, Is ANI Available request will be responded to.
For e.g., In India I-1 or I-10 is sent by the Outbound end. In Kuwait, I-6 is sent.
By default, Negative Response to Ask ANI is 10.
Step 66
ANI End Tone Presentation Allowed (Inbound)-This parameter specifies the Group I tone that the inbound end should
expect from the outbound end to consider End of ANI digits with an information that the Presentation of ANI by the
outbound end is allowed.
Use following command to program the ANI End Tone Presentation Allowed:
7122-1-DS1-ANI End Tone Presentation Allowed
7122-2-DS1-DS1-ANI End Tone Presentation Allowed
7122-*-ANI End Tone Presentation Allowed
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
Matrix
328 Eternity V8 System Manual
ANI End Tone Presentation Allowed is 00 or 11 to 15. If no such tone is sent, set this parameter to 00. For e.g. India uses
A-4, China uses A-1, etc.
By default, ANI End Tone Presentation Allowed is 15.
Step 67
ANI End Tone Presentation Restricted (Inbound)-This parameter specifies the Group I tone that the inbound end
should expect from the outbound end to consider End of ANI digits with an information that the Presentation of ANI by the
outbound end is Restricted.
Use following command to program the ANI End Tone Presentation Restricted:
7123-1-DS1-ANI End Tone Presentation Restricted
7123-2-DS1-DS1-ANI End Tone Presentation Restricted
7123-*-ANI End Tone Presentation Restricted
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
ANI End Tone Presentation Restricted is 00 or 11 to 15. If no such tone is sent, set this parameter to 00. For e.g. India
uses A-4, China uses A-1, etc.
By default, ANI End Tone Presentation Restricted (Inbound) is 00.
Step 68
Ordinary Subscriber-This parameter specifies the forward group II tone used to inform the inbound end that the calling
party is an Ordinary Subscriber. This signal is sent in response to Calling Party Category signal Request from the
inbound end.
Use following command to program the Ordinary Subscriber:
7124-1-DS1-Ordinary Subscriber
7124-2-DS1-DS1-Ordinary Subscriber
7124-*-Ordinary Subscriber
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
Ordinary Subscriber is from 00, 01 to 15. Use 00 when this parameter is not applicable.
By default, Ordinary Subscriber is 01.
Step 69
Priority Subscriber-This parameter specifies the forward group II tone used to inform the inbound end that the calling
party is a Priority Subscriber. This signal is sent in response to Calling Party Category signal Request from the inbound
end.
Use following command to program the Priority Subscriber:
7125-1-DS1-Priority Subscriber
7125-2-DS1-DS1-Priority Subscriber
7125-*-Priority Subscriber
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
Priority Subscriber is from 00, 01 to 15. Use 00 when this parameter is not applicable.
By default, Priority Subscriber is 02.
Step 70
Maintenance Equipment-This parameter specifies the forward group II tone used to inform the inbound end that the
calling party is maintenance equipment.
Use following command to program the Maintenance Equipment:
7126-1-DS1-Maintenance Equipment
7126-2-DS1-DS1-Maintenance Equipment
7126-*-Maintenance Equipment
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
Maintenance Equipment is from 00, 01 to 15. Use 00 when this parameter is not applicable.
By default, Maintenance Equipment is 03.
Step 71
Operator-This parameter specifies the forward group II tone used to inform the inbound end that the calling party is
Operator.
Use following command to program the Operator:
7127-1-DS1-Operator
7127-2-DS1-DS1-Operator
Matrix
Eternity V8 System Manual 329
7127-*-Operator
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
Operator is from 00, 01 to 15. Use 00 when this parameter is not applicable.
By default, Operator is 05.
Step 72
Pay Phone-This parameter specifies the forward group II tone used to inform the inbound end that the calling party is
Pay Phone (Coin box).
Use following command to program the Pay Phone:
7128-1-DS1-Pay Phone
7128-2-DS1-DS1-Pay Phone
7128-*-Pay Phone
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
Operator is from 00, 01 to 15. Use 00 when this parameter is not applicable.
By default, Pay Phone is 00.
Step 73
Data Transmission-This parameter specifies the forward group II tone used to inform the inbound end that the call is a
Data Call.
Use following command to program the Data Transmission:
7129-1-DS1-Data Transmission
7129-2-DS1-DS1-Data Transmission
7129-*-Data Transmission
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
Data Transmission is from 00, 01 to 15. Use 00 when this parameter is not applicable.
By default, Data Transmission is 06.
Step 74
Interception Operator-This parameter specifies the forward group II tone used to inform the inbound end that the call is
from Interception Operator. This is used in Singapore.
Use following command to program the Interception Operator:
7130-1-DS1-Interception Operator
7130-2-DS1-DS1-Interception Operator
7130-*-Interception Operator
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
Interception Operator is from 00, 01 to 15. Use 00 when this parameter is not applicable.
By default, Interception Operator is 00.
Step 75
Send next Digit (N+1)-This parameter specifies the backward group A tone used to request next digit, be it ANI digit or
DNIS digit.
Use following command to program the Send next Digit:
7131-1-DS1-Send Next Digit
7131-2-DS1-DS1-Send Next Digit
7131-*-Send Next Digit
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
Send next Digit is 00, 01 to 15. 00 is used for No tone.
For e.g. India uses A-1 to signify event Send DNIS Digit.
By default, Send Next Digit is 01.
Step 76
Send last but one Digit (N-1)-This parameter specifies the backward group A tone used to request last but one digit i.e.
N-1 digit, be it ANI digit or DNIS digit.
Use following command to program the Send last but one Digit:
7132-1-DS1-Send Last But One Digit
7132-2-DS1-DS1-Send Last But One Digit
Matrix
330 Eternity V8 System Manual
7132-*-Send Last But One Digit
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
Send Last But One Digit is 00, 01 to 15. 00 is used for No tone.
For e.g. India uses A-9 to signify event Send last but one digit.
By default, Send Last But One Digit (N-1) is 02.
Step 77
Send last but two digit (N-2)-This parameter specifies the backward group A tone used to request last but two digit i.e.
N-2 digit. Be it ANI digit or DNIS digit.
Use following command to program the Send last but two digit:
7134-1-DS1-Send Last But Two Digit
7134-2-DS1-DS1-Send Last But Two Digit
7134-*-Send Last But Two Digit
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
Send Last But Two Digit is 00, 01 to 15. 00 is used for No tone.
For e.g. India uses A-7 to signify event Send last but two digit.
By default, Send Last But Two Digit (N-2) is 07.
Step 78
Send last but three Digit (N-3)-This parameter specifies the backward group A tone used to request last but three digit
i.e. N-3 digit. Be it ANI digit or DNIS digit.
Use following command to program the Send Last But Three Digit:
7135-1-DS1-Send Last But Three Digit
7135-2-DS1-DS1-Send Last But Three Digit
7135-*-Send Last But Three Digit
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
Send last but three digit is 00, 01 to 15. 00 is used for No tone.
For e.g. India uses A-8 to signify event Send last but three digit.
By default, Send Last But Three Digit is 08.
Step 79
Address-Complete, Change over to reception of Group B signals-This parameter specifies the backward group A
tone used to inform the inbound end that the incoming register at the inbound end needs no additional address digit and
is about to go over to transmission of a group B signal conveying the status of the equipment at the subscriber at the
inbound end.
Use following command to program the Address-Complete, Change over to reception of Group B signals:
7136-1-DS1-Address-Complete, Change Over to Reception of Group B Signals
7136-2-DS1-DS1-Address-Complete, Change Over to Reception of Group B Signals
7136-*-Address-Complete, Change Over to Reception of Group B Signals
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
Address-Complete, Change Over to Reception of Group B Signals is 00, 01 to 15. 00 is used for No tone.
By default, Address-Complete, Change Over to Reception of Group B Signals is 03.
Step 80
Send Calling Party Category and Change to Group C-This parameter specifies the backward group A tone used by
the inbound end to request Calling Party Category from the outbound end. This tone also informs the outbound end to
change to reception of Group C signal. This signal is used in Mexico.
Use following command to program the Send Calling Party Category and Change to Group C:
7137-1-DS1-Send Calling Party Category and Change to Group C
7137-2-DS1-DS1-Send Calling Party Category and Change to Group C
7137-*-Send Calling Party Category and Change to Group C
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
Send Calling Party Category and change to Group C is from 00, 01 to 15. 00 is used for No tone.
By default, Send Calling Party Category and Change to Group C is 00.
Matrix
Eternity V8 System Manual 331
Step 81
Congestion in National Network-This parameter specifies the backward group A tone used to inform the congestion at
the inbound end.
Use following command to program congestion in the National Network
7138-1-DS1-Congestion in National Network
7138-2-DS1-DS1-Congestion in National Network
7138-*-Congestion in National Network
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
Congestion in National Network is 00, 01 to 15. 00 is used for No tone.
By default, Congestion in National Network is 04.
Step 82
Send Caller Partys Category-This parameter specifies the backward group A tone used to request calling party
category.
Use following command to program the Send caller partys category:
7139-1-DS1-Send Caller Party Category
7139-2-DS1-DS1-Send Caller Party Category
7139-*-Send Caller Party Category
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
Send Caller Party Category is 00, 01 to 15. 00 is used for No tone.
For e.g. India uses A-7 to signify event Send last but two digit.
By default, Send Calling Partys Category is 05.
Step 83
Address-Complete, Charge, Set-up Speech Conditions-This parameter specifies the backward group A tone used to
inform the inbound end that the incoming register at the inbound end needs no additional address digit, but will not send
Group B signals. Also charge the call on answer.
Use following command to program the Address-Complete, Charge, Set-up Speech Conditions of Group B signals:
7140-1-DS1-Address-Complete, Charge, Set-up Speech Conditions
7140-2-DS1-DS1-Address-Complete, Charge, Set-up Speech Conditions
7140-*-Address-Complete, Charge, Set-up Speech Conditions
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
Address-Complete, Charge, Set-up Speech Conditions is 00, 01 to 15. 00 is used for No tone.
By default, Address-Complete, Charge Set-up Speech Conditions is 06.
Step 84
Repeat DNIS digits from beginning-This parameter specifies the backward group A tone used to inform the outbound
end to send all the DNIS digits from the beginning.
Use following command to program the repeat DNIS digits from beginning of Group B signals:
7141-1-DS1-Repeat DNIS Digits from Beginning
7141-2-DS1-DS1-Repeat DNIS Digits from Beginning
7141-*-Repeat DNIS Digits from Beginning
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
Repeat DNIS Digits from Beginning is from 00, 01 to 15. 00 is used for No tone.
By default, Repeat DNIS Digits from Beginning is 00.
Step 85
Send Next ANI Digit-This parameter specifies the backward group A tone used to request next (first) ANI digit.
Use following command to program the Send Next ANI Digit
7142-1-DS1-Send Next ANI Digit
7142-2-DS1-DS1-Send Next ANI Digit
7142-*-Send Next ANI Digit
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
Send Next ANI Digit is 00 or 01 to 15. If no such tone is sent, set this parameter to 00.
Few countries use different tone to request next ANI digit and next DNIS digits.
For e.g. India uses A-4, China uses A-1, etc.
By default, Send Next ANI Digit is 05.
Matrix
332 Eternity V8 System Manual
Step 86
Special Information Tone-This parameter specifies the backward group B tone used to inform the outbound end that the
call cannot be made through because of reasons beyond those which are considered by the Protocol and hence Special
Information tone will be sent to the calling party. The PBX should send only the Group B signal and then disconnect the
call.
Use following command to program the Send Special Information Tone:
7143-1-DS1-Send Special Information Tone
7143-2-DS1-DS1-Send Special Information Tone
7143-*-Send Special Information Tone
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
Send Special Information Tone is from 00, 01 to 15. 00 is used for No tone.
By default, Send Special Information Tone is 02.
Step 87
Special Information Tone, and setup Speech Conditions-This parameter specifies the backward group B tone used to
inform the outbound end that the call cannot be made through because of reasons beyond those which are considered
by the Protocol and hence Special information tone will be sent to the calling party and request the outbound end to setup
speech conditions. In this case, the PBX will connect the calling party to the voice message of the PBX informing the
caller that the call cannot be connected. This is required in countries like Argentina. This is same as a condition Call
rejected, No indication of cause. This signal is also used in India to inform the caller that the called partys number is
changed and the caller should contact the Help desk of the Service Provider.
Use following command to program the Send Special Information Tone and Setup Speech Condition:
7144-1-DS1-Send Special Information Tone and Setup Speech Conditions
7144-2-DS1-DS1-Send Special Information Tone and Setup Speech Conditions
7144-*-Send Special Information Tone and Setup Speech Conditions
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
Send Special Information Tone, and Setup Speech Conditions is from 00, 01 to 15. 00 is used for No tone.
By default, Send Special Information Tone and Setup Speech Conditions is 02.

Step 88
Subscriber line busy-This parameter specifies the backward group B tone used to inform the outbound end that the
called subscriber is busy.
Use following command to program the subscriber line busy:
7145-1-DS1-Subscriber Line Busy
7145-2-DS1-DS1-Subscriber Line Busy
7145-*-Subscriber Line Busy
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
Subscriber Line Busy is from 00, 01 to 15. 00 is used for No tone.
By default, Subscriber Line Busy is 03.
Step 89
Subscriber line free, charge-This parameter specifies the backward group B tone used to inform the outbound end that
the called subscriber is free and the call is to be charged on answer.
Use following command to program the subscriber line free, charge:
7146-1-DS1-Subscriber Line Free, Charge
7146-2-DS1-DS1-Subscriber Line Free, Charge
7146-*-Subscriber Line Free, Charge
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
Subscriber Line Free, Charge is from 00, 01 to 15. 00 is used for No tone.
By default, Subscriber Line Free, Charge is 06.
Step 90
Subscriber line free, No charge-This parameter specifies the backward group B tone used to inform the outbound end
that the called subscriber is free but the call is not to be charged on answer. This signal permits nonchargeable calls
without the need for transferring no charge information by line signals.
Use following command to program the subscriber line free, no charge:
7147-1-DS1-Subscriber Line Free, NO Charge
7147-2-DS1-DS1-Subscriber Line Free, NO Charge
Matrix
Eternity V8 System Manual 333
7147-*-Subscriber Line Free, NO Charge
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
Subscriber Line Free, NO Charge is from 00, 01 to 15. 00 is used for No tone.
By default, Subscriber Line Free, NO Charge is 07.
Step 91
Congestion-This parameter specifies the backward group A tone used to inform that congestion is encountered after
changeover from Group-A to Group-B signals.
Use following command to program Congestion:
7148-1-DS1-Congestion
7148-2-DS1-DS1-Congestion
7148-*-Congestion
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
Congestion is from 00, 01 to 15. 00 is used for No tone.
By default, Congestion is 04.
Step 92
Unallocated Number-This parameter specifies the backward group B tone used to inform the outbound end that the
number received is not in use.
Use following command to program the Unallocated Number:
7149-1-DS1-Unallocated Number
7149-2-DS1-DS1-Unallocated Number
7149-*-Unallocated Number
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
Unallocated Number is from 00, 01 to 15. 00 is used for No tone.
By default, Unallocated Number is 05.
Step 93
Subscribers line out of order-This parameter specifies the backward group B tone used to inform the outbound end
that the called subscribers line is out of order
Use following command to program the subscribers line out of order:
7150-1-DS1-Subscribers Line out of Order
7150-2-DS1-DS1-Subscribers Line out of Order
7150-*-Subscribers Line out of Order
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
Subscribers Line out of order is from 00, 01 to 15. 00 is used for No tone.
By default, Subscribers Line Out of Order is 08.
Step 94
Reject Call due to R2MF Tone-This parameter specifies the Group B backward tone used to inform the outbound end
that the call is rejected but there is no indication of cause.
Use following command to program the Call rejected, No indication of cause:
7151-1-DS1-Reject Call due to R2MF Tone
7151-2-DS1-DS1-Reject Call due to R2MF Tone
7151-*-Reject Call due to R2MF Tone
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
Reject Call due to R2MF Tone is from 00 to 15.
By default, Reject Call due to R2MF Tone is 00.
Step 95
Alternative Answer Tone-This parameter specifies the Group B backward tone used to inform the outbound end that
the call is accepted and the speech path is made through. This is same as A-6. This is required in few countries like
Czech Republic.
Use following command to program the Alternative Answer Tone:
7152-1-DS1-Alternative Answer Tone
7152-2-DS1-DS1-Alternative Answer Tone
7152-*-Alternative Answer Tone
Matrix
334 Eternity V8 System Manual
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
Alternative Answer Tone is from 00, 01 to 15. Use 00 when this parameter is not applicable.
By default, Alternative Answer Tone is 00.
Step 96
Changed Number (Announcement on line)-This parameter specifies the Group B backward tone used to inform the
outbound end that the number dialed by the calling party is changed. However, this parameter will be rarely used. Please
note that VM should be assigned for this feature.
Use following command to program the Changed Number (announcement on line):
7153-1-DS1-Changed Number (announcement on line)
7153-2-DS1-DS1-Changed Number (announcement on line)
7153-*-Changed Number (announcement on line)
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
Changed Number (announcement on line) is from 00, 01-15. Use 00 when this parameter is not applicable.
By default, Changed Number (announcement on line) is 00.
Step 97
Send next ANI digit (group C)-This parameter specifies the backward group C tone to request next (even first) ANI digit
from the outbound end.
Use following command to program the Send next ANI digit (Group C):
7154-1-DS1-Send Next ANI Digit (Group C)
7154-2-DS1-DS1-Send Next ANI Digit (Group C)
7154-*-Send Next ANI Digit (Group C)
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
Send next ANI digit (Group C) is from 00, 01 to 15. Use 00 when this parameter is not applicable.
This parameter is applicable in Mexico only.
By default, Send Next ANI Digit (Group C) is 00.
Step 98
Request transition to Group A and restart from first DNIS (Group C)-This parameter specifies the backward group C
tone to restart from first DNIS and request transition to Group A.
Use following command to program the Request transition to Group A and restart from first DNIS.
7155-1-DS1-Request Transition to Group A and Restart from First DNIS
7155-2-DS1-DS1-Request Transition to Group A and Restart from First DNIS
7155-*-Request Transition to Group A and Restart from First DNIS
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
Request Transition to Group A and Restart from First DNIS is from 00, 01 to 15. Use 00 when this parameter is not
applicable.
This parameter is applicable in Mexico only.
By default, Request Transition to Group A and Restart from First DNIS is 00.
Step 99
Address completed, change to reception of Group B (Group C)-This parameter specifies the backward group C tone
used to signify Address completed, change to reception of Group B signal.
Use following command to program the Address completed, change to reception of Group B signal:
7156-1-DS1-Address Completed, Change to Reception of Group B Signal
7156-2-DS1-DS1-Address Completed, Change to Reception of Group B Signal
7156-*-Address Completed, Change to Reception of Group B Signal
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
Address Completed, Change to Reception of Group B Signal is from 00, 01 to 15. Use 00 when this parameter is not
applicable.
This parameter is applicable in Mexico only.
By default, Address Completed, Change to Reception of Group B Signal is 00.
Step 100
Congestion (Group C)-This parameter specifies the backward group C tone used to signify Congestion
Use following command to program the tone for Congestion:
Matrix
Eternity V8 System Manual 335
7157-1-DS1-Congestion
7157-2-DS1-DS1-Congestion
7157-*-Congestion
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
Congestion is from 00, 01 to 15. Use 00 when this parameter is not applicable.
By default, Congestion is 00.
This parameter is applicable in Mexico only.
Step 101
Request transition back to Group A, and sent next DNIS (Group C)-This parameter specifies the backward group C
tone used to signify request transition back to group A, and send next DNIS.
Use following command to program the tone for request transition back to group A, and send next DNIS signal:
7158-1-DS1-Request Transition Back to Group A, and Send Next DNIS
7158-2-DS1-DS1-Request Transition Back to Group A, and Send Next DNIS
7158-*-Request Transition Back to Group A, and Send Next DNIS
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
Request transition back to group A, and send next DNIS is from 00, 01 to 15. Use 00 when this parameter is not
applicable.
This parameter is applicable in Mexico only.
By default, Request Transition Back to Group A, and Send Next DNIS is 00.
Step 102
Request transition back to Group A, and restart the last DNIS (Group C)-This parameter specifies the backward
group C tone used to signify request transition back to group A, and repeat the last DNIS
Use following command to program the tone for request transition back to group A, and repeat the last DNIS:
7159-1-DS1-Request Transition Back to Group A, and Restart the Last DNIS
7159-2-DS1-DS1-Request Transition Back to Group A, and Restart the Last DNIS
7159-*-Request Transition Back to Group A, and Restart the Last DNIS
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
Request Transition Back to Group A, and Restart the Last DNIS is from 00, 01 to 15. Use 00 when this parameter is not
applicable.
This parameter is applicable in Mexico only.
By default, Request Transition Back to Group A and Restart the Last DNIS is 00.
Step 103
CD-Bits-This parameter indicates the default values of C and D bits when the Eternity transmits line signals.
Use following command to program the CD Bits for DS1 port:
7161-1-DS1-CD Bits
7161-2-DS1-DS1-CD Bits
7161-*-CD Bits
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
By default, CD Bits is 1.
Note:
The C and D bits received during an IC call are ignored by the Eternity.
Step 104
Invert Bit A-This parameter signifies that A-bit should be inverted before transmitting and on receiving.
Use following command to program to invert/dont invert Bit A for the DS1 port:
7162-1-DS1-Invert Bit A
7162-2-DS1-DS1-Invert Bit A
7162-*-Invert Bit A
CD Bits Meaning (Binary Value)
0 00 (C=0, D=0)
1 01
2 10
3 11
Matrix
336 Eternity V8 System Manual
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
By default, Invert Bit A is 0.
Step 105
Invert Bit B-This parameter signifies that B-bit should be inverted before transmitting and on receiving.
Use following command to program to invert/dont invert Bit B for the DS1 port:
7163-1-DS1-Invert Bit B
7163-2-DS1-DS1-Invert Bit B
7163-*-Invert Bit B
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
By default, Invert Bit B is 0.
Step 106
Invert Bit C-This parameter signifies that C-bit should be inverted before transmitting and on receiving.
Use following command to program to invert/dont invert Bit C for the DS1 port:
7164-1-DS1-Invert Bit C
7164-2-DS1-DS1-Invert Bit C
7164-*-Invert Bit C
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
By default, Invert Bit C is 0.
Step 107
Invert Bit D-This parameter signifies that D-bit should be inverted before transmitting and on receiving.
Use following command to program to invert/dont invert Bit D for the DS1 port:
7165-1-DS1-Invert Bit D
7165-2-DS1-DS1-Invert Bit D
7165-*-Invert Bit D
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
By default, Invert Bit D is 0.
Step 108
E1 Metering Bit-This parameter signifies the bit used by the network to signal metering pulses.
Use following command to program the E1 Metering Bit for the DS1 port:
7166-1-DS1-E1 Metering Bit
7166-2-DS1-DS1-E1 Metering Bit
7166-*-E1 Metering Bit
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
Invert Bit A Meaning
0 Dont Invert
1 Invert
Invert Bit B Meaning
0 Dont Invert
1 Invert
Invert Bit B Meaning
0 Dont Invert
1 Invert
Invert Bit D Meaning
0 Dont Invert
1 Invert
E1 Metering Bit Meaning
0 None
1 Bit-A
Matrix
Eternity V8 System Manual 337
By default, E1 Metering Bit is 1.
Step 109
E1 Metering Pulse Minimum Timer-This timer signifies the minimum time for which the metering bit should change to
be recognized as a genuine metering pulse subject to E1 Metering Pulse Maximum timer. All changes occurred for time
less than this timer will be ignored. This parameter is applicable only for E1 lines with R2 MFC signaling.
Use following command to program the Metering Pulse Minimum timer for the DS1 port:
7167-1-DS1-E1 Metering Pulse Minimum Timer
7167-2-DS1-DS1-E1 Metering Pulse Minimum Timer
7167-*-E1 Metering Pulse Minimum Timer
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
E1 Metering Pulse Minimum timer is from 20ms to 1000ms.
By default, E1 Metering Pulse Minimum Timer is 150ms.
Step 110
Clear Back Signal-This parameter signifies the signal used
to signify that the called party has disconnected the line first. This is indicated in two ways viz. Release guard signal or
forced release signal. This is country dependent.
Use following command to program the Clear Back Signal for the DS1 port:
7168-1-DS1-Clear Back Signal
7168-2-DS1-DS1-Clear Back Signal
7168-*-Clear Back Signal
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
By default, Clear Back Signal is 1.
Step 111
Release Timer-This timer signifies the time for which the clear back signal should persist on the line to be recognized as
a genuine clear back signal. This is also known as Clear Back timer.
Use following command to program the Release Timer for the DS1 port:
7169-1-DS1-Release Timer
7169-2-DS1-DS1-Release Timer
7169-*-Release Timer
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
Release Timer is from 20ms to 1000ms.
By default, Release Timer is 400 ms.
Step 112
Line Seizure Acknowledge Wait Timer-This timer signifies the time for which the outbound end waits for seizure
acknowledgment from the inbound end after sending the line seizure signal. On expiry of this timer, Clear forward signal
is sent by the outbound end. Alarm will be generated. This timer is applicable only when acting as Outbound end.
Use following command to program Line seizure acknowledge wait timer:
7170-1-DS1-Line Seizure Acknowledge Wait Timer
7170-2-DS1-DS1-Line Seizure Acknowledge Wait Timer
7170-*-Line Seizure Acknowledge Wait Timer
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
Line Seizure Acknowledge Wait Timer is from 0001 to 9999 milli seconds.
By default, Line Seizure Acknowledge Wait Timer is 200ms.
2 Bit-B
3 Bit-C
4 Bit-D
Clear Back Signal Meaning
1 Release Guard (Ab=1)
2 Forced Release (Bb=0)
E1 Metering Bit Meaning
Matrix
338 Eternity V8 System Manual
Step 113
Release Guard Timer-This timer signifies the time for which inbound register waits before declaring the channel idle
(sending idle signal) when clear forward line signal is received from the outbound end. This timer is also applicable for
Forced Release signal. This timer is applicable only when acting as Inbound end.
Use following command to program Release Guard Timer:
7171-1-DS1-Release Guard Timer
7171-2-DS1-DS1-Release Guard Timer
7171-*-Release Guard Timer
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
DS1 Release Guard Timer is from 0000 to 9999 milliseconds.
By default, Release Guard Timer is 200ms. This timer depends on the speed of switching and processing.
Step 114
Programming of 'E&M on DS1 port'
Eternity supports E&M protocol on DS1 port. Both E1 E&M and T1 E&M can be used as options of signaling type of
DS1 port. To use E&M on DS1, follow the steps mentioned below:
Select the signal type/line type as ISDN_E1_ E&M or ISDN_T1_ E&M.
Use following command to program signalling type/ Line type of a DS1:
6105-1-DS1-Line Type
6105-2-DS1-DS1-Line Type
6105-*-Line Type
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
By default, signalling type/line type of a DS1 is 1.
Assign E&M Feature template to DS1 using following command
Use Following command to assign E&M Feature Template to DS1 Port
6004-1-DS1-Template Number
6004-2-DS1-DS1- Template Number
6004-*- Template Number
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
Template Number is 01 to 50.
By default, Template 01 is assigned to DS1.
Now proceed to program other parameters for E&M on DS1 using following commands:
Use following command to select B Bit Value Same as A
7191-1-DS1-Code
7191-2-DS1-DS1-Code
7191-*-Code
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
By default, the Code is 1 (Same as A bit)
Line Type Meaning
1 ISDN_E1_PRI
2 ISDN_T1_PRI
3 ISDN_E1_CAS
4 ISDN_T1_RBS
5 ISDN_E1_QSIG
6 ISDN_T1_QSIG
7 ISDN_E1_E&M
8 ISDN_T1_E&M
Code Meaning
1 Same as A bit
2 Fixed Value
Matrix
Eternity V8 System Manual 339
Use following command to program B Bit Value
7192-1-DS1-B Bit Value
7192-2-DS1-DS1- B Bit Value
7192-*- B Bit Value
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
B bit value can be 0 or 1.
By default, B bit value is 0.
Use following command to program CD Bit Value
7193-1-DS1-CD Bit Value
7193-2-DS1-DS1-CD Bit Value
7193-*- CD Bit Value
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
CD bit value can be 1 or 3.
By default, CD bit value is 1.
Use following command to program to invert/don't invert Bit A for the DS1 port:
7162-1-DS1-Invert Bit A
7162-2-DS1-DS1-Invert Bit A
7162-*-Invert Bit A
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
By default, Invert Bit A is 0.
Use following command to program to invert/don't invert Bit B for the DS1 port:
7163-1-DS1-Invert Bit B
7163-2-DS1-DS1-Invert Bit B
7163-*-Invert Bit B
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
By default, Invert Bit B is 0.
Use following command to program to invert/don't invert Bit C for the DS1 port:
7164-1-DS1-Invert Bit C
7164-2-DS1-DS1-Invert Bit C
7164-*-Invert Bit C
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
By default, Invert Bit C is 0.
Use following command to program to invert/don't invert Bit D for the DS1 port:
7165-1-DS1-Invert Bit D
7165-2-DS1-DS1-Invert Bit D
7165-*-Invert Bit D
Where,
Invert Bit A Meaning
0 Do not invert
1 Invert
Invert Bit B Meaning
0 Do not invert
1 Invert
Invert Bit C Meaning
0 Do not invert
1 Invert
Matrix
340 Eternity V8 System Manual
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
By default, Invert Bit D is 0.
Use the following command to program the line build out parameters of a DS1:
6162-1-DS1-Code
6162-2-DS1-DS1-Code
6162-*-Code
Where,
DS1 is from 1 to 8.
By default, code is 8 = -22.5 dB or equidistance
Relevant Topics:
1. Direct Dialing-In (DDI) 280
2. DDI Routing Table 238
3. T1 RBS Parameters 656
4. T1 Maintenance 650
5. E&M Feature Template 346
6. System Parameters 642
=X=X=
Invert Bit D Meaning
0 Do not invert
1 Invert
Code Meaning
1 0 - 133 ft.
2 133 - 266 ft.
3 266 - 399 ft.
4 399 - 533 ft.
5 533 - 655 ft.
6 -7.5 dB or equidistance
7 -16 dB or equidistance
8 -22.5 dB or equidistance
DS1 PERFORMANCE REPORT AS ON 06-11-2008(Thu) AT 09:57
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
PRBS Count 01 On DS1 Port 0 At 06-11-2008 On 09:57:03
PRBS Count 01 On DS1 Port 0 At 06-11-2008 On 09:57:04
PRBS Count 01 On DS1 Port 0 At 06-11-2008 On 09:57:05
PRBS Count 01 On DS1 Port 0 At 06-11-2008 On 09:57:06
PRBS Count 01 On DS1 Port 0 At 06-11-2008 On 09:57:07
PRBS Count 01 On DS1 Port 0 At 06-11-2008 On 09:57:08
PRBS Count 01 On DS1 Port 0 At 06-11-2008 On 09:57:09
PRBS Count 01 On DS1 Port 0 At 06-11-2008 On 09:57:10
PRBS Count 01 On DS1 Port 0 At 06-11-2008 On 09:57:11
PRBS Count 01 On DS1 Port 0 At 06-11-2008 On 09:57:12
PRBS Count 01 On DS1 Port 0 At 06-11-2008 On 09:57:13
PRBS Count 01 On DS1 Port 0 At 06-11-2008 On 09:57:14
PRBS Count 01 On DS1 Port 0 At 06-11-2008 On 09:57:15
PRBS Count 01 On DS1 Port 0 At 06-11-2008 On 09:57:16
PRBS Count 01 On DS1 Port 0 At 06-11-2008 On 09:57:17
PRBS Count 01 On DS1 Port 0 At 06-11-2008 On 09:57:18
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Eternity V08R01 Page : 1

Matrix
Eternity V8 System Manual 341
Dynamic Lock
Whats this?
A feature by which the station user can change the Toll Control Level (Office) and avoid misuse of local and long
Distance dialing in his absence without any interference by the System programmers.
How it works?
Eternity supports 4 levels of Toll Control. Level 0, Level 1, Level 2, Level 3.
A user can change the Toll Control level of the station based on his requirement.
The SA can change the Toll Control level of the station based on requirement remotely.
The changing of Toll Control level by the user operates with a 4-digit password. Each station user has his personal
password called User Password.
Toll Control level of the station can be changed in two ways (1). Manually (change the Toll Control level of the station
when required by dialing the required code and explicitly change it back when the requirement is over) and (2).
Automatically (the system changes the Toll Control Level to default Toll Control Level after a set time).
If the Toll Control Level is 0, then Toll control is time based. The outgoing call is allowed/denied as per the External
List assigned as Allowed List and Denied List for that time of the day by the SE.
If the Toll Control Level is 1, 2, 3 the outgoing call is Allowed/Denied as per the External List assigned as Allowed and
Denied Lists, to each level.
Eternity will check the Toll control as per dynamic lock level when dynamic locked station uses Redial and Auto
Redial feature.
How to use it?
Program the Timer
Where,
Minutes is 00 to 99.
By default, Minutes is 00.
Minutes specify delay in minutes after which the station changes the Toll Control Level. If it is programmed as 00, then
the user has to explicitly change the toll control level by dialing the required code.
Change Toll Control Level
Where,
1 Lift the handset. Dial tone
2 Dial 142-User Password-Minutes. Confirmation tone
1 Lift the handset. Dial tone
2 Dial 141-User Password-Level. Confirmation tone
Level Meaning
0 Timezone wise assigned AL and DL shall apply.
1 AL and DL assigned for Dynamic Toll Control Level 1 shall apply.
2 AL and DL assigned for Dynamic Toll Control Level 2 shall apply.
3 AL and DL assigned for Dynamic Toll Control Level 3 shall apply.
Eternity
Open
Open
Lock
Lock
Matrix
342 Eternity V8 System Manual
By default, meaning of lock level setting as per following table:
From SA Mode
Program the Timer
Where,
Minutes is 00 to 99.
By default Minutes is 00.
Change Toll Control Level
Where,
By default, meaning of lock level setting as per following table:
How to program?
Program the Allowed and Denied lists for different Toll Control Levels.Refer the topic Station Basic Feature Template for
more details.
Important Points:
The default password needs to be changed for changing the Toll Control Level by the user. Please refer the topic User
Password for more details on changing the password.
Refer chapter System Parameters for command to set Hotel Mode or Enterprise Mode of Eternity.
Please refer separate manual for more details about Hotel Applications.
Relevant Topics:
1. Toll Control 675
2. Station Basic Feature Template 569
3. User Password 699
4. Auto Redial 113
5. Last Number Redial 425
=X=X=
Level By default
0 Allow all calls
1 Lock STD + ISD Calls
2 Lock ISD Calls
3 Lock all calls
1 Lift the handset. Dial tone
2 Enter SA Mode. Dial tone
3
Dial 1072-002-Flexible Number-2-
Minutes.
Confirmation tone
1 Lift the handset. Dial tone
2 Enter SA Mode. Dial tone
3 Dial 1072-002-Flexible Number-1-Level. Confirmation tone
Level Meaning
0 Timezone wise assigned AL and DL shall apply.
1 AL and DL assigned for Dynamic Toll Control Level 1 shall apply.
2 AL and DL assigned for Dynamic Toll Control Level 2 shall apply.
3 AL and DL assigned for Dynamic Toll Control Level 3 shall apply.
Level By default
0 Allow all calls
1 Lock STD + ISD Calls
2 Lock ISD Calls
3 Lock all calls
Matrix
Eternity V8 System Manual 343
E&M Connectivity
Whats this?
E&M connectivity feature of Eternity offers seamless connectivity in PLCC network and also in between various
communication products like PBX, Router, Lease Line, etc.
E&M interface is widely used interface to connect such diverse equipment. For example, in a PLCC network, number
of PLCC EPAX needs to be connected. As shown in the figure 1 of PLCC network, number of EPAXs are connected
with each other through E&M tie lines.
Say, an existing PBX capacity needs to be expanded beyond the configuration limit of a PBX. Installing one more
PBX and connecting both the PBXs through E&M interfaces can get us the desired expansion.
Four different applications of E&M connectivity are shown below:
Figure 1: E&M Connectivity on PLCC-Network
How it works in PLCC network?
E&M interface is achieved using a Eternity ME Card E&M. An E&M port of Eternity-PLCC EPAX has dual personality,
both of a subscriber and a trunk. An E&M port works like a subscriber interface for any incoming call to it and works like
a trunk interface when any subscriber makes an outgoing call through it. However, please note that a trunk line cannot be
connected to an E&M port. Also a subscriber cannot be connected to an E&M port.



PLCC-EPAX (SID-61)
PLCC-EPAX
(SID-70)
PLCC-EPAX
(SID-52)
PLCC-EPAX
(SID-34)
PLCC-EPAX (SID-51)
E&M1 E&M2 E&M3
E1 E2 En
E1
E2
En
E&M1
E&M3
E&Mn
E&Mn
E&M1 E&M2 E&M3 E&Mn
E&M2
E1 E2 En
E1
E2
En
E&Mn
E&M1
E&M2
E&M3
E&Mn
E&M1
Matrix
344 Eternity V8 System Manual
Incoming call on an E&M port in PLCC network:
When any subscriber of PLCC EPAX with SID-51 grabs an E&M2 port, he gets dial tone of SID-61. Now he can call any
subscriber of SID-61 and use features like priority, conference, etc. just like a normal subscriber would do. However, this
E&M port needs to be programmed for the same.
Outgoing call using E&M port in PLCC network:
When any subscriber of PLCC EPAX-34 dials network access code (as per programming) and dials SID say 52, an
E&M1 port is grabbed (as it is programmed for the same). Now he can call any subscriber of SID-52 and establish
speech. However, this E&M port needs to be programmed as any other normal trunk like enabling the port, programming
the dial type, etc.
All E&M ports can be put together in one single group depending on the requirement. A separate access code can be
assigned to it. This makes the operations easy. Now the subscribers have at least two different access codes for making
outgoing calls using trunk lines and other for making outgoing calls using E&M tie lines.
PBX EXPANSION (2-SYSTEMS)
Figure 2: Two PBXs are connected using E&M interface.
In the above figure,
T1 to Tn are trunk lines from the local central office (CO).
S1 to Sn are stations.
E&M1 to E&Mn are E&M lines between two PBX systems.
Figure 3: PBX systems are connected through E&M connectivity.
PSTN PSTN
PBX-A PBX-B
T1
T2
Tn
E&M1
E&M2
E&M3
S1 S2 Sn S1 S2 Sn
T1
T2
Tn
E&M1
E&M2
E&M3
PSTN PSTN
PBX-A
(8x8x8)
PBX-B
(16x8)
PBX-C
(24x8)
T1
T2
Tn
S1 S2 S8 S1 S2 S16
2001 2002 ....... 2008
S1 S2 S24
T1
T2
Tn
3001 3002 ........ 3016
4001 4002 ........... 4024
E&M5
E&M6
E&M7
E&M8
E&M5
E&M6
E&M7
E&M8
E&M1 ............. E&M8
E&M1
E&M2
E&M3
E&M4
E&M1
E&M2
E&M3
E&M4
Matrix
Eternity V8 System Manual 345
Figure 4: Two PBX systems located far from each other connected to each other using E&M connectivity.
How it works?
E&M interface is achieved using an Eternity ME Card E&M. An E&M port of Eternity-PLCC EPAX has dual personality:
both of a station and a trunk. An E&M port works like a station interface for any incoming call to it and works like a trunk
interface when any station makes an outgoing call through it. However, please note that a trunk line cannot be connected
to an E&M port. Also a SLT or DKP cannot be connected to an E&M port.
Incoming call on an E&M port
When any station of PBX B grabs an E&M port, he gets dial tone of PBX A. This port of PBX A behaves as a SLT port.
Now he can call another station, grab a trunk, or use a feature like raid, etc. just like a normal station would do. However,
this E&M port needs to be programmed as any other normal station. Features like Class of Service, Toll Control, etc. will
apply to this port, if programmed.
Outgoing call using E&M port
When any station from PBX A makes an outgoing call through an E&M port, he dials trunk access code. The E&M port
behaves as trunk interface and gives the station, the dial tone of PBX B. Now he can dial any station of PBX B or grab a
trunk line of PBX B to make a call or use any feature depending on the station programming done by the SE of PBX B.
Hence the E&M port of PBX A should be programmed as any other normal trunk like enabling the port, programming the
dial type, etc.
All E&M ports can be put together in one single group or few groups depending on the requirement. A separate access
code can be assigned to it. This makes the operations easy. In such case the stations can have at least two different
access codes for making outgoing calls, one for making outgoing calls using trunk lines and other for making outgoing
calls using E&M lines. Generally, E&M connectivity is used to expand the PBX capacity or connect two or more remotely
located PBXs. This forms a network of PBXs. The requirement is that, so formed network should work as one Group.
This is commonly known as Closed User Group. Please refer Closed User Group (CUG) and Closed User Group-With
Exchange ID for more details.
How to program?
Please refer Station Basic Feature Template, Station Advanced Feature Template, Trunk Feature Template for more
details.
Relevant Topics:
1. Station Basic Feature Template 569
2. Station Advanced Feature Template 565
3. Trunk Feature Template 680
=X=X=
PSTN
PBX-A
S1 Sn
T1
T2
T3
2001 2099
E&M
PSTN
PBX-B
S1 Sn
T1
T2
T3
2001 2099
E&M
E&M
Router
E&M
Router
Lease
circuit,
VSAT
Matrix
346 Eternity V8 System Manual
E&M Feature Template
Whats this?
The E&M Feature Template is a set of general features that completely define the features specific to the E&M. The
Eternity offers 50 such Template, each of which can be programmed as per the requirement. However, by default the
system provides all the E&M Feature Template with commonly used values. An E&M template is assigned to all E&M
port.
How it works?
The E&M feature template contains features of the E&M like:
Status-To Enable/Disable the E&M port.
Service Provider ID-To assign a service provider to an E&M trunk.
Seizure Type-To program the Seizure type for an E&M.
Orientation Type: To program from trunk, station or tie line.
Wait Wink Timer: The time up to which system will wait for the acknowledgment in form of Wink signal on E wire
of E&M port of PBX, to consider it as successful seizure.
Seizure pulse width T1: It is the time period of first ON period of the seizure pulse.
Seizure pulse width T2: It is the time period of second ON period of the seizure pulse.
Seizure pulse width T3: It is the time period of third ON period of the seizure pulse.
Wink pulse width timer: It is one of the seizure type and is period of the seizure pulse.
Dial Type: To program the dial type for E&M.
Pulse Dial Ratio-To program the Pulse Dial Ratio for an E&M.
Release Type-Program suitable type.
Release Pulse Width Timer-To program release pulse width timer for E&M.
Maximum OG Pulse Digit Count-To program the maximum Out Pulse Digit Count from the E&M.
Compander Control Signal (When End Point)-To Enable/Disable CCS when E&M is used as End Point.
Compander Control Signal (When Transit Exchange)-To Enable/Disable CCS if E&M is used for Transit calls.
DTMF Detection-To Enable/Disable DTMF detection on an E&M.
Idle Wait Timer-To program the Idle Wait Timer for the E&M.
Flash Timer-To program the Flash Timer for the E&M.
Pause Timer-To program the Pause Timer for the E&M.
Forced Maturity Timer-To program forced maturity timer for E&M. This is the time period after which, the system
will consider the call as matured.
Ring Timer-To program the Ring Timer for the E&M.
Prefix String-To program for the Prefix String for E&M.
IDP: This parameter is set to a value (millisecond) for decoding the pulse digits. It is set to suitable value, which
can be detected by the device on remote end. The IDP will be used while using E&M Signaling on DS1 Port. For
this, the E&M template with suitable value of IDP should be assigned to the DS1 port. This value of programmed
IDP, will also be applicable while out dialing pulse digits from E&M Ports.
Immediate with Ack: Program this parameter for OG and IC calls using E&M port. Program the release type is
programmed as "Status Change" when this seizure type is used for Call Disconnection.
Each of the above mentioned feature is explained in detail in the topic E&M Features.
How to program?
Programming an E&M Feature Template
Use the following command to program the feature in an E&M Feature Template:
6002-1-Template Number-Parameter Number-Code
6002-2-Template Number-Template Number-Parameter Number-Code
6002-*-Parameter Number-Code
Where,
Template Number is 01 to 50.
Parameter Number is 01 to 24.
The commands explained below should be referred as:
To program a single port: XXXX-1
To program a range of ports: XXXX-2
To program all the ports: XXXX-*
Matrix
Eternity V8 System Manual 347
How to assign default values to an E&M Feature Template?
Use the following command to default an E&M Feature Template:
6001-1-Template Number
6001-2-Template Number-Template Number
6001-*
Where,
Template Number is 01 to 50.
Following table shows all the E&M Feature Template programmed by default.
How to assign an E&M Feature Template to an E&M?
Use the following command to assign an E&M Feature Template to an E&M:
6003-1-E&M-Template Number
6003-2-E&M-E&M-Template Number
6003-*-Template Number
Where,
E&M is from 001 to 128.
Template Number is 01 to 50.
By default, Template 01 is assigned to the E&M.
Use Following command to assign E&M Feature Template to T1E1PRI Port
6004-1-T1E1PRI-Template Number
6004-2-T1E1PRI-T1E1PRI-Template Number
6004-*-Template Number
Where,
T1E1PRI is from 1 to 8.
Template Number is 01 to 50.
By default, Template 01 is assigned to T1E1PRI.
Relevant Topics:
1. E&M Features 348
2. E&M Connectivity 343
3. Closed User Group-With Exchange ID 212
4. DS1 Trunks 307
=X=X=
Matrix
348 Eternity V8 System Manual
E&M Features
Whats this?
The E&M port of Eternity has dual personality: both of a station and a trunk. An E&M port works like a station interface for
any incoming call and works like trunk interface when any station makes an outgoing call through it. However please note
that a trunk line cannot be connected to an E&M port. Also a SLT or DKP cannot be connected to the E&M port. The
Trunk Feature Template, Station Basic Feature Template, Station Advanced Feature Template can be assigned to the
E&M port accordingly. In addition, the E&M ports are to be programmed for parameters like Status of the port, Seizure
Type. Dial Type, Pulse Dial Ratio, Release Type, etc. Timers like Idle Wait Timer-Flash Timer-Pause Timer are also to be
programmed for the E&M port. The significance of all the parameters and Timers of the E&M port is explained below.
While an E&M call is established, the call process consists of three phases over the E&M Port as shown below:
Seizure
Dial
Release
All the types are programmable using different options. Matrix also programming of Seizure Pulse, Release Pulse and
Wink Pulse.
Status of the Port
An E&M port can individually be enabled or disabled. This can be useful when a particular port goes out of order and will
be stopped from being allocated to a user.
Service Provider ID
Program a Service Provider for the E&M.
Seizure Types
Matrix supports five types of seizure:
Immediate
Immediate + Wink
Seizure Pulse
Seizure Pulse + Wink
Express
Immediate
OG Call:
While making an out going call, when the station user of PBX-A seizes the E&M Port of PBX-A, status of the M wire
of its E&M port will go high indicating that it has seized the E&M line. There will not be any signaling over the E wire
of E&M Port during seizure.
IC Call:
While receiving an incoming call over the E&M port-B of PBX-B. PBX-B will be ready to receive digits as soon as it
detects high state on its E wire. There will not be any signaling over the M wire of E&M Port of PBX-B while
receiving an IC call.
Seizure Dial Release
M
E
PBX-A PBX-B
Rx
Tx
SA
SB
M
E
SA
SB
Rx
Tx
-48V
0V
Immediate Start
Matrix
Eternity V8 System Manual 349
Immediate with Ack:
OG Call:
If this seizure type is programmed, while making an OG call by seizure of 'E&M port', the "M" wire will go high
immediately.
The remote end will acknowledge this by making its "M" wire high, which in turn activates (high) "E" wire of the E&M
Port.
On sensing high signal on "E" wire, the Eternity will start out dialing the DTMF/pulse digits.
IC Call:
On detecting high signal on "E" wire of the E&M Port, the Eternity will consider it to be an incoming call seizure and
hence it will immediately make its "M" wire high, which will allow the remote end to dial out the DTMF/Pulse digits.
Call Disconnection:
If the parameter 'Release type' is programmed as "Status Change" and for this type of seizure, the "M" wire at remote
end goes Low for some call condition, the call will be disconnected. (Orientation Type of E&M Port is programmed as
Station).
For e.g. "M" wire at remote end will go 'Low' in following conditions:
Remote end user dials invalid number and doesn't hang up on getting error tone:
Remote end user dials valid station number and after conversation remote end hangs up first.
Remote end user dials valid number and station doesn't reply but the remote party doesn't disconnect the call.
Remote end has made 'Orientation Type' of E&M Port as 'Trunk' and for IC call all the Stations programmed in trunk
landing group are busy and also second call is not allowed to station user, the Eternity will disconnect the call after
expiry of RBT timer, by making "M" wire 'Low'.

Immediate + Wink:
The wink pulse width is programmable and is programmed as wink pulse width timer.
Method of seizing the E&M tie line using Immediate + Wink Start for OG and IC call is described below:
OG Call:
While making an out going call when the PBX-A initiates seizure (grab), state of the M wire of the E&M port of PBX-
A will go HIGH.
Acknowledging this E&M port of PBX-B will send Immediate + Wink signal over its M wire when PBX-B is ready to
receive digits.
On receiving the acknowledgment in form of Wink signal on E wire of E&M port of PBX-A before Wait Wink Timer
expires, it will consider it as successful seizure. Digits will be dialed out from E&M port.
If Wink is not received from PBX-B within Wait Wink Timer, PBX-A will drop the call.
IC Call:
While receiving an incoming call over E&M port of PBX-B, on its M wire it will send Wink signal to the PBX-A, which
has initiated the seizure (grab).
The Wink signal will be sent by the PBX-B when it is ready to receive the digits from the PBX-A.
PBX-A will identify the seizure successful, when it receives continuous LOW Wink signal over E wire of its E&M
Port before Wait Wink Timer expires.
-48V
0V
Wink Pulse
Wink
Pulse
Width
M
E
PBX-A PBX-B
Rx
Tx
SA
SB
M
E
SA
SB
Rx
Tx
-48V
0V
-48V
0V
Wink
Pulse
Matrix
350 Eternity V8 System Manual
Seizure Pulse:
Seizure Pulse is programmable. Various time periods T1, T2 and T3 are programmed as required. These are
programmed as Seizure pulse. Default Seizure Pulse Time, T1= 230 msec, T2=80 msec, T3=80 msec for some E&M
feature templates.
Method of seizing the E&M tie line using Seizure Pulse for OG and IC call is described below:
OG Call:
While making an out going call from E&M port of PBX-A, it will send seizure pulse over the M wire of its E&M port to
seize the line.
PBX-A will not make any signaling over the E wire of the E&M port of the PBX-A during seizure.
IC Call:
While receiving an incoming call over the E&M Port the PBX-B it will detect for valid seizure pulse over the E wire of
its E&M port.
Seizure Pulse + Wink
OG Call:
When seizure type, Seizure Pulse + Wink is set for an E&M Port, while making an OG call Seizure Pulse (as
programmed) will be sent on the M wire of E&M Port and will start Wait Wink Timer and expect Wink from remote.
On receiving valid Wink pulse from remote end within Wait Wink Timer, digits will be dialed out on E&M Port.
If valid Wink pulse is not received from the remote end, digits will be dialed out on expiry of Wait Wink Timer.
IC Call:
When Seizure type, Seizure Pulse + Wink is set for an E&M Port, on detecting valid Seizure pulse (matching with
programmed value of seizure) on E wire of the E&M Port, the E&M Port will send Wink pulse (of programmed value)
on M wire, and the call will be considered to be present.
Express:
When Caller from PBX A is making call to PBX B, the Express Signaling works as shown below:
Caller from PBX A presses the desired DSS key to seize the E&M tie line.
Till the DSS key is pressed by caller the signal on the M wire of E&M port-A will send continuous high signal to E&M
port-B. When the destination answers, the caller will release the DSS key as he has successfully seized the line. When
-48V
0V
T1 T3
T2
M
E
PBX-A PBX-B
Rx
Tx
SA
SB
M
E
SA
SB
Rx
Tx
-48V
0V
Seizure Pulse
M
E
PBX-A PBX-B
Rx
Tx
SA
SB
M
E
SA
SB
Rx
Tx
-48V
0V
Till DSS Key is Pressed
Matrix
Eternity V8 System Manual 351
the caller releases the DSS key, signal on the M wire of the E&M Port-A, and hence E wire of the E&M port-B will go
low.
Dial Type
Digits can be dialed over E&M tie line by two methods:
Tone
Pulse
When dial type is Pulse, the dialed digits will be sent on the M wire of the E&M port of the originating side and will be
received over the E wire of the E&M port of the terminating side.
When dial type is Pulse, the pulse dial ratio can be set to any of the following values:
10PPS, 1:2
10PPS, 2:3
10PPS, 1:1
20PPS, 1:2
20PPS, 2:3
20PPS, 1:1
If the dial type is Tone, the DTMF signals will be sent on the Tx of the E&M port of the originating side and it will be
received over the Rx of the E&M port of the terminating side.
When Seizure type is Express, the caller can make call by pressing the DSS key.
When seizure type is Immediate, the PBX seizes the tie line and the system will start the pause timer. On expiry of
the pause timer the PBX sends the digits to the remote PBX.
When seizure type is Seizure Pulse+Wink, on receiving Wink signal from the terminating end the originating side
(which initiates seizure) will start the pause timer and on expiry of pause timer it will start sending digits.
When seizure type is Seizure Pulse, the originating PBX system will start the pause timer after sending the seizure
pulse and on expiry of the seizure pulse it will send digits to the terminating end.
Following table shows status of the M wire of an E&M Port, while making OG call and Receiving IC call.
Release Type
Matrix supports four methods for release of the E&M call based on, which end will release the call as well as release
pulse width:
None (Should be programmed for express type of seizure)
Release Pulse
Status change (Status change of M wire)
None:
This option is programmed when seizure type is Express.
It is advisable to keep the release type as None in case the protocol doesnt support any signaling for disconnecting
the E&M port. Because if such E&M port is involved in Trunk-to-Trunk call the Trunk Inactivity Timer will be started
based on this.
Trunk-to-Trunk Inactivity Timer will be started if the E&M port programmed with Release type None is involved in
trunk to trunk call, and also the another trunk is TWT or another E&M Port is with None as release type.
Release Pulse:
If this type is selected, the specific Pulse width of Release pulse will be used to disconnect the call. This pulse width is
programmable, as shown below:
E&M Seizure Type
M Wire's Status after seizure
and in conversation while
making OG call
M Wire's Status when an IC
call initiates
M Wire's status on answer
and in conversation while
receiving IC call
Immediate High Low High
Immediate + Wink High Wink High
Seizure Pulse Low Low Low
Seizure Pulse + Wink Low Wink Low
Express Low Low Low
Immediate with Ack High High High
-48V
0V
Release Pulse Width
Matrix
352 Eternity V8 System Manual
Call can be disconnected by either party by sending Release Pulse.
For Example: SLT 2001 is connected to PBX-A and SLT 3001 is connected to PBX-B.
SLT 2001 user goes ON-Hook.
If SLT user 2001 goes on-hook the PBX-A will send Release Pulse over the M wire of the E&M port of the PBX-A.
PBX-A will release its E&M port.
The Release pulse sent by PBX-A will be received and detected on the E wire of the E&M port of the PBX-B. Hence
the PBX-B will release its E&M port.
SLT3001 user goes ON-Hook.
If SLT user 3001 goes on-hook the PBX-B will send Release Pulse over the M wire of the E&M port of the PBX-B.
PBX-B will release its E&M port.
The Release pulse sent by PBX-B will be received and detected on the E wire of the E&M port of the PBX-A.
Hence the PBX-A will release its E&M port.
Status Change: Program this option from Release Type, if status change of M wire is to be considered for release of
E&M call.
Other parameters of Trunk Feature Template are as described below:
Orientation Type:
Select the option of Orientation Type from:
Trunk
Station
Tie-line
When Orientation = Trunk, the port will be regarded as trunk. All the trunk related parameters will be applicable.
When Orientation = Station, the port will be regarded as station. All the station related parameters will be applicable.
When Orientation = Tie-line, the port will be regarded as station for all IC calls to it and as trunk for all OG calls to be
made through it.
Note for programming:
Access code is not required on the E&M port when it is programmed as Station (But in case of BRI Port the access
code is required when orientation = Network, because ISDN Terminals connected on the BRI Port can be called using
the Access code of the BRI Port).
Maximum OG Pulse Digit Count
The count gives the maximum number of digits that can be dialed out to make a call. When dialing out the number, if the
number of digits dialed are more than this count, the port which is used for dialing these numbers is released
automatically.
Compander Control Signal (CCS)
To improve the quality of speech transmission, PLCC networks use a signal called Compander Control Signal (CCS).
The PLCC network expects this signal from the PBX when speech is established. The Eternity provides this facility. The
Eternity sends CCS signal to the PLCC panel. CCS signal can be sent to the PLCC panel in the following cases:
When the E&M port is used as an Endpoint: The system sends a CCS to the PLCC panel while making an outgoing
call through the E&M port or when a call is received at the E&M port.
When the E&M port is used for Transit Exchange: The system sends a CCS to the PLCC panel while there is a
Incoming/Outgoing Transit call through the E&M port.
M
E
PBX-A PBX-B
Rx
Tx
SA
SB
M
E
SA
SB
Rx
Tx
-48V
0V
Release Pulse
Matrix
Eternity V8 System Manual 353
DTMF Detection
Consider Two PBXs are connected using the E&M interface. The E&M ports have dual personality. It behaves like a
station for an incoming call and trunk for an outgoing call. When any station from PBX A makes an outgoing call through
the E&M port, the E&M port of PBX A behaves as a trunk interface and gives the station the dial tone of PBX B. The
station user of PBX A can dial a station of PBX B or grab a trunk Line of PBX B. If the dial type of the E&M port of PBX A
is programmed as Pulse type, all the digits dialed by the station user are received twice by the E&M port of PBX B (Pulse
and Tone). The DTMF detection for SLT port can be disabled and stopped receiving redundant digits.
Idle Wait Timer
This timer signifies the time after which the codes could be simply (Station Numbers or Station Numbers with Exchange
ID) dialed over the E&M trunk. This timer is useful in two conditions:
Consider a situation in which forced disconnection is used. Suppose two exchanges A and B are connected through
E&M trunk. Station 2002 of PBX A is talking to station 3001 of PBX B over the E&M line. Station 2001 of PBX A calls
station 3001 of PBX B and finds it to be busy. Station 2001 is allowed to use forced disconnection feature. He issues
forced disconnection command. The PBX A disconnects the Station 2002. It then waits for E&M Idle Wait Timer and
then dials 3001 over the E&M trunk.
Consider another situation. When a Station of PBX A goes On-Hook, PBX A sends a release signal over the E&M
trunk to PBX B. In turn PBX B sends a release signal to PBX A as an acknowledgment. The E&M Idle Wait Timer
programmed in PBX A does not allow any other station of PBX A to grab the E&M trunk. Similarly, E&M Idle Wait
Timer programmed in PBX B does not allow any station of PBX to grab the E&M trunk.
Flash Timer
In pulse dialing, codes are dialed in pulses. A Flash key is generally used to dial this code. Flash is breaking the loop
current for 83ms to 999ms. Flash Timer signifies the time period for which the loop current breaks.
Flash Timer programmed in the E&M feature template assigned to the E&M port is insignificant, when seizure type is
programmed as Seizure Pulse/Seizure Pulse + Wink.
When seizure type is programmed as Seizure Pulse/Seizure Pulse + Wink and Flash is dialed, the Seizure Pulse
will be sent on the E&M port (Value of the seizure pulse will be same as programmed in the assigned E&M feature
template).
Pause Timer
It is the time for which the system waits before dialing the outside number after grabbing the E&M trunk. Some times it is
observed that after grabbing the Trunk, the user does not get the dial tone immediately. When user himself is dialing the
number, he waits for the dial tone and then dials the number. But this is not so when the system dials the number. Now if
there is no pause time and if the PSTN is of old type then it is possible that the system may dial out the number before
getting the dial tone. This may result in dialing a wrong number. To avoid this situation, Eternity offers pause timer.
Ring Timer
It is the time for which the station connected to Eternity rings. At the end of this period the station stops ringing. This timer
is useful in the situation explained below: If station connected to PBX A gets an incoming call, it starts ringing. At this time
if user is busy with some other important work, than he can wait for some time and then attend the call. But if he attends
the call, after the ring is stopped call cannot be attended and only Error Tone is heard. It can be programmed upto 255
seconds.
How to program?
Please refer the topic E&M Feature Template for details on programming range, default values and assigning these
features to individual E&M.
Relevant Topic:
1. E&M Feature Template 346
=X=X=
Matrix
354 Eternity V8 System Manual
E1 Maintenance
Whats this?
The E1 Maintenance consists of Error Counts (Performance Statistics), Alarms and Loop Back Tests.
This is as per standards like G.704, G.706 and G.732.
G.775 is also considered for detection of defect conditions like Loss of Signal (LOS), Loss of Frame (LOF), Alarm
Indication Signal (AIS), etc.
To elaborate, the Digital line can have transmission errors. All the errors will not generate an Alarm. Few severe errors
generate Alarms. However, all the errors are logged in the System Fault Log.
The SNIIC (Subscriber Network Interface Integrated Circuit), is used to interface E1 line to Eternity. It supports error
counters listed in the table given below.
Each error detected by the Eternity ME Card T1E1PRI/port is sent to the master in the form of an event.
The master counts these errors and prepare a statistical record if the condition matches. For e.g. Severely Errored
Seconds Count is incremented when one OOF (Out of Frame) event reaches the master or more than 320 framing
errors reach the master.
This statistical record is updated and maintained by the master.
Facility-Associated and Non-Facility Associated Signaling:
Signaling on ISDN PRI trunks consists of messages transported over the D-Channel, which is channel 24 on T1
interface or channel 16 on E1 interface. This signaling can be provided by two methods:
FAS: The D channel can provide signaling for the other B channels on the same interface. This is called Facility
Associated Signaling (FAS).
NFAS: The D channel can provide signaling for the other B channels on more than one interface. This is called
No facility Associated Signaling (NFAS). The signaling arrangements, the capability is supported to designate a D
channel on one interface to be a backup to a D channel on another interface in case of failure. This is called D
channel backup.
Error Counts (Performance Statistics)
Error Counters supported by SNIIC in E1 Mode.
Following parameters form the statistical record. This can be generated in the form of a report as shown below:
Out Of Frame (OOF)-Out of Frame is the occurrence of a particular density of framing error events. OOF is declared
when three consecutive frame alignment signals have been received with an error. OOF ends when;
In frame N, the FAS is correct.
In frame N+1, the FAS is absent.
Errored Frame Alignment Signal This counter is incremented on receipt of each errored FAS.
E-bit This counter is incremented when either E1 or E2 bit is set in the transmit frame.
CRC-4 Error This counter is incremented when the received frame has CRC-4 errors.
Line Code violation Error This counter is incremented when a line code violation error occurs.
Excessive Zeros Error This counter is incremented when excessive zeros are received or Line code
violation error occurs.
Positive Slip Buffer This counter is incremented every time a positive slip occurs.
Negative Slip Buffer This counter is incremented every time a negative slip occurs.
Performance Parameter Seconds/Count
Error Seconds 000 to 255
Bursty Errored Seconds 000 to 255
Severely Errored Seconds 000 to 255
Severely Errored Framing Seconds 000 to 255
Unavailable Seconds 000 to 255
Positive Slip Seconds 000 to 255
Negative Slip Seconds 000 to 255
Loss of Frame Count 000 to 255
Line Errored Seconds 00000 to 65535
Excessive Zeroes Error Count 000 to 255
CRC-4 Error Count 00000 to 65535
Matrix
Eternity V8 System Manual 355
In frame N+2, the FAS is present and is correct.
Errored Seconds-It is defined as a second with one of the following:
One FAS Errors.
One or more OOF defects.
One or more Slip events.
A detected AIS defect.
Bursty Errored Seconds
Without CRC-It is a second with:
More than one but less than 320 Errored FAS.
No OOF.
No SES.
No AIS.
With CRC-It is a second with:
More than one but less than 320 CRC errors.
No OOF.
No SES.
No AIS.
Severely Errored Seconds
With CRC-It is a second with one of the following:
832 or more CRC error events.
one or more OOF defects.
Without CRC-It is a second with one of the following:
2048 or framing errors.
Slips are not included. This is not incremented during Unavailable seconds.
Severely Errored Framing Seconds (SEFS)-It is a second with either one or more OOF defects or a detected AIS
defect.
Unavailable Seconds-It is defined as a second in which E1 service is unavailable. An unavailable state is declared at
the onset of 10 consecutive severely errored seconds and is cleared on onset of 10 consecutive seconds with no
severely errored seconds.
Positive Slip Seconds-It is defined as a second in which a frame is repeated to account for frequency drift between ET2
and the network.
Negative Slip Seconds-It is defined as a second in which a frame is deleted to account for frequency drift between ET2
and the network.
Loss of frame count-Loss of Frame is declared after 2.5 seconds of continuous loss of signal or OOF. LOF is cleared
after 10 seconds of continuous no loss of signal or OOF.
Line Errored Seconds-It is a second in which one or more than one line code violation error occurs.
Excessive Zeroes Error Count-This counter is incremented when excessive zeroes are received on the line or when
line code violation error occurs.
CRC-6 Error Count-This counter is incremented when a CRC-6 Error is detected.
Alarms
Alarms are indicated on the LEDs of the Eternity ME Card T1E1PRI.
Eternity ME Card T1E1PRI has four LEDs viz. L1 to L4.
L1 and L2 indicate alarms for T1E1PRI-1 whereas L3 and L4 indicate alarms for T1E1PRI-2.
During normal conditions, the LED blinks green (1 sec ON, 1 sec. OFF).
RED Alarm:
This alarm is generated if Loss of Signal persists for 2.5 seconds.
This is indicated by flashing the LED Red (500ms ON, 500ms OFF).
Matrix
356 Eternity V8 System Manual
The master logs this event in the System Fault Log as RED Alarm <Slot No.> <Port No.> at HH:MM:SS.
This alarm is cleared when the signal is acquired back and persists for 10 seconds.
The LED is turned OFF. The master logs this event in the System Fault Log as RED Alarm Cleared <Slot No.> <Port
No.> at HH:MM:SS.
RED Alarm is declared if
Received signal is more than 20 dB or 40 dB below nominal for at least 1ms.
32 consecutive zeroes are received (As per CISCO, LOS is declared if more than 10 consecutive zeroes are
received).
Loss of frame alignment occurs.
When RED Alarm is declared, Yellow Alarm is sent to the far end within 12ms of detection of LOS.
YELLOW Alarm:
This Alarm is also known as Remote Alarm Indication or Distant Alarm.
This Alarm is generated when Yellow Alarm is sent by the far end (Yellow Alarm is sent by the far end to indicate that
it has lost the incoming signal).
Yellow Alarm is declared when the signal corresponding to Yellow Alarm persists for 0.5 seconds.
This is indicated by flashing the LED Orange (500ms ON, 500ms OFF).
The master logs this event in the System Fault Log as YELLOW Alarm <Slot No.> <Port No.> at HH:MM:SS.
This alarm is cleared when No Yellow Alarm signal persists for 0.5 seconds.
The LED is turned OFF. The master logs this event in the System Fault Log as YELLOW Alarm Cleared <Slot No.>
<Port No.> at HH:MM:SS. Yellow Alarm is declared if:
Bit 3 of the receive NFAS is 1 on two consecutive occasions.
Yellow Alarm is cleared if:
Bit 3 of the receive NFAS is 0.
If equipment is connected in downstream (Drop and insert mode i.e. NT mode) then on receipt of Yellow Alarm, a
Blue Alarm will be sent on the port, which is configured in NT mode.
BLUE Alarm:
It is also known as Alarm Indication Signal (AIS).
This alarm indicates that the upstream equipment connected to the Eternity has lost receiving its incoming signal.
This alarm is generated when AIS persists for 2.5 seconds.
This is indicated by flashing the LED Red (1 sec. ON, 1 sec. OFF).
The master logs this event in the System Fault Log as BLUE Alarm <Slot No.> <Port No.> at HH:MM:SS.
This alarm is cleared when clearance of AIS is detected for continuous 10 seconds.
The LED is turned OFF. The master logs this event in the System Fault Log as BLUE Alarm Cleared <Slot No.>
<Port No.> at HH:MM:SS.
Blue Alarm (AIS) is declared if unframed all ones signal is received as a string of 512 bits containing fewer than three
zero bits.
When BLUE Alarm is declared, Yellow Alarm is sent to the downstream equipment connected to the Eternity.
Port1 Status:
Port2 Status:
LED Card Status Port Status
L1 Green Flashing @1 Sec. Card Heart Bit Port 1 Layer is established
L1 Red Flashing @1 Sec. Card Heart Bit Port 1 Layer is not established LOS-Red alarm detected.
L1 Red Flashing @500 msec. Card Heart Bit Port 1 Layer is not established LBFA -Loss of Basic Frame Alignment.
L1 Red Flashing @100 msec. Card Heart Bit Port 1 Layer is not established- LMFA loss of multiframe alignment.
L1 Yellow Flashing @1 Sec. Card Heart Bit Port 1 Layer is established -RAI (Yellow Alarm) is detected.
L2 Green Port 1 achieves CRC4 synchronization.
L2 Yellow Port1 does not achieve CRC4 synchronization.
L2 Green Flashing @1 Sec. Port 1 achieves CRC4 synchronization-AIS (Blue Alarm) is detected.
L2 Yellow flashing @1 Sec. Port 1 doesnt achieves CRC4 synchronization-AIS (Blue Alarm) is detected.
LED Card Status Port Status
L2 Green Steady Port2 Layer 1 is established.
L3 Red Flashing @1 Sec. Port 2 Layer is not established-LOS-Red alarm detected.
L3 Red Flashing @500 msec. Port 2 Layer is not established-LBFA-Loss of Multi Frame Alignment.
Matrix
Eternity V8 System Manual 357
Loop Back Tests:
Please refer the topic DS1 Trunks for more details.
Relevant Topic:
1. DS1 Trunks 307
=X=X=
L3 Red Flashing @100 msec. Port 2 Layer is not established-LMFA Loss of Multi Frame Alignment.
L3 Yellow Flashing @1 Sec. Port 2 Layer is established-RAI (Yellow Alarm) is detected.
L4 Green Port 2 achieves CRC4 synchronization-AIS (Blue alarm) is detected.
L4 Yellow Port2 doesnt achieves CRC4 synchronization-AIS (Blue Alarm) is detected.
LED Card Status Port Status
Matrix
358 Eternity V8 System Manual
Emergency Detection and Reporting
Whats this?
Whenever an Emergency call is made by a station, it is detected by the system and reported to the Operator. This is
useful when a distantly located station of Eternity dials emergency number. In such cases, the Operator may not be
aware of the emergency and when the Police reaches the site, the operator might be put in a jeopardize condition.
How it works?
When any station makes an emergency call the system informs the Operator by giving a ring till Alarm Ring Timer2.
If Operator is DKP then it will ring continuously an display an emergency message on the LCD. A typical message on
the LCD could be:
Here line 2 of LCD shows that there is an emergency condition at station 2001.
Once the OGTBG is assigned for dialing emergency number, the system searches for a free trunk in this OGTBG to
dialout the emergency number.
How to program?
Use the following command to enable/disable emergency reporting:
5110-Code
Where,
By default, Emergency Reporting is enabled.
Important Points:
Please note that no other feature access code should match with the feature access code of Emergency numbers.
However, an access code can be a subset of any other access code.
Relevant Topics:
1. Access Codes 77
2. Security Dialing and Reporting 538
3. Emergency Dialing 359
4. Flexible Numbers 369
5. Conflict Dialing 230
6. Alarms 96
=X=X=
Code Meaning
0 Disable
1 Enable
Matrix
Eternity V8 System Manual 359
Emergency Dialing
What's this?
The Eternity supports dialing of Emergency number immediately without any blocking.
Toll control (Allowed denied list, Dynamic lock) will not bar dialing of the Emergency Number.
Emergency number dialing will be allowed to station, even if allotted Call Budget amount is consumed.
Automatic number translation logic will not be applied to the dialing of Emergency Number.
Call Duration Control (CDC) will not be applied on the dialing of Emergency Number.
Emergency Number table has 10 entries. Each entry of the table has 2 parameters viz. Emergency Number and
Outgoing Trunk Bundle group (OGTBG). When the number is dialed, it will be routed through the port programmed in
corresponding OGTBG.
Emergency Numbers are considered as access codes only and can be out dialed even in following cases:
In Off-Hook condition.
In Standby Mode of the station (after dialing Flash).
After grabbing the trunk line.(using Trunk access code or selective access)
During Busy, Error, Confirmation and Placed phases. Refer chapter Access Codes for all phases and for
Emergency Numbers for various countries.
SIM card is not present in the Mobile port.
Mobile port is not registered with any of the GSM network.
SIM PIN is not entered or incorrect SIM PIN is entered.
Even if Keypad of phone is locked.
Emergency Number will not be out dialed in following cases:
If Port from which number is to be routed (TWT, Mobile, T1E1PRI or BRI) is disabled.
If hardware related to dialing of Emergency number is not present.
If Emergency number is to be routed from ports T1E1PRI or BRI but the link is not established for that T1E1PRI or
BRI trunk.
If Emergency number is dialed during SE Programming mode
Emergency dialing will not work if Mains Power to the Eternity fails.
How to dial Emergency number?
Go Off-Hook
Dial Trunk Access Code-Emergency Number
For example:
Dial '0'-'112'
How it works?
Emergency Number will always be out dialed through the OTBG programmed for the emergency number dialed
except when Selective trunk access code/Selective Trunk Access DSS key, is used for grabbing the trunk where it will
be dialed through the trunk selected only.
As shown in the Table you can only program the Emergency numbers and OGTB Group at indices 6 to10 of the
Emergency Number table.
First five numbers 01 to 05 are pre-programmed as per region (e.g. USA or Australia) selected in the Eternity. This will
be useful when it is required that the emergency number should be routed to the particular trunk first i.e first it will be
tried to route through ISDN and than analog trunk or vice-versa.
The Emergency Number Table should be programmed in the system as shown below:
Default Emergency Number Table
Index Emergency Number OG Trunk Bundle Group
01 Uneditable (Blank or as per region selected) (Note1) 01 or as per region selected
02 Uneditable (Blank or as per region selected) 01 or as per region selected
03 Uneditable (Blank or as per region selected) 01 or as per region selected
04 Uneditable (Blank or as per region selected) 01 or as per region selected
05 Uneditable (Blank or as per region selected) 01 or as per region selected
06 01
07 01
Matrix
360 Eternity V8 System Manual
Note1:
The Emergency numbers are fixed as per the region where Eternity is installed.
For example,
If Region code is selected as USA, than Emergency Number Table in the system will be as given below:
If Region code selected is for Australia, than Emergency Number Table will be as given below:
How to program?
Emergency Numbers
Use following command to program Emergency Numbers:
3116-Index-Emergency Number-#*
Where,
Index is from 06 to 10.
Emergency Number is 8 digits max. using digits 0-9 only
OGTBG
Use following command to program OG Trunk Bundle Group (OTBG) for emergency numbers:
3117-Index-OG Trunk Bundle Group
Where,
Index is from 01 to 10.
OGTBG is from 01 to 25
Default emergency numbers and OTBG
Refer chapter Default Settings for default emergency numbers and OTBG for different region codes.
Important Points:
Where the Trunk access code conflicts with the Emergency Number, emergency number should be dialed after
dialing the trunk access code. i.e after dialing the trunk access code it should not wait for conflict timer before applying
the logic for TAC (Trunk Access Code). For e.g. trunk access code is 0 and emergency number is 000. (In Australia).
Now, if you dial '0', it will be considered as trunk access code and the logic for trunk access code will be applied.
Thus, where emergency number conflicts with the trunk access code, it is recommended to dial the trunk access code
first and than the emergency number i.e for above case user has to dial 0-000 for emergency number dialing.
08 01
09 01
10 01
Index Emergency Number OG Trunk Bundle Group
01 911 25
02 112 01
03 01
04 01
05 01
Index Emergency Numbers OG Trunk Bundle Group
01 000 25
02 106 23
03 112 24
04 01
05 01
Index Emergency Number OG Trunk Bundle Group
Matrix
Eternity V8 System Manual 361
Relevant Topics:
1. OG Trunk Bundle 472
2. OG Trunk Bundle Group 474
3. Access Codes 77
4. Conflict Dialing 230
5. Default Settings 242
=X=X=
Matrix
362 Eternity V8 System Manual
External List
Whats this?
External List is a group of number strings. Eternity uses these lists to support seven different features viz. Toll Control,
Dynamic Lock, Call Budget, Call Duration Control, Call Taping, SMDR and Carrier Pre-Selection. Maximum of 24
external lists are supported by the Eternity. Each External List can house 999 numbers. Each number string can be
programmed up to 16 characters maximum.
Using the Number List for different features:
Association of External List with Toll Control:
When the number is dialed from a station, the Eternity compares the dialed number string with the number strings in
External List assigned to the station to check whether the number is allowed or denied from the station.
Association of External List with Dynamic Toll Control:
If the user changes the lock level and thereafter dials a number from his station, from the locked levels the Eternity
compares the dialed number string with the number strings in External List assigned to the station for the locked status.
Association of External List with Call Budget:
If the call budget of the station exhausts and thereafter the station dials a number, the Eternity compares the dialed
number string with the number strings in External List assigned to the station for the call budget exhausted status.
Association of External List with Call Duration Control:
If Call Duration Control feature is set on a station, the Eternity compares the dialed number string with the number strings
in External List for Call Duration Control (CDC) condition.
Association of External List with SMDR:
The system keeps tracks of the calls received and calls made by the numbers programmed in the External List
programmed as a SMDR filter.
Association of External List with Carrier Pre-Selection:
The system uses the External Lists for dialed number list and substitute number list of ANT.
Association of External List with Call Taping:
The system uses the External List for programming the numbers for incoming and outgoing call taping.
Also the default values will take care of features Dynamic Toll Control Level 0, 1, 2 and 3. The default external lists in the
system are as shown below:
Matrix
Eternity V8 System Manual 363
Default External Lists:
Where,
B is Blank.
How to program?
Step 1
Take a pen and a paper. Decide which of the above-mentioned seven features are to be used. Make the External List
accordingly.
Step 2
Use following command to program a number in an External List:
4302-List Number-Location Index-Number-#*
Where
List is from 01 to 24.
Location Index is from 001 to 999.
Number is a number string of maximum 16 digit long terminated with #*. The digits used are as given in Table below for
digits: 0-9, #, *, A, B, C, D, F, P, +.
Location
List-
01
List-
02
List-
03
List-
04
List-
05
....
List-
15
List-
16
List-
17
List-
18
List-
19
List-
20
List-
21
List-
22
List-
23
List-
24
001 B 00 0 00 B
Same
as
List
05
B B B 0 B 0 B 0 B 0
002 B 0 B B B B B B 1 B 1 B 1 B 1
003 B 1 B B B B B B 2 B 2 B 2 B 2
004 B 2 B B B B B B 3 B 3 B 3 B 3
005 B 3 B B B B B B 4 B 4 B 4 B 4
006 B 4 B B B B B B 5 B 5 B 5 B 5
007 B 5 B B B B B B 6 B 6 B 6 B 6
008 B 6 B B B B B B 7 B 7 B 7 B 7
009 B 7 B B B B B B 8 B 8 B 8 B 8
010 B 8 B B B B B B 9 B 9 B 9 B 9
011 B 9 * * * B B B * B * B * B *
012 B * # # # B B B # B # B # B #
013 B # F F F B B B F B F B F B F
014 B F B B B B B B B B B B B B B
015 B + B B B B B B B B B B B B B
: : B B B B B B B B B B B B B B
999 B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B
The commands explained below should be referred as:
To program a single port: XXXX-1
To program a range of ports: XXXX-2
To program all the ports: XXXX-*
Special Digit Code
Flash (F) #2
Pause (P) #3
A #4
B #5
C #6
D #7
+ #8
Dot (.) #9
Matrix
364 Eternity V8 System Manual
Use the following command to clear the number programmed in a list:
4302-List Number-Location Index-#*
Where,
List Number is from 01 to 24.
Location Index is from 001 to 999.
Step 3
Use the following command to default an External List:
4301-1-List Number
4301-2-List Number-List Number
4301-*
Where,
List Number is from 01 to 24.
Important Point:
For programming '.' use '#9' when SLT or DKP is used. But for dialing a number with '.' use '*'.
Relevant Topics:
1. Toll Control 675
2. Dynamic Lock 341
3. Call Budget 140
4. Call Duration Control (CDC) 169
5. Call Taping 191
6. Station Message Detail Recording 574
7. Least Cost Routing-Carrier Pre-Selection 428
8. Access Codes 77
=X=X=
# ##
* **
Special Digit Code
Matrix
Eternity V8 System Manual 365
External Music
Whats this?
Eternity provides a facility to give external music to the users by way of connecting an external music source. It is
possible to give external music to the stations or external callers or both. For more details, please refer Music on Hold
(MOH).
Relevant Topic:
1. Music on Hold (MOH) 459
=X=X=
Matrix
366 Eternity V8 System Manual
File Transfer Protocol (FTP)
Whats this?
Matrix Eternity ME/GE support an embedded FTP server which can be used for three purposes.
Uploading/Downloading System Software.
Uploading/Downloading System Configuration files.
Uploading/Downloading Call Record files (SMDR).
File Transfer Protocol (FTP), a standard Internet protocol, is the simplest way to exchange files between computers
on the Internet. Like the Hypertext Transfer Protocol (HTTP), which transfers displayable Web pages and related
files, and the Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP), which transfers e-mail, FTP is an application protocol that uses
the Internets TCP/IP protocols. FTP is commonly used to transfer Web server for everyone on the Internet. Its also
commonly used to download program and other files to your computer from other servers.
As a user, you can use FTP with a simple command line interface (for example, from the Windows MS-DOS Prompt
window) or with a commercial program that offers a graphical user interface. Your Web Browser can also make FTP
requests to download programs you select from a Web page, Using FTP, you can also update (delete, rename, move
and copy) files at a server. You need to logon to an FTP server. However, publicly available files are easily accessed
using anonymous FTP.
How to use it?
Please refer topics Backup-System Configuration, Backup-SMDR and Backup-System Software for more details.
Relevant Topics:
1. Backup-System Configuration 127
2. Backup-SMDR 122
3. Backup-System Software 131
=X=X=
Matrix
Eternity V8 System Manual 367
Flash Timer
What is Flash?
Pulse dialing is a type of signaling in which codes (digits) are dialed in pulses. A hook switch or a Flash key is generally
used to dial this code. Technically, Flash is breaking the loop current for 200 milliseconds to 900 ms. Please note that
since this code is not simulated in standard DTMF convention, one cannot dial it in DTMF mode.
Flash timer signifies the time period for which the loop current breaks. Flash timer is programmable. Flash timer ranges
from 083 ms to 999 ms. By default, Flash Timer is 600 ms.
Where is it used?
Stations dial flash to use few PBX features and also to use few PSTN features. Flash is used in following cases:
While transferring a call from one station to another.
While making conference between few stations.
While toggling call between two stations.
While using call-waiting facility available from PSTN exchange.
Now a days, more number of basic service providers and different types of advanced electronic telephone exchanges
are prevailing. It is possible that one service provider interprets breaking of loop current for 300 ms as flash, other service
provider interprets breaking of loop current for 900 ms as flash and system interprets breaking of loop current for 600 ms
as flash. Hence if the system engineer sets the flash timer to 600 ms then he might not be able to use features provided
by the service provider interpreting 900 ms for flash.
To take care of this situation, Eternity offers Flexibility to program different flash timers for both stations and
trunks.
How to program?
Step 1
Please refer the topic SLT Hardware Template for more details on assigning flash timer to a SLT.
Step 2
Please refer the topic TWT Hardware Template for more details on assigning Flash Timer to E&M.
Step 3
Please refer E&M Feature Template for more details on assigning Flash Timer to an E&M.
Important Points:
Many times it happens that while transferring the call, the call either gets disconnected or is not transferred. This
happens due to mismatch of time for which the hook switch is pressed, if used for transferring the call hence it is
advisable to use Flash Key of the telephone instrument, instead of hook switch.
This problem may occur with Flash Key also, if the timer for the Flash Key on the telephone instrument and the flash
timer of the system are not set properly.
Few telephone instruments have flash timers set to 800 ms. In such case the call does not get transferred because
the flash timer of all stations is set at 600 ms by default. In such cases the flash timer of the station where the phone
is connected should be increased to 800 ms.
Relevant Topics:
1. SLT Hardware Template 555
2. TWT Hardware Template 687
3. Digital Key Phone-Operation 252
4. E&M Features 348
5. E&M Feature Template 346
=X=X=
Matrix
368 Eternity V8 System Manual
Flashing on Trunks
Whats this?
Trunk exchanges support many advanced features like call waiting, call forward etc. To use these features it is required to
dial codes during speech. The dialing of codes during speech do not create problem when you are dialing on the trunk
directly. (Please refer the topic Continued Dialing for more details). But with the PBX connected between the user and the
central office, the central office codes clash with PBX codes. This leads to difficulty in accessing CO features while in
speech. However, Eternity supports dialing codes on trunk when in speech to all codes from any extension. But it is
required to inform the PBX, prior to dialing some code on the trunk.
How to use it?
Example:
To use Call Waiting facility of service provider exchange from any station, perform following steps:
How to program?
Please refer Class of Service (COS) for details on how to allow Flashing on Trunk to a user.
Relevant Topics:
1. Class of Service (COS) 200
2. Flash Timer 367
3. Continued Dialing 231
=X=X=
1 Speech with trunk.
2 Dial Flash. Feature tone
3 Dial *. Feature tone stopped.
4 Dial Desired Code.
1 Dial Flash-*. This informs the system to pass following code.
2 Dial Flash-1. Speech with second call.
3 Dial Flash-*. This informs the system to pass following code.
4 Dial Flash-1 Speech with first call.
5 Dial Flash-*. This informs the system to pass following code.
6 Dial Flash-1 Speech with second call.
Matrix
Eternity V8 System Manual 369
Flexible Numbers
Whats this?
Eternity offers Flexibility to assign a code of your choice to access a station. This code is called Flexible number. For
example, to access first SLT having software port 001, one has to dial 2001. It is possible to change this code to any
other number of your choice.
Eternity offers two types of stations viz. SLT and DKP. The system loads default access codes to all the SLT and DKP
stations on first power ON. Later on the stations can be assigned default Flexible numbers using a command.
A typical table of default SLT station numbers looks like:
A typical table of default DKP station numbers looks like:
How to program?
Use following command to program the access code for a SLT station:
3101-1-SLT-Access Code-#*
3101-2-SLT-SLT-Access Code-#*
3101-*-Access Code-#*
Where,
SLT is a 3-digit number from 001 to 512.
Access Code is maximum of 6 digits.
Use following command to clear the access code for a SLT:
3101-1-SLT-#*
3101-2-SLT-SLT-#*
3101-*-#*
Use following command to assign the default flexible number of a SLT:
3151-1-SLT
3151-2-SLT-SLT
3151-*
Where,
SLT is from 001 to 512.
Use following command to program the access code for a DKP:
3102-1-DKP-Access Code-#*
3102-2-DKP-DKP-Access Code-#*
3102-*-Access Code-#*
Where,
DKP is a 3-digit number from 001 to 128.
Access Code (flexible number) is maximum of 6 digits.
Software Port Access Codes
001 2001
002 2002
003 2003
: :
: :
512 2512
Software Port Access Codes
001 3001
002 3002
003 3003
: :
: :
128 3128
Matrix
370 Eternity V8 System Manual
Note:
The flexible number can be programmed up to 6 digits, however the SE is recommended to program flexible number of 4
or less than 4 digits only, while using Eon45 with Eternity, otherwise the Eon45 user will get truncated message on the
LCD display of Eon45.
Use following command to clear the access code for a DKP:
3102-1-DKP-#*
3102-2-DKP-DKP-#*
3102-*-#*
Use following command to assign the default flexible number to a DKP:
3152-1-DKP
3152-2-DKP-DKP
3152-*
Important Points:
It is possible to have maximum of 6 digit flexible numbers.
It is possible to clear the flexible number of a station, range of station and all stations.
Flexible numbers are the codes dialed from dial phase to call another station. These flexible numbers should be
unique and should not match with either other SLT stations or DKP stations or any of the features available from the
dial phase.
Flexible number having common digits can be assigned to another station. Please refer Conflict Dialing for more
details.
Same flexible number cannot be assigned to two different stations.
Use flexible numbers for all the features used from User mode and SA mode. Software port numbers are to be used
only during for SE mode.
When the access code of a station is cleared; its flexible number becomes null or void.
If access code of a station is cleared, one cannot call that station. However the station with NULL flexible number can
make calls as usual.
Relevant Topics:
1. Conflict Dialing 230
2. Access Codes 77
=X=X=
Matrix
Eternity V8 System Manual 371
Floor Service
Whats this?
In Enterprises, hospitals and other applications, all the rooms on one floor have common service rooms. Similarly,
another service room allotted for another floor. For example, Pantry, Zerox room, Fax room etc. The station users are
required to dial a code to call the concerned person in the room. It may be required that all the station users are given
common code say '38' to call the concerned person in the room.
Now, for critical requirement it is required that the call from a station user, should be placed to the service room of the
corresponding floor only i.e. if room number 2001 dials '38' then the call should go to 2010 (assigned for Fax Room) and
if 3001 dials '38' then the call should go to 3010 (assigned for Pantry services).
How to program?
Step 1: This feature is programmed by assigning a unique station group to 'Floor Service' feature for each floor. Please
refer topic Station Advanced Feature Template for assigning this feature.
Step 2: On each floor, a group of stations will be assigned same template where 'Floor Service' is enable (viz. assigned
station group other than '00').
Now, a group of all stations on one floor can dial access code '38' to place a call on Station Group for Floor Service.
Thus, if you program a single station in a station group, call will be placed on that station only.
Example:
Above programming is explained with following example:
Floor 1: Station users 3001 to 3010 should call to Station 3015 for any work related to Pantry services on this floor.
Floor 2: Station users 3101 to 3110 should call to Station 3115 for any work related to Pantry services on this floor.
Floor1:
Refer chapter Routing Group for commands 6502 and 6505.
Make Routing group = 01 with only one member '3015' and other Stations programmed as 'Null' .
Program the rotation method, as 'First station within the group'.
Refer chapter Station Advanced Feature Template for commands 6502 and 6505.
Assign Station advanced feature template number 05 to all DKP from 3001 to 3010 using command:
5604-2-001-010-05
Assign Floor Service feature to Routing Group 01 for template 05 using commands:
5602-1-05-14-01 where, feature number 14 is 'Floor Service' and 01 is routing group assigned for floor service.
Floor2:
Refer chapter Routing Group for commands 6502 and 6505.
Make Routing group = 12 with only one member '3115' and other Stations programmed as 'Null' .
Program the rotation method, as 'First station within the group'.
Refer chapter Station Advanced Feature Template for commands 6502 and 6505.
Assign Station advanced feature template number 15 to all DKP from 3101 to 3110 using command:
5604-2-101-110-15
Assign Floor Service feature to Routing Group 01 for template 05 using commands:
5602-1-15-14-01 where, feature number 14 is 'Floor Service' and 12 is routing group assigned for floor service.
Now, the users on first floor can dial Access Code '38' to contact Station number '3015' of Pantry on first floor.
The users on second floor can dial Access Code '38' to contact Station number '3115' of Pantry on second floor.
How to use?
From SLT:
Go off-hook.
Dial, Access Code '38'
From DKP:
Go off-hook.
Dial, Access Code '38'
OR
Matrix
372 Eternity V8 System Manual
Dial, Access Code '38'
Important Points:
Refer chapter System Parameters for command to set Hotel Mode or Enterprise Mode of Eternity.
Please refer separate manual for more details about Hotel Applications of this feature.
Relevant Topics:
1. Station Advanced Feature Template 565
2. Routing Group 533
3. System Parameters 642
4. Access Codes 77
=X=X=
Matrix
Eternity V8 System Manual 373
Follow Me
Whats this?
Make your calls follow you wherever you go.
After going to your co-workers desk if you desire to receive all your calls on his station, use this feature.
How to use it?
Example:
Your station number is 201. Your user password is 1212. Right now you are at station 203. You want to divert all your
calls to station 203. Dial 135-201-1212 from station 203.
Cancel Follow Me
How to program?
Refer Class of Service (COS) for details on how to allow Follow Me to a user. The user should have Call Forward COS to
use Call Follow Me Feature.
Important Points:
The stations dial tone changes to feature tone if its calls are forwarded.
Multiple users can use Follow Me from the same station.
Follow Me can be overwritten. Station A sets Follow-Me on station B. After a period of time, he goes to station C and
he wishes to receive his call at station C. He can set Follow Me once again on station C.
Follow Me cannot be chained. If station A sets Follow Me to station B. And station B sets Follow Me on station C,
Follow Me of station A is automatically cancelled.
DND is given priority over Call Follow Me feature.
Relevant Topics:
1. Call Forward 174
2. Class of Service (COS) 200
3. Do Not Disturb (DND) 304
=X=X=
1 Lift the handset. Dial tone
2 Dial 135-Station-User Password. Confirmation tone
1 Lift the handset of your station. Dial tone
2 Dial 130. Confirmation tone
Matrix
374 Eternity V8 System Manual
Forced Answer
Whats this?
This feature enables the caller to force the called station answer the call by making the destination stations speaker
OFF-Hook. This is useful when the called party is not responding to the call in spite of the station ringing continuously.
Now the caller can forcefully make the speaker OFF-Hook and come in speech with the called party.
This feature is helpful to managers who can simply call their secretary and deliver the message instead of waiting for
the secretary to answer their call.
How to use it?
How to program?
Please refer Class of Service (COS) for details on how to allow forced answer to a user.
Important Points:
Forced Answer can be requested from both-SLT and DKP.
The destination must be DKP only.
The speaker LED glows when the DKP goes OFF-Hook.
The user can dial Flexible Number and 5 in a line or Flexible number and then 5 in RBT.
Forced Answer is not allowed from DID.
Forced Answer will also work when the called party is busy, but has free loops for the calls to land. The calling person
gets RBT and when he dials 5, he is in speech with called party. The party which was in speech with the called party
earlier is now in held state. On completion of the speech the called party is in speech with the held party.
Forced Answer is allowed when the destination is ringing or in two-way speech.
=X=X=
1 Lift the handset. Dial tone
2 Dial Flexible Number. Ring Back Tone (If the called party is free).
3 Dial 5. RBT stops. Called Partys speaker goes OFF-Hook. Speech with called party.
Matrix
Eternity V8 System Manual 375
Forced Call Disconnection
Whats this?
This feature enables a station user to free the system resources (station or a trunk) for him.
How to use it?
How it works?
Suppose, Station A and Station B are talking to each other. Station C calls Station B and finds it to be busy. If he uses
Forced Call Disconnection, he gets confirmation tone. Station A and station B gets Error tone. However, for this to
happen the priority of Station C should be higher than that of Station B and Station A else he wont be able to use this
feature.
Likewise suppose Station A is talking to an external party through trunk 1. Station B tries to grab Trunk 1. On finding it
busy, he uses Forced Call disconnection. Doing so, he gets connected to trunk 1 and gets CO dial tone whereas
Station A gets disconnected and gets error tone. However, for this to happen priority of Station B should be higher
than Station A. In this case, priority of the trunk is not considered.
Suppose station A is talking to an external party through trunk1. Station B calls station A and finds it busy. He uses
forced call disconnection. Doing so, station B gets dial tone whereas, the trunk 1 gets disconnected.
This is also termed as Forced Release (In Eternity-Jeeves).
CAUTION!
Forced Call Disconnection is a sensitive feature. The System Engineer should restrict access to
this feature. If a user is allowed the access to Forced Call Disconnection, he should use this
responsibly.
How to program?
Refer Class of Service (COS) for details on how to allow Forced Call Disconnection to a user.
Important Points:
In PLCC applications, Forced Call Disconnection can be used in a chain to reach the last Exchange through many
tandem exchanges in between.
There is no privacy against Forced Call Disconnection. However, priority of station is taken in account as explained in
the example given above.
Relevant Topics:
1. Class of Service (COS) 200
2. Priority 497
=X=X=
1 Lift the handset. Dial tone
2 Dial Station/Trunk Access Code. Busy tone
3 Dial #*.
The called station/trunk gets disconnected.
You get dial tone after the confirmation tone.
4 Dial Station/External Number. Ring Back Tone
Matrix
376 Eternity V8 System Manual
GPAX Application
Whats this?
GPAX application is one of the applications provided by Eternity and used in commercial establishment/Society/
Organisation, etc. Group PBX are installed, operated and maintained by organisations/agencies. The owner will be
treated as the main hirer. The private exchange (PSTN)/service provider will provide junctions to the PBX and the owner
will pay the rental of the junctions, and the call charges. The number of junctions provided to the PBX should be adequate
to carry the traffic. The owner/agencies of the PBXs will be responsible for the payment of all charges to the private
exchange/service provider.
In this application say a PBX A is connected to PSTN. PBX A is given an exchange ID (say 2837). A number of stations
(say 001-100) can be connected to PBX A. When a station 015 dials 2837025, PBX A interpret this number to be dialed
for the same system. However, for dialing a station number belonging to same system, it is not necessary to prefix the
station number with exchange ID. When a station 020 dials 2834537, PBX A does not interpret this to be dialed for the
same system and hence will dial the digits on the trunk.
When a station user picks up the handset and dials any digit except the one programmed in the routing table will be
dialed on the trunk. If the user dials digit that is programmed in the routing table with Self-flag enabled, the system will not
dial the digits on the trunk since it would interpret these to be dialed for the same system.
For dialing the digits on the trunk it is required to program the routing table carefully. Route code should be specified in
route code column of routing table in association with Self Route Flag disable. This will make the call to be routed on
trunk which is specified in OG Trunk Bundle Group. Regarding this please refer Closed User Group (CUG) and Closed
User Group-With Exchange ID.
In order to make internal calls, user is advised to program Routing Table such that one of the entries in routing table
should have route code as #, Strip digit count as 1 and Self route flag as 1 (enable). Doing so, when user picks up
handset and dials the required number with prefix #, the system interpret this number as an activity for the internal users
and waits for relevant access code.
Because of Strip digit count=1, the first digit dialed by the user (i.e. # in this case) will be ignored and next digit will be
processed which could be a feature code or a station number.
In order to use system features, the feature codes should be prefixed by #. Whenever the user dials # on picking the
handset, the PBX assumes it to be an activity for the internal users and waits for relevant access code.
In GPAX application, Answer Signaling on SLT and Answer Supervision on trunk shall e programmed properly. Also the
Disconnect Supervision parameter shall be programmed as appropriate for proper billing of calls.
PSTN
PBX A
T1
T2
Tn
2837
S1 S2 Sn
001 002 100
Matrix
Eternity V8 System Manual 377
Following figures shows how call is established between users using PSTN and Eternity-GPAX.
FXO
(Trunk)
FXS
(SLT)
Inter Exchange
Trunk interface
card
Subscriber
Card
Inter
Exchange
Trunk card
Sub Card
Subscriber
Card
Inter Exchange
Trunk interface
card
PSTN
Makarpura Alkapuri
A
B
C
D
Customer Site
Eternity-GPAX
1. Call from A to B is shown by
2. Call from B to A is shown by
3. Call from C to A is shown by
Trunk
MFC
Inter
Exchange
Trunk
interface card
Subscriber
Card
PSTN
A
C
Customer Site
Eternity-GPAX
1. Call from A to C is shown by
3. Call from C to A is shown by
SLT
Card
Operator
Matrix
378 Eternity V8 System Manual
Relevant Topics:
1. Answer Signaling on SLT 108
2. Answer Supervision on TWT 109
3. Closed User Group (CUG) 208
=X=X=
Trunk
MFC
Inter
Exchange
Trunk
interface
card
Subscriber
Card
PSTN
A
C
Trunk Offer
Eternity-GPAX
1. Call from A to C is shown by
2. Call from C to A is shown by
SLT
Card
Operator
3. Call from Opt. to A is shown by
Matrix
Eternity V8 System Manual 379
GPAX Billing
Whats this?
In commercial establishments/large societies/organisations etc. staff make calls from their rooms. It is required that the
cost of these calls is calculated so that amount of calls made by a staff member can be paid. GPAX provides a facility
which if enabled can calculate cost of each call if programmed properly.
To calculate the total cost of a call please refer following topic for more details:
Call Cost Calculation (CCC), Call Duration Control (CDC), Call Budget, Answer Signaling on SLT and GPAX charge
Internal Calls in Station Advanced Feature Template.
In order to make billing for internal calls between GPAX users, GPAX charge internal calls flag to be set to enable (please
refer Station Advanced Feature Template for more details).
If GPAX charge internal calls flag is enabled, this call will be recorded in the Station message detail recording-outgoing
buffer. If GPAX charge internal calls flag is set to disable, the call made to an internal station will not be billed and will be
recorded in the SMDR-Internal buffer as normal internal call.
GPAX has a dedicated memory space (commonly called buffer) to store details of each call.
These calls are retained in the buffer even during power failure.
Various reports can be routed either on the printer or on the computer from this buffer.
Once the buffer is 100% full, the new call overwrites the oldest one.
It follows First In First Out (FIFO) scheme.
It is recommended that printing of various reports should be regularised on fixed dates. This should be done
regardless of whether the buffer is full or not.
This will prevent spilling and subsequent loss of data. You can enable or disable call logging for individual trunk.
This gives flexibility of monitoring only important (STD) trunks.
This also prevents frequent spilling of the buffer, as new local calls will not be recorded.
=X=X=
Matrix
380 Eternity V8 System Manual
GPAX Flexible Numbers
Whats this?
In office/organisation etc., it is required that the flexible numbers are given in such a manner that it identifies the
departments/blocks i.e. say subscribers for marketing department may start with 5, for technical support with 6 and
so on.
Eternity offers Flexibility to the user to assign a code of your choice to access a station. This code is called Flexible
number. For example, to access first SLT having software port 001, one has to dial 2001. It is possible to change this
code to any other number of your choice.
Eternity offers two types of stations viz. SLT and DKP. The system loads default access codes to all the SLT and DKP
stations on first power ON. Later on the stations can be assigned default Flexible numbers using a command.
Default table of SLT station numbers looks like:
Default table of DKP station numbers looks like:
How to program?
Please refer topic Flexible Numbers for more details.
Important Points:
While using the Eternity in the GPAX application, SE should program different toll control levels as per the user's
requirement for making the calls which can be different than office user.
For example, SE can program the External number list for Allowed / Denied numbers for home user, as per following
Table:
Relevant Topics:
1. Conflict Dialing 230
2. Access Codes 77
3. Flexible Numbers 369
4. Dynamic Lock 341
=X=X=
Software Port Access Codes
001 2001
002 2002
003 2003
: :
: :
512 2512
Software Port Access Codes
001 3001
002 3002
003 3003
: :
: :
128 3128
Dynamic Toll Control Level External List can be programmed and assigned to:
0 (time zone wise toll control) Allow Local calls only
1 Allow Local + STD calls
2 Allow Local + STD + ISD calls
3 Lock all calls
Matrix
Eternity V8 System Manual 381
Help Desk
Whats this?
Eternity allows few stations to be programmed as emergency stations.
These stations could be First Aid, Security, Fire Station etc.
Whenever a call is placed to these stations if the station is found busy, Auto Call Back is set automatically.
How to program?
Help Desk is programmable. By enabling this feature in the COS of the station, the station can be made a Help Desk
station.
Relevant Topic:
1. Class of Service (COS) 200
=X=X=
Matrix
382 Eternity V8 System Manual
Hold
Whats this?
This feature allows the user to talk other station or external party without releasing the present party. It is same as
asking the person to wait in the waiting room while you want to attend another important guest simultaneously.
The station user can dial another number. The current party is held. The held party gets music.
Even if the station user goes ON-Hook, the held call is active. However when the DKP user goes ON-Hook when one
call is on 'Hold', the call does not come back immediately but comes back after expiry of call park timer in case of
External call.
This feature is allowed to DKP users only.
This feature is implemented for trunks and not for station.
How to use it?
=X=X=
Action Display on DKP
Speech with external party.
Press the DSS key or press Hold key. Current party hold.
Dial Station. Speech with second station.
Press the DSS key or press Hold key. Speech with hold party.
Matrix
Eternity V8 System Manual 383
Hot Desking
Whats this?
Hot Desking enables the user to use all the features/facilities allowed to him from another station.
Generally in an organization persons with higher hierarchy have access to most of the important features. But when
these people go away from their work place within the organization, they are unable to use these features since the
stations they might be using then may not have access to these features.
Hot Desking enables to over come this restriction.
How to use it?
How it works?
To perform Hotdesking minimum two stations are required. (Host station and Hot Desking station).
Host station is the station whose user performs Hotdesking.
Hotdesking station is the station where Hotdesking is performed.
On hotdesking, the hotdesking station works as your own station. All the properties of your station are copied to the
host station. No activity except hotdesking is possible from the host station. If anybody now wants to use the host
station then they have to perform Hotdesking.
When your job is over, and you get back to your seat (now the host station) you have to clear the hotdesk.
Clearing the hotdesk is equivalent to performing self Hot Desk. After which the stations are swapped again and
acquire their original properties. Your colleague needs to clear the hotdesk at his station.
How to program?
Refer Class of Service (COS) for details on how to allow Hot Desking to a user.
Important Points:
SLT users can Hotdesk only another SLT port.
DKP users can Hotdesk another DKP port.
Hotdesk of a SLT user on a DKP port or vice versa is not allowed.
The User password of both the stations involved cannot be default password.
Hotdesk feature should be enabled on both the stations involved in Hotdesk.
While accomplishing Hotdesk, both the stations should be idle.
No features/facilities except Hotdesk are allowed from the host station.
Relevant Topic:
1. Class of Service (COS) 200
=X=X=
1 You are at your colleagues station.
2 Lift the handset. Dial tone
3 Dial 1091-Your Station Number-User Password. Stations swapped.
Matrix
384 Eternity V8 System Manual
Hotline
Whats this?
Hotline eliminates repeated dialing of a station number.
As soon as the user picks up his handset, the Eternity automatically dials the fixed station. The station starts ringing
and the user gets ring back tone.
In an office environment, it is found that a boss calls his secretary or his co-worker frequently. He can use this feature.
How to use it?
Example:
The boss needs to speak to his secretary (station number 202) many times in a day. He can avoid repeated dialing by
activating the Hotline feature from his station:
151-202

Delayed hot line is possible. After lifting the handset you do not get connected to the station immediately but get regular
dial tone. If the user does not dial anything during this short dial tone, the Eternity places the hotline call to the station.
This delay timer allows the user to dial other numbers without canceling hot line.
Set Hotline Timer
The default value of hot line timer is 3 seconds and its range is 000-255 seconds.
Important Point:
If Dial Tone timer is less than Hotline Timer, then Hotline timer overrides Dial Tone timer.
Hot Outward Dialing (HOD)/Hot OG Trunk
Whats this?
You get connected to a desired trunk the moment you lift the handset.
This feature is useful when you are making more number of trunk calls compared to internal calls. Once this feature is
enabled, as soon as you lift the handset you get the trunk dial tone after the set time.
How to use it?
Example:
To simulate dialing of trunk access code 62 immediately on lifting the handset, dial 152-62.
Important Point:
Delayed HOD is possible on a station. After lifting the handset you do not get connected to the trunk line immediately
but get a regular dial tone. This HOD delay timer is same as Hotline delay timer.
HOD With External Number
Whats this?
You get connected to a desired external number the moment you lift the handset.
This feature is useful when you are making call to a particular external number many times in a day. Once this feature
is enabled, as soon as you lift the handset, the system dials the telephone number and you get connected to the
external person.
How to use it?
1 Lift the handset. Dial tone
2 Dial 151-Station. Confirmation tone
1 Lift the handset. Dial tone
2 Dial 154-Seconds. Confirmation tone
1 Lift the handset. Dial tone
2 Dial 152-Trunk Access Code. Confirmation tone
1 Lift the handset. Dial tone
2 Dial 153-Trunk Access Code-Number-#* Confirmation tone
Matrix
Eternity V8 System Manual 385
Example:
Let us activate HOD for external number 0265 630555. Let us assume trunk access code 63. Dial following code to set
this feature:
153-63-0265630555-#*
Important Points:
Delayed HOD With Number is possible from any station. After lifting the handset you do not get connected to the
external number immediately instead you get a normal dial tone. You get connected to the external number only after
the set time. This HOD delay timer is same as Hotline delay timer.
This allows you to dial other numbers without canceling HOD.
Hotline and HOD cannot be activated on the same station at the same time.
Cancel Hotline/Hot Outward Dialing
Whats this?
There is a common code to cancel both Hotline and Hot Outward Dialing.
How to use it?
The cancellation code must be dialed from the dial tone. If the delay timer is kept at its minimum of 1 second,
you have to be very quick in dialing the code.
How to program?
Refer Class of Service (COS) for details on how to allow Hot line to a user.
Important Points:
On using this feature from DKP, the Eternity offers a menu list to the user to choose from. On dialing 15, the DKP
displays Hotline Internal. The user should use Up/Down keys to navigate and make desired selection.
If the Hotline Delay Timer is programmed as 0 the station user cannot dial any feature code. Not even the feature
code to cancel HOD. To cancel HOD, the user should follow the following steps.
Relevant Topics:
1. Class of Service (COS) 200
2. Toll Control 675
=X=X=
1 Lift the handset. Dial tone
2 Dial 150. Confirmation tone
Action Response
Go OFF-Hook. CO Dial Tone
Dial by Digit. Pause/Silence
Wait for Trunk Inter Digit Timer. Pause/Silence
Dial Flash. Feature Tone
Dial the code to change the HOD timer or to cancel the HOD. Confirmation Tone
Go ON-Hook. Return ring of the trunk.
Go OFF-Hook. Connected to the held trunk.
Go ON-Hook.
Matrix
386 Eternity V8 System Manual
IC Reference Table
Whats this?
The IC Reference Table is a set of general features that define the logic of resolving an incoming call and placing on the
target DDI station. An IC Reference Table is assigned to every port. This table in conjunction with DDI Routing Table
identifies the target station. The Eternity offers 64 such table each of which can be programmed as per the requirement.
How it works?
The IC Reference Table is configured using following Parameters:
IC Reference ID-This is the reference number acts as an identifier to the translation logic programmed in the IC
Reference Table. Any number of table can have the same reference number. An IC Reference ID is assigned to ISDN
and SIP trunks. When a call lands on the ISDN trunk, the system checks the IC Reference Number assigned to it and
identifies the corresponding DDI Routing Table for call resolving. For more details on the complete Translation Logic
please refer the topics Direct Dialing-In (DDI) and DDI Routing Table.
Start Channel Number-This is the First Channel Number for the trunk to which the logic is applicable.
Total Channel Count-The Total number of channels of the trunk to which the IC Reference Table is applicable.
DDI Routing Reference ID-This is the DDI Routing Table's Reference number used by the IC Reference table for
mapping the received DDI number to a flexible number. It is a link parameter.
Route on First Destination-This flag can be enabled or disabled. Once the station is identified, the system checks
the DDI IC routing flag of the station. If the flag is enabled, the call always lands on first station of the MSN number. If
the flag is disabled, the call is routed to the identified target station.
Ring Timer-This timer signifies the time for which the station on which the incoming call is received rings. On expiry
of this timer if the Call is not answered the call is routed as per the programmed logic. Route to TLG-When No Reply-
When the DDI station does not answer the call, the system checks for this flag. If it is enabled, then the system routes
the call to the TLG assigned to the Trunk. It is in seconds.
Route on TLG-When No Reply-If the DDI station cannot take the call because it is not replaying, the system checks
for this flag. As per the flag set, it will either disconnect the call or route the call to Trunk Landing Group or answer the
call automatically or play voice message and on completion of message disconnect the call or answer the call
automatically, play voice message and on completion of message transfer call to Trunk Landing Group.
Route on TLG-When Busy-If the DDI station cannot take the call because it is busy, the system checks for this flag.
As per the flag set, it will either disconnect the call or route the call to Trunk Landing Group or answer the call
automatically or play voice message and on completion of message disconnect the call or answer the call
automatically, play voice message and on completion of message transfer call to Trunk Landing Group.
Trunk Features Template-A Trunk feature template is assigned to each DDI Routing Table. This enables the user to
allow Auto Answer timezone wise, allow DID on few numbers timezone wise etc. For more details please refer the
topic Trunk Feature Template.
How to program?
Use the following command to default IC Reference Table Index:
6301-1-IC Reference Table Index
6301-2-IC Ref. Table Index-IC Ref. Table Index
6301-*
Where,
IC Reference Table Index is from 01 to 64.
Use the following command to program IC Reference Table Index:
6302-1-IC Reference Table Index-Feature Number-Value
6302-2-IC Ref. Table Index-IC Ref. Table Index-Feature Number-Value
6302-*-Feature Number-Value
Where,
IC Reference Table Index is from 01 to 64.
Feature Number is from 01 to 09.
The commands explained below should be referred as:
To program a single port: XXXX-1
To program a range of ports: XXXX-2
To program all the ports: XXXX-*
Matrix
Eternity V8 System Manual 387
Default values of the IC Reference Table is given below:
Parameters Value:
Relevant Topics:
1. Direct Dialing-In (DDI) 280
2. Trunk Feature Template 680
3. ISDN-BRI 398
4. DS1 Trunks 307
5. DDI Routing Table 238
=X=X=
Feature No. 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09
Feature
Name/Table
Index
IC
Ref.
ID
Start
Channel
No.
Total
Channel
Count
DDI
Routing
Ref. ID
Route on
First Dest.
DDI Ring
Timer
(Sec.)
Route to
TLG on when
No-Reply
Route to
TLG when
Busy
Trunk
Feature
Template
01 00 01 00 00 Disable 045 Disconnect Disconnect 01
02 00 01 00 00 Disable 045 Disconnect Disconnect 01
: : : : : : : : : :
64 00 01 00 00 Disable 045 Disconnect Disconnect 01
Code 0 00-99 01-30 00-30 00-99 Disable 001-255 Disconnect Disconnect 01-50
1
Enable Route to TLG
Route to
TLG
2 Greet and
Disconnect
Greet and
Disconnect
3
Greet and
Route to TLG
Greet and
Route to
TLG
Matrix
388 Eternity V8 System Manual
Incoming Call Management
Whats this?
When a call lands on a trunk, the system needs to check for features like CLI based routing, Enabling of DID or DISA,
DDI enabling etc. before routing the call to the destination. The flow chart given below depicts the logic of incoming call
management by the system.
How it works?
Does calling
number match with
CLI Based Routing
Table?
Incoming call
Is that
station free?
Is DDI
Routing
enabled?
Place the call.
Is the call
answered?
End
B
Is DISA/DID
enabled?
Place the call
to the TLG
End
Is trunk
auto answer
enabled?
Call processed as per
the DID/DISA Logic
Auto Answer greetings/
RBT or Message
Call Routed to TLG
End
If RBT timer
elapsed?
Place the call to
TLG
End
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
No
Matrix
Eternity V8 System Manual 389
Relevant Topics:
1. CLI Based Routing 205
2. Direct Dialing-In (DDI) 280
3. Trunk Auto Answer 678
=X=X=
B
Is DID/
DISA enabled on
the received DDI
No.?
Route Call as per
DID/DISA logic
Trunk Auto answer/RBT
or RBT Message
Route the call to the
destiantion as per the DDI
template assigned
Is the
destination
free?
Is Route to
TLG when Busy
enabled?
Disconnect
Call routed to TLG
End
Destination Rings
Destination
replies?
End
Is DDI
Ring Timer
elapsed?
Is route to
TLG when No Reply
enabled?
Disconnect
Call routed to TLG
End
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
No
Yes
Is Trunk
Auto Answer
enabled?
No
Yes
Route Call as per Trunk
Auto Answer Logic
Matrix
390 Eternity V8 System Manual
Internal Call Restriction
Whats this?
Using this feature, the operator will be able to allow/restrict internal calls. The operator has flexibility to allow calls
during day time and restrict calls during night time. In Eternity this feature is implemented by following ways:
Assigning 'Guest Group' to the station
To enable/disable Internal Call Barring (Call Block)
Assigning 'Guest Group' to the station
Privacy of the user is very important in Enterprises and hospitals. In general, most of the users need to communicate
only with reception, operator, pantry and such other service stations. He is not required to dial other user numbers.
For example, in hospitals the patients need to call the nurse and not the doctor or other patients.
Sometimes, a group of users occupy multiple rooms in the Enterprise. In such cases members of the group would like
to communicate only among themselves and service stations.
Essentially we need following logic:
Certain service stations should be able to dial any other service station or any guest (e.g. Nurses, Operator).
Certain stations should be able to dial only service stations (e.g. patients, single user in the office).
A group of station users need to dial amongst each other and the service stations (e.g. doctors).
Above requirements are implemented as follows:
Solo Group (e.g. patients, single user of the station). This is classified in group 00.
Universal Group (e.g. Nurses and other services staff). This is classified in group 99.
Friend's Group (e.g. Group of visitors). Such a group of station users can be assigned to any group number from 01 to
98.
Following diagram depicts this logic:
How to use it?
From SA mode:
Dial,
1072-904-Flexible Number-Guest Group
OR
Press DSS key for 'Guest Group'
Where,
Flexible Number is the code given to access a station.
Guest Group is from 00 to 99.
By default, the guest group assigned is 99.
The user can call any body in his 'guest group' number '99'.
The station users in one 'guest group', '99' can call each other within the group as well as the station users in other
groups.
The default Guest group of all the stations = 99.
Enable/Disable Internal Call Barring (Call Block)
Eternity supports a feature, to allow or bar the Internal Calls for the users of Eternity. This is called Call Blocking.
Universal Group
99
Friends Group
00
Friend Group
A
Friend Group
B
Universal Group
99
Friends Group
00
Friend Group
A
Friend Group
B
Matrix
Eternity V8 System Manual 391
How to use it?
From SA mode:
Dial,
1072-045-Code
OR
Press DSS key for 'Enable/Disable Internal Call Block'.
Where,
When this feature is enabled, the LED on the DSS key assigned to 'Call Block' will glow Red and when disabled, the
LED will be turned Off.
When the operator issues "Call Block'- Enable command, all the station users will be assigned guest group = 00.
When the operator issues "Call Block'- Disable command, all the station users will be assigned guest group = 99.
Note:
Even after issuing SA command for 'Call Block', the operator can use the SA command 1072-904 to change the guest
group of any station user.
Important Point:
Please refer separate manual for more details about Hotel Applications for this feature.
Relevant Topic:
1. System Parameters 642
=X=X=
Code Meaning
0 Disable Call Block, (i.e. Internal Calls allowed)
1 Enable Call Block (i.e. Internal Calls barred)
Matrix
392 Eternity V8 System Manual
International Mobile Equipment Identity (IMEI)
Whats this?
Each GSM Module is identified by a unique number to stop the use of stolen GSM Module from accessing the
network. This is called International Mobile Equipment Identity (IMEI) number.
The IMEI number is pasted on the GSM engine.
How it works?
The system will store the IMEI number in its memory and when the SE wishes to download the IMEI number, the
number stored in memory is send to the Jeeves.
Command:
There is no SE command to display IMEI number on telephone instrument.
IMEI number of the Mobile ports GSM Engine will be known from the Web Jeeves only.
Important Point:
Some times it may happen that GSM Engine does not send the IMEI data. In such case, the user should restart the
system.
=X=X=
Matrix
Eternity V8 System Manual 393
Interrupt Request (IR)
Whats this?
When your call is urgent and you cannot wait for the called person to become free, you can land in his conversation
after intimating him.
While landing, you get ring back tone and the called person gets beeps for Interrupt Request Timer.
During the beeps, the called person can dial Flash to answer your call. He can talk to you while his previous partner
is put on hold and gets music.
Replace handset once your talk is over. This will automati cally restore his original speech with the held-up party.
How to use it?
How to program?
Refer Class of Service (COS) for details on how to allow Interrupt Request to a user.
Timer of Relevance:
Interrupt Request Timer-Time for which the station on which interrupt request is made gets the beeps.
Command: 3802-Seconds
Default: 045 seconds.
Valid Range: 001 to 255 seconds.
Important Points:
Interrupt Request works even when the destination is talking on a trunk line.
Interrupt Request works if the called person is in 2-way, normal speech.
Interrupt Request is ineffective if the called person is having call privacy from Interrupt Request.
The called party requested Interrupt Request can toggle both the calls.
Interrupt Request can also be used after putting one party in hold. An important trunk call can be transferred to a busy
station after putting the calling party in hold and interrupting the busy destination to inform him about his call. This is
most advantageous feature for the operator while transferring calls.
Relevant Topics:
1. Class of Service (COS) 200
2. Privacy 500
3. QSIG 508
=X=X=
1 Lift the handset. Dial tone
2 Dial Station. Busy tone
3 Dial 3. Ring Back Tone. The called person gets beeps.
4 The destination dials Flash. Speech with the called person.
Matrix
394 Eternity V8 System Manual
ISDN-An Introduction
The ISDN Technology
ISDN stands for Integrated Services Digital Network. Integrated Services refers to ISDNs ability to deliver two or
more simultaneous connections, in any combination of data, voice, video, and fax, over a single line. Digital refers to
ISDNs purely digital transmission, as opposed to analog transmission of Plain Old Telephone System (POTS). ISDN
transmits data digitally, resulting in a very clear transmission quality. Network refers to the fact that ISDN is not simply
a point-to-point solution like a leased line. ISDN networks extend from the local telephone exchange to the remote user
and include all the telecom and switching equipment in between.
ISDN is based around two types of channels:
Bearer channel commonly called B-channel.
Common Signaling channel commonly called D-Channel.
The Bearer Channel (B-Channel)
The B-channels are logical pipes in a single physical ISDN line.
The B-channel is a 64 Kbps clear channel whose entire bandwidth is available for user information since call setup.
The user information can take several forms such as data or PCM encoded voice. One of the B-channels can be
used for a device such as telephone or fax machine, while the other B-channel can be used for data transfer.
Alternatively, two B-channels can be combined to download data at very high speeds to a PC.
B-channels form circuit-switched connections, which resemble analog telephone connections in that they are end-to-
end physical circuits temporarily dedicated to transfer information between two devices. The circuit-switched nature
of B-channel connections, combined with their reliability and high bandwidth, makes ISDN suitable for voice, video,
fax and data applications.
B-channels can be used to transfer any layer 2 or higher protocols across a link within the OSI model.
Although B-channels are normally used for on-demand connections, taking full advantage of the circuit-switched
networks upon which they are based, they can also be configured as semi-permanent or nailed-up connections,
which are always up, much like a leased line. However, this can cause a capacity problem for carriers and ISPs,
which can be solved by an emerging feature of ISDN called Always On/Dynamic ISDN (AO/DI).
The Common Signaling Channel (D-Channel)
Unlike B-channels, which function as pipes, the D-channel is associated with higher level protocols at layers 2 and 3
of the OSI model that form the packet-switched connections.
D-channel uses packet-switched connections, which are best adapted to the intermittent but latency-sensitive nature
of signaling traffic, thus accounting for the vastly reduced call setup time of 1 to 2 seconds on ISDN calls (vs. 10 to 40
seconds using an analog modem).
D-channel transmits at either 16 Kbps (for BRI) or 64 Kbps (for PRI).
The D-channel is used mostly for administrative signaling, to instruct the carrier to set up or terminate a B-channel
call, to ensure that a B-channel is available to receive a call, or to provide signaling information for features like CLIP,
CLIR, COLP, COLR, etc.
Following two sketches show the call setup process in POTS and in ISDN network.
Call Setup Process in POTS
Human Telephone
Telephone
Network
Called
Party
Pick up handset
Off-hook signal
Dial tone
Dial tone
Enter number
Tones or Pulses
Ringback signal
Hello
Hi, Sumer here
Tones or pulses
Ringback signal
Hello
Hi, Sumer here
Ring Current
Hello
Hi, Sumer here
Matrix
Eternity V8 System Manual 395
Call Setup Process in ISDN
Basic Rate Interface (BRI)